Home

CNC PILOT 4290

1. B il HELI 00 00 00 0 eS Hid 3 Ol 2S 7 3 Control Parameters 35 C actual value and information 41 Quanity information and time per unit 42 Quantity information 43 Time per unit 45 M01 and skip levels 60 Spindle and speed information 61 Actual nominal speed 69 Actl noml feed rate 70 Slide and feed rate information 71 Channel display 81 Overview of enables 88 Load display A axis aux axis 354 eee 00 00 0d 0 00 00 00 0 PCE HO 00 00 00 0 TOTALT 00 00 00 0 1000 0 mm emi n mm fin lmao CHANNEL 1 89 90 91 92 93 95 96 97 98 99 Load display B axis aux axis Load display C axis aux axis Load display Spindle Load display X axis Load display Z axis Load display C axis Load display Y axis Load display U axis auxiliary axis Load display V axis auxiliary axis Load display W axis auxiliary axis Blank field s Iil s ANN 7 Parameters 74 Set Up Parameters zp Recommendation Use Cur Para Set up menu to edit the parameters In the other menu items the parameters are listed without the axes Workpiece zero point For each slide Workpiece zero point main spindle reference machine zero point
2. 149 Parameters X Diameter of the end point C Final angle angular dimension XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates R Radius J Center in Cartesian coordinates Th End depth default Current Z position H Circular plane machining plane default O H 0 1 Facing XY plane H 2 Machining inYZ plane H 3 Machining in XZ plane K Center point Z direction only for H 2 3 L Programming X C XK YK Z absolute incremental or modal l J absolute or incremental Program either X C or XK YK Program either center or radius With radius circular arcs possible only lt 180 End point in the coordinate origin Program XK 0 and YK 0 4 10 3 Lateral Surface Machining Rapid traverse on lateral surface G110 The tool moves at rapid traverse along the shortest path to the end point Parameters Z End point C Final angle angular dimension CY End point as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter G120 X End point diameter gp Programming Z C CY absolute incremental or modal Program either Z C or Z CY Use G110 to position the C axis to a defined angle wrogami N TOTIOCH 150 Circular arc G103 4 DIN PLUS Linear segment on lateral surface G111 The tool moves linearly at the feed rate to the end point Parameters Z End point C Final angle angular dimension C
3. HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 279 6 11 Prepare 6 11 Prepare Parameters for Three jaw chuck indirect face driver with jaws Chuck identification number Jaw type Select the jaw type Jaw identification number Identification number of face driver Indentation depth Approximate depth by which the claws indent the material TURN PLUS uses this value to position the graphic representing the face driver Clamping pressure is transferred to the PROGRAM HEAD TURN PLUS does not evaluate the parameter Chucking a workpiece at the tailstock Menu item Tailstock side Parameters Chucking Select the type of chucking equipment Dead center Lathe center Centering taper Identification number of chucking equipment Centering depth Depth by which the chucking equipment indents the material TURN PLUS uses this value to position the graphic representing the chucking equipment If you clamp the workpiece at the spindle and the tailstock TURN PLUS assumes that a shaft is machined 280 gt TURN PLUS 3 Poraneter bepol ZX main view Chicking a Spindle side Fi Tailetock side if Cutting limitation Three jau chuck indirect ID number chuck KHI10 n Type j w Gripper jou a ID number jaw IKea2590 50 a I0 face driver STH 5089 Ey Indentation depth E nm Clamp press 1 Recess Form 151 486 i l gt Tum PLus E Poraneter 1234500 ZX main view Chucking
4. Change to the simulation operating mode With Ci p Change to theTURN PLUS mode TURN PLUS Switch the NC program M ee Switch the NC program gt AT A Switch the editing window Select full size window one editing window Select double or triple window Activate the graphics 61 4 1 3 Linear and Rotary Axes Principle axes Coordinates of the X Y and Z axes refer to the workpiece zero point Any deviations from this rule will be indicated ep Note for negative X coordinates Not permitted for contour definition Not permitted for turning cycles Contour regeneration is interrupted The direction of rotation of arcs G2 G3 G12 G13 must be adjusted manually The position for tooth and cutter radius compensation G41 G42 must be adjusted manually C axis Angle data are with respect to the zero point of the C axis Precondition The C axis has been configured as a principal axis For C axis contours and C axis operations the following applies Positions on the front rear face are entered in Cartesian coordinates XK YK or polar coordinates X C Positions on the lateral surface are entered in polar coordinates Z C Instead of C the linear value CY is used unrolled reference diameter Secondary axes auxiliary axes In addition to the principle axes the CNC PILOT supports U Linear axis in X direction V Linear axis in Y direction W Linear axis in Z direct
5. Delete tool entry Abbreviations in header of the tool list USE rs Cutter radius db Drill diameter df Milling cutter diameter ew Setting angle bw Drilling angle Edit fw Milling angle T no T number in the turret list See 4 2 4 Tool Programming Sort by type Copy tool entry Edit tool entry Sort displayed entries according to tool type Editing the tool list gt Place the cursor on the desired tool and press the a Sort displayed entries according to tool ID number soft key b y ID Copy entry n K You can only copy similar tools Pogi Reverse the sorting sequence The new tool receives a new ID number sorting F Delete entry Graphic Display the tool graphic Edit Or ENTER Edit the entry Entries of the turret list are neither copied nor deleted in the tool editor It is possible to edit the entries when Automatic mode is not active Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 373 8 1 Tool Database Display picture of tool Graphic To exit the graphic press the soft key again ce 374 The CNC PILOT generates the displayed tool from the parameters The graphic enables you to check the entered data Changes become effective as soon you exit the input box Tool position f the mount type tool parameter is used The CNC PILOT looks for the mount type In the tool mount descriptions as of machine parameter 511 200 002 The first tool holder with this mount type is 100 001
6. ENTER the CNC PILOT presents the parameter for editing Parameter number is known Machine direct Control direct On eee eee Enter the parameter number Make the changes In the submenu of Contig you can select in addition the parameter groups E Setup parameters E Machining parameters m PLC parameters The procedure is identical with that described under parameters lists 340 z 32 001 l Jimme giie Select of machine data A Etri 2 phoreoataa a of machine 3 General axis configuration 4 General spindles configuration 5 Aggregate group d Level assignment 18 Turret aliccation table 13 Linking multi tool 14 Alternative tool chain iT Display setting 1 Control configuration zz Look head 70 002 ae 22 00i ametera Editing 2 parbontan ot machine tt 3 General axis configuration F 4 G neral spindle configurat 5 Aggregate group Level as a 6 Tool mrin 18 frat ailiccation table 13 Linking multi tool 14 Alternative tool chain iT Display setting 1 Central aaa ion i v 002 pE ett as E 100 001 ae op HI o je E gp mihe CNC PILOT checks whether the user is authorized to change a parameter Log on as system manager if you wish to edit protected parameters Otherwise you are only authorized to read parameters E Parameters that influence the production of a workpiece cannot be edited in automatic mode Parameters that you as machine op
7. Changes to Service Mode Switches to Transfer mode of operation Entries in the chucking database sorted by chuck type Entries in the chucking database sorted by chuck ID 8 Operating Resources Chucking equipment lists The CNC PILOT lists the chucking equipment according to identification numbers or chuck types EEN x Ja aJ New direst Nek menu Type list Lists the entries sorted by chuck type You can limit the list by using the type number mask Only those entries are displayed that correspond to the mask D 2 A A Chucking databace a i The chucking equipment list serves as starting point Selection oy TA l TIn for editing copying or deleting entries number Type Designation Chucking diameter range A D Collet chuck 3 0 42 0 ID list Lists the entries sorted by ID number Erm E 130 Three jau chuck Estee Mask for ID numbers limits the list i Sh ai eea Den ie Only those entries are displayed that H130 130 hres jau ane 29 moog correspond to the mask 49 95 31 Chueak lue o se jaw 55 0 123 0 O Chuck jams Soft jan 55 8 123 8 Mask Fd Chuck jane Hard iia 17 0 116 6 5 j Chuck jawe Hard jaw Enter the first characters of the ID i Chuck Sake Riet tes gt The following places can be any 900 Lu characters O Any character can be at these s 100 001 positions iv gt K m The chuck header informs you of the mask entered the num
8. 114 Feed per minute rotary axes G192 113 Feed rate override display BS Feed rate interrupted G64 Ho Feed rate override 100 G908 171 Feed rate override in automatic mode 44 Feed rate reduction G38 Geo 93 In manual control mode 25 Per revolution G95 Geo 94 Per revolution GxQb 114 Per tooth Gx93 114 Rotary axes G192 ha TURN PLUS attribute 263 File organization 419 File Transfer Protocol FIP 409 File types 413 Finished part contour Fundamentals 66 section code FINISHED PART 83 TURN PLS ax 220 Index Finishing tool 371 Finish machining DIN PLUS Cycle G890 132 Finishing feed rate 94 TURN PLUS IWG Clearance turning 299 Contour machining G890 298 Hollowing neutral tool 301 Residual contour machining 300 Undercuts 299 Fits IWG measuring step 299 TURN PLUS holes 324 Fixed stop traverse to G916 162 Fixed word list 400 Forged part TURN PLUS 228 Form elements DIN PLUS ease 86 TURN PLUS VWs Free editing Fundamentals 72 Menu items 74 Front face Contour description 96 Fundamentals 62 Machining 149 Section code 83 Front window simulation 201 FTP File Transter Protocol 409 Full circle DIN PLUS Front rear face G304 Geo 99 Lateral surface G314 Geo
9. 3 7 Loa O ran Q z 3 7 Loa 3 7 3 Editing LimitValues The function for editing the load parameters allows you to analyze reference machining cycles and optimize limit values The CNC PILOT displays the program name of the loaded monitoring parameters in the header Selection Display Load monitoring Edit Automatic mode Load parameter editor submenu Act load Load current file menu item Monitoring parameters of the active NC program Load menu item Monitoring parameters you have selected Edit menu item Display and edit the limit values Delete reference values menu item Delete the load parameters of the NC program Auto Returns to the automatic menu Editing the load parameters The Display and adjust load parameters dialog box displays the parameters of one component of one monitoring zone which can then be edited The bar graphic shows all components of the monitoring zone the larger bar displays the values for performance the smaller bar displays the values for work The selected component is highlighted Enter the monitoring zone and select the component The CNC PILOT displays the reference values The limit values for performance and work which are displayed can be edited The tool T number is displayed for information Buttons of the dialog box Saving Store the limit values of the component in the specified zone End
10. List of the pending maintenance tasks iti Acknowledged measures Lists the acknowledged maintenance measures Acknowldged actions List of acknowledged measures Type Symbol See Type of maintenance actions table Measure was acknowledged Measure Designation of the maintenance action Acknowledged through Name of the acknowledger Acknowledgment on Date of the acknowledgment At Time of maintenance action is due t2 Comment of the acknowledger HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 g gt l E Service Maintenance syatem C EPS6_UTO para _usriup_ demo ceu 344 Confirm Fii Inport HH Export Be Desctivete Acknowledged actions is a Acknowledgment Through On Fj HNH DEMO 1 pg 16 O2 09 16 02 HNH DEMO 037 16 02 097 16 02 i HNH DEHO amp 69 16 82 a9 16 82 HMH DEMD 7 eo 16 02 09 16 02 i HMH DEMO amp es 16 62 69 16 02 HNH DEMO 5 5 16 02 09 16 02 go HMH SDEMO 1 B97167862 09 18 02 X 200 002 T 0m X nani z 100 007 7 100 001 Zen Y 10 001 ae sie D joe He a ws Edit Help Display Pending Acknowldged All document Selection Bt ions aekions actions M M Minutes S F Hours T D Days W W Weeks JAY Years Parts of a time unit are given as decimal numbers Example 1 5 S 1 hour and 30 minutes 407 9 3 Maintenance System lagnosis 9 4D 9 4 Diagnosis Call Diag nosis drop down menu in the Service m
11. 249 Element entry auxiliary functions 226 Elements for C axis contours 242 Elements for finished part contours 229 Entering the C axis contours 223 Entering the finished part contour 220 Entering the workpiece blank contour 219 Form elements 232 Form elements superimposing 221 Inserting in the contour 260 Machining attributes 265 Notes on operation 225 Overlay elements 239 Selection with soft keys 229 Selection with the touch pad 229 Solving form elements figures patterns 262 Transformations 261 User aids 269 Workpiece blank contours 228 Workpiece blanks attributes 263 Workpiece description 219 General information Configuration 316 Control graphic a Example 328 Machining information 320 Managing files 217 Operating mode 216 Program header 218 User aid 216 XXII IWG Cutting data 284 Cycle specification 284 Drilling 295 Finishing 297 Interactive working plan generation 282 Milling 303 ReEcessing 290 Roughing 285 Special machining SM 305 Thread cutting 302 Tool call 283 Machining information Coolant 321 Cutting parameters 321 Drilling 324 Full surface machining 324 Hollowing 322 Inside contour 322 Shaft machining 326 Tool
12. Call The synchronous point analysis is a subfunction of the time calculation function Select synchronous points E Change slides by soft key or uoward downward arrow E Next previous synchronous point arrow left right Synchronous point information m NC program subprogram E Active tool E The NC block relevant for the selected synchronous point E tw Waiting time at this synchronous point E tg Calculated execution time as of program start Return to time calculation Press soft key again Return to simulation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Switch to the next slide ee Return to time calculation 213 yus Point Analysis gt a y LO Eline other fehrere Coaturgelen moriiara oF ail JS Mode of Operation as _ b oa ee TURN PLUS Mode of Operation TURN PLUS enables you to describe the workpiece blank and finished part in a graphic interactive environment Then you can have the working plan generated fully automatically or generate it yourself interactively The result is a commented and structured NC program TURN PLUS comprises Graphic interactive contour creation Workpiece setup Interactive working plan generation IWG Automatic working plan generation AWG 6 1 for Turning operations Milling and drilling operations with the C axis Milling and drilling operations with theY axis Full surface machining TURN PLUS c
13. Sum O LL LO q 424 10 Transfer 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 11 1 1 Undercut DIN 76 Parameters TURN PLUS determines the parameters for the thread undercut undercut DIN 76 from the thread pitch Where Thr pitch thread pitch depth of undercut radius K width of undercut R undercut radius W undercutangle The undercut parameters are in accordance with DIN 13 for metric threads 426 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 7 0 8 1 2 1 3 1 6 ZO 2 6 3 6 4 4 Dad 6 4 Li 8 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 3 0 0 ORS 0 3 0 7 0 9 1 05 1 2 1 4 1 6 T 75 2A 2 45 Z0 2 8 20 4 4 2 6 1 8 7 10 5 12 14 16 149 19 1 2 1 4 1 6 19 ZZ 2 4 2 3 3 20 4 2 0 1 0 12 0 16 0 16 0 1 0 12 0 16 0 16 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 11 Tables and overviews 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 307 30 30 307 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 11 1 2 Undercut DIN 509 E Parameters The undercut parameters are determined from the cylinder diameter Where undercut depth K undercut length R undercut radius W undercut angle 11 1 3 Undercut DIN 509 F Parameters The undercut parameters are determined from the cylinder diameter Where undercut depth K und
14. 286 Contours for turning 66 Control graphics TURN PLUS 317 Control of the program run 183 Control parameters 344 Controlled parting By servo lag monitoring G917 162 By spindle monitoring G991 163 Values tor controlled parting G992 164 Index Index Controls and Displays 13 Machine operating panel 13 Operating panel 13 Screen 13 Touch pad 13 Conventional DIN programming 60 Converting parameters and operating resources 416 Converting and mirroring G30 169 Coolant Technology database 396 TURN PLUS sc 32 Coordinates Absolute 7 Coordinate system 7 Fundamentals 62 Programming 65 Coordinates unknown 65 Copy TURN PLUS Contours 226 Copying tool 371 Counterbore O71 Counterboring IWG 295 Countersinkers 371 Countersinking DIN PLUS cycle G72 144 TURN PLUS Countersinking on front rear face 245 Countersinking on lateral surface 252 Form element 238 Cut display mode 203 Cutter compensation switching G148 120 Cutting data TURN PLUS IAG 284 Cutting limit Fixing editing TURN PLUS 277 With preparation TURN PLUS 213 With residual roughing TURN PLUS 28 7 Cutting material Designations specifying 400 Technology database 395 Cutting parameters Finding in TURN PLUS 321 Technol
15. 404 Dialog box 19 Dialog texts with subprograms 182 Digitizing TURN PLUS user aid 270 Dimensions simulation 204 DIN PLUS Basic structure 60 E OROT cens 71 Fundamentals 2 Main menu 72 Parallel editing 61 Programming 60 Screen 61 Direction of contour description 66 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Direction of contour machining 66 Directories enabled 413 Display of actual values 32 Displays Block display 48 DIN PLUS contour display 68 Machine display Display fields defining 348 Meaning of display elements 52 Switching in Automatic mode 52 Switching in Manual control 24 Simulation Graphic elements 197 Note on the display modes 198 Distance to go display 52 Drilling DIN PLUS Bore hole centric G49 Geo 91 Cycle for boring countersinking G72 144 Cycle for deep hole drilling G 4 147 Cycle for drilling G71 143 Cycle for tapping G36 146 Cycle for tapping G78 145 Front face rear side G300 Geo 98 Fundamentals 66 Lateral surface G310 Geo 103 TURN PLUS Centric bore hole 238 Hole on front face rear side 244 Hole on lateral surface 251 IWG centric predrilling 295 IWG drilling 296 Machining attribute 266 Drilling and slot milling tool 3 2 Drilling tools 371 Drop down menu 14
16. If required select Cycle Retract tool Enter the position and type or retraction If required select Cycle Move to tool change point Enter position and type of approach to the change point Start TURN PLUS stimulates the machining see 6 74 Control Graphics _yy amp amp amp amp __OOEOEOEEOEern You can accept the work block Accept Ihe work block is saved and the workpiece contour updated the work block is saved and the workpiece is updated regeneration of the blank Change TURN PLUS rejects the work block check optimize the parameters and simulate again Repeat URN PLUS simulates machining again 6 TURN PLUS Select IWG On eps eee TURN PLUS opens the work plan exists dialog box Select continue u _y SES Add further work blocks Change existing workplan _ _ _ a ema e n bepog ZX main view Select IWG an Generation IWG EN Program Pd workpiece 31 Prepare at IWG Hid aug J4 Configuration N Selection of machining blocks with TURN PLUS opens the Working plan exists No Nain Machining Submachining dialog box Select Change fLongtl rgh noll t Roughing 3 Contur machining Transu rohholl e y Contour machining Contour parallel 5 Recessing Form_O 59 Thread IE pO recess TURN PLUS displays the existing work plan _yy amp amp amp amp amp a
17. M Q gt k 8 2 Chucking Equipment Database The CNC PILOT stores up to 999 chucking equipment descriptions which are managed via the chucking equipment editor Chucking equipment is used in TURN PLUS mode and displayed in the simulation control graphics Chucking equipment identification number Each chuck has its own ID number up to 16 characters letters The ID number must not start with with an underline character 200 002 100 001 100 001 C Chucking equipment type The chuck type defines the type of chuck jaws 8 2 1 Chucking Equipment Editor Select Chuck ing equipment menu item Parameters mode Editing chuck data Chuck data are edited in a dialog box Chuck parameters contain data for chuck representation in the simulation control graphics and further data for chuck selection in TURN PLUS The chuck parameters can be omitted provided that 5 Service you do not use TURN PLUS or do not wish chucks Transfer to be displayed in the simulation graphics Type list Chuck definition New direct menu item gt Enter chucking equipment type ID list gt Enter the chucking equipment data in the dialog box New direct menu item gt Enter chucking equipment type in the submenu gt Enter the chucking equipment data in the dialog box 390 Hfjcrip ut Frontside carrier aii special jan Hjrotat grip il Dead center i Lathe center iH centering cone
18. O g al Attributes for superimposed elements G39 Geo Programming notes G39 is a non modal function G39 is programmed beforethe contour element for which it is destined Influences G890 in the override elements form elements Chamfers rounding arcs for connecting basic elements Undercuts Recesses G50 preceding a cycle MACHINING section cancels a finishing allowance programmed for that Machining factors influenced cycle with G39 Special feed rate Peak to valley height Additive D compensation Equidistant oversizes Only use peak to valley height V RH finishing allowance F and special feed rate E alternately Parameters F Feed per revolution V Type of surface texture see also DIN 4768 V 1 General roughness profile depth Rt1 V 2 Average roughness Ra V 3 Mean roughness Rz RH Peak to valley height um inch mode pinch Number of the additive compensation 901 lt D lt 916 Finishing allowance radius Translation of P absolute additive default O H 0 P replaces G57 G58 oversizes H 1 P is added to G57 G58 oversizes E Special feed factor 0 lt E lt 1 default 1 special feed rate active feed rate E T V U HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 93 Commands O g u Blockwise oversize G52 Geo Equidistant allowance that is taken into consideration in G810 G820 G830 G860 and G890 Parameters P Finishing allowance radius H Transl
19. Protection zones software limit Sneu cont Histor wliset up Micontour 1M Debug mm switches are not monitored Save contours for DIN PLUS Monitoring with warning The CNC PILOT i ie Unit Metric registers protection zone violations or limit switch He oe imu immediate error message and cancelation of the simulation dp violations and handles them as warnings The NC 5 program is simulated up to the end of program Monitoring with error message A i F protection zone or limit switch violation results in an ee 36 mr Mirroring x in Fi OK Cancel 1 N 33 x 358 080 Z 276 608 c 8 805 Iy 8 868 T E E Contour drop down menu Contour follow up Updates the contour to depict the current progress of machining The CNC PILOT takes the blank part as a basis and accounts for each cut i _ Dimension see 5 3 2 Dimensioning RM 2 14 3 14 gait Program active W TAO Menu item 3 D view see 5 7 3 DView gt Save contours Saves the contour in the simulated machining condition as BLANK and the programmed finished part Settings in the Save contours for NC program dialog box Unit Contour description in millimeters or inches Contour Selection of the contour is more than one contour exists Shift Value of the workpiece zero point shift Mirroring Contours are mirrored not mirrored DIN PLUS TURN P
20. column D duration Period defined by the machine tool builder between due and overdue maintenance actions D Q acknowledgment period Within this period the maintenance action can be conducted and acknowledged t1 maintenance action is due soon t1 we Starting from this time point the maintenance action can be completed and acknowledged The status is marked yellow Calculation t1 Early warning entry interval 100 t2 maintenance action is due Starting from this time point the maintenance action should be T completed and acknowledged E The status is marked red l Calculation t2 interval D Duration t3 maintenance action is overdue Q Acknowledgment time period The time point of the maintenance action has been exceeded The status remains red t1 Maintenance action will soon be due Calculation t3 interval duration E Vanene de t3 Maintenance action is overdue HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 405 9 3 Maintenance System 9 3 Maintenance System List of maintenance actions Type See type of maintenance action table The status is distinguished by background color No color No maintenance action required Yellow Maintenance action is due soon Red Maintenance action is due or overdue Location Location of the assembly Assembly Designation of the assembly When Time remaining until maintenance action is due remaining time of the maintenance
21. 285 Roughing tool 371 Rounding DIN PLUS cycle G87 139 TURN PLUS form element 237 Run out length thread 140 safety clearance Turning G47 118 Milling G147 119 screen display configuring 74 Screen displays DIN PLUS screen 61 General information 12 Simulations screen 196 Sealing ring TURN PLUS form element 239 Search functions 73 secondary machining direction NBR 381 section code in DIN PLUS Entry in geometry menu 15 Entry in main menu Ve Overview 79 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Semiautomatic IWG 282 sending receiving files 414 separation point TURN PLUS attribute 264 TURN PLUS machining information 326 Sequential events 178 serial interface Configuration 412 Connector assignment 433 General information 409 service functions 398 setting up the chucking table 37 Setup DIN PLUS program header 79 Setup functions 34 Setup parameters 351 TURN PLUS program header 218 Shaft machining TURN PLUS Machining information 326 Preparing a machining process 243 Shift TURN PLUS contour 261 Shifting the contour G121 117 Side milling cutter oIa Side view YZ Simulation 201 Simple tools Programming 81 Setup 28 Simulation Chucking equipment display 197 Contour generation during simulation
22. 4 1 2 DIN PLUS Screen 1 Menu bar 2 Display of loaded NC programs The selected program is marked 3 Full double or triple editing window The selected window Is marked 4 Contour display or machine display 5 Soft keys Parallel editing You can edit up to eight NC program subprograms in parallel The CNC PILOT displays NC programs as desired in either a full double or triple window Main menus and submenus The functions of the DIN PLUS editor are contained in the main menu and various submenus The submenus can be called by Selecting the desired menu items Positioning the cursor in the program section Soft keys Soft keys are available for fast switching to neighboring operating modes for changing the editing window and for activating the graphic HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 gt DIN PLUS E Transfer soo Frent 4 surf 4H Instr Hi Graph 1 z DAAE I EARBEITUNG MACHINING li Roughing Transversal Outside Fro 25 G59 Z2 Geometry HG FA Line fcir et ASR AE Barin wi P 1 27 GGS H2 X80 Z 100 D1 04 23 G14 06 28 G26 24608 REVOLVER 1 6 Gl x38 2 23 7 GI 2 20 a GI x40 3762 3 G25 HS I 2 EG RO 6 W36 NH 16 G1 26 B 1 2 ID 111 6 660 1 11 G37 01 F1 5 P8812 01 A38 M30 R15 4 10 121 35 040 17 12 Gl 78 B 1 6 ID 151 4868 1 13 GI Z 8 10 141 150 2 T Bl 14 GI XT Z 193 3034 BI PPANNHITTEL 1 a5 Sep 02 1T 18 23 ORE
23. G903 generates an interpreter stop 170 gp Use G717 and G718 in expert programs only refer to your commissioning manual for information on real time coupling function 4 DIN PLUS Block speed monitoring off G907 The CNC PILOT starts machining operations requiring spindle revolutions when the programmed speed has been reached G907 is used to deactivate speed monitoring block by block the path of traverse is started immediately Program G907 and the traverse path in the same NC block Feed override 100 G908 G908 sets the feed override for traverse paths GO G1 G2 G3 G12 G13 block by block to 100 Program G908 and the traverse path in the same NC block Interpreter stop G909 The CNC PILOT pre interprets approx 15 to 20 NC blocks in advance If variables are assigned shortly before the evaluation old values would be processed An interpreter stop ensures that the variables contain the new value G909 stops the pre interpretation The NC blocks are processed up to G909 after G909 the subsequent NC blocks are processed Apart from G909 the NC block should only contain synchronous functions Some G functions generate an interpreter stop Look ahead G918 The look ahead function can be activated deactivated with G918 G918 can be programmed in a separate NC block program before after the thread cutting G31 G33 Parameters O Look ahead function on off default 1 Q 0 Off Q 1
24. HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 IONS J S LL S L gt Program NC blocks containing G65 with slide code if your lathe has more than one slide Otherwise the system displays more than one chuck Example Chucking equipment SPANNMITTEL 1 CHUCKING EQUIPMENT aD iat Oe Chuck H2 ID KBA250 77 Chuck jaw H4 ID KSP 601N Lathe center ROHTEIL BLANK N1 G20 X80 Z200 KO BEARBEITUNG MACHINING 1 N2 G65 H1 X0 2 234 1 N3 G65 H2 X80 Z 200 04 159 4 12 Special Functions 4 12 2 Slide Synchronization G functions can be used for synchronizing slides when more than one slide is used for machining a workpiece The slides are synchronized by markers and or tool positions in NC blocks which are started simultaneously One sided synchronization The slide programmed with G62 waits until slide Q has reached mark H or the mark and the X Z coordinate Use G162 to set a synchronizing mark for a different slide The CNC PILOT uses the actual value if you synchronize to the X Z coordinate Parameters H Number of the marker range 0 lt H lt 15 O Slide to be awaited X Z Coordinate to end the waiting process default Only the marker is used for synchronizing Synchronous start of slides G63 G63 causes a synchronous simultaneous start of the programmed slides Synchronization marking G162 G162 sets a synchronizing mark Another s
25. Point angle default 180 Countersinking diameter Countersinking depth Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 103 Commands Commands O g u eS COUMETSINKIng angle EE Machine the G310 hole with G71 G74 Thread diameter J Thread depth K Thread runout length F Thread pitch V Left hand or right hand thread default O V 0 Right hand thread V 1 Left hand thread A Angle reference Z axis default 90 vertical hole range 0 lt A lt 180 O Centering diameter Linear slot on lateral surface G311 Geo Parameters va Center C Center angle CY Angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter Angle to longitudinal axis reference Z axis default 0 Slot length Slot width Pocket depth no entry P from G308 VO ws Circular slot on lateral surface G312 G313 Geo G312 Circular slot clockwise G313 Circular slot counterclockwise Parameters Z Center of curvature C Center of curvature angle CY Angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter Curvature radius reference center point path of the slot Angle of starting point reference Z axis Angle of end point reference Z axis Slot width Pocket depth no entry P from G308 Yee a G312 Geo 104 4 DIN PLUS Full circle on lateral surface G314 Geo Parameters Z Circle cent
26. The 3 D view accounts for contours machined by turning no C orY operations Soft keys Standard Depiction as solid body model in the 3 D view Standard view not rotated not enlarged reduced Grating Depiction as wire model Magnify displayed graphics Reduce displayed graphic HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 209 5 7 3 D View NC Program Run X O D Z QO o0 LO 5 8 Checking the NC Program Run For complex NC programs with branches variable calculations events etc you simulate all inputs and events to test all program branches Debug drop down menu Debug Set start block Debug Delete start block Debug View start block If a start block is defined then up to this block the NC program is compiled and the traverse is not depicted The CNC PILOT stops The continue soft key resumes the simulation Debug Variables Source block In the standard setting the NC source block is displayed below the simulation window With Variables source block you can change between the display of four selected variables and the NC source block Debug Variables display All variables The variables are shown in a dialog box Use arrow up down and page up down to display the desired variables If merely the variable number is displayed the D variable is not used All V variables Select variable groups and defin
27. To call the PLC window open the error window with the Error status key and then press PLC Diagnosis soft key To exit the PLC status display press the ESC key to switch to the error window use the CNC Diagnosis soft key 18 a Automatic operation Lapel HUE WIPO bal Chanel 1 12 10 09 Traverse path X collides with software limit switch W IPO Concel Traverse path X collides with software limit switch Display of PL status Analog Eingaenge LE Statua 2 CNE diagnosis z Switch to PLC display diagnosis Delete all Deletes all error messages errors CNC Return to error display diagnosis 2 Basics of Operation 2 4 Data Backup The CNC PILOT stores NC programs operating resource data and parameters on the hard disk Since the possibility of damage to the hard disk due to excessive vibration or shock cannot be eliminated HEIDENHAIN recommends making regular backup copies of your programs operating resource data and parameters on a PC You can use DataPilot 4290 the WINDOWS Explorer or other suitable programs for backing up your data on a PC For data exchange and data backup you can use the Ethernet interface Data exchange is also possible over the serial interface RS 232 see 70 2 Data Transfer Methods 2 5 Explanation of Terms Cursor In lists or during data input a list item an input box or a character is highlighted This highlight is cal
28. Vill Index G59 Zero shift absolute 117 G60 Switch off protection zone 169 G62 One sided synchronization 160 G63 Synchronous start of slides 160 G64 Interrupted feed rate TIS G65 Chucking equipment 159 G7 Precision stop on 168 G701 Rapid traverse in machine coordinates 111 G702 Save load contour follow up 164 G703 Contour follow up 164 G706 K default branch 164 G71 Drilling cycle 143 G710 Add tool dimensions 121 G717 Update nominal values 170 G718 Ignore lag error 170 G72 Boring countersinking 144 G720 Spindle synchronization 161 G73 Tapping 145 G74 Deep hole drilling cycle 147 G8 Precision stop off 168 G80 Cycle end 134 G81 Longitudinal turning simple 134 G810 Longitudinal roughing 122 G82 Simple face roughing 139 G820 Face roughing 124 G83 Contourrepeat cycle 136 G830 Contourparallel roughing 126 G835 Contourparallel with neutral tool 127 G840 Contour milling 152 G845 Pocket milling roughing 156 G846 Pocket milling finishing 157 G85 Parting cycle Tos G86 Simple recessing cycle 138 G860 Contourbased recessing 128 G866 Recessing cycle 129 G869 Recess turning cycle 130 G87 Line with radius 139 G88 Line with chamfer 139 G890 Contour finishing 132 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290
29. amp amp amp amp amp e Enter the tool ID number Button Coolant circuit Set the displays circuits on off high pressure KK _____ _ __ ____ l Select Setting up Tool list Set up turret Set up turret n On eee eee Select the tool pocket arrow up down or touch pad __ YY k Deletes the tool and places it in the ID number clipboard Select a new tool pocket arrow up down or touch pad On ees eee z Take the tool from the ID number na 5 clipboard If the location was occupied the previous tool is taken into the clipboard HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 gt TuAN PLUS E Poraneter a bepog ZX main view Program 14 Workpiece fy Prepare IWG Hid aug JW Configuration Turret assignment 1 Tool ID number clipboard 10 number fisi 150 2 T No ID number Type Designation 111 680 686 1 Cooling circuit cone B 111 Roughing tool 121 35 648 1 Fo 121 Finishing toal DERRE 38 Bg i 38 127 55 048 1 Finish Conteur parallel Select Setting up Tool list Set up turret Set up turret n Select the tool pocket arrow up down or touch pad or the DEL key deletes the tool 7 285 6 11 Prepare lan Generation IWG e 2 a S aay Pur N ma 6 12 Interactive Working Plan Generation IWG In the IWG you define the indi
30. e5 S p z J Select Setting up Tool list Update tool life management Confirm the confirmation request with OK the CNC PILOT sets the tool lite quantity to the value defined in the database and sets all tools in the tool list to ready for use The CNC PILOT displays the Tool list tool life management for inspection E Application example The cutting edges of all tools used have been replaced Part production is to be continued using the tool life management function 33 n oa a al 8 0 3 4 Setup Functions 3 4 1 Defining theTool Change Position With the ISO command G14 the machine slide moves to the tool change point Always program the tool change point as far from the workpiece as possible to allow the turret to rotate to any position For more than one slide Define the desired slide with the Slide change key Nn eee ees eee Select Setting up Tool change point On eee eee The CNC PILOT displays the currently valid position in the Set tool change point dialog box Entering the tool change point Enter anew position Capture tool change point Move slide to the tool change position Confirms the slide position as tool change point Confirms the position of individual axes The tool change point is managed in the setup parameters Select Act Para Setting up menu Tool change point zp The coordinates o
31. lt PLVA lt AP AL PLVI lt IP IL PLVA gt AP AL PLVI gt IP IL RAA 32 160 7 Parameters Roughing Machining cycles Overhang length external ULA Relative length for external rough machining enabling roughing beyond the target position in longitudinal direction Not considered when the cutting limitation Is in front of or within the overhang Overhang length inside ULI see also 6 75 5 Inside Contours Length of roughing beyond the target point during inside machining in longitudinal direction Not considered when the cutting limitation is in front of or within the overhang ULI is used to calculate the drilling depth for centric predrilling Retracting length external RAHL Retracting length internal RIHL Retracting length for smoothing variants H 1 2 of roughing cycles G810 and G820 for external machining RAHL internal machining RIHL Cutting depth reduction factor SRF For rough machining with tools machining opposite to the main machining direction the infeed value cutting depth is reduced Calculation of infeed P for roughing cycles G810 G820 P ZT SRF ZT Infeed from the technology database Finishing Tool and Machining Standards Finishing tools are defined according to machining location and main machining direction MMD via setting angle and point angle For tool selection the following additionally applies Finishing cycles are primarily executed
32. the workpiece zero point all zero offsets and the tool dimensions Traverse paths and position values are referenced to the distance tool tip workpiece zero point while taking the zero point shifts into consideration 172 4 DIN PLUS 4 14 Data Input and Data a E Data are also entered and output during simulation V variables are included during simulation The V variables can be assigned values Thus all branches of your NC program can be tested Comp insp W Display Interpr dialog channel Input Diameter Data Output 4 14 1 Input Output of Variables i a INPUT P With INPUT you program the input of variables that 200 002 are evaluated during program Interpretation Zi 100 001 A You define the input text and the variable number The 100 001 CNC PILOT stops the interpretation at INPUT and E waits for input of the variable value 30 Aug 62 q The CNC PILOT displays the input after having ESA Switching Switch Basic block Single block Selectable completed the INPUT command PO et Mi Pombo sited Syntax INPUT text variable m a simuration Erereneter Hain level XBSP_I_6 PRINT PRINT can be used to output texts and variable values during program interpretation You can program a succession of several texts and variables J Machining aH Motion aH set up H 3 0 View Syntax PRINT text1 variable text1 var
33. xx T number and not by an ID number 28 e B Manual control T aT di Luly 44 Rof H Tool list nee Compile list FH Tool change point fH compare list SA shift zero point Accept list EH Protection Zones a4 Toot lifo managomont di chucking table gt el Update tool life management Hal Machine moasuros di Tool set up X1 200 002 T iis X hm Z 71 999 e E Z 100 001 Zur Y 100 001 en a J ee p AAE iai 0 05 Sep OZ 16 32 11 CEP The parameters of simple tools are defined in the NC program The tool life data are evaluation only if the tool life management is active Danger of collision Compare the tool list with the current tool carrier assignment and check the tool data before running a program The tool list and the dimensions of the tools entered must correspond to the actual facts because the CNC PILOT uses the data for slide movements protective zone monitoring etc 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 3 1 Setting Up aTool List A tool list can also be set up without using an NC program ife Data l is E tOo La E Roughing too Select Setting up Tool list Compile list 12 16 0801 112 Roughing tool 121 735 648 1 Finishing tool _ _ _ _i V22 12 846 1 Finishing tool 151 600 2 Recess standard 143 16 158 1 Thread standard Select the tool location 141 150 2 Ho Thread standard 342 320 1 i Revers pl drill ENTER or INS key
34. 105 TURN PLUS Front rear face 246 Lateral surface 253 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Full surface machining Fundamentals 4 in DIN PLUS 187 TURN PLUS AWG machining information 324 AWG machining sequence 307 G commands overview 3 G functions Manual turning operations 26 selection from list of geometry functions 75 selection from list of machining functions 76 G functions for contour description G0 Geo Starting point of contour 84 G100 Geo Starting point for front face 96 G101 Geo Line on front face 97 G102 Geo Arc on front face 97 G103 Geo Arc on front face 97 G10 Geo Surface roughness 92 G110 Geo Starting point on lateral surface 102 G111 Geo Line on lateral surface 102 G112 Geo Arc on lateral surface 103 G113 Geo Arc on lateral surface 103 G12 Geo Circular arc 85 G13 Geo Circular arc 85 G149 Geo Additive compensation 94 G1 Geo Line 85 G20 Geo Chuck part cylinder tube 84 G21 Geo Cast part 84 G22 Geo Recess standard 86 G23 Geo Recess general 86 G24 Geo Thread with undercut 87 G25 Geo Undercut contour 88 G2 Geo Circular arc 85 G300 Geo Hole on front face 98 G301 Geo Linear slot on front face 99 G302 Geo Circular slot on front face 99 Vil Index Index G G12 Circular movement 112 G303
35. 111 Turning contour G1 Ge o 85 With chamfer G88 139 With radius G87 139 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 TURN PLUS Front rear face 243 Lateral surface 250 Turning contour 230 Linear and rotary axes 62 Linear dimension 62 Linear path See Line segment Linear pattern see Pattern Linear slot DIN PLUS Front rear face G301 Geo 99 Lateral surface G311 Geo 104 TURN PLUS Front rear face A Lateral surface 254 Load display 53 Load monitoring Fundamentals 54 Limit values editing 56 Load monitoring type of G996 167 Monitoring zone defining G995 167 Parameters for 58 Production under D9 Programming 167 Reference machining 54 Reference machining analyzing 57 Working with the 97 Load monitoring type of G996 167 Local subprograms 70 Local variables 70 Log Tile 405 Longitudinal roughing G810 122 Longitudinal turning simple G81 134 Look ahead G918 171 XI Index Index M Commands In manual control mode 25 M01 optional stop 183 M30 program end 183 M97 synchronous function 193 M99 program end with return jump 133 TURN PLUS IWG special machining 305 TURN PLUS program header 218 Machine commands 183 Machine data 25 Machine dimensions setting up 38 Machine display Adj
36. 15 Inserting TURN PLUS contour 260 Inside machining TURN PLUS machining information 329 Inspection mode 46 Inspector TURN PLUS user aid 270 Installation of data transfer 410 Instructions input 76 Integer variable 175 Interactive working plan generation IWG 282 Interfaces Ethernet Connector assignment 433 Transmission methods with 409 Serial Configuration 412 Connector assignment 433 General information 409 Intermediate contours 83 Internal error 18 Interpreter stop Interpreter stop G909 171 Variable programming 179 Index Interrupted feed rate G64 113 Inverting TURN PLUS contour 262 Island DIN PLUS 95 Isolating a detail Simulation 208 TORN PLUS ars 317 L call 77 Lag error following error Ignoring G718 170 In variables G903 171 Lag error limit G975 172 Language selecting 399 Lateral surface Contour commands 102 Coordinate data 62 Machining commands 150 Reference diameter G120 148 Surface window simulation 201 TURN PLUS contours 249 Lathe center 393 Limit switch monitoring In simulation 207 Line segment DIN PLUS Front rear face contour G101 Geo 97 Front rear face G101 149 Lateral surface contour G111 Geo 102 Lateral surface G111 151 Linear motion G1
37. 205 Contour simulation 203 Dimensions 204 Displays 198 Errors and warnings 200 Front window 201 Graphic elements 197 Lines and path display 197 Machining Simulation 205 XVII Index Index Simulation Main menu 201 Motion Simulation 207 NC program run checking 210 Operating mode 196 Protection zone and limit switch monitoring 205 Screen contents 196 side view YZ 201 Surface window 201 synchronous point analysis 213 Time calculation 212 Tool representation 197 TURN PLUS control graphics 317 ZOOM cease 208 Single hole TURN PLUS 244 Single block mode Automatic mode 43 Simulation 196 Skip cycle 181 Skip level CEG coasts 76 Entering 43 Execution T3 Fundamentals 64 Slide change key 27 Slide code Conditional block run 181 Fundamentals 64 Programming 76 Slide display ae Slide synchronization 160 General information 160 One sided synchronization G62 160 synchronizing mark setting G162 160 synchronous start of slides G63 160 Slots DIN PLUS Circular slot on front rear face G302 G303 XVIII Circular slot on lateral surface G312 G313 Geo 104 Linear slot on front rear face G301 Geo 99 Linear slot on lateral surface G311 Geo 104 TURN PLUS Circular slot on f
38. 383 Tool ID number 368 Tool life monitoring 380 Tool lists 369 Tool position 370 Width dn 381 Tool dimensions adding G710 121 Tool edge compensation G148 120 Tool edge number 69 Tool graphic displaying 370 Tool interchange chain Defining exchange tools 30 Fundamentals 69 Tool length 10 Tool life management Data display 28 Data in the tool database 380 In automatic mode 45 Parameter entry 30 Tool diagnosis bits 178 Tool life monitoring Diagnosis bits 178 Fundamentals 69 Parameter entry 30 With load monitoring 167 Index Tool list Compare with NC program 31 Setup machine setup 29 Setup TURN PLUS 280 Transferring from NC program OZ Tool movement without machining 110 Tool programming 68 Tool radius compensation Fundamentals 10 Programming 115 Tool selection Manual control 29 TURN PLUS sc 320 Tool types Angle cutter 312 Bar grippers Cy Button tool 371 Centering tool cra Circular saw blade or Copying tool cya Counterbore 371 Countersinkers 371 Delta drill 371 Drilling and slot milling tool 372 Drilling tools 371 End mill 3 2 Finishing tool of 1 Gripping device 372 Indexable insert drills 371 Knurling tool 371 Milling pins 372 Mill
39. Contours that are milled or drilled are programmed within the FINISHED PART section The machining planes are defined as FRONT FRONT_Y SURFACE SURFACE_Y etc You can repeatedly use the section codes or program various contours within one section code Up to four contour per NC program The CNC PILOT support up to four contour groups workpiece blank and finished part in one NC program The code CONTOUR introduces the description of a contour group Parameters on zero point shift and the coordinate system define the position of the contour in the working space A G99 in the machining section assigns the machining to a contour Contour generation during simulation You can save contours generated in the simulation and insert it in the NC program Example You describe the workpiece blank and finished part and simulate the machining of the first setup Then you save the contour You define a shift of the workpiece zero point and or a mirror image Ihe simulation saves the generated contour as the workpiece blank and the originally defined finished part contour taking the zero point shift and mirroring into account In DIN PLUS you insert into the program the workpiece blank and finished part contour that you generated during simulation block menu Insert contour Contour follow up CNC PILOT takes the blank part as a basis and accounts for each cut and each cycle of the turning operation when following up the contou
40. E E E 17 5ep 62 13 48 30 6 TURN PLUS Transfer parameters in expert program with other name Spindle speed for workpiece transfer LA Direction of spindle rotation LB 3 CW 4 CCW Angular synchronization LC 0 Angular synchronization 1 Speed synchronization Offset angle LD with angular synchronization Dead stop LE 0 With traverse to dead stop 1 Without traverse to dead stop Transfer dimension LF Transfer position in machine dimension n n 1 6 Minimum feed path LH For traversing to dead stop see machining manual Maximum feed path LH For traversing to dead stop see machining manual Feed path J For traversing to dead stop see machining manual Jaw rinsing K see machine manual Transfer parameters for information With TURN PLUS 2 1 Prepare work on the opposing spindle switch on conversions zero point shift etc Working position 2 Z U Proposed value Zero point offset e g from machine parameter 1164 for Z axis 1 see sketch Zero point shift W Shift of the NC zero point calculation distance from reference point on chuck to dead stop on chuck jaw finished part length Finished part length LF From the workpiece description Rechuck Full surface machining back to 1st chucking If you wish to correct or optimize the contour or machining process after the 2nd setup has been generated you can use this funct
41. E Additive compensation gt Select Comp Additive cormpensation gt Enter the compensation number 901 to 916 the FE yas ro Tra Hjinsp ow Diepiay CNC PILOT displays the current compensation arrears LEOL T ZB0pOT values gt Enter the compensation values Values entered here are added to the existing compensation values gp Additive compensation H are activated with G149 E are managed in setup parameter 10 can be changed by no more than 1 mm TTT S i pg gt Ee alme pie Di 3 5 5 Tool Life Management gt Select Comp Tool life management This tool list with the current tool life data is displayed gt Select the tool gt ENTER opens the Tool life management dialog box E Set to ready for use or E update the tool life data with a new cutter HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 45 3 5 Automatic Mode of Operation 3 5 6 Inspection Mode peration This function interrupts the program sequence checks and corrects the active tool inserts a new cutting edge and continues the NC program from the point of interruption The inspection cycle is executed as follows ene Interrupt the program sequence and retract the E tool Check the tool and replace the cutting edge if necessary n Return the tool E Cutting edge OK Continue the automatic program run m New cutting edge Define the compensation values by scratching and continue the automatic
42. E G muel GAD ess FE apes gt Simulation T 4 115 375 080 1 Program active W See 66 Sep 62 89 35 47 2 ZBSPO1 Warning 1 op Eset up WH contour dioe Debug Hachining EE tii New Ti Cent Hr PEPPE E 1 N 123 G836 NS18 NEIN E Z U HO T 4 K 15 4226 1 N 123 7e eea Zz 19 e87 cf 5 oao 5 seolt 6fS 35 e80 1 A selg gal Zoon ON Program active W 86 Sep B2 03 37 27 5 Graphic Simulation Zero point shift In the Contour selection dialog box Set up Contour selection you define whether zero point shifts will be accounted for in the simulation As an alternative you can use the touch pad to click the zero point shifts symbol in order to change the setting Changed settings do not become effective until the simulation is restarted D Including zero point shifts The machine zero point is the reference point for the positioning of contours and for the traverse paths Zero point shifts are included in calculation Ga Zero point shifts are not included in calculation The workpiece zero point is the reference point for the paths of traverse Zero point shifts are ignored If you use the program section code CONTOUR and G99 no matter what the status of the zero point shift The workpiece the contour is depicted at the position defined in CONTOUR G99 X Z shifts the workpiece to a new position Severa
43. amp amp To return to the main menu press the ESC key SSS SSS Ss Select Prepare Chucking Chuck _ y amp amp amp amp e Select Spindle side Three jaw chuck Nn eee eee Three jaw chuck dialog box Select ID number of chuck Enter type of jaw Enter the clamp form Select the ID number of jaw Check enter the clamp length and clamp pressure Define the clamp range select a contour element that is touched by clamping jaws Onn eee eee Close the three jaw chuck dialog box TURN PLUS now depicts the chucking equipment and the cutting limits m re To return to the main menu press the ESC key transfer EN Spindle side J Tailetock side d Cutting limitation Three jaw chuck Enter chuck data ID number chuck KHI10 n Type j w Gripper jou cy lone step d Clamp form oho W ID number jan IKeAz50 32 Clamp length i nm Clamp press lo bar JAU petting Ain E am Select clamp range Cancel 6 TURN PLUS Generating a working plan blockwise _ gt e ce Select AWG Block by block pace bar mal y 444 Program 44 Workpiece J4 Fropare 44 1u On epee eee TURN PLUS runs a graphic simulation of the machining process block by block Onn ees eee select Accept working block YY e After the working plan has been generated select Accept working plan 6 1
44. or the reference diameter in the section code Specify the depth and position of a milling contour pocket island in the contour definition With depth P in the previously programmed G308 Alternatively on figures Cycle parameter depth P The algebraic sign of depth P defines the position of the milling contour see table P lt 0 Pocket P gt 0 Island Section P Surface__ Miilling floor __ FRONT Ped Z Z P FRONT P gt 0 Z P Z REAR SIDE P lt 0 Z Z P REAR SIDE P gt 0 Z P Zz SURFACE P20 X X P 2 SURFACE P gt 0 X P 2 X X Reference diameter from the section code Z Reference plane from the section code P Depth from G308 or from cycle parameter Contours in More than One Plane Programming with hierarchically nested contours Start with G308 begin pocket island and end with G309 End of pocket island G308 sets a new reference plane reference diameter The first G308 uses the reference plane defined in the section code Every following G308 sets a new reference plane Calculation Currently active reference plane P from the previous G308 G309 switches back to the previous reference plane Start pocket island G308 Geo New reference plane reference diameter for hierarchically nested front face rear face or lateral face contours Parameters P Depth for pocket height for islands Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Pocket or island ep Island The
45. pressed The simulation is conducted without stop 200 5 Graphic Simulation 5 2 Main Menu Prog ram selection drop down menu Load Select NC program and press OK From DIN PLUS takes the NC program selected in DIN PLUS Menu items for calling the Contour simulation Contour Machining simulation Machining Movement simulation Motion 3 D depiction 3 D view Set up drop down menu Settings that you made previously apply in the contour machining and motion simulation Set up Window window selection dialog box Select the combination of windows best suited to the machining that you wish to inspect Front window The contour and traverse paths are shown in the XY plane taking the spindle position into account The spindle position O is located on the positive X axis designation XK Surface window The contour display and traverse path display are oriented to the position on the unrolled lateral surface designation CY and the Z coordinates Contours with the C axis are displayed the same way as contours on the workpiece surface In the graphic simulation window of the DIN PLUS editor the surface contours are drawn on the milling floor and are therefore shorter than the arc on the workpiece Surface Side view YZ window The contour and traverse path are shown in the YZ plane The side view depicts only theY and Z coordinates not the spindle
46. 1076 Compensation values of C axis Parameters are entered by the machine tool builder 1107 1157 Backlash compensation linear axes In backlash compensation the value of backlash compensation is calculated into every change In direction 1110 1160 Load monitoring linear axis Type of backlash compensation 0 No backlash compensation 1 Encoder is built into the motor The backlash compensation accounts for the reversal error between the motor and table During each change in direction the nominal value is adjusted by the value entered in the backlash compensation value option 2 With direct measurement the backlash compensation compensates the reversal error between the motor and encoder During each change in direction the nominal value is corrected by the value entered in the Backlash compensation value option Backlash compensation value For tyoe 1 compensation value with positive sign For type 2 compensation value with negative sign Evaluation Load monitoring Start up time for monitoring 0 1000 ms evaluated if Omit paths of rapid traverse is active The load monitoring function is not activated if the nominal acceleration of the spindle exceeds the limit value limit value 15 of acceleration ramp brake ramp As soon as nominal acceleration falls below the limit value the monitoring function is activated after the start up time for monitoring has elapsed Number of me
47. 44 45 5 08 a 50 8 5644444444 2 1 4 5715 5 644444444 2 1 2 63 5 6 35 2 3 4 69 85 6 35 a 76 2 6 35 3 1 4 82 55 6 35 y 88 9 6 35 33 4 95 25 6 35 4 101 6 6 35 Q 14 UNF US fine pitch thread Thread diameter Thread ___ designation linmm pitch _ __ 0 06 1 524 0 3175 0 073 1 8542 0 352777777 0 086 2 1844 0 396875 0 099 2 5146 0 453571428 Oni 2 8448 0 529166666 0 125 3 175 0 577272727 0 138 3 5052 0 635 0 164 4 1656 0 705555555 0 19 4 826 0 79375 0 216 5 4864 0 907142857 1 4 6 35 0 907142857 5 16 7 9375 1 058333333 3 8 9 525 1 058333333 low 11 1125 27 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 9 16 6 8 3 4 7 8 1 1 8 1 1 4 1 3 8 1 1 2 127 14 2875 15 87 95 19 05 22 225 25 4 25 575 31 70 34 925 38 1 1 27 1 411111111 1 411111111 15075 1 814285714 1 814285714 2 116666667 2 116666667 2 116666667 2 116666667 Q 15 UNEF US extra fine pitch thread Thread diameter Thread __ designation __ inmm pith 0 216 5 4864 0 79375 1 4 6 05 0 79375 5 16 19375 0 79375 3 8 0 029 0 79375 7 16 11 1125 0 907142857 1 2 t2 0 907142857 9 16 14 2875 1 058333333 5 8 18 070 1 058333333 11 16 174625 1 058333333 3 4 19 05 1 27 13 16 20 6375 1 27 7 8 22225 1 27 15 16 23 8125 1 27 1 25 4 LZ 11 16 26 9875 1 411111111 1 1 8 28 575 1 411111111 13 16 30 1625 1 411111111 1 1 4 2175 1 411111111 15 16 39 33 5 1 411111111 13 8 34 925 1 411111111 1 7 16 36 5125 1 411111111
48. 6 Status of the simulation status of the zero point shift Functions of the simulation The Simulation mode shows a graphic representation of programmed contours the paths of traverse and cutting operations The CNC PILOT shows the working space tools and chucking equipment true to scale Check machining operations with the C orY axis in the supplementary windows front surface and side view windows For complex NC programs with branches variable calculations external events etc you simulate all inputs and events to test all program branches During simulation the CNC PILOT calculates the machining and idle machine times for every tool For lathes with several slides the Synchronous point analysis enables you to optimize your NC program Up to four workpieces in the working space The CNC PILOT supports the program text for lathes with more than one slide in one working space You can simulate the simultaneous machining of up to four workpieces The simulation mode is grouped into Contour simulation Simulation of programmed contours Machining simulation Inspection of the machining process Motion simulation Simulation of real time machining with continuous contour regeneration 196 E Service TH Prog FH contour H Machining dH Motion Wi Set up Fa 3 0 view 1 wen wees 3 stom i z gt ae O Single Basie block DIN PLUS TURN PLUS block 20 Aug 82 6 End of program 10 14
49. 858 They can be changed with G992 The CNC PILOT writes the monitoring result into variable V300 Specify the path to be monitored in return path R and define whether the path before the workpiece is cut off or the return path is to be monitored see illustration Parameters R Return path radius value No entry The speed difference between the spindles running synchronously is checked one time check R gt 0 Remaining path before the parting operation is monitored R lt 0 Return path is monitored the monitoring function is activated when the return path begins and is deactivated when the value R is reached zp Parting control with G917 is preferable to G991 Tool breakage might result in speed differences which in turn might affect the monitoring result It is therefore advisable to monitor the reverse path too HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Continued gt Programming notes Program G917 and G1 in one block Program G1 as follows With parting control Path gt 0 5 mm to permit a result of monitoring When checking for smooth parting control Path lt width of the parting tool Result in variable V300 0 Workpiece has not been cut off correctly smoothly lag error has been detected 1 Workpiece has been cut off correctly smoothly no lag error has been detected G917 generates an interpreter stop N G991 R G1 X Noo GS Ins GI 2 Programming no
50. E The direction of the contour description is independent of the direction of machining m CNC PILOT closes open contours paraxially E Contour descriptions must not extend beyond the turning center E The contour of the finished part must lie within the contour of the blank part E When machining bars only define the required section as blank E Contour definitions are valid for the complete NC program even if the workpiece is rechucked for machining the rear face E In the fixed cycles you program reference values referenced to the contour description Continued gt 66 4 DIN PLUS To describe blank parts use G20 Blank part macro for standard parts cylinder hollow cylinder G21 Cast part macro for blank part contours based on finished part contours Individual contour elements Such as are used for finished part contours if use of G20 or G21 is not possible To describe finished parts use individual contour elements The contour elements or the complete contour can be assigned attributes which are accounted for during the machining of the workpiece example roughness allowances etc For intermediate machining steps define auxiliary contours Auxiliary contours are programmed in the same way as finished part descriptions You can program one contour definition per AUXILIARY CONTOUR The number of auxiliary contours in a program is not limited Contours for machining with the C Y axis
51. EREE Bee mimi ee a bie bee Bee S Calls G96 Cutting speed LLL LLL Instructions for structuring the program Graphics Activate update the contour in the graphic simulation windows mimi ele zee ele Bike bebe 4 DIN PLUS L call external see 4 76 Subprograms Select the subprogram and press RETURN Enter the transfer parameters The CNC PILOT inserts the subprogram call L call internal see 4 76 Subprograms Enter the name of the subprogram number of the first block of the subprogram Enter the transfer parameters The CNC PILOT inserts the subprogram call Comment line Enter the comment the comment is inserted above the cursor position Template selection Select from the available templates Prerequisite The machine manufacturer has defined templates The working plan collects all comments that begin with and places them before the MACHINING section This gives you a summary of the functions in the NC program or subprogram Menu item Graphic Activates deactivates contours in the graphic window 4 3 4 Block Menu This function enables NC program sections several successive NC blocks to be moved copied deleted or exchanged between NC programs To define an NC block highlight the first and last line of the block Then select the desired function from the Edit menu In order to exchange blocks between NC progra
52. Event 2 Sequential event that is triggered when the life of the last tool of the interchange chain has expired the tool has produced the defined quantity Event 21 59 Ready for use Set the tool to ready for use or not ready for use applies to tool life management only Select Setting up Tool list Tool life management the CNC PILOT displays the tools entered uy amp amp amp e g Select the tool location _yY amp amp amp amp e J Press ENTER the CNC PILOT opens the Tool life management dialog box u y eee Enter the replacement tool and the tool life parameters press OK New cutter sets the tool life quantity to the value programmed in the database and sets the tool to ready for use ee HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 2 C E Manual control jr Js 3n Hsotting up 3447 Hrona Hrer Teol List oL melts mut 1 ee _ ID number cli T type Revers pl drill axial 342 De te AME ae aa ah aE a E alas 342 361 Ident M 342 300 1 Henitering m de Tool life EEN 2 oe Repl tool XxX Total tool life 20 00 122 12 Event 1 e Remoin tool life 0 00 ja ITa Event 2 lg Total piece mo 80000 amp 141 151 Ready for use fon Romain pioco no 88088 Statue paar Reason F stoppage 12 ae OK new cutter Cancel X 200 002 T ma X n mmni Z 71 999 a E 100 001 Zma 1 YI 100 001 C v mnnn i J caa e DAS G e
53. First X then Z direction i Threads bem 6 12 Interactive Worki a Si iL Switch over the soft key row for the E selection of the following form Finishing Retraction soft keys _ as H 0 4 Backs off at 45 against the machining direction and H Undercut type H a moves diagonally to the retraction position Asi Backs off at 45 against the machining direction and a Undercut type K oe moves first in the X direction then in the Z direction to the retraction position Undercut type U H 2 f Backs off at 45 against the machining direction and z moves first in the Z direction then in the X direction to the retraction position Recess general i Backs off at feed rate to the safety clearance Recess form S Recess form D _ 4 Switch over the soft key row for the selection of the following form elements Back Switch back the soft key row ae Undercut type E HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 301 lan Generation IWG 6 12 Interactive Work Finishing Contour machining G890 The selected contour area is machined parallel to the contour in one pass Chamfers roundings and undercuts are taken Into account For chamfers roundings the following applies The peak to valley height or feed rate are not programmed The CNC PILOT automatically reduces the feed rate At least FMUR revolutions machining parameter 5 are performed Peak to valley height feed rate programmed No fee
54. G9 Precision stop 168 G901 Actual values to variables 170 G902 Zero point shift to variables 171 G903 Servo lag to variables 171 G905 C angle offset 161 G906 Measuring angular offset during spindle synchronization 161 G907 Block speed monitoring off 171 G908 Feed rate override 100 171 G909 Interpreter stop Wa G910 Switch on in process measurement 165 G912 Actual value capture for in process measuring 165 G913 Switch off in process measuring 165 G914 Retract touch probe 165 G915 Postprocess measurement 166 G916 Traverse to a fixed stop 162 G917 Controlled parting 162 G918 Look ahead 171 G919 Spindle override 100 171 G920 Deactivate zero point shifts 172 G921 Deactivate zero point shifts tool lengths PE G93 Feed per tooth 114 G94 Constant feed rate 114 G95 Feed per revolution 114 G96 Constant cutting speed 114 G97 Spindle speed 114 G975 Servo lag limit 172 G98 Spindle with workpiece 169 G980 Activate zero point shifts 172 G981 Activate zero point shift tool lengths 172 G99 Workpiece group 110 G991 Controlled parting spindle monitoring 163 G992 Values for controlled parting 164 G995 Define monitoring zone 167 G996 Type of load monitoring 167 Geometry in main menu T3 Geometry commands DIN PLUS 84
55. Graphic DIN PLUS 74 Index Index Graphic display 49 Graphic window 68 Graphic magnitying reducing Simulation 208 TURN PLUS 317 Gripping device olz Guarding ring TURN PLUS 236 Handwheel 26 Hollowing TURN PLUS IWG Cutting limit for 287 Finishing neutral tool 301 Finishing 300 Hollowing automatic 289 Residual roughing contourparallel 288 Residual roughing longitudinal transverse 287 Roughing neutral tool 289 TURN PLUS machining information 322 Identification number IF Program branch 180 Illustrations for machine display 349 Inches Defining the unit of measure 79 Machine mode of operation 24 41 Programming 63 Units of measure 8 Programming 65 Incremental coordinates 8 Indexable insert drills 371 Infeed 396 Info system 16 X Information in variables 178 Information on unsolved geometric elements 227 In process measuring Actual value capture for G912 165 Switching off G913 165 Switching on G910 165 Touch probe retracting G914 165 INPUT input of variable 173 Input field 15 Input resolution 429 Input window 15 INPUTA input of V variable 174 Inputs outputs Operator communication 64 Programming 174 Time for 70 INS key
56. Identical variable numbers on different slides are no problem Global variables are retained after the program has been completed and can be processed by the following NC program 30 45 channel independent global variable Are available once within the control If the NC program of a slide changes a variable it applies to all slides The variables are retained after the program has been completed and can be processed by the following NC program 46 50 variables are only used in expert programs Do not use these variables in your NC program 256 285 local variables are effective within a subprogram Reading in parameter values Syntax 1 PARA x y z x Parameter group 1 Machine parameters 2 Control parameters 3 Setup parameters 4 Machining parameters 5 PLC parameters y Parameter number Z Sub parameter number Continued P gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Syntax__Mathematicalfunction ss Addition c Subtraction x Multiplication Division SORT Square root ABS Absolute amount ci TAN Tangent in degrees ATAN Arc tangent in degrees SIN Sine in degrees gt ASIN Arc sine in degrees W COSl Cosine in degrees ACOS Arc cosine in degrees ROUND Round LOGN Natural logarithm EXP Exponential function e INT Cut decimal places Only with variables SORTA Square root of a2 b SORTS Square root of a2
57. Milling ON OFF Slot milling Contour milling Pocket milling Deburring Engraving 370 Mirror direction of rotation 0 Direction of spindle rotation remains the same for front and rear side 1 Direction of spindle rotation is mirrored i e M3 becomes M4 and vice versa TURN PLUS uses expert programs for functions such as workpiece transfer for full surface machining This parameter defines which expert programs Subroutines are used Enter the subprogram names UP 100098 parting UP 100099 bar loader UP EXUMS12 currently no meaning UP EXUMS12A currently no meaning UP MEAS01 measuring cut UP UMKOMPL rechucking for lathes with counterspindle UP UMKOMPLA parting and rechucking for lathes with counterspindle UP UMHAND rechucking for lathes without counterspindle UP ABHAND parting and rechucking on machines without opposing spindle 7 Parameters 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 Tool Database The CNC PILOT stores up to 999 tool descriptions which are managed via the tool editor Data exchange and data backup The CNC PILOT supports data exchange and data backup of operating resources tools chucking equipment technology data and the associated tixed word list see 70 Transfer 8 1 1 Tool Editor Select Config Parameter mode of operation Editing the tool data The tool data are edited in three dialog boxes The parameters of the first two dialog boxes depend on the tool type
58. N10 M3 M4 opposing functionality NC address parameters Address parameters consist of 1 or 2 letter s followed by a A value A mathematical expression A 2 simplified geometry programmingVGP An to designate incremental address parameters examples less Char Kling Y Klica BTC A variable calculated during NC program interpretation A V variable calculated during run time Examples X20 absolute dimension ZI 35 675 Incremental dimension X Simple geometry programming X 12 Programming of variables X V12 1 Programming of variables X 37 2 SIN 30 Mathematical term Program branches and repeats You can use program jumps repeats and subprograms to structure a program Example Machining the beginning end of a bar etc Skip level Influences the execution of individual NC blocks Slide code you can assign the NC blocks to the indicated slides provided that your lathe is equipped with more than one slide Input and output With input the machine operator can influence the flow of the NC program Using output functions you can communicate with the machinist Example The machinist is required to check measuring points and update compensation values Comments These are enclosed in parentheses They are located at the end of an NC block or in a separate NC block 64 4 DIN PLUS 4 2 Programming Notes 4 2 1 Parallel Editing The CNC PILOT runs up to eight NC progra
59. Q 2 Lifts off to safety clearance and stops bea Undercutting see soft key table E p 148 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 289 c J Sou c g c 6 12 Interactive Work Roughing contour parallel G830 Parameters P Cutting depth maximum infeed A Approach angle reference Z axis default 0 180 parallel to Z axis W Departing angle reference Z axis default 90 2 70 perpendicular to Z axis X Z Cutting limit Type of oversize is set by soft key I K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle E Reduced plunging feed rate Q Type of retraction at cycle end OQ 0 Return to starting point first X then Z direction Q 1 Positions before the finished contour Q 2 Lifts off to the safety clearance and stops Undercutting see soft key table Roughing automatic Selection Roughing Roughing automatic TURN PLUS generates the working blocks for all roughing operations longitudinal transverse hollowing inside outside etc All the elements contained in a working block are determined tools cutting data cycle parameters etc 290 6 TURN PLUS Cutting limitation with residual roughing Using the Roughing hollowing residual roughing function you can remove residual material from sloping contours Cutting limitation If no cutting limits are defined TURN P
60. The third dialog box serves for multitool management and tool life management Edit the third dialog box as required The tool parameters include Basic data Information on tool depiction simulation control graphic Information for TURN PLUS tool selection automatic working plan generation The tool data can be omitted provided that you do not use TURN PLUS or do not wish tools to be depicted New direct menu item gt Enter the tool type gt It the tool type is unknown in the Main group Sub group Machining direction press the continue soft key and select the type and machining direction from the tool data Enter the tool data New menu menu gt Enter the tool type gt Enter the tool data del temp menu item Deletes tool descriptions that were recorded temporarily by NC program Temporary tool descriptions start with _SIM or _AUTO see 4 6 2 REVOLVER x 372 C p Tools that do not fit into any of the standard tool type groups are assigned to special turning drilling milling tools They are not used for contour cycles and are not used by TURN PLUS EC Delete all toole sex Standard lathe tools ass Roughing Special lathe toole JH Finishing tool f standard drill toole ff Threading tool standard Wi Special drill tools dj Rocoss tool standard Wistandard milling tools Cut off tool fH Special milling tools Part hand
61. Turning contour comprising Basic contour Form elements chamfers roundings undercuts recesses threads centric bore holes C axis contours Turning contours blank finished part must be closed Entering the basic contour Entering the basic contour Select Workpiece Finished part Contour Define the starting point of contour Select Line Arc Enter the basic contour element for element Line Use a menu symbol to select a direction Describe a line Arc Use amenu symbol to select the direction of rotation Describe the arc Switch between line arc menu by soft key If the contour is not closed Press the ESC key twice Answer yes to Close contour See also 6 5 1 Basic Contour Elements 6 3 7 Help Functions for Element Definition 6 9 Assigning Attributes 220 cl Attribute Pleas select element Save contour fo Be changed iH Contour kJ H 4 Line 4 arc Describe first the basic contour and then superimpose the form elements 6 TURN PLUS 6 3 3 Superimposing form elements Form elements are superimposed on the basic contour There remain independent elements that can be edited or deleted If required TURN PLUS generates a special machining cycle for the form elements The position selection considers the type of form element Chamfer Outside corners Rounding Outside and inside corners Undercut Inside corners defined by paraxial
62. WW Approach angle undercut angle A Runout angle transverse angle TURN PLUS suggests undercut parameters calculated from the diameter see 11 1 3 Undercut Parameters DIN 509 F Undercut type G TURN PLUS proposes the parameter values but you can overwrite them The proposed values are based on the metric ISO thread DIN 13 that is found from the diameter Parameter see 77 7 7 Undercut Parameters DIN 76 Finding the thread pitch see 11 1 5 Thread Pitch Parameters F Thread pitch K Undercut length undercut width Undercut depth radius R Undercut radius in both corners of the undercut default R 0 6 Approach angle undercut angle Undercut type H Parameters K Undercut length R Undercut radius WW Approach angle HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 DIN 509 F 233 5 Finished Part Contour 5 Finished Part Contour Undercut type K Parameters Undercut depth R Undercut radius W Aperture angle A Approach angle angle to linear axis default 45 Undercut type U Parameters K R P 234 Undercut length undercut width Undercut depth radius Inside radius in both corners of recess default O Outside radius chamfer No no chamfer rounding Chamfer P width of chamfer Rounding P radius of rounding 6 TURN PLUS Recess general Recess general defines an axial or radial recess on a linear reference
63. amp 141 150 Recesa otandard w Off e6a Thread standard OFF a8 Thread standard Off 868 m E aa i i a a a E 1 11 342 320 1 Revere pl drill orf 12 X 200 002 T iis X hm Z 71 999 e E Z 100 001 Zur PEELE 05 Sep Z Y 100 001 We ie chA S e a 5 16 34 16 jerej we jun e gt Delete the tool Take the tool from the ID number clipboard tR J Delete the tool and place in the ID number clipboard Edit the tool parameters Editing Type list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool typep ID list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool ID number 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 3 4 Tool Life Management The tool life management allows you to define the sequence of exchange and declare the tool to be ready for use The tool life quantity is defined in the tool database see section 8 7 7 Multiple Tools Tool Life Monitoring The Tool life management dialog box is used both for entering and displaying the tool life data You can use the variable programming function in your NC program to evaluate sequential events that you enter in Event 1 and Event 2 see section 4 15 2V Variables Tool life management parameters Repl tool replacement tool number turret position of the replacement tool Event 1 Sequential event that is triggered when the life of a tool has expired a tool has produced the defined quantity Event 21 59
64. b ep Program NC blocks containing variable calculations with slide code if your lathe has more than one slide Otherwise the calculations are repeated Examples for variables N 1 PARA 1 73 transfers machine value 1 Z to variable 1 N 1 14 1 N G1 X 1 N G1 X SQRT 3 SIN 30 N 1 ABS 2 0 5 175 Programming Information contained in variables The following variable information on tool data and your NC program can be read out The assignment of variables 518 521 varies depending on the type of tool Precondition he variable is defined as a result of a tool call or an NC program call 512 Tool type 3 digit number 513 515 1 2 3 Tool type position 516 Usable length nl for turning drilling or boring tools 517 Main machining direction see table 518 Secondary machining direction of turning tools see table 519 Tool type 14 1 right hand model 2 left hand model A 5 6 number of teeth 520 Tool type 1 2 Cutting radius rs 3 4 Drilling boring diameter d1 51 52 Milling diameter front df 56 6 Milling diameter d1 521 Tool type 11 12 Roughing finishing diameter sd 14 15 16 27 Cutting width sb 3 4 Length of first cut al 5 6 Milling width fb 522 Tool orientation reference machining direction of tool 0 On the contour 1 To the right of the contour 1 To the left of the co
65. element The recess is assigned to the selected reference element Parameters XZ Reference point K Recess width without chamfer rounding Recess depth Bs Diameter radius of recess base for recesses parallel to the Z axis A Recess angle angle between recess edges 0 t A lt 180 P Outside radius chamfer corner far from starting point No no chamfer rounding Chamfer P width of chamfer Rounding P radius of rounding B Outside radius chamfer corner near starting point No no chamfer rounding Chamfer B width of chamfer Rounding B radius of rounding R Radius at bottom inside radius in both recess corners Recess type D sealing ring This recess type defines an axial or radial recess on the outside or inside of the contour The recess is assigned to the previously selected reference element Parameters X Starting point for radial recess Z Starting point for axial recess Diameter radius of recess base li Axial recess Recess depth Radial recess Recess width pay attention to sign KI Axial recess Recess width pay attention to sign Radial recess Recess depth B Outside radius chamfer at both recess sides No no chamfer rounding Chamfer B width of chamfer Rounding B radius of rounding R Radius at bottom inside radius in both recess corners HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 The CNC PILOT refers the recess depth to the reference element The recess base r
66. opens the setup dialog box O O 200 002 Enter the ID number i f 335 y oa BAL l 8 a ap Enter the tool type the CNC PILOT displays all tools of this type mask Enter the ID number the CNC PILOT displays all the tools of this ID mask Delete tool 5 Select the tool A Take the tool from the ID number clipboard ae Take the tool from the database Delete the tool and place in the ID number clipboard wine tack database Edit the tool parameters Select Setting up Tool list Compile list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool ID number isla Entries in the tool database sorted by tool typep Select the tool location or the DEL key deletes the tool Continued P gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 29 oar m 3 3 Tool Lists Select Setting up Tool list Compile list Select tool location Deletes the tool and saves it in the ID number clipboard Select a new tool location A L Take the tool from the ID number n clipboard If the location was occupied the previous tool is taken into the clipboard 30 Pn 3 Mmmm AA pin FER aLi Pppp LE S LLA ta ea F j ol F da Pnr p mm E AL E n Compile tool list 1 12 16 6908 1 121 35 648 1 122 12 04 1 151 600 2 143 16 158 1 141 158 2 342 320 1 X 200 002 1 999 Y 100 0
67. planes FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE Parameters Js Retraction plane default return to starting position Front rear face Retraction position in Z direction Lateral surface Retraction position in X direction diameter G Machining direction Q Toward the outside Q 0 From the inside toward the outside Toward the inside Q 1 From the outside toward the inside H Cutting direction H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling U Overlap factor range 0 lt U lt 0 9 0 No overlapping V Overshoot factor has no effect for operations with the C axis F Maximum infeed in the milling plane Ris Oversize in X Z direction is omitted for finishing 308 6 TURN PLUS Engraving G840 Engraves open or closed contours of the reference plane FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE Options parameters K Retraction plane default return to starting position Front rear face Retraction position in Z direction Lateral surface Retraction position in X direction diameter P Milling depth plunging depth of the tool 6 12 10 Special Machining Tasks SM In special machining SM you add paths of traverse subprogram calls or G M functions example use of tool handling systems Special machining defines a work block that is integrated in the working plan Special machining tasks Tool movements at feed rate or rapid traverse including tool calls and definition of technological data Selection IWG men
68. program run When the tool is retracted the CNC PILOT stores the first five traverse movements Each change in direction corresponds to a path of traverse The NC program run can be continued before the point of interruption Specify the distance to the interruption point If the value is greater than the distance between the start of the NC block and the interruption point program sequence begins at the Start of the interrupted NC block e 2 me Q Pur lt LO ap m Interrupt the program run Select Insp ection During the inspection process you can turn the turret press the spindle keys etc E f the turret was turned the return motion program inserts the correct tool When changing the cutting edge select If necessary swivel the turret the compensation values so that the tool stops in front of the workpiece E In the cycle stop condition you can interrupt the inspection cycle with ESC and switch to Manual control Conclude the inspection process the CNC PILOT loads the return motion program _SERVICE To retract the tool use the axis direction keys Inspect the tool if necessary replace it The Tool compensation dialog box appears Enter the compensation values and confirm with OK If you are using anew cutting edge modify the tool compensation so that the tool when returning comes to a stop in front of the
69. radius to the right of the contour in traverse direction HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Parameters G41 G42 Q Machining plane default O Q 0 TRC on the turning plane X Z plane Q 1 MCRC on the face X C plane Q 2 TRC on the lateral surface Z C plane Q 3 TRC on the ace X Y plane Q 4 TRC on the lateral surface Y Z plane H Output only with MCRC default O H 0 Intersecting areas which are programmed in directly successive contour elements are not machined H 1 The complete contour is machined even if certain areas are intersecting O Feed rate reduction default O O 0 Feed rate reduction active O 1 No feed rate reduction CA Ifthe tool radii are larger than the contour radii the TRC MCRC might cause endless loops Recommendation Use the finishing cycle G890 milling cycle G840 Never select MCRC during a perpendicular approach to the respective plane Remember when calling subprograms with active TRC MCRC Switch the TRC MCRC off in the subprogram In which It was switched on in the main program if it was switch on there Function of the TRC MCRC Path of traverse from X10 Z10 to X10 TRC Z20 TRC The path of traverse is shifted by the TRC Path of traverse from X20 TRC Z20 TRC to X30 Z30 115 N z Q O 2 46 6 Zero Point Shift Overview S You can program several zero shifts in one NC program The G51 Relative shift c relationship of the coordinate
70. slots pattern definition Normal position he starting end angles are defined relative to the pattern positions The orientation angle is added to the starting end angle Original position Starting end angles are defined absolutely The following examples and figures show the programming of a circular pattern with circular slots Slots arranged at distance of pattern radius around the pattern center point All slots are located at the same position center of curvature center of pattern Slots arranged at distance of pattern radius curvature radius around the pattern center pattern center point X 5 Y 5 Slots are arranged at the distance of the pattern radius curvature radius around the pattern center while retaining the starting end angles pattern center point X 5 Y 5 4 DIN PLUS Example for a slot center line as reference and normal Example for a slot center as reference and original Example for a center of curvature as reference and normal Example for a center of curvature as reference and Original position HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Commands 4 5 Geome Commands O 4 6 Machining Commands 4 6 1 Assigning the Contour to the Operation Workpiece group G99 If more than one contour description is defined in an NC program workpieces use G99 to assign the contour Q to the following machining sequence The slide code before the NC block defi
71. 1 1 2 38 1 1 411111111 1 9 16 39 6875 1 411111111 1 5 8 41 275 1 411111111 1 11 16 42 8625 1 411111111 1 3 4 44 45 1 5875 2 00 0 15975 431 Q 16 NPT US taper pipe thread Q 18 NPSC US cylindrical pipe thread with Thread diameter Thread PICA 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters Thread diameter Thread ___ 116 7938 0 94074074 designation inmm pitch __ 1 8 10 287 0 941740 74 1 8 10 287 0 94174074 1 4 13 716 1 411111111 1j4 13 16 1 411111111 3 3 17145 1 411111111 3 8 17145 1 411111111 1 2 21 336 1814285714 Le 21 336 1814285714 3 4 26 67 1 814285714 3 4 26 67 1 814285714 E 33 401 2 208695652 1 33 401 2208695652 1 1 4 42 164 2 208695652 T 1 4 42 164 2 208695652 1 1 2 48 26 2 208695652 14172 48 26 2 208695652 oe 60 325 7 208695652 7 60 325 2 208695652 212 73 025 3 175 21 2 73 025 3 175 3 88 9 3 175 3 88 9 3 175 Ct 101 6 3 175 312 101 6 3 175 4 114 3 3 175 4A 114 3 3 175 5 141 3 3 1 5 6 168 275 3 175 Aa E a Q 19 NPFS US cylindrical pipe thread without 10 273 05 3 175 g 12 323 85 3 175 lubricant ad A an Threads diameter Thread ___ 16 406 4 3 175 13 A579 3175 designation inmm pitch _ _ 20 508 0 3 175 1 16 7938 0 941740 74 24 609 6 3 175 1 8 10 287 0 941740 7 4 1 4 13 716 1 411111111 3 8 17145 1 411111111 Q 17 NPTF US taper dryseal pipe thread La n Ba 3A 20 07 1 814285 714 1 33 401 2 208695652 1 16 7938 0 941740 4 1 8 10 287 0 941740 4 1 4 13 716 1 411
72. 100 01 Z TTT o Yi 0 000 f Die D Yii H EEE E E k E are Switch Basic block damir blo Selectable Start eee n display hanl displ stop search Display elements Position display actual value display XP Distance from tool point to tool zero point Empty box Reference mark in this axis not yet traversed woo White axis letter No enabling Position display actual value display C Position of the C axis Index Indicates the C axis 0 1 Empty box C axis is not active White axis letter No enabling Distance to go display Distance remaining in the current traverse command Bar graphic Distance to go in millimeters Box at lower left Actual position Box at lower right Distance to go m 0 000 T display without tool life monitoring T number of active tool Tool compensation values T display with tool life monitoring a T number of the active tool Tool life data Continued gt 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode Quantity of workpieces time per workpiece Automatic mode Cycle Start Display Number of finished workpieces in this batch Machining time of current workpiece Automatic mode Feed Sto Entire production time of this batch e p Load display ox Automatic mode Cycle Stop Load of the spindle motors axis drives with regard to rated torque Ol D display additive compensation 900 Manual control Numbe
73. 13 p Change to the DIN PLUS mode DIN PLUS Change to theTURN PLUS mode TURN PLUS afr Switch to the next slide Activate the magnify function O Single Set single block mode block E Set basic block mode Call next selection The control parameter 1 settings defines whether the display values will be in millimeters or inches The setting in program head has no influence on operation and display in the simulation mode of operation 5 Graphic Simulation 5 1 1 Graphic Elements Displays m a simulation IB Machining ZESPOT Graphic elements Coordinate systems The zero point of the coordinate system corresponds to the workpiece zero point The arrows of the X and Z axes point in the positive direction If the NC program is machining more than one workpieces the coordinate systems of all required slides are displayed Displayed blank form Programmed Programmed blank form Not programmed standard blank form control parameter 23 Display of finished part and help contours New HI Cont H Stop atl set up abl Contour Programmed Programmed finished part S Not programmed No display Tas Display of tool EL CE cr Z Programmed in the NC program The tool TOES EISER Program active Hi Oy 55 59 programmed in the REVOLVER TURRET section is mws Saans Geo OW i Not programmed in the NC program The entry in the tool list is used see 3 3 Tool L
74. 152 G845 Pocket milling roughing 156 G846 Pocket milling finishing 157 Special functions G99 Workpiece group 110 G65 Display chucking equipment 159 G62 One sided synchronization 160 G63 Synchronous start of slides 160 G162 Set synchronizing mark 160 G30 Converting and mirroring 169 G121 Contour mirroring shifting 117 G720 Spindle synchronization 161 G905 Measuring C angle offset 161 G906 Angular offset during spindle synchronization measuring 161 G916 Traversing to a fixed stop 162 G917 Controlled parting using lag error monitoring 162 G991 Controlled parting using spindle monitoring 163 G992 Values for controlled parting 164 G702 Storing loading contour follow up 164 G703 Contour follow up ON OFF 164 G706 K default branch 164 G910 Activate in process measuring 165 G912 Actual value determination for in process measuring 165 G913 Deactivate in process measuring 165 G914 Deactivate probe monitoring 165 G915 Post process measuring 166 G995 G996 167 167 Define monitoring zone Type of load monitoring G4 Period of dwell 168 G7 Precision stop ON 168 G8 Precision stop OFF 168 G9 Block precision stop 168 G15 Move rotary axes 168 G30 Converting and mirroring 169 G60 Deactivate protection zone 169 G98 Assignment spindle workpiece 169 G121 Contour mirroring shitting 117 G204 Waiting for moment 170 G717 Update nominal values 170 G718 Move lag error 170 G901 Actual values in variables 170 G902 Datu
75. 22 synchronization synchronization spindle G720 161 synchronizing function M97 183 synchronizing mark setting G162 160 synchronous start of slides G63 160 synchronous point analysis 213 system error 18 T commands Fundamentals 68 Tool changing 120 T display 52 T number 80 Tables Thread parameters 424 Thread pitch A425 O 2 Metric ISO thread 425 O 8 Cylindrical round thread 425 O 9 Cylindrical Whitworth thread 426 OQ 10 Taper Whitworth thread 426 Q 11 Whitworth pipe thread 426 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 O 13 UNC US coarse thread 426 Q 14 UNF US fine thread 427 Q 15 UNEF US extrafine thread 427 Undercut parameters DIN 509 E 423 Undercut parameters DIN 509 F 423 Undercut parameters DIN 76 422 Tap drill O71 Tapping DIN PLUS Cycle G36 146 Thread contourbased G73 145 TURN PLUS Centric bore hole 238 Front face rear side 246 IWG machining 295 Lateral surface 262 Technology database Auxiliary teed rate 396 Coolant 396 Cutting material 395 Cutting speed 396 Infeed 396 Machining operation 395 Main feed rate 396 Material 395 Template control 70 Thread cutter 3 2 Thread overrun 140 Thread parameters 424 Thread pitch 425 Thread tool standard 371 Thread und
76. 3 71 Reference Machining 54 3 72 Production Using Load Monitoring g9 3 73 Editing Limit Values 56 3 74 Analyzing Reference Machining 5 3 75 Machining Using Load Monitoring 5 3 76 Load Monitoring Parameters 58 4 1 4 2 4 3 DIN Programming 60 4 1 1 Introduction 60 4 1 2 DIN PLUS Screen 61 4 1 3 Linear and Rotary Axes 62 4 1 4 Units of Measurement 63 4 1 5 Elements of the DIN Program 63 Programming Notes 65 4 2 1 Parallel Editing 65 4 2 2 Address Parameters 65 4 2 3 Contour Programming 66 4 2 4 Tool Programming 68 4 2 5 Fixed cycles 69 4 2 6 NC Subprograms 70 4 2 7 Template Control 70 4 2 8 NC Program Interpretation 70 The DIN PLUS Editor 71 4 3 1 Main Menu 72 4 3 2 Geometry Menu 15 4 3 3 Machining Menu 76 4 3 4 Block Menu 77 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Contents Contents 4 4 Program Section Codes 79 4 4 1 PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAM HEAD 79 4 4 2 TURRET 80 AAS GHUCKING EQUIPMENT 82 4 4 4 Contour Definition 82 4 4 5 BEARBEITUNG MACHINING 83 4 4 6 UNTERPROGRAMM SUBPROGRAI 83 4 5 Geometry Commands 84 4 5 1 Definition of Blank 84 4 5 2 Basic Contour Elements 84 4 5 3 Contour Form Elements 86 4 5 4 Helo Commands for Contour Definition 92 4 5 5 Contour Position 95 4 5 6 Front and Rear Face Contours 96 4 5 7 Lateral S
77. 4290 139 Cycles D el 3 Thread Cycles 4 8 Thread Cycles The slide requires a run in distance to accelerate to the programmed feed rate before starting the actual thread and a run out distance overrun at the end of the thread to decelerate again If the run in run out length is too short the thread may not attain the expected quality In this case the CNC PILOT displays a warning Starting length BA gt 0 75 F S 2 a 0 15 Thread cycle G31 G31 machine simple threads successions of threads and multi start threads with G24 G34 or G37 Geo External or internal threads are detected by the tool definition The individual cuts are calculated from the thread depth maximum approach and type of approach V Parameters NS Block number reference to basic element G1 Geo for successions of threads block number of the first basic block Maximum approach maximum infeed distance B P Starting length overrun length no input Length is calculated from adjacent undercuts or recesses Undercut recess does not exist thread starting length thread runout length from machining parameter 7 D Cutting direction reference Defined direction for basic element default O D 0 Same direction D 1 Opposite direction V Type of feed default O V 0 Constant cutting cross section for all cuts V 1 Constant infeed V 2 With distribution of remaining cut firs
78. 4290 15 2 2 Thelnfo System The info system calls excerpts from the User s Ma nual to the screen The system is structured in info topics comparable to the chapters of a book In the top line of the information window the topic you selected and the page number are shown The info system gives you information on the current operating situation context sensitive help Also you can select the info topics through the table of contents or the subject index Simply select the desired topic or word and click Topic select or Enter Cross references in the text are highlighted Place the cursor on the desired cross reference and call the topic with Topic select Topic return switches back to the previous topic Error display When an error message occurs press the info key or place the cursor on the error message in the display of errors and then press the info key to get further information on the respective error 7 Call the info system End the info system 16 Info window Finish contour GGO page Calls the E Selected cross reference E Topic from the table of contents E Topic from the subject index Returns to the most recent info topic Calls the table of contents with the overview of info topics The table of contents is arranged in several levels Calls the subject index Switches to the previous topic Switches to the next topic or page up key previous info p
79. 45 5 Return at rapid and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 3 to 5 until target point Z has been reached 7 If required repeat 2 to 6 until all areas have been machined 8 H 1 Smoothen contour 9 Retract according to Q Cutting limitation The tool position before the cycle call determines the effect of a cutting limit The CNC PILOT machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depending on which side the tool has been positioned before the cycle is called Cutter radius compensation Active G57 oversize Enlarges the contour also inside contours G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour lt 0 is not considered G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after cycle end 4 DIN PLUS V 3 No machining V 4 Chamfer rounding is being machined not the basic element prerequisite Contour HOT H4 H5 6 79 Cycles section with an element 0 e D Omit element influences the machining of 1 D undercuts relief turns see table default O 2 n e a F A gt B Slide lead for 4 axis machining 3 r B 0 Both slides work on the same E diameter with double feed rate A B lt gt 0 Distance to leading slide the lead The slides work on different diameters with e Skip elements the same feed rate B lt 0 The slide with larger number leads B gt 0 The slide with smaller number leads 4 axis operation When wo
80. 60 2 1 von 2 32 bar 88 mn PLUS Editor T 4 tom pemg Xin v7 Z m C v nni ir E p AQ in Z 100 001 aia ae lt Prog NC program management Head Edit the NC program head program head turret assignment chucking equipment table Geo Program the contour of the blank and finished part submenu Geometry Pro gramming Program the machining of the workpiece Machining submenu PAb Insert program section codes Block Switch to the block submenu containing functions for moving copying or deleting NC blocks NC BI Functions for block numbering searching and free editing Configuration of the DIN PLUS screen display with without graphical display Graphics Select graphic simulation window switch the contour simulation ON OFF 73 Block numbering The number interval is specified for the first NC block for each following block the interval is added Block references in contourrelated G commands and subprogram calls are corrected automatically The sequence of the NC blocks is retained New free input Position the cursor Select New free input Enter NC block The new NC block is inserted below the cursor position Ses Q bas ge LL V l A Modify free input Position the cursor on the NC block to be edited Select New modified input Edit the NC block 4 3Th Config uration menu group Aux pict Select whether
81. 66 Q Enter only IN right window displays the file J Fixed word data FWL BSPUZBOR WKZ 25978 r u peste oc A I Tac 1 i dete TEC BSPWZORE WEZ 27TTe3 09 62 content you close the file by pressing Enter again Machine data MAS EEFI E Mei E k J Control data ST0 2 CHP_OEU MAS 6693 r w 82 85 2082 O or SC ey J Processing data BEA J CHP_DEU SP5 2964 r W 30 84 2602 J Set Hp 570 EY ei r ens the selected parameter IPLE Aata SPJ IMFOCDEU SER S62 t u O5 08 2002 Selective Op th l d p l INFO_DEU MAS 430137 r7 03 66 2082 p collection operating resource file and presents ih INFO_DEU PRO S888 r u 05 86 2082 O J IMFO OEU SPS 26561 Fi 85 66 74567 the individual parameter operating o 3p INFO DEU STO 112267 rje 05 06 2602 zj resource file for marking and Quantity 3 irked 8 Marked 3 oN subsequent transfer 900 002 ee ee O avs Converts and transfers the marked 100 001 B m m parameters parameter operating resource file or 100 001 l i r the marked parameters operating z ina i r 2 TTT TT o Tp resources selection in the PARA_USR PTT Mda directory W220 S g 0 FHER Marks all displayed files or parameter all operating resources selection pressing again unmarks them Mark Mouse operation You can use a mouse to position the cursor and mark and open a file with DIN PLUS programs parameter files and operating resource f
82. AR SAR Starting point of residual material External safety clearance machining parameter 2 Cutting limit 291 Z c Q J jam g c amp 6 12 Interactive Worki lan Generation IWG i i E 6 12 Interactive Work H Type of departure type of contour smoothing H 0 Smoothing after each cut along the contour H 1 Lift off at under 45 contour smoothing after the last cut H 2 Lift off at under 45 no contour smoothing Q Retraction at cycle end OQ 0 Return to starting point Longitudinal first X then Z direction Transverse First Z then X direction Q 1 Positions in front of the finished contour Q 2 Lifts off to safety clearance and stops Undercutting see soft key table Residual roughing hollowing contour parallel Parameters P Cutting depth maximum infeed A Approach angle reference Z axis Longitudinal Default 0 180 parallel to Z axis Plan default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis W Departure angle reference Z axis Longitudinal Default 90 2 70 perpendicular to Z axis Transverse Default 0 180 parallel to Z axis X Z Cutting limit Type of oversize is selected by soft key per Softkey l K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contours Yes No E Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Type of
83. Angular synchronism with preset angular offset lt 0 Spindle soeed synchronism Transfer position in Z LD O Transfer position in machine dimension 1 1 6 Transfer position in machine dimension 1 6 0 6 Transfer position Calculation of the proposed value see sketch Working position in Z LE Proposed value Zero point offset e g from machine parameter 1164 for Z axis 1 see Sketch Finished part length LF From the workpiece description Distance from stop surface LH Distance between reference point of chuck and stop surface of the clamping jaw calculated from the second setup Minimum traverse I Without moving to fixed stop Safety clearance on the workpiece to be transferred proposed value From safety clearance on blank machining parameter 2 With traverse to a fixed stop See machine manual Maximum traverse J No input Without traverse to fixed stop With input With traverse to fixed stop meaning of the parameters and J See machine manual 1 if 2 workpieces U No meaning Continued gt 282 if l gt TURN PLUS E transfer bepog ZX main view 11 program 4 orkpices 1 Prepare ddj IWG aS awe dH Configuration Subprogram UMKOMPL Drehzahl Orehrich CECW 8 Hink Synchronj j L Abholpos in Z LO 321 Arbeitspos in Z LE EE Feriigteillsenge UF i GH Hbst Anecni Lao LH EE min Vorechubweg ax Worechubueg 1 wenn 2 Werkst U Cancel
84. Assign the handwheel to the X Z axis and scratch the workpiece Press Accept value to save the compensation values defined per handwheel o The program run continues HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 47 3 5 Automatic Mode of Operation 3 5 7 Block Display Block display basic block display The block display lists the NC blocks according to the programmed sequence The basic block display shows the individual paths of traverse the cycles are resolved The numbering of the basic blocks is independent of the programmed block numbers In the block display and basic block display the cursor is located on the block being executed Channel display For lathes with several slides channels you can activate block display for up to 3 channels X 200 002 mm 71 999 Basic block on off ia Switching the channel display To add a channel press the soft key again in the block display only channel 1 is shown Variable output Pressing the soft key enables the variable soft key output with PRINTA Otherwise the variable output is suppressed Menu item display E Font size Enlarges reduces the characters in the block display E Load monitoring see 3 72 Production under Load Monitoring X 200 002 7 100 001 400 007 _ 100 001 i 48 go _ channel 1 K bepal o eaneneene 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 5 8 Graphic Display The Automatic
85. Dwell time G4 168 Index Index Eccentric polygon See Polygon Editing 19 Editing switch 399 Element dimensions simulation 204 Elements of the DIN program 63 Enabling Enabled directories 413 Enabling name of the communications partner 411 Enabling password network 405 Enabling overview machine display 53 End Pocket island G309 Geo 96 section code 83 End mill 372 Engraving DIN PLUS Cycle 6840 152 TURN PLUS IWG machining 305 Machining attribute 268 Equidistants 10 Error log file 405 Error message simulation 200 Error message 17 Esc key 15 Ethernet interface Connector assignment 433 Transfer method with 409 Evaluate events 178 Examples Contour repetitions 184 DIN PLUS Programming 184 Full surface machining with opposing spindle 187 Full surface machining with single spindle 192 Programming Machining Cycles 184 TURN PLUS esas 320 VI Expert programs 70 Exposed contours 66 Extended input for address parameters 66 Extension 19 External subprograms 70 F display 93 Face driver 392 Face roughing G820 124 Face turning simple G82 Tog Feed per minute Linear axes G94 114 Manual control 25 Rotary axes G192 113 Feed per revolution 25 Feed rate Constant G94
86. Ej Slide change key a Spindle change key TA Spindle speed at the programmed value I wm EA increase decrease spindle speed by 5 100 Override dial for feed rate WW F 0 Touch pad with right and left mouse key SH contour firorm jpattern tH Figure jmanipuiate FH attribute WGFeuUT fore as l l Ti 4 i T T1 T m i A CNC PILOT 4290 Software and Functions This manual describes functions that are available in the CNC PILOT 4290 with NC software number 368 650 xx Release 7 0 For programming the Y axis please refer to the User s Manual CNC PILOT 4290 withY Axis It is not described in this manual The machine manufacturer adapts the features offered by the control to the capabilities of the specific lathe by setting machine parameters Therefore some of the functions described in this manual may not be among the features provided by the CNC PILOT on your machine tool Some of the CNC PILOT functions which are not available on every machine are Machining with the C axis Machining with the Y axis Full surface machining Tool monitoring Graphically supported interactive contour definition Automatic or graphically supported interactive DIN PLUS program generation Please contact your machine manufacturer for detailed information on the features that are supported by your machine tool Many machine manufacturers an
87. Enter the G number and the function parameter press OK gt The G function is executed The following G functions are permitted m G30 Rearface machining E G710 Adding tool dimensions m G720 Spindle synchronization m G602 G699 PLC functions E Manual NC programs Depending on the configuration of a lathe the machine manufacturer can includes NC programs supporting the machinist in manually operating the lathe Example Switching to rearface machining Refer to the machine manual 3 2 4 Handwheel Assign the handwheel to one of the principle axes or the C axis and enter the feed rate or angle of rotation per handwheel increment Handwheel axes dialog box The handwheel assignment and speed ratio are shown in the machine display the axis letter and the decimal place of the handwheel traverse ratio are marked The cancel the handwheel assignment press the Handwheel soft key with opened dialog box 20 002 The handwheel assignment is canceled by va 99d E Switching to another slide Y 100 001 E Changing the operating mode E Pressing an axis direction key E Selecting the handwheel assignment again 26 Hendwheel axes 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 2 5 Spindle andAxis Direction Keys The keys of the machine operating panel are used for machining a workpiece manually and for special functions such as positioning or determining compensation values actual position capt
88. Full surface machining on lathe with m gt simutation fE2 Poraneter lt traveling opposing spindle Machining ZBSPIELI The workpiece is machined on the front face Sneon fiicont Hostos dHset up contour 1H Debug transferred to the opposing spindle through an expert program and machined on the rear face Upper figure Machining the front face Lower figure Machining the rear face The expert program is used for Angularsynchronous workpiece transfer to counterspindle Mirroring the traverse paths for the Z axis Activating the conversion list Mirroring the contour definition and shifting it for the 2nd setup 1 1 NTI G 4a OO NS15 NEIS 10 5 R PI The mirroring conversion function for rear face SEN nia 2s zevi 9soat _ 45 000 E 1 512 00 10 machining expert program is switched off at EN 2 gal gal Progran active Wi 95 5ep 62 program end with the G30 command air G Single f sic block DIN PLUS TURN PLUS block gt Simulation 3 Parameter Machining ZBSPIELT Warning 2 1 New Fi cont istop atiset up Wl Contour JH Debug FERRAN ATF 1 1 NIZI G640 OO NS22 NE25 10 5 RO PI i N 121 x 31 623 z 1 00 c TT 565 v T 3 514 600 10 E palgal 4 14 Zoon ON Program active ee RRR gt 2 H HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 189 4 18 Notes and Examples 4bspiell nc PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAM HEAD OCHIAI EN 1 2 SLIDE REVOL
89. G15 is used to move the rotary axis to a specified angle The principal and secondary axes can be moved on a linear path Parameters A B Angle end point of rotary axis X Y Z End point of principal axis X diameter value U V W End point of secondary axis 168 4 DIN PLUS Converting and mirroring G30 G30 converts G functions M functions and slide and spindle numbers with the aid of the conversion lists machine parameters 135 and following G30 mirrors traverse paths and tool dimensions and shifts the machine zero point about the zero point offset of the axis see machine parameters 1114 1164 Application For full surface machining you describe the complete contour machine the front face rechuck the workpiece through an expert program and then machine the rear face To enable you to program rearface machining in the same way as front face machining Z axis orientation arc rotational direction etc Includes the expert program commands for converting and mirroring Parameters H Table number H 0 Switch off the conversion and compensate the offset H 1 4 conversion table in addition the machine zero offset is activated machine parameters 1114 1164 and following Q Selection O 0 Deactivate traverse path and tool mirroring Q 1 Activate traverse path mirroring for specified axes OQ 2 Activate tool dimension mirroring for specified axes X Y Z U V W A B C axis selection X 0 Mirrorin
90. HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 129 Cycles urning Recess turning cycle G869 G869 machines indents the contour area defined by NS NE axlally radially The workpiece is machined by alternate recessing and roughing movements The machining process requires a minimum of retraction and infeed movements The contour to be machined may contain various valleys It required the area to be machined Is divided into several sections The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between radial and axial recesses With NS NE you specify the machining direction If the contour to be machined consists of one element then If you program only NS Machining in contour definition direction If you program NS and NE Machining against the contour definition direction Depending on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation You can correct the resulting infeed error with turning depth compensation factor R The value is usually determined empirically After the second infeed movement during the transition from turning to recessing the path to be machined is reduced by Offset width B Each time the system switches on this side the path is reduced by B in addition to the previous offset The total offset is limited to 80 of the effective cutting width effective cutting width cutting width 2 cutting radius If required the CNC PILOT re
91. ISO fine pitch thread DIN 13 Part 2 Series 1 and a subsequent thread undercut DIN 76 Calling the contour macro NEG X Z B Starting point for thread ROZARIA A Contours for thread and undercut NEG lx Next surface element Parameters F Thread pitch Depth of undercut radius K Width of undercut Z End point of the undercut Use G24 only if the thread is cut in the definition direction of the contour The thread is machined with G31 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Recess or free rotation 87 Commands Commands O g u Undercut contour G25 Geo Generates the following undercut contours in paraxial inside contour corners Program G25 after the first axis parallel element Parameters H Type of undercut default 0 H 4 Undercut type U H 0 5 Undercut type DIN 509 E H 6 Undercut type DIN 509 F 7 Thread undercut DIN 76 8 Undercut type H 9 Undercut type K H H H Undercut form U H 4 Parameters ie Depth of undercut radius K Width of undercut R Inside radius in both corners of recess default O P Outside radius chamfer default O P gt 0 Radius of rounding P lt Q0 Width of chamfer Undercut DIN 509 E H 0 5 Parameters Depth of undercut radius K Width of undercut R Undercut radius in both corners of the undercut W Undercut angle If you do not enter parameters the CNC PILOT calculates them from the diameter see 11 1 2 Unde
92. M97 N129 M30 ENDE END HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Zero point shift 1st setup Display chucking equipment of 1st setup Milling Contour Outside Front face Prepare the rechucking Delete chucking equipment of 1st set up synchronize slides for rechucking procedure Expert program for parting and rechucking LA speed limitation LD transfer position Z LE machining position Z slide 2 LF length of finished part LH distance between chuck reference point and edge of workpiece l minimum feed motion to fixed stop Activate chucking equipment for spindle 4 Rear face machining Deactivate rearface machining 191 4 18 Notes and Examples 4 18 Notes and Examples Example Full surface machining on a single w spindle lathe In the example the machining of the front and rear face using one NC program is described Hachining The workpiece is first machined on the front face then it is rechucked manually The rear face is machined subsequently The expert program mirrors and shifts the contour for the 2nd setup 1 M135 G84 00 M522 NE2Z5 10 5 RG PI 1 N 135 31 241 Z e see c 328 134 TT 1 512 680 10 Stet 2 3 11 4 14 peas eal a Single Basic block i DIN PLUS os PLUS EA CA block PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAM HEAD ie lille LITEM 1 SLIDE REVOLVER 1 TURRET T1 1D 512 600 10 T2 1D 111 80 080 1 T4 1D 121 55 040 1 SPANNMITTEL 1 CHUCKING EQUIPMENT H1 ID 3BA
93. Nominal position value 7 Distance between tool tip and slide position 8 IPO target position HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 341 _ 7 2 Machine Parameters 7 2 Machine Parameters 18 Control configuration PLC takes over workpiece counting 0 CNC takes over workpiece counting 1 PLC takes over workpiece counting MO0 M1 for all NC channels 0 MO M1 initiates a STOP on programmed channels 1 MO M1 initiates a STOP on all channels Stop interpreter during tool change 0 Not active 1 Active look ahead block interpretation is interrupted and only resumed after execution of the command 204 254 Feed rates Rapid traverse speed and feed rate when slide is moved with the axis direction keys jog keys Rapid traverse contouring speed for manual control Feed rate contouring speed for manual control 205 255 Protective zone monitoring The protection zone dimensions are defined for individual axes machine parameter 1116 Define in this parameter whether the protection zone dimensions are to be monitored Monitoring 0 Protection zone monitoring off 1 Protection zone monitoring on The other parameters are not used at present 208 258 Thread cutting If the coupling uncoupling path is not programmed in an NC program parameter values are used Coupling path Acceleration path at the beginning of a threading cut in order to synchronize the feed axis with the spindle Decoupling path Deceleration
94. One curve Bar graphics Up to four curves Display grid See 83 77 Reference Machining Mode menu group Line graphic Display the torque values over the time axis and limit values limit values are gray nonmonitored area rapid traverse paths are hidden Bar graphic Displays current torque values previous work and all limit values of the monitoring zone HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 eo l 3 i gt DIN PLUS Elservice Taking nom value T sefeasscausc evseuas Eu Sidhi G95 PO 25 no oy nies 60 HO 25 O13 7h PRS 10 8 J30 EO ann u tartan zy 5 plan nanara S230 095 FO 4 MI GUZU HS10 BLO V3 9 11 E FSA MS Fas Taenga fossen Tze X 38 239 T eee CE eee oo Z 0 300 p i Z 100 001 7 o m o yi 0 000 gt eE Disses D Ymmi e ca 1 p aer D H a CEP Block display has no influence on reference machining a gt DIN PLUS Biservice Load monitoring m MI WO Z 15F H120 2 118 NROSESN 2 Sesey 5 Shree S 3 3 E Saas FEP Rsa S35 f HERE 1 5 Schruppen plan agssen N34 G96 S230 035 Poa na a3 nies 16 G0 Wigs 5 I Ga Fe EL pained W510 BEN PIS Ti E 71 740 X 0 000 T 12n CO Rt SE X ia e Z 59 998 D Z 100 00 Z n m o yi 0 000 8 E pismm D Ymmi e ca 1 fern D HG rr 1 niai o gees Pause Stops the display Continue Resumes the display Auto Returns to the automatic menu 55 O z man e
95. PILOT calculates as follows Limit value reference value factor for limit value Minimum torque of rated torque Reference values that remain below this value are raised to this minimum torque value This prevents that limit values are exceeded as a result of minor torque differences Maximum file size KB If the data during measured value registration exceed the maximum file size the oldest values are overwritten Approximate value For one component per minute of program run time approximately 12 KB Evaluation Post process measuring Activate measuring function 0 Postprocess measuring function off 1 Postprocess measuring function on the CNC PILOT is ready to receive data Continued gt 7 Parameters 11 FTP parameters 20 Time determination for simulation general Non cutting time for the time counting function 21 Time determination for simulation M function Individual time allowances for a maximum of 10 M functions HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Measuring mode 1 Post orocess measuring Measured value coupling O New measured values overwrite old measured values 1 New measured values are not accepted until old measured values are evaluated In control parameters 40 the serial interface is selected and the interface parameters are defined Evaluation Data transfer using FTP file transfer protocol User name Name of one s own station Password Address name of FTP server
96. Programming Z CY Absolute incremental modal or C Absolute incremental or modal Program either Z C or Z CY 102 4 DIN PLUS Circular arc in lateral surface contour G112 G113 Geo Direction of rotation see help graphic Parameters Z End point C End point end angle CY End angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter R Radius K Center point in Z direction W Angle of the center point J Angle of the center point as a linear value Q Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the circular arc intersects a circular arc Q 0 Far intersection Q 1 Near intersection B Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer p Programming Z CY Absolute incremental modal or C Absolute incremental or modal K J Absolute or incremental Program either Z C or Z CY and either K W or K J Program either center or radius With radius circular arcs possible only lt 180 Hole on lateral surface G310 Geo Hole with countersinking and thread Parameters Center Z position Center angle Angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter Hole diameter Depth of hole excluding point
97. Q 2 Metric ISO thread DIN 13 Outside a 0 61343 F F 30 30 Inside a 0 54127 F F 30 30 Q 3 Metric ISO tapered thread DIN 158 Outside 0 61343 F F 30 30 Q 4 Metric ISO tapered thread DIN 158 0 61343 F F 30 30 Q 5 Metric ISO trapezoid thread Outside 0 5 F ac 0 633 F 15 15 Inside 0 5 F ac 0 630 15 15 O 6 Flat metr trapezoid thread DIN 308 Outside 0 3 F ac 0 527 F 15 I5 Inside 0 3 F ac 0 527 F 157 15 Q 7 Metric buttress thread DIN 513 Outside 0 86777 F 0 73616 F oF 30 Inside 0 75 F F Kb 30 3 Q 8 Cylindrical round thread DIN 405 Outside i OEE F b 15 Inside i 0 5 F F 15 15 Q 8 Cylindrical Whitworth thread DIN 11 Outside 0 64033 F F 270 Zio Inside 0 64033 F F 275 2o O 10 Tapered Whitworth thread DIN 2999 Outside 0 640327 F F 21o 215 Q 11 Whitworth pipe thread DIN 259 Outside 0 640327 F F 2D 27 5 Inside 7 0 640327 F F 2o 279 Q 12 Nonstandard thread Q 13 UNC US coarse thread Outside 0 61343 F F our 30 Inside i 054127 F F 30 30 QO 14 UNF US fine pitch thread Outside 0 61343 F F 30 30 Inside j 0 54127 F F 30 30 Continued gt 428 11 Tables and overviews Q 15 UNEF US extra fine pitch thread Outside 0 61343 F F 30 30 Inside 0354127 F F 30 oo Q 16 NPT US taper pipe thread Outside i 0 6 F F 30 30 Inside 0 6 F F 30 30 Q 17 NPTF US taper dryseal pipe thread Outside 0 8 F F 30
98. Recess width no input a single cut is machined recess width tool width K Allowance K gt 0 Allowance roughing and finishing K 0 No finishing E Period of dwell for chip breaking default Length of time for one revolution With finishing allowance Only during finishing Without finishing allowance For each recess 138 Cutter radius compensation Active Allowances are not calculated 4 DIN PLUS Cycle radius G87 G87 machines transition radii at orthogonal paraxial inside and outside corners The direction is taken from the position machining direction of the tool A preceding longitudinal or transverse element is machined If the tool is located at the X or Z coordinate of the corner before the cycle is executed Parameters X Z Corner point X diameter B Radius E Reduced feed default Active feed Cutter radius compensation Active Allowances are not calculated Cycle chamfer G88 G88 machines chamfers at orthogonal paraxial outside corners The direction is taken from the position machining direction of the tool A preceding longitudinal or transverse element is machined if the tool is located at the X or Z coordinate of the corner before the cycle is executed Parameters X Z Corner point X diameter B Chamfer breadth E Reduced feed default Active feed Cutter radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT
99. Setting Serial are selectable only if an interface is assigned in External 416 10 Transfer 10 3 Data Transfer 10 3 1 Enabling DataTypes Enabling CNC PILOT See Enabled directories You can protect these directories from access for reading and or writing by assigning passwords menu item Controls Network Enabling password in the Service Diagnosis operating mode see 9 3 Diagnosis If you enter no password all communication partners have access to the directories Enabling communication partners The communication partner can assign passwords for reading or writing access Windows System control Networks Access control to shared levels In this case the Windows dialog box Enter network password appears when you try to access directories of the remote system If only one password is used it can be saved As a result the dialog box appears only once and each time the password has been changed Ihe password saved is checked each time you try to access further directories If the password for read permission differs from the one for write permission the Enter network password dialog box appears each time you try to access a directory after having restarted the CNC PILOT File types Select the desired file type in the dialog box Mask of files All NC programs DIN PLUS programs NC main programs DIN PLUS programs NC subprograms DIN PLUS progr
100. TURN PLUS 228 Basic block display Automatic mode 48 Simulation 200 Basic block mode Automatic mode 42 Simulation 196 Basic contour TURN PLUS 229 BLANK section code 83 Blank attributes TURN PLUS 263 Block Display Font size 48 Setting 48 Block number Fundamentals 63 Numbering 74 Block number increment 73 Index Index Block references Contour display 72 Fixed cycles 122 Block editing Exchanging blocks 17 Inserting copying deleting 78 Boring G72 144 Button tool 371 Buttons 15 Bytes 19 C axis Angle data 7 C angle offset G90b 161 Configuration 62 Contours machined with 67 Fundamentals 3 Reference diameter G120 148 selecting G119 148 Standardizing G15e 148 Zero point shift G152 148 Calculator TURN PLUS user aid 269 Cast part DIN PLUS cast part G21 Geo 84 TURN PLUS workpiece blank 228 Centering DIN PLUS cycle G72 144 TURN PLUS Form element 238 Front rear face 244 IWG machining 295 Lateral surface 251 Centering taper 394 Centering tool 371 Centric predrilling IWG 295 Chains of tool dimensions G710 121 Chamfer DIN PLUS Cycle G88 139 TURN PLUS form element 232 Change TURN PLUS contour 258 Chuck part cylinder tube G20 Geo
101. The type of drill determines when a feed rate reduction begins K notprogrammed Reiract tositarina gos iion Indexable inserts and twist drills with 180 drilling angle K programmed Retract to position KZ Reduction at end of hole 2 safety clearance Other drills Drill end length of first cut safety clearance y Single hole without contour description Program X or Z as alternative Hole with contour description Do not length of first cut drill tio safety clearance see machining Ce parameter 9 Drilling or G47 G147 Parameters program X Z NS Contour block number with geometry of bore hole G49 G300 Hole pattern NS refers to the bore hole G310 Geo no input Individual bore hole without contour contour and not the definition of the definition pattern X Z Position length end point of axis radial holes X diameter value A teed rate reduction at end goes into ay effect only at the last drilling stage P 1st drilling depth Reduction value default 0 B Retraction distance default to starting point of hole J Minimum hole depth default 1 10 of P E Period of dwell for chip breaking at end of hole default O V Feed rate reduction 50 default O V 0 or 2 Reduction at start V 1 or 3 Reduction at start and at end V 4 Reduction at end V 5 No reduction Exception withV 0 andV 1 No reduction when boring when indexable insert drills and twist dri
102. Workpiece zero point opposing spindle reference machine zero point opposing spindle PgUp PgDn switches to the next previous slides The Workpiece zero point counterspindle is derived from Machine zero point Zero offset machine parameters 1114 1164 It is activated with G30 H1 a Datum position main spindle X Y Z Slide 1 Datum position main spindle X Y Z Slide 2 Datum position counterspindle X Y Z Slide 1 Datum position counterspindle X Y Z Slide 2 L Set the workpiece zero point in the Manual Control mode Tool change position The CNC PILOT manages the tool change point for each slide PgUp PgDn switches to the next previous slides The tool change position defines the distance to the machine zero point Tool change position X Y Z Slide 1 Tool change position X Y Z Slide 2 I Set the workpiece zero point in the Manual Control mode HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 355 _ 7 4 Set Up Parameters 7 4 Set Up Parameters Datum Oversize G53 G54 G55 The CNC PILOT manages allowances for zero point offsets for each slide PgUp PgDn switches to the next previous slides Oversize X Y Z Slide 1 Oversize X Y Z Slide 2 Datum shift C axis Datum shift C axis 1 Datum shift C axis 2 E Influences the C axis actual value The zero point shift G152 is added to this parameter Tool life monitoring Tool life switch tool life quantity monitori
103. X 35 Press OK On eee eee Enter Z 43 Press OK Onn eee eee Enter X 58 W 70 Press OK _y amp amp e J J Enter Z 6 press OK _ y amp amp ev 2 Esc key Close contour confirm with yes the basic contour is defined U E Select Form Chamfer Select corner threaded stud Chamfer dialog box Chamfer width 3 mm Select Form Rounding Select corner for rounding Rounding dialog box Rounding radius 2mm ee HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 a4 Contour FH Form A Pattern al Figure J Manipulate Fh Attribute dl contour Form Pattern RER Figure H Hanipulate td Attribute transfer _ A 3 eh ij E transfer 333 6 17 Example 6 17 Example Select Form Undercut Undercut type G Select Corner for undercut Dialog box Undercut form G Undercut length 5 mm Undercut depth 1 3 mm Approach angle 30 Sp Select Form Recess Recess type D Select Basic element for recess Recess form D dialog box Reference point Z 30 mm Undercut width Ki 8 mm Undercut diameter 25 mm Corners B Chamfers 1 mm _ S errr Select Form Thread Select basic element for thread Thread dialog box Select metric ISO thread _yY
104. X Z Contour target point X diameter default Transfer the last X Z coordinate Il Maximum infeed in X direction radius default O K Maximum infeed in Z direction default O 136 4 DIN PLUS Undercut cycle G85 2 With the function G85 you can machine undercuts according to DIN ET 509 E DIN 509 F and DIN 76 thread undercut The CNC PILOT gt determines the type of undercut using K For undercut parameters Q see table O The adjoining cylinder is machined if the tool is positioned at the cylinder diameter X in front of the cylinder The undercut roundings are executed with the radius 0 6 Parameters X Z Target point X as diameter value Depth wear allowance radius DIN 509 E F Wear allowance default O DIN 76 Undercut depth K Undercut width and type K no input DIN 509 E K 0 DIN 509 F K gt 0 Undercut length for DIN 76 kK DIN509E X Undercut DIN 76 thread undercut E Reduced feed for machining the undercut no input Active feed rate Cutter radius compensation Not active Allowances are not considered lt 18 0 25 2 0 6 gt 18 80 039 25 0 6 gt 80 045 4 1 Undercut DIN 509 E K 0 lt 18 0 25 2 0 6 0 1 DIN 509 F gt 18 80 0 35 2 5 0 6 0 2 gt 80 0 45 4 1 0 3 Undercut angle for undercuts according to DIN 509 E and F 15 Transverse angle for an undercut according to DIN 509 F 8 depth of
105. Z direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO Safety clearance to workpiece blank SAB Internal safety clearance SIB for deep hole drilling retraction distance B for G74 SIB Predrilling Machining Drilling depth ratio BTV TURN PLUS checks the 1st and 2nd drilling step The predrilling step is performed with BTV lt BT dmax BTV lt BT dmax bt1 BTF db Drilling depth factor BTF 1st drilling depth for deep hole drilling bt2 bt1 BTR cycle G74 bt1 BIF db Drilling depth reduction BTR Reduction for deep hole drilling cycle G74 bt2 bt1 BTR Overhang length predrilling ULB Through drilling length EAn 360 7 Parameters Roughing Tool and Machining Standards RTO tek are defined Ae to machining location and main HAs heei machining direction MMD via setting angle and point angle In addition Use of standard roughing tools is preferred Tools that enable full surface machining are used as an alternative Setting angle external longitudinal RALEW pm Point angle external longitudinal RALSW eA Setting angle external transverse RAPEW RILEW Point angle external transverse RAPSW RILSW Setting angle internal longitudinal RILEW Point angle internal longitudinal RILSW Setting angle internal
106. _ _ _ G51 Datum shift relative 116 Contourbased turing cycles Page G53 Parameter dependent datum shift 116 G810 Longitudinal roughing cycle 122 G54 Parameter dependent datum shift 116 G820 Face roughing cycle 124 G55 Parameter dependent datum shift 116 G830 Contour parallel roughing cycle 126 G56 Additive datum shift 117 G835 Contour parallel with neutral tool 127 G59 Absolutezeropointshift 17 Ss 860 Universal recessing cycle 128 G121 Contour mirroring shitting 117 G866 Simple recessing cycle 129 G152 Zero point displacement C axis 148 G869 Recess turning cycle 130 G920 Deactivate datum shifts 172 G890 Finishing cycle 132 x number of spindles 0 3 G31 Thread cycle 140 G32 Single thread cycle 141 G33 Single thread cut Thread single path 142 G36 Tapping 146 G71 Simple drilling cycle 143 G72 Boring countersinking etc 144 G73 Tapping cycle 145 G74 Deep hole drilling cycle 147 C axis machining G119 Select C axis No of C axis 148 G120 Reference diameter lateral surface machining 148 G152 Zero point displacement C axis 148 G153 Standardize C axis 148 G100 Rapid traverse face 149 G101 Linear path face 149 G102 Circular arc face 149 G103 Circular arc face 149 G110 Rapid traverse lateral surface 150 G111 Linear path lateral surface 151 G112 Circular arc lateral surface 151 G113 Circular arc lateral surface 151 G120 Reference diameter lateral surface machining 148 G840 Contour milling
107. a Contour Train The contour trains overlay elements Circular arc VVedge Pontoon are predefined You can describe complex contours like a finished part contour To be able to use a contour train in different programs save the respective contour train Overlay elements superimpose existing linear or circular contour elements Supporting contour elements Loading a contour train if desired Select Program Load Contour train Select and load file _yy amp amp amp amp e r Return to main menu OO eee eee Select Workpiece Finished part Form Form element __ _se Ss Standard overlay element Select and describe the overlay contour Contour train or last overlay element Select Contour Onn eee eee Select a Supporting contour element _y amp hme Define an overlay dialog box Linear Circular overlay _yeeeee r eee TURN PLUS displays the overlay You can accept OK or reject it cancel 222 a turn puus Etronater bepoa ZX main view Finished part HJ Contour Form H Pattern aJ Figure a Manipulate Fh Attribute Linear overlay Start point x Nusber End point Enter position orientation amp number If there is more than one solution select the best one TURN PLUS integrates the overlay contours into the exis
108. and data backup you can use the Ethernet interface Data exchange is also possible over the serial interface RS232 Automatic mode gt The NC programs are run in Automatic mode You control and monitor the machining of the workpiece DIN PLUS programming mode gt In DIN PLUS you can create structured NC programs You first define the geometry of the blank and finished part and then program the individual operations The Simulation mode shows a graphic representation of programmed contours the paths of traverse and cutting operations Ihe working space tools and chucking equipment are shown true to scale gt Simulation programming mode During simulation the CNC PILOT calculates the machining and idle machine times for every tool For lathes with several slides the Synchronous point analysis enables you to optimize your NC program In TURN PLUS you describe the contour of the workpiece using Interactive graphics For Automatic Working plan Genera tion AWG you select the material and chucking equipment The CNC PILOT will generate the NC program automatically at a keystroke As an alternative you can create the working plan with the aid of interactive graphics IAG gt TURN PLUS programming mode Parameter organization mode The system behavior of the CNC PILOT is controlled with parameters In this mode you set the parameters to adapt the control to your situation In addition in this
109. appropriate machining method Selection of the tools and definition of the cutting data Direct graphic control of machining process Immediate compensation possibility Automatic DIN PLUS program generation Automatic selection of tools Automatic generation of working plan TURN PLUS extension by C axis or Y axis C axis representation of programmed contour in the following views XC plane front rear end and ZC plane unrolled surface Y axis representation of programmed contour in the following views XY plane front rear end YZ plane side view Hole and figure patterns Fixed cycles Interactive or automatic working plan generation also for machining with the C axis or Y axis TURN PLUS extension by opposing spindle Rechucking with expert program Interactive or automatic generation of working plan also for rechucking and 2nd setup In process measuring With triggering probe For measuring tools For measuring workpieces Post process measuring Connection of measuring system via RS 232 interface Evaluation of measuring results in Automatic mode Expansion Stages Options Options can usually be retrofitted Your machine manufacturer can give you more information on retrofitting 6 1 Introduction and Fundamentals 1 4 Fundamentals Axis designations The cross slide is referred to as the X axis and the saddle as the Z axis All X axis values that are displayed or entered are regarded as diameters In TURN P
110. at feed rate The type of drill determines when a feed rate reduction begins 4 Drill through feed rate reduction according to V Indexable inserts and twist drills with 180 drilling angle 5 Retract at rapid traverse or feed rate according to Reduction at end of hole 2 safety clearance D Other drills 6 Position to which the tool retracts Drill end length of first cut safety clearance If K is not programmed Retraction to the starting l tients o point a ee yc ld pee Meng If K is programmed Retraction to position K Parameters NS Contour block number with geometry of bore hole G49 G300 Sj ee ire ingle hole without contour description ict nae no Input Individual bore hole without contour Program X or Z as alternative X Z Position length end point of axis radial holes X diameter nog eo ae ore on DOMA rana program X Z l Hole pattern NS refers to the bore hole lr a in seconds for chip breaking at end of hole contour and not the definition of the pattern V Feed rate reduction 50 default O V 0 or 2 Reduction at start V 1 or 3 Reduction at start and at end V 4 Reduction at end V 5 No reduction Exception withV 0 andV 1 No reduction when boring when indexable insert drills and twist drills with 180 drilling angle are used D Retraction speed default 0 D 0 Rapid traverse D 1 Feed rate K Retraction plane radial holes holes in the YZ plane diameter de
111. cut for reducing the cutting pressure in the thread base default 0 Run out length at thread end default O W Taper angle range 45 lt W lt 45 default 0 position of the taper thread with reference to longitudinal or transverse axis W gt 0 Rising contour in machining direction W lt 0 Falling contour C Starting angle thread start is defined with respect to rotationally nonsymmetric contour elements default 0 H Type of tool offset offset of the individual approaches to smooth the thread flanks default O H 0 No offset H 1 Offset to the left H 2 Offset to the right H 3 Offset alternating left and right A HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 141 8 Thread Cycles Thread single path G33 G33 cuts threads in any desired direction and position longitudinal tapered or transverse threads internal or external threads G33 uses a single pass to cut a thread starting at the tool position and ending at X Z Spindle and feed drives are synchronized during thread cutting Parameters X Z Diameter length to end point of thread X diameter F Feed per revolution thread pitch B P Run in length overrun length default O see 4 8Thread Cycles C Starting angle thread start is defined with respect to rotationally nonsymmetric contour elements default O Q Number of the spindle H Reference direction for spindle pitch default O H 0 Feed rate in Z axis f
112. cycle G866 129 Recessing G860 128 TURN PLUS IWG contour recessing 290 IWG recessing 290 Recessing tool 371 Rechucking JI Rectangle DIN PLUS Front rear side G305 Geo 100 Lateral surface G315 Geo 105 TURN PLUS Front rear side 246 Lateral surface 253 Reference diameter Reference diameter G120 148 section code 75 Reference marks traversing 22 Reference plan setting TURN PLUS 224 Reference plane Reference plane G308 95 Section code 79 Reference point 9 Relief turn Form element G23 Geo 86 TURN PLUS form element 236 Remote diagnosis 405 Repetition factor of subprograms 70 Replacement tool 69 Residual contour machining DIN PLUS residual finishing 132 TURN PLUS IWG contour parallel roughing 288 IWG cutting limitation 287 IWG finishing 300 IWG roughing 207 Resolution TURN PLUS 202 Index Restart 41 RETURN section code 83 Rotary axis Feed per minute rotary axes G192 tls Fundamentals 62 Moving G15 sa 168 Rotating gripper 392 Roughing DIN PLUS Contourparallel roughing 6830 126 Contourparallel with neutral tool G835 127 Face roughing G820 124 Longitudinal roughing G810 122 TURN PLUS Automatic 286 Contour parallel 286 Hollowing with neutral tool 289 Longitudinal transverse
113. definitions for drilling milling use the program section codes FRONT END REAR END etc Examples for section codes in the finished part definitions ROHTEIL BLANK NIRGZC ISO Z2200 FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART N2 GO X60 Z 80 N3 G1 2 70 STIRN Z 25 FRONT N31 G308 P 10 N32 G402 Q5 K110 AO Wi72 V2 XKOYKO N33 G300 Bb P1IOW118 AO N34 G309 STIRN ZO FRONT N35 G308 P 6 N36 G307 XKOYKO Q6A0 K34 641 NET GHO 83 4 4 Program S Commands O g u 4 5 Geometry Commands 4 5 1 Definition of Blank Chuck piece bar tube G20 Geo Contour of a cylinder hollow cylinder Parameters X Diameter of a cylinder hollow cylinder Diameter of circumference of a polygonal blank Z Length of blank K Right edge distance between workpiece zero point and right edge Inside diameter for hollow cylinders Cast part G21 Geo Generates the workpiece blank contour from the finished part contour plus the equidistant allowance P Parameters F Equidistant finishing allowance reference finished part contour Q Bore holes yes no default Q 0 Q 0 Without bore holes Q 1 With bore holes 4 5 2 Basic Contour Elements Starting point of turning contour G0 Geo Starting point of a turning contour Parameters X Z Starting point of the contour X diameter 84 4 DIN PLUS Line segment in a contour G1 Geo Parameters X Z End point of contour element X diameter A Angle
114. definitive for the tool position 100 001 C TERAN X dim xe 65 Z dim za 38 Tool anten 93 Tip an s 3 Radius rs 0 8 Cut 1g s1 12 ID number of tool aD EAN ae cca fay ia A P ol 8 Operating Resources 8 1 2 Tool Types Overview Main machining direction third digit of tool type see figure Turning tools Roughing tool type 11x Finishing tool type 12x Threading tool standard type 14x Recessing tool type 15x Parting tool type 161 Button tool type 21x Copying tool type 22x TURN PLUS uses copying tools only for undercut types H and K Recess turning tool type 26x Knurling tool type 27x Special turning tool type 28x Example Tool type 11x Drilling tools Centering tool type 31x NC center drill Type 32x Twist drill tyoe 33x Indexable insert drills type 34x Counterbore type 35x Countersink type 36x Tap type 37x Step drill type 42x Reamer type 43x Tap drill type 44x Delta drill tyoe 47x Turn out tool Type 48x not used by TURN PLUS Special drilling tool type 49x Example Tool type 31x HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 375 8 1 Tool Database Milling Tools Twist drill cutter type 51x End milling cutter type 52x Side milling cutter type 56x not used by TURN PLUS Angle cutter type 61x Thread milling cutter type 63x not used by TURN PLUS Milling pins type 64x Circular saw blade t
115. direction Confirm the Z position of the tool as the measured value Measuring tools with the touch probe for each input field gt Select the X Z input field gt Move the tool tip in X Z direction to the probe the CNC PILOT saves the X Z dimension gt Retract the tool retract the touch probe Measuring the tools with measuring optics For each input field gt Select the X Z input field gt Align the tool point in the X Z direction with the cross hairs E Accept the value HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Et e ions unct soi B 72100001 Y 100 001 C ra fa Fo i F KELI j 3 ri LSP tau m Assign a handwheel to an axis E Define the handwheel interpolation factor Switch the machine display Enter the feed per revolution Enter the M function Accept the X position as measured value X orY or Z position eee Enter the constant surface speed I The entries in the Enter measured value dialog box are given with respect to the workpiece zero point E The compensation values of the tool are deleted Ehe measured tool dimensions are entered in the database Continued gt 39 Functions Move the tool into position __ S see s Select Setting up Tool setup Tool compensation Assign the handwheel to the X axis move the tool by the compensation value Assign the handwheel to the Z axis move the to
116. direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 365 Machining Parameters Machining Parameters Recessing contour recessing Tool selection allowances If a recess base machined with a contourrecessing cycle does not contain paraxial elements but only linear elements a suitable tool is selected using the recessing width divisor SBD Recessing width divisor SBD SB lt b SBD SB width of recessing tool b width of machining area Type of allowance KSAA The recessing area to be machined can be assigned allowances When allowances have been defined a recess Is first rough machined and then finish machined Entry 16 Different longitudinal transverse allowances individual allowances are not considered 144 Different longitudinal transverse allowances individual allowances are considered 32 Equidistant allowance individual allowances are not considered 160 Equidistant allowance individual allowances are considered Equidistant or longitudinal KSLA Equidistant allowance or longitudinal allowance None or transverse KSPA Transverse allowance ep The allowances are accounted for when machining contour valleys with a contour recessing operation Standardized recesses such as recess types D S A are comple
117. direction of spindle rotation tor AWG Width dn Too width from tool tip to shank back The parameter for width dn is evaluated for graphically representing the tool Physically available Identifies an unavailable tool without deleting the database entry Version Left or right tool defines the position of the tool reference point For neutral version tools the tool reference point is located on the left side Picture number Display the tool or only the tool tip 0 Display tool 1 Display only the tool tip Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 ep A gt gt after the input box means fixed word list Select the tool parameters from the fixed word list and use It as input Calling the fixed word list Position the cursor on the input box and press the gt gt soft key 385 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 Tool Database CSP correction Cutting speed FDR correction Feed rate Deep correction Cutting depth TURN PLUS multiplies the cutting data from the technology database by the compensation values entered here Mount type is used for lathes with different tool holders The tool is used if it has the same mount type as is defined for this pocket see machine parameter 511 The mount type influences tool selection and positioning in TURN PLUS The function Set up tool table checks whether the tool can be used on the designated turret position Angle of orientation rw Def
118. drilling amp threading Sequence machining location Center Front face also for Y front face Lateral surface also for Y lateral surface following that sequence of geometrical definition Machining all bore holes on all machining locations Centering drilling Countersinking reaming tapping Execution of the selected drilling operation on all machining locations Continued gt 316 6 TURN PLUS Drilling continued Centering drilling Countersinking reaming tapping Location Machining a bore hole on the selected machining location Define the drilling cycle p_ Drilling combinations Define the drilling combinations as machining attributes see 6 9 6 Machining Attributes Select the appropriate drilling operation as submachining operation see above n Generation AWG Milling Contour analysis Determining the milling contour Sequence milling operation Linear and circular slots Open contours Closed contours pockets single surfaces and polygonal surfaces Sequence machining location Front face also machines front face in Y Lateral surface also machines lateral surface in Y then sequence of geometrical definition Execution of all milling operations on all machining locations wt Som Q oe oa lt m z fe Surface contour slot pocket Execution of the selected milling operation on all machining locatio
119. element G is machined with cycle G860 Sequence External machining precedes internal machining radial machining precedes axial machining All recess types outside and inside Machining outside 315 n Generation AWG wt Som Q Oo ad lt m BE Undercuts continued Type H K U G Inside Machining inside Define the undercut type gp TURN PLUS uses roughing and finishing operations to machine undercut type G Undercut type G is only machined with an undercut cycle if no suitable roughing finishing tool is available n Generation AWG Thread cutting Contour analysis Determining the thread types Sequence External machining precedes internal machining Then the elements are machined according to the sequence of geometrical definition Machining cylindric longitudinal tapered and transverse threads on the outside and inside of a contour Cylindric longitudinal Tapered transverse Outside Machining an external thread Cylindric longitudinal Tapered transverse Inside Machining a threaded hole Define the type of thread wt Som Q Oo oa lt m pF Drilling Contour analysis Determine the type of bore hole form elements Sequence drilling operation drilling combinations Centering centering amp countersinking Drilling Countersinking drilling amp countersinking Reaming drilling amp reaming Tapping
120. following block not the pattern definition Parameters Q Number of holes figures default 1 XK YK Starting point in Cartesian coordinates J End point in Cartesian coordinates li Ji Distance between figures in XK YK direction A Angle to longitudinal axis reference XK axis default 0 R Total length of pattern Ri Distance between figures pattern distance 100 4 DIN PLUS Circular pattern on front rear face G402 Geo G402 is effective for the bore hole figure defined in the following block G300 305 G307 Programming notes Program the hole figure in the following block without a center Exception circular slot the center of curvature J is added to the sample position see 4 5 8 Circular Pattern with Circular Slots The milling cycle MACHINING section calls the hole figure in the following block not the pattern definition Parameters Q Number of figures K Pattern diameter A Starting angle position of the first figure reference XK axis default 0 W Ending angle position of the last figure reference XK axis default 360 Wi Angle between figures V Direction orientation default O V 0 without W distribution over complete circle V 0 with W distribution over long arc V 0 with WI algebraic sign of Wi defines the direction VWWi lt 0 clockwise V 1 with W clockwise V 1 wit
121. inward copying angle EKW Limiting angle for recessing contour areas for distinguishing between turning and recessing cycles EKW gt mtw Relief turn EKW lt mtw Undefined recess no form element mtw contour angle Tool selection tool change speed limitation Tool off WD When selecting a tool TURN PLUS accounts for the 1 Current turret assignment 2 Current turret assignment in the first place and the tool database in the second place 3 Tool database TURN PLUS turret RNR Precondition VWWD 1 or WD 2 RNR determines which turret assignment is used O Current turret assignment in Machine mode 1 TURN PLUS specific turret assignment see 6 72 Setting Up a Tool List Traversing mode to tool change position WP determines the mode of approach and tool change position The sequence In which the axes are traversed is defined in the IWG or for the AWG in the respective machining parameters 1 Approaching the tool change position in rapid traverse GO lwG Definition of approach mode and tool change position Cycle Move to tool change point menu item Continued P gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 357 m Machining Parameters n Machining Parameters AWG Definition of approach mode Respective machining parameters Tool change position Defined tool change point 2 Moving to tool change position with G14 3 Moving to a calculated change position with GO TURN PLUS uses
122. is independent of the type of contour to be imported workpiece blank finished part etc Press the DXF import soft key TURN PLUS opens the DXF Import selection box p e SE Choose and load a DXF file SF S ess SS s Ss N SSSss sN Next Select the contour to be imported with the Next Contour and Previous Contour soft keys DXF import contour Previous contour Onn eeessseeee llEEEeeeoeeeoeoeoeooeee Import the DXF contour s Vv 6 8 4 Transferring and Organizing DXF Files The transfer and organization functions of the Transfer operating mode support DXF files In the Mask of Files dialog box set the TURN PLUS DSF file file type in order to edit DXF files 266 6 TURN PLUS 6 9 Assigning attributes Attributes forWorkpiece Blanks These attributes influence the division into machining areas and the selection of roughing cycles in the AWG Selection Workpiece Blank Attribute Finished part attributes After the contour of a finished part has been defined individual contour elements contour sections can be assigned attributes The AWG and IWG evaluate the attributes for generating a working plan Selection Workpiece Finished part Attribute 6 9 1 Attributes for Workpiece Blanks Define the type semifinished Surface quality dialog box Cast or forged workpiece blank Working plan generation according to the c
123. limit value Limit value reference value factor for limit value Minimum torque of rated torque Reference values below this value are raised to this minimum torque value This prevents that limit values are exceeded as a result of minor differences in torque maximum file size KB If the data exceed the maximum file size the oldest measured values are overwritten Approximate value For one component per minute of program run time approximately 12 KB Control parameter 15 bit codes for load monitoring Assigns the bits number used in G995 to the drives logical axes 58 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 4 1 DIN Programming 4 1 DIN Programming 4 1 1 Introduction The CNC PILOT supports conventional DIN programming and DIN PLUS programming Conventional DIN programming You program the basic contour with line segments circular arcs and simple turning cycles For conventional DIN programming the simple tool description is sufficient see section 4 4 2Turret DIN PLUS Programming The geometrical description of the workpiece and the machining process are separated You first program the geometry of the blank and finished part Then you machine the workpiece using contourrelated turning cycles The contour follow up function can be activated for each machining step including individual paths of traverse and simple turning cycles The CNC PILOT optimizes the machining process as well a
124. list Available Physical availability fixed word list d Diameter of collet chuck Mandril length LD Total length DF Flange diameter BF Flange width max cl dia Maximum clamping diameter min cl dia Minimum clamping diameter e 2 q A J4 c oO LLI O wt Q K m Collet chuck type 220 Mandril type 23x HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 395 Face driver Rotating gripper ID Chuck identification number ID Chuck identification number Available Physical availability fixed wordlist Available Physical availability fixed word list ds lipdiameter Nom dia Diameter of rotating gripper Is Tiplengthh Length Length of rotating gripper DK Body diameter max cl dia Maximum clamping diameter BK Body width min cl dia Minimum clamping diameter DF Flange diameter BR Flange width d1 Maximum clamping diameter d2 Minimum clamping diameter gt Chucking Equipment Database Face driver type 24x 396 8 Operating Resources Dead center Lathe center y Parameters dead center type 26x Parameters lathe center type 27x _____ Q ID Chuck identification number ID Chuck identification number He L a Available Physical availability fixed word list Available Physical availability fixed word list A D nd w1 Lathe center angle 1 w1 Lathe center angle 1 T w2 Lathe center angle 2 w2 Lathe center angle 2 O d1 Dia
125. ma oe oe l N ae ae Vorschubred ab x Lo ma N ET h pe H34 OK Cancel X1 200 002 T Oiri X ma nnani 05 Z 100 001 Se E Z 100 001 Z jm r Y 100 001 C nanan d aise p HAS p a 05 Sep Z 18 05 47 The parameter LN is reserved for the transfer of block numbers This parameter may receive a new value when the NC program is renumbered Parameter descriptions Beginning pn n s parameter text max 16 characters End on Parameter designations la Ib n Conversion number for units of measurement 0 Non dimensional T mm or men 2 mm rev or inch rev 3 mm min or inch min A m min or feet min 5 Rev min 6 Degrees 7 um or uinch Example la 1 s bar diameter lb 1 s starting point in Z Ic 1 s chamfer round VA 4 DIN PLUS M01 Optional STOP The optional stop Automatic mode determines whether the M commands for program runcontrol program run stops at M01 Cycle start resumes the program run i Machine commands N 4 17 M Functions The effect of the machine commands depends on the M functions control the program run and the machine components type of lathe The table below lists the M commands machine commands used on most machines M00 Program STOP A For more information on the M commands a The program run stops Cycle Start resumes the program run refer to your machine
126. manual S MOO Program STOP M30 End of program M30 indicates the end of a program or subprogram M30 does not M01 Optional STOP need to be programmed M30 End of program If you press Cycle START after M30 program execution is repeated M99 NS Program end with restart from the start of the program M99 Program end with restart at beginning of program or at a Mcommandsasmachinecommands given block number M99 means end program and start again CNC PILOT restarts a ee program execution from M04 Spindle ON CCW Program beginning if NS is not entered M05 Spindle STOP Block number NS if NS is entered M12 Lock spindle brake I Modal functions feed rate spindle speed tool number etc which are effective at the end of program remain in M13 Release spindle brake effect when the program is restarted You should therefore M14 C axis ON reprogram the modal functions at the start of program or at the startup block if M99 is used M15 C axis OFF M19C STOP spindle at position C M97 Synchronous function Slides for which M97 is programmed wait until all slides have reached M40 Shift gear to range 0 neutral this sentence Program run then continues M41 Shift gear to range 1 For complex machining operations e g machining of several M42 Shift gear to range 2 workpieces M97 can be programmed with parameters M43 Shift gear to range 3 Parameters H Synchronous mark number the evaluation takes place only M44 shift gea
127. mode you describe the operating resources tools and chucking equipment and the cutting values a Service organization mode In Service mode you log on for password protected functions select the conversational language and make the system settings This operating mode also provides diagnostic functions for commissioning and checking the system Transfer organization mode In Transfer you exchange the files with other systems organize your programs and make data backups HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 5 1 3 Expansion Stages Options C gt This operating manual describes all options The operating sequences The machine manufacturer configures the CNC PILOT according to described in this manual may therefore the capabilities of the specific lathe The following upgrades options deviate from those on your machine are available which enable you to adapt the control to your specific whenever a certain option is not supported requirements by your system TURN PLUS Graphically supported interactive contour definition Graphic description of the workpiece for blank and finished part Geometry programming function for calculating and displaying missing contour data Simple input of standard form elements like chamfers rounding arcs recesses undercuts threads fits etc Easy to use transformations like shifting rotating mirroring or multiplying DIN PLUS program generation with interactive graphics Selection of the
128. monitoring simulation 205 Switching off G60 169 Quantity information B3 Quantity monitoring for number of parts produced Quantity default 43 Quantity in variable 178 Quantity information 53 Radius G87 139 Rapid paths simulation 197 Rapid traverse Front tace rear side G100 149 In machine coordinates G701 111 XV Index Index Rapid traverse Lateral surface G110 150 Rapid traverse GO 110 Real variables 175 Reamer 371 Reaming Cycle G72 144 IWG machining 295 Rearface machining DIN PLUS Elements of the front rear face contour 96 Example with opposing spindle 187 Example with single spindle 192 Section code 83 section code programming 75 TURN PLUS Machining information 324 Machining sequence 307 Recess turning DIN PLUS cycle G869 130 IWG machining 291 Recess turning tool 371 Recessing DIN PLUS Contour based recessing G860 128 Recess contour general G23 Geo 86 Recess contour standard G22 Geo 86 Recessing cycle G866 129 Simple G86 138 simple G866 129 TURN PLUS Form element general recess 239 Form element recess type D sealing ring 239 Form element recess type F relief turn 236 Form element recess type S sealing ring 236 IWG machining 290 XVI Recessing DIN PLUS Recess
129. not as software limit switches Protection zone parameters are expressed with respect to the machine zero point E are managed in the machine parameters AG 150 X value are radius dimensions 99999 99999 means no monitoring of this side of the protection zone 36 Z 58 001 Y 100 001 m Assigns a handwheel to an axis E Defines the handwheel interpolation factor Switch the machine display Enter the feed per revolution Enter the constant surface speed Enter the M function Accept the X position as protection zone X parameter or X Y Y Z Z position Accept the axis positions as positive negative protection zone parameter 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 4 4 Setting up the Chucking Table The chucking table is evaluated by the concurrent graphics Select Setting up Chucking table Main spindle or Tailstock On eee eee Select the ID number from the chucking database TEA Chucking equipment for spindles The definition of the clamping form Grip form presupposes the definition of the chuck jaws Set the clamp form by soft key it is graphically illustrated To switch to the chucking assignment of further spindles press the Page Up Page Dn keys Parameters for spindle x main spindle spindle 1 E Chucking ID identification number Reference to database E Chuck jaws ID identification number Reference to databa
130. not switched off since the program was last selected New start Select Prog New start The NC program is loaded and translated Use for starting an NC program containing variables From DIN PLUS Select Prog From DIN PLUS The NC program selected in DIN PLUS is loaded and translated E If the turret table of the NC program is not the currently valid one there is a warning The name of the NC program is retained until you select another program even if the lathe was switched off in the meantime HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 l E Paraneter j gt DIN PLUS 3 Automatic operation Zbepol TEE from DIN PLUS HOATUH BHATERTAL RAUF SPANNUNG 1 von 2 BSPANNDRUCK 32 bar BAUSSPANNLAENGE 6 mm BE INSPANNDURCHM 5 mm BSCHLITTEN BS ANCHRO i X 185 693 T Du onm UY peme cocoon ie 7 377 299 p 7 100 001 Z mea Y 0 000 pee mips D Yami e oe p H i os pbb 65 Sep 0z 14 18 47 Suitching Smitch Basic block Single block Selectable tert block display chan diepl stop soarch Switch to graphic display Switching Witch the machine display display Switch Define block display for more channels chanl displ Basic block Display basic blocks individual paths of traverse Variable oUppress permit variable output output Single block Set single block mode Selectable rogram stop at M01 optional stop stop Start block R
131. number If required log on as system manager Service mode Nn ee ees _ eee Select Cur Para Parameter mode EO EE EEE Select a parameter via the menu the CNC PILOT opens a window for editing the parameter Eee ee _ ee Make the changes aaa Parameter lists The parameter groups m Setup parameters E Machining parameters m PLC parameters are available in the sub items of Param lists You can select these parameters without being logged on as system manager Select Param lists Parameter mode yy amp amp amp amp amp Select parameter groups E Setup parameters E Machining parameters m PLC parameter _yy amp amp amp amp e J Select parameters _yY amp amp amp ENTER the CNC PILOT presents the parameters for editing Nn ees eee Make the changes E HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 339 7 1 Mode of Operation rameter Mode of Operation Editing configuration parameters You edit parameters of the machine and control groups as follows Log on as system manager Service mode _ Select config Parameter mode _yy amp amp amp em Parameter number unknown Select parameter group machine control __ S _ errs Select parameter arrow up down or touch pad
132. or circularly in the given working plane while the third axis interpolates linearly This enables you to machine slots or pockets for example with plane floors and perpendicular edges By defining the spindle angle you can determine the position of the milling contour on the workpiece The CNC PILOT supports part program creation with the Y axis In DIN PLUS TURN PLUS contour definition TURN PLUS working plan generation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 1 1The CNC PILOT 1 1 The CNC Full surface machining The CNC PILOT supports full surface machining for all common machine designs The features include angle synchronous part transfer with rotating spindle traversing to a stop controlled parting and coordinate transformation This ensures efficient full surface machining and simple programming The CNC PILOT supports full surface machining in DIN PLUS TURN PLUS contour definition TURN PLUS working plan generation 1 Introduction and Fundamentals i The actual control is not accessible to the machinist 1 2 The Operating Modes You should know however that your CNC PILOT has The functions of the CNC PILOT are grouped into the following an integrated hard disk on which all TURN PLUS and operating modes DIN PLUS programs that you enter are stored This allows you to save a vast number of programs Manual operating mode In the Manual mode you set up the machine and move the axes manually For data exchange
133. or with the page up page down keys to the input box Once the cursor is located in the box you can enter your data Existing data are overwritten With the right left arrow keys you can place the cursor on a position within the input box in order to delete or add characters The up down arrow keys or Enter confirm and terminate the entry 2 1 User a Some dialogs have more input fields than a window can show In these cases more than one input X 185 693 T window appears on the screen one superimposed on Z 377 299 the other You will recognize this through the window l number in the top line To toggle between input windows use the Page Up Page Dn keys By pressing the OK button you confirm the data entered or edited Independent of the position of the cursor you can press the INS key as an alternative If you leave the input window by pressing the Cancel button or the ESC key entries or changes will be lost If the dialog consists of more than one input window you already confirm the data when pressing the PageUp PageDn key Buttons The CNC PILOT allows you to choose various options via different buttons such as the OK and Cancel buttons for terminating a dialog box or the buttons contained in the Extended inputs window Select the required button and press ENTER Note Instead of selecting the OK or Cancel button you can press the INS or ESC key HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT
134. part Allowance reference Workpiece zero point Inside diameter for hollow cylinders solid blanks O 24 Simulation Color table for feed lengths The feed travel of a tool is displayed in the color assigned to the respective turret location Evaluation Simulation mode Color for turret position n n 1 16 color code light green default color dark gray light gray dark blue light blue dark green light green dark red light red 9 yellow 10 white o N gJAaAUN gt gt O 27 Simulation Settings The machining simulation and the control graphics TURN PLUS are delayed by the path delay time after each path that has been simulated graphically The simulation speed can thus be influenced Smallest unit 10 msec Evaluation Simulation mode Path delay machining 350 7 Parameters 40 Allocation to interfaces The interface parameters are saved in the parameters 41 to 47 In parameter 40 the machine tool builder assigns an Interface description to an encoder The Transter mode of operation uses the parameters of the interface defined under external input output Meaning of data to be entered 1 7 Interfaces 1 7 for example 2 interface 2 described in control parameter 42 External input output DataPilot 90 Printer Post process measuring 2nd keyboard or card reader The parameter settings are made by the machine tool builder 41 47 Interfaces T
135. path at the end of a threading cut 209 259 Slide deactivation Slide 0 Deactivate slide 1 Do not deactivate slide 342 7 Parameters 211 261 Position of probe or optical measuring system To define the position of the probe enter its external coordinates To define the position of the optical measuring system enter the position of the cross hairs X Z Reference Machine zero point Position of probe optical measuring system X Position of probe X Position of probe optical measuring system Z Position of probe Z 511 542 561 592 Description of tool holders Positions of the tool holders relative to the tool carrier reference point Distance to carrier reference point X Z Y Distance between reference point of tool carrier and reference point of tool holder Compensation X Z Y Compensation value for the distance between reference point of tool carrier and reference point of tool holder 804 854 Protection zone monitoring for spindle not used at present 805 855 General spindle parameters Zero point shift M19 Defines the distance between the reference point of the spindle and the reference point of the encoder After receiving the reference pulse from the encoder the value determined is transferred Number of revolutions for backing off Number of spindle revolutions after the spindle has stopped in Automatic mode When using low spindle speeds additional spindle revolutions a
136. position Path display in supplementary windows The front window surface window and side view are considered supplementary windows Traverse paths are not shown until the C axis has been oriented or a G17 or G19 with Y axis has been executed G18 or aC axis out of orientation stops output of the traverse paths in the supplementary windows Continued HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 transfer a Prog F contour Hi Machining att Motion Wi set up til 3 p view EF Sa 1 N 33 Al 3830 908 z 226 688 C 8 88 ae End of program i 122828 eis Oremus LT ie Se stl E Machining z203 di New Cont H stop aH set up abl Contour E m 1 N22 G846 06 NS IS PS 1 N 22 xl 28 808 z 56 008 C 188 000 2 508 T 1 jS11 18868 18 Sti ali iali guli Propran active Hl After program changes in the DIN PLUS editor you need only press New to simulate the changed NC program The front and the surface windows operate with a tixed spindle position Whereas the machine turns the workpiece the graphic simulation moves the tool The surface window and the side view YZ are shown alternatively 66 Sep 82 09 58 51 201 5 2 Main Menu 5 2 Main Menu As an alternative you can set the path display in supplementary windows to always in the Window selection dialog box Then each traverse path will be shown in all simulation
137. program files via serial interface without protocol Ensure that your communications partner complies with the defined interface parameters baud rate word length etc Network printer the CNC PILOT transmits print jobs to the defined standard printer Prerequisites Installed printer driver Declaration as standard printer Device name STD Printer settings dialog box Local printer The CNC PILOT transmits print jobs to the COMx interface entry in the Device name field of the Printer settings dialog box personnel put your printer into service HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 L gt HEIDENHAIN recommends having trained 413 10 2 Transfer Method 10 2 Transfer Method 10 2 2 Configuring for DataTransfer Configuring a network Windows networks and FTP networks are configured in the Windows operating system gt Log in as system manager gt Select Controls Network Settings This menu item calls the Windows dialog box Network gt Perform network configuration The CNC PILOT is entered as Client for Microsoft Networks Details on installing and configuring networks are available in the documentation or in the on line help function of Windows X 497 282 me C amp P HEIDENHAIN recommends configuration z _ 160 001 f Z of the Windows networks by the Y 0 999 authorized personnel of your machine manufacturer Settings for Windows network gt Log in as syst
138. refer to the value displayed Perform calculation display result Basic types of calculation SIN COS TAN Trigonometric functions ASIN ACOS ATAN Trigonometric inverted functions X2 Square y Square root STO Store value displayed STO STO Add subtract value displayed to memory contents RCL Recall memory contents to the display CLA Clear the display 1 x Calculate the reciprocal of the value displayed T Ratio of circle circumference to diameter 3 14159 n Percent calculation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 o E Bams ede cir 1 x z Fit Inside thread OK Cancel Fit Calculate the mean tolerance for fits Enter nominal diameter Press fit Enter the fit data Tit dialog box press OK The calculator displays the mean tolerance value To calculate a core hole diameter from thread data use the Internal thread button Press inside thread Enter the thread data inside thread dialog box press OK The calculator calculates the core hole diameter and accepts it as display value 273 m 6 10 Operating Aids 6 10 Operating Aids 6 10 2 Digitizing a l gt TURN PLUS E Transfer bep l ZX main view Finished part Input values can be determined and transferred to the Er input field using the quadruple arrow digitizing TURN PLUS displays the coordinates of the cross hairs position Activate digitizing mode with opened dialo
139. run 17 tem O m b LU o H N tem O red a Lu lt o N Information of the error message Error description Explains the error Error number For service inquiries Channel number Slide for which the error occurred Time of day When the error occurred for your information Error class only with errors Background The message serves for information only or it is a minor error Cancel The running process cycle run traverse command etc was aborted You can resume operation once the error has been cleared Emergency stop Traverse and the execution of the DIN program were stopped You can resume operation once the error has been cleared Reset Traverse and the execution of the DIN pro gram were stopped Switch off the control for a moment then restart Contact your machine manufacturer If the error occurs again System Error Internal Error If a system error or internal error occurs write down all information on the displayed message and inform your machine manufacturer You cannot correct an internal error Switch off the control and restart Warnings during Simulation In the event of problems during simulation of an NC program the CNC PILOT displays a warning in the status line see 5 7 2 Notes on Operation PLC display The PLC window is used for PLC messages and the PLC diagnosis Your machine manual provides more detailed information on the PLC window
140. section and adds it n times to the contour Select Series Row Linear TURN PLUS tags the last element Select the contour section by soft key and confirm Enter Copy in linear series TURN PLUS extends the contour Parameter Copy in linear series Q Number of copies the contour section is copied Q times Continued gt 226 Delete Element range deletes the contour elements last entered 6 TURN PLUS Series Circular duplicates the selected contour section and adds It n times to the contour Select Series Row Circular TURN PLUS tags the last element Select the contour section by soft key and confirm Enter Copy in circular series dialog box TURN PLUS shows a center of rotation as a red square select by soft key the center of rotation and confirm by soft key TURN PLUS extends the contour Parameter Copy in circular series G Number of copies the contour section is copied Q times R Patten radius Duplicating circular Centers of rotation TURN PLUS uses the entered radius for creating a circle both around the starting point and the end point of the contour section The points of intersection of the circles are the two possible centers of rotation The angle of rotation is calculated from the distance between starting point and end point of the contour section Extending the contour TURN PLUS duplicates the selected contour section rotates it and a
141. selection 320 Turret assignment 320 Preparing a Machining Process Cutting limitation defining 271 Rechucking 277 Tool list setting up 280 Workpiece clamping 273 Turning TURN PLUS contour 261 Turning contours 66 Turning cycles Contourbased 122 Simple 134 Turn out tool 371 Turret DIN PLUS section code 80 DIN PLUS tool programming 68 TURN PLUS turret assignment 320 Twist drill 371 Index Undercut DIN PLUS Cycle G85 1o7 Definition with G25 Geo 88 DIN 509 E 88 DIN 76 89 Form H 89 Form Kaen 90 Forma U cava 88 TURN PLUS DIN 76 233 Form ocx 233 Form K 234 Forni U suse 234 Undercut parameters DIN 509 E 423 DIN 509 F 423 DIN 76 422 Units of measurement In the DIN PLUS program 63 Overview 8 Unit of measure setting 79 User entering 398 Values for controlled parting G992 164 Variables variables 175 As address parameters 66 Assignment 179 Calculations 175 Information in variables 178 Input in Geometry menu 15 Input output of variables 173 Input output of V variables 174 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Machining menu Input 76 Programming 175 V variables 177 Validity range 177 Variable display 80 Verification of NC program run 210 VGP sim
142. the working plan The IWG uses the machining attributes as cycle parameters Defining machining attributes Adjust the working plane turning contour front face or lateral surface etc Select the attribute type Machining attributes drop down menu Select the contour element existing attributes are displayed Enter edit the attributes Soft keys If holes or patterns and created in a figure a figure in a figure TURN PLUS differentiates between these levels First select the plane and the desired contour Machining attributes Threading Parameters B P Starting length overrun length no input The CNC PILOT automatically determines the length from adjacent undercuts or recesses If no undercut recess exists the starting length and overrun length from machining parameter 7 will be used see also 4 8Thread Cycles G Starting angle if the beginning of the angle is defined with respect to rotationally nonsymmetrical contour elements Maximum approach maximum infeed distance V Type of infeed V 0 Constant cross section Constant cross section for all cuts V 1 Constant infeed V 2 Remaining cut division If the division of thread depth by infeed yields a remainder this remainder applies to the first infeed The last cut is divided into 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 of a cut V 3 EPL method The infeed is calculated from the pitch and the speed H Type of tool offset of the individual inf
143. the appropriate jaw adapter code For both the chuck Parameters chuck type 1x0 and the required chuck jaws enter the same code ID Chuck identification number Jaw connection 0 any jaw type may be used Available Physical availability tixed word list Jaw con Code for jaw adapter d Chuck diameter I Chuck length max cl dia d1 Maximum clamping diameter min cl dia d2 Minimum clamping diameter dz Centering diameter max speed Maximum spindle speed rom Chucking Equipment Database Collet chuck type 110 Example Three jaw chuck type 130 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 393 y Chuck jaws Q Parameters chuck jaws type 21x Parameters chuck jaws type 21x _ _ s ID Chuck identification number 1 Dimension step 1 in X direction S A Available Physical availability fixed word list S2 Dimension step 2 in X direction J c Jaw con Code for jaw adapter must correspond to the jaw min cl dia Minimum clamping diameter Q adapter code of the chuck max cl dia Maximum clamping diameter oN L Width of jaws re 5 H Height of jaws G1 Dimension step 1 in Z direction amp G2 Dimension step 2 in Z direction la gt Example Chuck jaw type 211 Example Grip jaw type 213 394 8 Operating Resources Collet chuck Mandril ID Chuck identification number ID Chuck identification number Available Physical availability tixed word
144. the current and subsequent tool to calculate the optimum change position Speed limitation SMAX Global speed limitation You can define a lower speed limitation in theTURN PLUS program head see 6 2 2 Program Head Global safety clearance External on blank SAR Safety distance on the outside blank Internal on blank SIR Safety distance on the inside blank External on machined part SAT Safety distance on the outside premachined workpiece contour Internal on machined part SIT Safety distance on the inside premachined workpiece contour TURN PLUS takes account of SAR SIR for all rough turning cycles and for centric predrilling SAT SIT on the premachined parts apply to Finish machining Recess turning Contour recessing Recessing Thread cutting Measuring Centric predrilling tool selection allowances For predrilling a maximum of three drilling steps is used 1st predrilling step diameter limit UBD1 2nd drilling step diameter limit UBD2 Finish drilling step 1st drilling diameter limit UBD1 1st predrilling step where UBD1 lt DB1max Tool selection UBD1 lt db1 lt DB1max 2nd drilling diameter limit UBD2 2nd predrilling step where UBD2 lt DB2max Tool selection UBD2 lt db2 lt DB2max Finish drilling is performed with dimin lt UBD2 Tool selection db dimin Continued P gt 358 UBD1 lt DB1max UBD2 lt DB2max 7 Parameters Designations d
145. the direction Wi lt 0 clockwise V 1 with W clockwise V 1 with Wi clockwise sign of Wi has no meaning V 2 with W counterclockwise V 2 with Wi counterclockwise sign of Wi has no meaning Center of pattern Center of pattern angle Position of figures default O H 0 Normal position figure is rotated about the circle center rotation H 1 Original position position of figure remains unchanged with respect to the coordinate system translation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 107 N z Q O Commands O g u 4 5 8 Circular Pattern with Circular Slots In addition to the pattern positions for circular patterns you program the center and radius of curvature DIN PLUS and TURN PLUS calculate the position of the slots from the center of the pattern and center of curvature If pattern center center of curvature and pattern radius radius of curvature then Pattern position center of slot center line Pattern center center of curvature or pattern radius center of curvature then Pattern position center of curvature Example for a slot center as reference and normal position Example for a slot center as reference and original position Example of a center of curvature as reference and normal position Example for a center of curvature as reference and original position 08 The following rules apply for the orientation of the
146. the number of the additive correction value The correction value is defined during the machining of the workpiece Exclusion from machining The effect of the attribute depends on the type of machining Roughing The attribute is evaluated with the first last element of an inside outside contour Form elements are not machined Finishing Marked elements are not finished Predrilling Attribute is ignored Recessing Marked recesses are not machined Thread machining Marked thread elements are not finished and threads are not cut Centering Marked holes form elements are not drilled Drilling Marked holes for C Y machining are not machined Milling Marked milling contours for C Y machining are not machined 6 9 4 Precision stop Tagged contour elements are machined with the precision stop see also 4 5 4 Auxiliary Commands of Contour Description 6 9 5 Separation Points are used for shaft machining or machining with multiple setups After the element is selected TURN PLUS opens the selection point dialog box Parameters Position Delete Deletes an existing separation point a division of the contour element remains however 1 In target point Separation point at the end of the element 2 On element Separation point lies on the element X Z Position of the separation point 268 6 TURN PLUS 6 9 6 Machining Attributes The AWG evaluates the machining attributes for generating
147. the selected reference plane and suggests it as reference dimension Reference data dialog box Z Reference dimension Starting point of end face contour To define the starting point select Contour Parameters XK YK Starting point of the contour in Cartesian coordinates Fa Starting point of contour in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis 242 6 TURN PLUS Line segment in end face contour Use the menu symbol to select the direction of the line and assign it a dimension Parameters XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates XKi YKi Distance from starting point to end point P a End point in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis W Angle of the line for reference see illustration WV Angle to the preceding element WN Angle to the successor element WV WN The angle leads from the preceding succeeding element counterclockwise to the new element Arc as preceding succeeding element Angle to tangent E Length of line mE Tangential nontangential Specify the transition to the oA next contour element Circular arc in end face contours Use the menu symbol to select the direction of arc rotation and give the arc a dimension Parameters end point of arc XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates XK1 YKi Distance from starting point to end point PO End point in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis Pi i End point polar incremental Pi
148. therefore impossible for inside contour machining stay in effect after cycle end G58 oversizes are not taken into account Cycle run 1 Calculate the cut segmentation infeeds 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point on paraxial path 3 Move at feed rate to target point Z 4 Depending on the algebraic sign of lt O Machine contour outline l gt 0 Retract by 1 mm at 45 5 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 3 to 5 until target point X has been reached 7 Move to X last position at which the tool retracts Z starting point of cycle Parameters X Z Contour target point X diameter Maximum infeed distance in X direction I lt 0 With machining contour outline l gt 0 Without machining contour outline K Offset in Z direction default O Q G function Infeed default O 0 Infeed with GO rapid traverse 1 Infeed with G1 feed rate 134 ce Programming X Z absolute incremental or modal Cutter radius compensation Not active Safety clearance After every step 1 mm 4 DIN PLUS Simple face roughing G82 G82 machines roughs the contour area defined by the current tool position and X Z If you wish to machine an oblique cut you can define the angle with and K The CNC PILOT uses the position of the target point to distinguish between external and internal machining The proportioning of cuts is calculated
149. transfer see also 6 77 Prepare Rechuck Speed or anglular synchronism LC 0 Angular synchronism without angular offset gt 0 Angular synchronism with preset angular offset lt 0 Spindle speed synchronism Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 m gt TuAN PLUS bep _kb ZX main view IWG Parting Full surface P ae Tool Bu cutting deta tH cucip 4 single block distart 4 Automatic Subprogram UMKOHPLA i Drehzehlbegrenz La EE rpn Max Rohteildurch LE 308 am tine synchron gi LCE i Hihelpee imir Lo Eis nm Arbeitepos in LE Fertigteiliasnge LF fica am Abet Anech legs min Vorecnumipg I Bam mar Vor scnubbneg Red Uorechub Startpunkt in X Bz nm Cancel Startpunkt in Z Uorschubred ab X Zielpunkt in X P R 5 1 wenn Werkst U Start execution of the work block Basic ica W Transfer position in Z LD O Transfer position in machine dimension 1 1 6 Transfer position in machine dimension 1 6 0 6 Transfer position Calculation of the proposed value see sketch Working position in Z LE Proposed value Zero point offset such as from machine parameter 1164 for Z axis 1 Finished part length LF From the workpiece description Distance from stop surface LH Distance between reference point of chuck and stop surface of the clamping jaw calculated from the second setup Minimum traverse I Without moving to fixed stop Safety clea
150. type 32 alternative tool centering drill type 31 Counterboring Step drill type 42 Tapping lap type 44 Drilling and reaming Delta drill type 47 No machining The hole hole pattern is not machined Delete drilling attributes Deletes all attributes of this hole 270 6 TURN PLUS Machining attributes Milling Select the desired type of milling operation from the drop down menu see also 4 77 Milling cycles Contour milling Mills the figure or the freely defined open or closed contour Attributes Parameters Q Milling location e Contour Center of cutter on the contour E Internal milling closed contour O External milling closed contour D To the left of the open contour in machining direction H To the right of the open contour in machining direction lt H Milling direction 0 Up cut mill 1 Climb mill D Milling diameter for selecting suitable tool K Retraction plane Cutter position before after milling lateral surface diameter Area milling Mills the internal surface area of closed contours figure or freely defined contour Parameters ae Milling direction 0 Up cut mill 1 Climb mill D Milling diameter for selecting suitable tool K Retraction plane Cutter position before after milling lateral surface diameter HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 271 N Deburring g Deburrs the figure or the freely defined open or closed c
151. window is displayed or suppressed Display output Display V output If the data output of variables and V variables interfere use these menu items to put the desired display in the foreground HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 211 5 9 Time Calculation During machining or motion simulation the CNC PILOT calculates the productive and non productive times Call Settings Times menu item Exit the time calculation e O i H The machining times idle times and total times are shown in the table Time calculation green machining times yellow idle times Each line represents the use of a new tool for each tool call withT If there are more table entries than fit on a screen page you can call further time data with the arrow keys and PgUp PgDn Switch to the next slide Output of the time calculation table on a printer see control parameter 40 Call the synchronous point analysis 212 5 Graphic Simulation 5 10 Synchronous Point Analysis If you use more than one slide for your machining operation you can coordinate the machining process with synchronous points The Synchronous point analysis analyzes the mutual dependence of the slides The bar graph displays tool changes synchronous points and waiting times Additional synchronous point information describes the selected point arrow below the bar graphic
152. windows Source block display For NC programs with more than one slide define which slides are to be shown in the source block display Set up Slides For lathes with more than one Slides define Path output for All slides Display traverse paths of all slides Current slides Display traverse paths of the selected slide Slide position Define for every slide whether the tool traverse should be depicted in front of or behind the workpiece Reset button The slide position defined in the machine parameters is adopted Set up Contour selection In the dialog box define whether one selected contour or all contours of the NC program are described Define whether zero point shifts are to be taken into account Set up Status line or PgUp PgDn switches the die display Thus you can check either the tool data or the technology data Set up Zero point C only during active surface window In the zero point dialog box define the position at which the unrolled cylinder is to be cut open The C angle that you enter Is located on the Z axis Default setting C angle 0 202 Ree Prog tt Contour EM Machining dH Motion WH set up H 3 p view Window select transfer Lathe window ko Front window ae Surface window a n P Side view Y2 Path display in Source block display for Curren
153. workpiece If necessary activate the spindle 5o Starts the return motion program Continued gt 46 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode The Scrambled takeoff on restart dialog box appears Enter Yes No and press OK Ce Scrambled takeoff Yes The Startfrom interruption point IP before interruption point dialog box appears E From UP No further dialog box E Before UP Specify the distance from the point of interruption to the starting point of the tool Dialog Distance from interruption point The return motion program positions the tool on before the interruption point and continues the program without stopping The inspection cycle has been completed Scrambled takeoff NO The Start from interruption point IP before interruption point dialog box appears E From UP No further dialog box E Before UP Specify the distance from the point of interruption to the starting point of the tool Dialog Distance from interruption point The return motion program positions the tool on before the interruption point and stops Application example Cutting edge has been replaced _y amp amp amp u amp Select Insp ection again _Yy mr S C r C C Cr C Cr _ew The Scratch with tool dialog box opens for information v e 2 J oa lt LO ap
154. 0 G22 Geo _ Recess standard 86 G307 Geo Eccentric polygon on end face 100 G23 Geo Recess relief turn 86 G401 Geo Linear pattern on end face 100 G24 Geo Thread with undercut 8 G402 Geo Circular pattern on end face 101 ee Lateral surface contours Page G34 Geo Thread standard 90 G37 Geo tead acne 90 G110 Geo Starting point of lateral surface contour 102 G49 Geo Borehole arumingeenic 97 G111 Geo Line segment on lateral surface 102 TG 72 Geo Circular arc on lateral surface 103 Help commands for contour definition Page G113 Geo Circular arc on lateral surface 103 Overview Help commands for contour definition 92 G310 Geo Bore hole on lateral surface 103 G7 Geo Precision stop ON 92 G311 Geo Linear slot lateral surface 104 G8 Geo Precision stop OFF 92 G312 Geo Circular groove on cylindrical surface 104 G9 Geo Precision stop blockwise 92 G313 Geo Circular groove on cylindrical surface 104 G10 Geo Peak to valley height 92 G314 Geo Faull circle on cylindrical surface 105 G38 Geo Feed rate reduction factor 93 G315 Geo Rectangle on cylindrical surface 105 G39 Geo Attributes of superimposed elements 93 G317 Geo Eccentric polygon on lateral surface 105 G52 Geo Blockwise oversize 94 G411 Geo Linear pattern on lateral surface 106 G95 Geo Feed per revolution 94 G412 Geo Circular pattern on lateral surface 106 G149 Geo Additive correction 94 Overview of G commands inthe MACHINING __ Zerolpoiritidisplacenienit lll Pagel section G921 Activate datum shif
155. 00 00 sec Start of reference machining cycle Switch back to Edit load parameters 3 45 Machining Using Load Monitoring It is advisable to use the load monitoring function when due to a dull cutting edge a machining process requires a considerably higher torque than with a new cutting edge As a rule drives that are subjected to considerable loads should be monitored usually the main spindle Due to the relatively small torque variations it Is difficult to monitor machining operations with small cutting depths A decrease In torque cannot be identified HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 j gt DIN PLUS l E service Editing the zones file display iE Display 1 setting eee Set cursor Een TH Beginn file Eze Next beginn zone 4f Maximum in zone h Ti af par S008 635 P0 29 ma 20 min TEE 91 000 24 G8 XU gt 90 6995 HI O17 i 3 24 10 G78 2 74 PIS 108 290 Fa 1 X T a eo en Z 221 426 p a 7 100 001 Z m Y 0 000 C a n ie Defining the monitoring zones he reference values for torque depend on the maximum torque values of the zone Therefore lower torque values cannot always be monitored Facing with constant cutting speed he spindle is monitored as long as the acceleration is 15 of the mean value from maximum acceleration and maximum braking deceleration machine parameters 811 Since acceleration increases as a result of the increase in rotatio
156. 01 Roughing tool Finishing tool Finishing tool Recess standard Thread standard Thread standard Revers pl drill 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 3 2 Comparing aTool List with an NC Program The CNC PILOT compares the current tool list with the entries in the NC program last translated in automatic mode Select Setting up Tool list Compare list The CNC PILOT shows the current contents of the tool list and marks deviations from the programmed tool list _y amp re_f Select marked tool location __ YY _ _er Nominal actual comparison Press ENTER or INS key The CNC PILOT opens the nominal actual comparison dialog box _ _errresss Accept the ID number of the nominal Confirm nominal tool in the tool list or Type list Look for the tool in the database ID list The CNC PILOT shows the following tools marked Actual tool nominal tool Actual not occupied nominal occupied The entries in the TURRET section are considered nominal tools reference TURRET section of the NC program most recently interpreted in Automatic mode Tool locations that are not assigned in the NC program cannot be selected Danger of collision A N Tool pockets that are occupied but according to the NC program are not needed are not marked The CNC PILOT compensates the tool actually entered even if it does not match the nominal assignme
157. 01 j SEIGEAT NG 504 rife 62 08 2002 Marked Quantity 15 Marked HI D 0 j I T 2 0 000 X inna Ux E maii pi en ion a gt E 2 20116 05 Z mmmmmmm 0 C n innana ie mite DAs Dai 0 dL TE Change to Service mode Change to Parameter mode Define file type sorting and masking Update the file list Call the Organizations functions see 70 4 File Organization Transmit the marked files Download the marked files from the communications partner for serial transfer The CNC PILOT goes to readiness to receive Mark all files Mark a file 10 Transfer Operation Vertical arrow keys Page Up Dn move the cursor within the list of files Arrow left right Switches between the left and right window while also switching the CNC PILOT between readiness to transmit and receive Enter character character series The cursor positions to the next file name beginning with this character sequence Enter with DIN PLUS programs parameters and operating resource files Shows the file content You close the Tile by pressing Enter again or Esc Ses 2 e S oa m o q TE Marks all displayed files pressing again unmarks all them Hark This soft key or plus key marks the selected file pressing again unmarks it Network or FTP Marked files from the CNC PILOT to Transmit aa the communications partner If the file already exists you mu
158. 1 tH eh EN H B CO co Cl coo CE O68 Sep Bz End of program 10 23 31 Zeon OH Standard Prev zoom Workpiece Work space E PLUS E o si maximum e Standard size Prev zoom ET Workpiece maximum Work space By coordinates Cancels the zoom settings and displays the last setting Workpiece maximum or Work space Cancels the last magnification setting You can select Previous zoom more than once Switches the zoom function to the next simulation window Shows the workpiece in the largest possible view Shows the working space including the tool change position Set the dimensions of the simulation window and position of the workpiece zero point If there is more than one window each window must be set separately The setting applies to the contour of the selected slide 5 Graphic Simulation 5 7 3 DView In the 3 D view the CNC PILOT shows the workpiece in its simulated condition If you call the 3 D view trom the contour simulation the finished part is depicted Call 3 D view menu itemh Fe Exit the 3 D view Switching the display modes m With a soft key you can switch between a standard solid model or a grating wire model E To magnify Soft key or page up m To reduce Soft key or page down E To rotate cursor keys plus and minus key E Soft key standard 3 D view displays the workpiece in the standard size and position ar
159. 1 Spindle side fii Tailetock side ID number KSP 601 H Lathe center iz on 66 Sep 62 15 08 16 E jpcese Form 151 468 1 6 TURN PLUS Defining the cutting limit Menu item Clamp Cutting limitation TURN PLUS finds the cutting limitation for AWG on the outside and inside of the contour at Clamp Spindle side You can edit or add to the values The cutting limit is displayed as a red line Deleting the chucking data Menu item Chucking Delete chuck plan Deletes all data for tool clamping and all entered cutting limitations Rechucking Rechuck Standard machining Use Rechuck Standard machining for front face and rear face machining with separate NC programs TURN PLUS Ttlips the workpiece blank and finished part and shifts the zero point by Nvz Rotates lateral surface contour or contours of the YZ plane about Wye Deletes the chucking equipment of the first setup Rechuck workpiece parameters Nvz Zero point shift proposed value length of the finished contour Wve Angular shift Rechuck Complete machining 1st chucking after 2nd chucking Starts machining of the second setup First define the chucking equipment Then TURN PLUS activates an expert program from machining parameter 21 for workpiece transfer Which expert program is used depends on the entry 1st setup of spindle 2nd setup of spindl
160. 111111 3 8 17145 1 411111111 1 2 21 336 1 814285714 3 4 26 67 1 814285714 T 33 401 2 208695652 Lia 42 164 2 208695652 1 1 2 48 26 2 208695652 Pa 60 325 2 208695652 212 73 025 3 179 Ca 88 9 3 175 11 Tables and overviews 11 2 Technical Information Standard features Contouring control with integrated motor control and integrated inverter 2 close loop axes X1 and Z1 on slide 1 1 close loop spindle Expandable To up to 10 closed loops Maximum 6 slides Maximum 4 spindles Maximum 2 C axes Display 15 inch TFT flat panel display c 2 por m O lam rr c E D N q q Program memory Hard disk Interpolation Straight lines In 2 principal axes optionally in 3 principal axes maximum 10 m Circular arcs In 2 axes maximum radius 100 m C axis Interpolation of linear axes X and Z with the C axis Helices Superimposition of circular and linear paths Look ahead Preliminary calculation of the contour speed profile under consideration of up to 20 blocks Feed rate Maximum input at 0 001 mm resolution 400 m min Input in mm min or mm revolution Constant cutting speed Feed rate with chip breaking Data interfaces RS 232 C V 24 with up to 38 4 kilobaud Ethernet 100 BaseT maximum 100 megabaud Printout over serial interface Accessories CNC PILOT 4290 DataPilot PC software for programming and training for the CNC PILOT 4290 lathe control Programming and Test Run Program management O
161. 121 335 040 1 E 6 TURN PLUS Note on machining the rear face For contours on the rear side C Y axis machining remember the orientation of the XK or X axis and the orientation of the C axis Designations Front side The side toward the working space Rear side R The side away from the working Space These designations also apply to workpieces clamped at the opposing spindle or to workpieces rechucked for rearside machining in lathes with one spindle HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 w gt TURN PLUS gizi_sys ZX main view J4 Workpiece JI Prepare 13 IWG Hii awa p Configuration a alu Execute machining over IG or AG E Poraneter CENNETE AT ep 0z 14 12 17 w gt TURN PLUS gizi_sy4 ZX main view Program i Workeicce H prepare 1 twa iawo cM Configuration Execute machining over IG or AWG fae PLUS Ti Illustration of lathe with opposing spindle E Paraneter EEEE 17 Sep 14 13 87 ona o d d d 329 ion achining Informat lachining Information fe 6 16 9 Shaft Machining For shafts TURN PLUS supports rear face machining of outside contours In addition to standard machining processes This enables shafts to be completely machined using one setup TURN PLUS does not support retracting the tailstock and does not check the setup used Precondition for shaft machining The workpiece is clamped a
162. 2 for each individual tool of the tool interchange chain The sequential events are automatically reset at the end of a program M99 Information in variables V660 Quantity Is set to zero when the system Is started Is set to zero when a new NC program is loaded Is increased by M30 or M99 by 1 V901 V920 are used for the G functions G901 G902 G903 G912 and G916 see table Continued gt 178 If an tool interchange chain is defined program the first tool of the chain for tool compensation and tool diagnosis The CNC PILOT addresses the active tool from the sequence of exchange see 4 2 4 Tool programming Example for diagnosis bits AEVO Sets the expiration of tool life of tool 10 or replacement tool wW IN N O CO o 1 Worn out tool identifies tool condition Reason for replacing a tool see bits 2 to 8 Specified tool life piece number has been reached Reserved for tool wear determined by in process measuring of tool Tool wear determined by in process measuring of workpiece Tool wear determined by in process measuring of workpiece Tool wear identified by the load monitoring function power limit value 1 or 2 has been exceeded Tool wear identified by the load monitoring function power limit value 1 or 2 has been exceeded A cutting edge of a multipoint tool is worn out New cutting edge The remaining tool life of the cutting edge is lt 6 or the re m
163. 22 3 170 3 029 3 629 4 233 4 233 5 08 5 08 5 645 5 645 6 35 6 35 125 0 907 0 907 1 337 1 337 1 814 1 814 2 309 2 309 2309 2 309 2 309 2 309 2309 2 309 2 309 Q 11 Whitworth pipe thread 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 1 1 1 8 1 1 4 13 8 LZ 1 3 4 7 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 3 4 3 3 1 4 31 2 3 3 4 A 4 1 2 5 6 Q 13 UNC US coarse thread 5 1 2 9 728 13 167 16 662 20 995 22 911 26 441 30 201 33 249 37897 41 91 44 323 47 803 53 746 59 614 65 71 75 184 81 534 8 7884 93 98 100 33 106 68 113 08 126 75 138 43 151 15 163 83 0 907 Loo7 1 337 1 614 1 614 1 614 1 814 2 309 2 309 2 309 2309 2 309 2 309 2 309 2 509 2 309 2 309 2 309 2 309 2309 2 309 2309 2 309 2309 2 309 2 309 0 073 0 086 0 099 0 112 0 125 0 138 0 164 0 19 0 216 1 8542 2 1844 2 5146 2 8448 3 175 3 0052 4 1656 4 826 5 4864 0 396875 0 4538571428 0 529166666 0 635 0 635 0 79375 0 79575 1 058333333 1 058333333 Continued gt 11 Tables and overviews 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 1 4 6 35 1 27 5 16 7 9375 1 411111111 3 8 9 525 1 5875 7 16 11 1125 1 814285714 1 2 12 7 1 953846 154 9 16 14 2875 2 116666667 5 8 15 875 2 309090909 3 4 19 05 2 54 7 8 22 225 2822222222 ie 25 4 3 175 11 8 28 575 3 62857 1429 11 4 31 75 3 628571429 13 8 34 925 4233333333 11 2 38 1 4233333333 13 4
164. 30 Inside 0 8 F F 307 30 Q 18 NPSC US cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant Outside 0 8 F F 30 30 Inside UBF F 30 30 Q 18 NPFS US cylindrical pipe thread without lubricant Outside 0 8 F F 30 30 Inside a 0 8 F F 30 30 11 1 5 Thread Pitch Q 2 Metric ISO thread Diameter Threadpitch _ _ 1 0 25 20 2 5 1 1 0 25 792 25 1 2 0 25 24 2 1 4 0 3 27 3 1 6 0 35 30 35 1 8 0 35 33 25 Z 0 4 26 A 22 0 45 39 A 2 5 0 45 42 4 5 3 0 5 45 4 5 3 5 0 6 48 5 Aoo 0 oy 5 A5 0 75 56 55 5 0 8 60 5 5 6 1 64 6 1 68 6 8 1 25 OQ 5 Q 8 Cylindrical round thread JOS iameter_ Threadpith _ 11 15 12 2 54 44a 14 3 175 46 40 4 233 qg Z gt 105 6 35 T Oe 200 6 30 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 429 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters Q 9 CylindricalWhitworth thread 1 4 5 16 3 8 7 16 1 2 0 8 3 4 7 8 1 1 8 1 1 4 13 8 le 1 5 8 13 4 Eo 2 1 4 a 2 3 4 Q 10 Tapered Whitworth thread 1 16 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 3 4 11 4 1 1 2 Le E9 Oy Cla 430 6 35 7938 9 525 11 113 12 7 15 876 19 051 22 220 25 401 28 9 6 31701 34 926 38 101 41 277 44 452 47 627 50 802 57152 63 502 69 853 LIZS 9 728 13 157 16 662 20 995 26 441 33 249 41 91 47 803 59 614 75 184 387 884 113 03 138 43 163 83 1 27 1 411 1 588 1 814 2 117 2 309 2 54 2 0
165. 4 Returns at return speed S according to K K not programmed Return to starting point K programmed Return to position K Hole pattern NS refers to the bore hole contour and not the definition of the pattern Cycle stop becomes effective at the end of a thread cut Feed rate override is not in effect Do not use spindle override 145 _ Cycles 9 Drilling Cycles Thread cycle G36 G36 cuts axial radial threads using driven or stationary tools Depending on X Z G36 decides whether a radial or axial thread will be machined Move to the starting point before G36 G36 returns to the starting position after having cut the thread Parameters X Diameter end point for axial holes Z Length end point for radial holes Feed per revolution thread pitch Q Number of spindle default O main spindle B Run in length for synchronizing spindle and feed drive see G33 H Reference direction for thread pitch default O H 0 Feed rate on the Z axis H 1 Feed rate on the X axis H 2 Feed rate on theY axis H 3 Contour feed rate 5 Retraction speed higher speed for the retraction default Same speed as for tapping 146 Types of taps Stationary tap Spindle and feed drives are synchronized Driven tap Driven tool auxiliary spindle and feed drive are synchronized Cycle stop becomes effective at the end of a thread cut Feed rate override is not in eff
166. 6 115 680 Point angle 8 888 59 886 Usable length min 41 880 mm Tool diameter max 13 898 mm Hachining parameters off Cur para Inward copying angle 48 000 Hachining ihe thod Complete Toole aff File OK Cancel BE Sep 82 12 00 54 Centric predrilling 2nd hole S42 7140 1 6 TURN PLUS 6 11 Preparing a Machining Process The Prepare function defines the chucking equipment the position of the chucking equipment and TURN PLUS specific turret assignments For chucking a workpiece TURN PLUS determines the Cutting limitation on the inside and outside of the contour Zero point shift is taken into the NC program as a G59 command and transfers the following setup information to the program head see 6 2 2 Program Head Clamping diameter Unclamping length Clamping pressure 6 11 1 Chucking a Workpiece Chucking a workpiece at the spindle Select Prepare Chucking Chuck _y eeee _ o oo o Select Spindle side m SE sr ee ooo Select the type of chuck from the drop down menu TURN PLUS opens the corresponding dialog box Two jaw chuck Three jaw chuck Fourjaw chuck Collet chuck Without chuck face driver Three jaw chuck indirect face driver in chuck with jaws __ 6 _ _ _er rrss ss ss eee Enter the data for clamping Define the clamp range u _yy amp s g lt eee TU
167. 7 Example R Select Program Saving Complete S Check the file name Press OK ee m _ y amp amp amp amp amp e TURN PLUS saves The working plan the contour of the blank and finished part in one file The NC program DIN PLUS format Start generation without user influence ep The AWG generates the working blocks according to the machining sequence and the settings in the machining parameters see 6 13 2 Machining Sequence and 75 Machining Parameters HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 335 7 7 i a Parameters F 12345 2 i gt 107 e T ARS ee 1 8 a 7 1 ee cto Mode of Operation 7 1 Parameter Mode of Operation 7 1 1 Parameters The parameters of the CNC PILOT are grouped as follows Machine parameters These are used to adapt the control to the requirements of the machine e g parameters for components assemblies the assignment of axes slides and spindles Control parameters These are used to configure the control system machine display interfaces measuring system used etc Setup parameters These define certain settings required for the production of a specific part workpiece datum tool change position compensation values etc PLC parameters These parameters are defined by the machine manufacturer see Machine Manual Machining parameters These define the strategy for machining cycles and for TURN
168. 74 ECAR G820 NS Monitors the feed paths of the roughing cycle GO X54 T074 M109 mG os Ends the machining cycle The code for axes is defined in bit numbers for load monitoring control parameter 15 167 IONS J S C LL 4 13 Other G Functions Period of dwell G4 The CNC PILOT interrupts the program run for the time F before executing the next program block If G4 is programmed together with a path of traverse in the same block the dwell time only becomes effective after the path of traverse has been executed e Q me S 5 LL g Parameters Period of dwell sec range 0 lt F lt 99 999 Precision stop ON G7 G7 switches precision stop on It is a modal function With precision stop the CNC PILOT does not run the following block until the last point has been reached in the tolerance window for position tolerance window machine parameter 1106 ff position control for linear axis 4 13 Precision stop affects single contours and cycles The NC block containing G7 is also executed with a precision stop Precision stop OFF G8 G8 switches precision stop off The block containing G8 is executed without an accurate stop Block precision G9 G9 activates an accurate stop for the block in which it is programmed see also G7 Programming of all parameters Move rotary axis G15 Absolute incremental or modal
169. 84 Chucking equipment Displaying G6b 159 DIN PLUS section code 82 Reference point 159 Circular arcs DIN PLUS Front rear face contour G102 G103 Geo 97 Front rear face G102 G103 149 Lateral surface contours G112 G113 Geo 103 Lateral surface G112 G113 151 Turning contour G2 G3 G12 G13 Geo 85 Turning cycles G2 G3 G12 G18 112 TURN PLUS Basic contour 231 Front face rear side 243 Lateral surface 250 Circular interpolation 62 Circular path See Circular arc Circular pattern see Pattern Circular pattern with circular slots 108 Circular saw blade 372 Circular slot ccw DIN PLUS Front face G302 G303 Geo 99 Lateral surface G312 G313 Geo 104 In circular patterns 108 TURN PLUS Front rear face 247 Lateral surface 254 Comments Fundamentals 64 Input in Edit menu V7 Input in Geometry menu 15 Index Compensation Additive compensation G149 120 Additive compensation G149 Geo 94 Entering compensation values 44 Compensation of left right tool point G151 121 Configuration DIN PLUS help graphic 74 TURN PLUG onset 318 Connect TURN PLUS contours 262 Constant cutting speed Gx96 114 Constant feed manual control 26 Contour Activate update contour display 74 Contour display switch on 68 Contour selection Simulation 202 Contour si
170. 9 2 Service Functions 9 2 Service Functions 9 2 3 Fixed Word Lists Materials and cutting materials The terms for materials and cutting materials from the technology database are contained in fixed word File name Otemater fwl ParaNo 13 No of entries 32 max no of entries 64 Position Code Term lists Use them to adapt this database to your requirements see also Z5 Cutting Value Database Fits The parameter Fit is included for the delta drill and reamer tools Specify the desired fit qualities in the OWZPASSU fixed word list Note on editing fixed word lists Maximal 64 entries Code Number from 0 63 Assign each code only once Name Maximum 16 characters Select Sys srv FWLediting Language independent Select OTEMATER material OTESTOFF cutting material OWZPASSU fit quality YY Editing an entry Select the position to be edited press ENTER Edit the Code or Term and press OK The CNC PILOT saves the data New entry Is Opens the Editing fixed word lists dialog box Enter the Code Term and press OK The CNC PILOT saves the data 404 m entry length 16 9 Service and Diagnosis 9 3 Maintenance System L gt Prerequisite The machine tool builder i must enter the required actions and Maintenance System provide complete descriptions of them The CNC PILOT reminds the machi
171. Address name of remote station Use FTP 0 No 1 Yes The parameters can also be set using the transfer functions Evaluation Time counting Simulation mode Tool change time sec Gear shifting time sec Time allowance for M functions sec All M functions are rated with this time If an M function is also specified in control parameter 21 the time allowances entered here are added Evaluation Time calculation Simulation mode 1 10 M function Number of the respective M function Time allowance sec individual time allowance The time calculation function in simulation mode adds the specified time to the time allowance entered in control parameter 20 349 7 3 Control Parameters 7 3 Control Parameters 22 Simulation Default window size X Z The simulation function adapts the window size to the workpiece blank If no blank part is programmed the CNC PILOT uses a standard window size Evaluation Simulation mode Zero position X Distance of the origin of the coordinate system from the lower window frame Zero position Z Distance of the origin of the coordinate system from the left window frame Delta X Vertical expansion of the graphics window Delta Z Horizontal expansion of the graphics window 23 Simulation Default blank If no blank part is programmed the CNC PILOT uses a standard blank Evaluation Simulation mode Outside diameter Length of blank part Right edge of blank
172. At rapid traverse Dwell time for cutting free F50 Feed rate reduction see soft key table Parameters special deep hole drilling P 1st drilling depth J Minimum drilling depth Reduction of depth reduction value B Retraction value return distance default Retract to Starting point of hole Parameters special tapping A Slope length default Machining Parameter 7 Thread starting length GAL 5 Retraction speed default Tapping speed 300 s A 6 TURN PLUS 6 12 7 Finishing Form element machining softkeys Overview of finishing operations BF Finishing Contour machining G890 ne Finishing Clearance turning Finishing Undercut Finishing Residual contour machining G890 O 4 Hollowing finishing neutral tool G890 Q 4 Undercut type F Undercut type G FD Relief turn Notes on using TURN PLUS You define the approach type retraction type and form element machining by soft key see the following tables a5 Q 0 Approach Automatic selection the IWG checks _ Diagonal approach First X then Z direction Equidistant around the obstacle Omission of the first contour elements if the starting position is inaccessible l Switch over the soft key row for the selection of the following form elements Aa 2 J aos c g c amp B c Chamfer B Rounding PT Fit Q 1 Approach
173. CK H2 ID KBA250 86 X100 Q4 Zero point shift Z233 ROHTEIL BLANK N1 G20 X100 Z100 Kl FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART STIRN Z0 FRONT RUECKSEITE Z 98 REAR SIDE N20 G308 P 1 N21 G100 XK5 YK 10 N22 Gol ris N23 G101 XK 5 N24 G103 XK 8 YK3 8038 R6 I 5 BO N25 G101 XK 12 YK 10 N26 G309 192 of wt sot up Contour 1J Debug gt Simulation Parameter ZBSPIEL2 Fiicont tH PEREA 66 Sep Z 28 52 09 H g ae f hs i ia u Zoon ON Program active ee a i pi C EEG ie rk Example Full surface machining on single spindle lathe 4 DIN PLUS HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Zero point shift 1st setup Display chucking equipment of 1st setup Prepare the rechucking Delete chucking equipment of 1st set up Expert program for manual rechucking V LF length of finished part LH distance between chuck reference point and edge of workpiece Activate chucking equipment for rearface machining Milling rear side 193 4 18 Bi i Examples lode of Operation x 5 Y Ra LO 5 1 Simulation Mode of Operation Simulation screen 1 Infoline Submode of simulation simulated NC program 2 Simulation window The machining is depicted in up to three windows 3 Programmed NC block NC source block alternative display of variables 4 Displays NC block number position values tool information alternative cutting values Coordinate systems of the slides
174. Cartesian coordinates a PM Center in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis A Angle to a polygon side reference XK axis Q Corner number Q gt 3 K Length of side SW Width across flats inscribed circle diameter R Chamfer rounding Width of chamfer Radius of rounding P Depth of the figure Linear slot Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates a PM Center in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis Angle of longitudinal axis of slot reference XK axis Slot length Slot width Depth of the figure VUA Circular slot Parameters XK YK Center of curvature in Cartesian coordinates a PM Center of curvature in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis Starting angle starting point of the slot reference XK axis End angle end point of the slot reference XK axis Curvature radius reference center point path of the slot Slot width Depth of the figure UWNDS PY HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 247 m 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours Linear Hole Pattern Linear Figure Pattern Parameters XK YK Starting point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates a P Starting point of pattern in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis Q Number of holes figures default 1 le end point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates li Ji Distance between two figures in XK YK direction B Angle to the longitudinal axis of the pattern r
175. Conditional Block Execution 179 4 16 Subprograms 182 4 17 M Functions 183 4 18 Programming Notes and Examples 184 4 18 1 Programming Machining Cycles 184 4 18 2 Contour Repetitions 184 4 18 3 Full Surface Machining 187 5 Graphic Simulation 195 5 1 Simulation Mode of Operation 196 5 1 1 Graphic Elements Displays 197 5 1 2 Basics of Operation 200 5 2 Main Menu 201 5 3 Contour Simulation 203 5 3 1 ContourSimulation Functions 203 5 3 2 Dimensioning 204 5 4 Machining Simulation 205 5 5 Motion Simulation 207 5 6 Zoom Function 208 5 7 3 D View 209 5 8 Checking the 5 9 Time Calculation 212 5 10 Synchronous Point Analysis 2138 6TURN PLUS 215 6 1 TURN PLUS Mode of Operation 216 6 2 Program Management 217 6 2 1 TURN PLUS Files 217 6 2 2 Program Head 218 6 3 Workpiece Description 219 6 3 1 Entering the Contour of a Blank Part 219 6 3 2 Input of the Finished Part Contour 220 6 3 3 Superimposing form elements 22 6 3 4 Integrating a Contour Train 222 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Contents Contents VI 6 3 5 Entering Contours Machined with the C Axis 223 6 3 6 Basics of Operation 275 6 3 7 Help Functions for Element Definition 226 6 4 Contours of Workpiece Blanks 226 6 5 Contour of Finished Part 220 6 5 1 Basic Contour Elements 229 6 5 2 For
176. Curve 4 Display grid fin sec pict aoe X 200 000 ier were e Qe een z 457 000 pret C 7 100 001 Zima y 0 000 SJE Diss D Ymmi E E A a d ca T D A G v iaumaicmi 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode Bar graphic Graphically display torque values and mark the peak values Save do not save measured values The measured values must be saved for later analysis of reference machining Check the setting in the Save data Write data display field Overwrite Do not overwrite limit values If you wish to retain the limit values after a new reference machining cycle select Do not overwrite limit values Pause stops the display Continue continues the display Auto returns to the automatic menu Additional information Zone number Current monitoring zone Negative algebraic sign Production Is not monitored example skipping the paths of rapid traverse Tool Active Tool Selected drives The drives are listed and the current torques are displayed Block display 3 42 Production Using Load Monitoring If you wish to use the load monitoring function for your machining processes you must activate It in the NC program G996 Display torque values and limit values Display Load monitoring Display Automatic operating mode Load monitoring display submenu Curves menu item Enter the required drives in the input fields Curves 1 to 4 Line graphics
177. E Parameter Automatic Grafic Wbesp i X 0 000 T 11 ort Err X n m Te Z 5 000 go a Z 100 001 Z ma Y 0 000 pE ae E By s O Y ai aa D ei 2 Ag pai PLL 85 Sep 62 15 17 31 SA Return to block display On Activate the zoom function Single Set to Single block mode block Depiction of traverse paths Line or cutting trace E Tool depiction Point of light or tool Motion appears only for lathes with one slide If no blank part was programmed the standard blank form control parameter 23 is assumed 49 Operation oO e m a Oo Pu gt lt LO o Jperation 3 5 Automatic Mode of O Enlarging reducing selecting a section for enlargement When you call the zoom function a red frame appears with which you can select the detail you wish to isolate eS Detail Enlarge Page forward Reduce Page back Shift Cursor keys Zoom settings by touch pad Prerequisite Simulation in stop condition Position the cursor to one corner of the section While holding the left mouse key pull the cursor to the opposite corner of the section Right mouse key Return to standard size Standard settings See soft key table Exit the zoom function After having enlarged a detail to a great extent select Workpiece maximum or Work space and then isolate a new detail 50 l E Paraneter m 3 e Automatic Grafi
178. E SURFACE You can change the cutting direction with the cutting direction H the machining direction Q and the direction of tool rotation see following table Parameters NS Block number reference to contour description P Maximum milling depth infeed in the working plane R Radius of approaching departing arc default 0 R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to approach point above the milling plane then perpendicular feed to plunging depth R gt 0 Mill moves along approaching departing arc which connects tangentially with the contour element U Minimum overlap factor overlap of tool paths overlap U cutter diameter default 0 5 V Overrun factor no significance for machining with the C axis H Cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling F Feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate E Reduced feed rate for circular elements default Current feed rate Je Retraction plane default return to starting position Front or rear face Retraction position in Z direction Lateral surface Retraction position in X direction diameter Q Machining direction default 0 OQ 0 From the inside toward the outside Q 1 From the outside toward the inside Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 withY Axis User s Manual HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Cycle run 1 Starting position X Z C is the position before the cycle begi
179. E Sslee i gt Simulation CLL AEREE RAL Line G11 tart a 30 137 End VE a Al 162 600 xe oN 3 ME 12 421 Xk 7 665 i 5 800 66 Sap az ali guli End of program W 16 12 22 Change to next simulation window Prerequisite There are contours on the reference planes front face Y face lateral surface side view A 5 Graphic Simulation 5 4 Machining Simulation Ce You can change the speed of the machining simulation with control parameter 27 ion Functions of the machining simulation Checking the tool traverse paths Checking the proportioning of cuts Ascertaining the machining time lat imu Monitoring for violations of the protection zones vy and traverse limits m a simuration EpPoraneter 5 Finding and setting variables te E Saving machined contours Tjon Mjcont Listor set up Wicontour M Debug F a Back to main menu Protection zone and limit switch monitoring In addition to the setting in the simulation the protection zone monitoring is also switched on in the machine parameter 205 Monitoring on off You set the protection zone dimensions in the Setup mode Manual Control operating mode The dimensions are managed in the machine parameters 1116 Poon Contour generation during simulation You can save contours generated in the simulation a and transfer them into the NC program Example You TA SEES describe the blank form and f
180. Examples T3 or 13 0 Turret position 3 Main cutting edge T12 2 position to which the turret rotates 12 cutting point 2 Replacement tools If you wish to use the Tool life monitoring function you must define an tool interchange chain As soon as a tool is worn out the CNC PILOT interchanges a replacement tool The CNC PILOT does not stop the program run until the last tool of the tool interchange chain is worn out In the TURRET section and the T commands you program the first tool to be interchanged The CNC PILOT inserts the replacement tool automatically When programming variables access to tool compensation or tool diagnosis bits you also address the first tool of the chain The CNC PILOT automatically addresses the active tool You can define replacement tools in Setup see 3 3 4Tool Life Management 4 2 5 Fixed cycles HEIDENHAIN recommends programming a fixed cycle in the following steps see 4 78 7 Programming a Fixed Cycle Insert tool Define the cutting data Position the tool in front of the working area Define the safety clearance Call a cycle Retract the tool Approach the tool change position HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Danger of collision If cycle programming steps are omitted when a program is optimized A special feed rate remains in effect up to the next feed rate command example finishing feed for recessing cycles Several cycles return diagonally to t
181. For a single contour element you can program NS and NE to reverse the contour direction You can change the machining direction and the cutter radius compensation TRC with the cycle type Q the cutting direction H and the rotational direction of the tool see following table Deburring G840 deburrs if chamfer width B is programmed The milling depth P defines the plunging depth of the tool preempting the infeed Preparation diameter J see illustration Open contour J programmed The contour is deburred all around Prerequisite he deburring tool has a smaller diameter than the milling cutter Open contour deburring tool and milling cutter have equal diameter J is omitted Closed contour The side programmed with cycle type Q is deburred J is omitted Other parameters are usually programmed in the same way as milling contours Approach and departure For closed contours the point of the surface normal from the tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position the starting point of the first element is the point of approach and departure For figures you can select the approach depart element or machine parts of the figure by selecting Begin End Element Number D V Oversize A G58 oversize shifts the contour to be milled in the direction given in cycle type Inside mil
182. Geo Circular slot on front face 99 G120 Reference diameter 148 G304 Geo Full circle on front face 99 G121 Mirror and shift contour 117 G305 Geo Rectangle on front face 100 G13 Circular movement 112 G307 Geo Polygon on front face 100 G14 Tool change position 110 G308 Geo Start of pocket island 95 G147 Safety clearance milling cycles 119 G309 Geo End of pocket island 96 G148 Changing the cutter compensation 120 G310 Geo Hole on lateral surface 103 G149 Additive compensation 120 G311 Geo Linear slot on lateral surface 104 G15 Rotary axis traverse 168 G312 Geo Circular slot on lateral surface 104 G150 Compensate right tool tip 121 G313 Geo Circular slot on lateral surface 104 G151 Compensate left tool tip 121 G314 Geo Full circle on lateral surface 105 G152 Zero point shift C axis 148 G315 Geo Rectangle on lateral surface 105 G153 Standardize C axis 148 G317 Geo Polygon on lateral surface 105 G162 Set synchronous mark 160 G34 Geo Thread standard 90 G192 perminute feed rotary axes Tio G37 Geo Thread general 90 G2 Circular movement 112 G38 Geo Feed rate reduction 93 G204 Waiting for time 170 G39 Geo Attributes for overlay elements 94 G26 Spindle speed limit 113 G3 Geo Circular arc g5 G3 Circular movement 112 G401 Geo Linear pattern on front f
183. H Type of surface texture see also DIN 4768 H 1 General roughness profile depth Rt1 H 2 Average roughness Ra H 3 Mean roughness Rz RH Peak to valley height um inch mode pinch 92 CEP G10 G38 G52 G95 and G149 Geo apply for basic contour elements G1 G2 G3 G12 and G13 Geo not for chamfers rounding arcs that are programmed in connection with basic contour elements The auxiliary commands of the contour description influence the finishing feed rate of the Cycles G869 and G890 not the finishing feed rate in recessing cycles Precision stop is used for basic contour elements that are executed with G890 or G840 Programming notes G10 Geo is modal G95 Geo or G10 Geo without parameters switch the peak to valley height off G10 RH without H overwrites the peak to valley height blockwise G38 Geo overwrites the peak to valley height block by block E The peak to valley height applies only to basic contour elements 4 DIN PLUS special feed rate active feed rate E Feed rate reduction factor G38 Geo The special feed rate is valid only for 4 Special feed rate for G890 basic contour elements Parameters Programming notes E Special feed factor 0 lt E lt 1 default 1 G38 is a non modal function Oo Q G38 is programmed before the contour element for which it is destined G38 replaces another special feed rate or programmed peak to valley height
184. HEIDENHAIN a li ll eae j H contour Tj Fors tfipettern tii Figure 3 Fransoa H DIN 76 m mMm 2 Arpi T H H S88 886 000A DEED NC Software 368 650 xx V7 User s Manual English en 10 2004 Data input keypad Manual operating mode Automatic mode Programming modes DIN PLUS simulation TURN PLUS Organization modes parameter service transfer Display error status Call the info system ESC escape Go back by one menu level Close dialog box do not save INS insert Insert list element Close dialog box save data ALT alter Change the list element DEL delete Deletes the list element deletes the selected character or the character to the left of the cursor a Numbers for value input and soft key selection SHO OEoeeB Decimal point Minus as algebraic sign Be Continue key for special functions e g marking Arrow keys Page forward page backward Change to previous next screen page Change to previous next dialog box Switch between input windows Enter Confirmation of input Machine operating panel a Cycle Start Cycle Stop EI Feed Stop E Spindle Stop y Spindle on M3 M4 direction gt gt Fm Spindle jog M3 M4 direction The M spindle turns until you press the key N Manual direction keys X X 5 Manual direction keys Z Z Manual direction keys Y Y Rapid traverse key
185. IN program certain program section codes are already entered You can add new codes or delete existing ones depending on your program requirements A DIN program must contain at least the MACHINING and END section codes NC blocks start with the letter N followed by a block number with up to four digits The block numbers do not affect the sequence In which the program blocks are executed They are only intended for identifying the individual blocks The NC blocks of the PROGRAM HEAD TURRET and CHUCKING EQUIPMENT sections are not included in the block number organization of the DIN editor An NC block contains NC commands such as positioning switching or organizational commands Traversing and switching commands begin with G or M followed by a number G1 G2 G81 M3 M30 and the address parameters Organizational commands consist of key words WHILE RETURN etc or of a combination of letters numbers You can also program NC blocks containing only variable calculations You can program various NC commands in an NC block provided that they do not contain the same address letters and do not have opposing functionalities Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 63 5 z re 5 O gt 4 1 Programming Examples Permissible combination N10 G1 X100 Z2 M8 Impermissible combination N10 G1 X100 Z2 G2 X100 Z2 R30 same address letters used more than once or
186. LUS Debug drop down menu If you use variables to machine the workpiece you can show and edit them with the debug functions see 5 8 Checking the NC Program Run 206 5 Graphic Simulation 5 5 Motion Simulation The motion simulation depicts the workpiece blank material as a filled surface and machines it during simulation by erasing the material The tools move at the programmed feed rate program run graphics You can Interrupt the motion simulation at any time even during simulation of an NC block The display below the simulation window indicates the target position of the current path If other simulation windows are activated In addition to the lathe window the machining process is shown as track display graphics in the supplementary windows Protection zone and limit switch monitoring In addition to the setting in the simulation the protection zone monitoring is also switched on in the machine parameter 205 Monitoring on off You set the protection zone dimensions in the Setup mode Manual Control operating mode The dimensions are managed in the machine parameters 1116 Visual limit switch monitoring Depending on the limit switch for slide x setting slide settings dialog box the motion simulation shows the positions of the software limit switches relative to the tool point red rectangle That simplifies monitoring the traverse paths near the wo
187. LUS machines in the selected area Io avoid collision the select machining area is reduced by the cutting limitation function The machining cycle accounts for the safety clearance SAR SIR machining parameter 2 in front of the remaining material Defining the cutting limitation gt Position the tool so that it moves on the same side as the residual material Selecting the machining range gt Select the starting point of the remaining material as the position of the cutting limitation see figure Danger of collision The residual material is machined without monitoring for collision Check the cutting limits and the angle of approach given in the Cycle parameter roughing dialog box Residual roughing hollowing longitudinal transverse Parameters P Cutting depth maximum infeed A Approach angle reference Z axis Longitudinal Default 0 180 parallel to Z axis Plan default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis WW Departure angle reference Z axis Longitudinal Default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis Transverse Default 0 180 parallel to Z axis KL Cutting limit Type of oversize is selected by soft key per Softkey I K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contours Yes No Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290
188. LUS you can define whether the X axis values are to be interpreted as diameters or radii Lathes with Y axis The Y axis is perpendicular to the X axis and Z axis Cartesian system When programming paths of traverse remember to Program a positive value to depart the workpiece Program a negative value to approach the workpiece Coordinate system The coordinates entered for the principal axes X Y and Z are referenced to the workpiece zero point exceptions to this rule will be indicated Angles entered for the C axis are referenced to the zero point of the C axis precondition the C axis has been configured as a principal axis Absolute coordinates If the coordinates of a position are referenced to the workpiece zero point they are referred to as absolute coordinates Each position ona workpiece is clearly defined by its absolute coordinates HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 1 4 ungamo ee 5 m lt q Incremental coordinates Incremental coordinates are always referenced to the last programmed position They specify the distance from the last active position and the subsequent position Each position on a workpiece is clearly defined by its incremental coordinates Polar coordinates Positions located on the face or lateral surface can either be entered in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates When programming with polar coordinates a position on the workpiece is c
189. Linear distance from starting to end point Reference of ai Angle between an imaginary line intersecting the starting point and parallel to the XK axis and another line from the starting point to the end point Parameters center of arc a Center in Cartesian coordinates biais Difference from starting point to center point in XK YK direction B PM Center in polar coordinates reference angle b positive XK axis Bi PMi Center polar incremental PMi linear distance from starting point to center reference of Bi angle between imaginary line intersecting the starting point and parallel to the XK axis and another line from the starting point to the center Continued P HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 End point must not be the starting point no full circle 243 m 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours Other parameters R Arc radius my Tangential nontangential Specify the transition to the ee next contour element Angle parameters WA Angle between positive XK axis and tangent in starting point of arc WE Angle between positive XK axis and tangent in end point of arc WV Angle between preceding element and tangent in the starting point of the arc WN Angle between tangent in arc end point and following element WV WN The angle leads from the preceding succeeding element counterclockwise to the new element Arc as preceding succeeding element Angle to tangent Single hole Reference poin
190. Location machining location With the submachining and the machining location you can refine the machining specification If you do not define the submachining operation machining location the AWG generates working blocks for all submachining operations machining locations The following table lists the recommended combinations of main machining operations with submachining operations and machining locations and explains the working method of the AWG The following factors additionally influence the working plan Contour geometry Contour attributes Tool availability Machining parameters The AWG does not generate the working blocks if any required preparatory step is missing or if the appropriate tool is not available etc TURN PLUS skips machining operations machining sequences that do not make sense in the machining process Rear face machining full surface machining Rear face machining Is initiated by the main machining and submachining operation Cutting off Full surface machining or by Rechucking Full surface machining You can define further machining operations for machining the rear face after Parting Rechucking When no further main machining operations are defined after Cutting off Rechucking TURN PLUS uses the machining sequence defined for the front face for machining the rearface HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Transfer c A TURN PLUS alwa
191. MO amp 12 3456 T89 Linear axis 6 3 H HNH HNH DEMO T 12 3456 785 Linear axis T 4 H HNH HAH DEMO amp i 3456 789 Linear axie amp 3H HNH je HNH DEHO 9 12 3456 Tso Linear axie 43 4 J HNH p HNH DEMO 18 12 3456 789 Linear axic 18 4 j HNH X 200 002 T eo K es oii 2 moon H un eit ce Z 100 001 Se Z 100 001 Zur B ai 7 YI 10 001 Cement i ee this 1 16 Sep 62 18 48 04 e Edit Help Display Pending Acknowldged All document selection actions actions actions Display Part 2 of the actions list A EA Help Call comprehensive description of the action Display Part 1 of the actions list document Display Switch to the soft key row Type status of actions selection Back Switch back to the maintenance system soft key row Cleaning Inspection Maintenance Fala oe AR Repair Mm r before the symbol The maintenance system is deactivated 9 Service and Diagnosis Selecting the list You can open the list Maintenance and Repair Tasks according to the following criteria all List of all maintenance tasks actions List of the pending current and Pending i OORE overdue maintenance tasks Display Switch the soft key row to Type A T Status of Tasks Type of tasks List of repair tasks List of maintenance tasks List of inspection tasks List of cleaning tasks A f Status of the tasks List of the current and overdue maintenance tasks
192. NC programs Alternately you can machine your workpiece in DIN PLUS with linear and circular movements and simple turning cycles as you are accustomed to in conventional DIN programming Both TURN PLUS and DIN PLUS support machining with the C axis or Y axis and full surface machining The Graphic Simulation feature enables you to subject your NC programs to a realistic test The CNC PILOT displays the machining of up to 4 workpieces in the working space Workpiece blanks and finished parts chucking equipment and tools are shown to scale You can program your NC programs and test them even during machining operations directly on the machine Regardless of whether you are machining a simple or complex part producing a single part or a series of parts or a whole batch on a turning center the CNC PILOT always gives you optimum support 1 Introduction and Fundamentals The C axis With a C axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on its front back and lateral surfaces During use of the C axis one axis interpolates linearly or circularly with the spindle in the given working pla ne while the third axis interpolates linearly The CNC PILOT supports part program creation with the C axis in DIN PLUS TURN PLUS contour definition TURN PLUS working plan generation TheY axis With a Y axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on Its front back and lateral surfaces During use of the Y axis two axes interpolate linearly
193. NTOON acc 240 Oversize Blockwise Gb2 Geo 94 Contour parallel equidistant G58 119 Paraxial G57 119 Switch off G50 118 TURN PLUS attribute 263 XIV Parallel editing DIN PLUS 65 Parallel work 60 Parameter C axis parameters 341 Control parameters 344 Editing 300 Linear axis parameters 342 Machine parameters Siow Machining parameters 399 Parameter groups 334 Protected parameters 336 Setup parameters 351 Spindle parameters 339 Parameter description subprograms 182 Parameter values reading DIN PLUS 175 Parameterdependent zero shift e540 Oi pac 116 Parameters operating resources Transferring 416 Parting IWG Standard machining 292 Parting tool 371 Password 398 Path 411 Patterns DIN PLUS Circular front rear face G402 Geo 101 Circular lateral side G412 Geo 106 Linear front rear face G401 Geo 100 Linear lateral surface G411 Geo 106 TURN PLUS Circular front rear face 248 Circular lateral surface 255 Linear front rear face 248 Linear lateral surface 254 Peak to valley height Index DIN PLUS command G10 Geo 92 Machining parameters 308 TURN PLUS attribute 263 Peripheral interfaces 433 PLC message 18 Pocket milling Finishing G846 157 Milling contour pocket 95 Roughi
194. No Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Bidirectional Cutting with cycle Yes G835 No G830 Q Retraction at cycle end Q 0 Return to starting point Longitudinal first X then Z direction Transverse First Z then X direction Q 1 Positions in front of the finished contour O 2 Lifts off to safety clearance and stops Undercutting see soft key table HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 293 z c 2 J lt c g c amp 6 12 Interactive Worki j 6 12 5 Recessing Recessing sequence type softkeys lt Overview of recessing operations Select longitudinal transverse oversize Contour recessing G860 radial axial or automatic UA or constant oversize a Recessing G866 radial axial or automatic a 2 Recess turning G869 radial axial or automatic LLL Precutting and finishing Parting cutting off Parting prepare rearside machining workpiece transfer e g prep g p Tie Precutting g EES inish machining c Contour recessing radial axial G860 For form elements Recess general relief turns recess type F and freely defined recesses Parameters X he Cutting limit Type of oversize is set by soft key l K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle vy w 2 a S d N aie co Process Setting by soft key Pre cutting and finishing in
195. O trapezoidal thread DIN 103 Part 2 Series 1 Flat metric trapezoidal thread DIN 380 Part 2 Series 1 Metric buttress thread DIN 513 Part 2 Series 1 Cylindrical round thread DIN 405 Part 1 Series 1 Cylindrical Whitworth thread DIN 11 TaperedWhitworth thread DIN 2999 Whitworth pipe thread DIN 259 Nonstandard thread UNC US coarse thread UNF US fine thread UNEF US extra fine thread NPT US taper pipe thread NPTF US taper dryseal pipe thread NPSC US cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant US cylindrical pipe thread without lubricant Direction of rotation Right hand thread Left hand thread Select reference point Beginning of thread at starting point of element Beginning of thread at end point of element Thread pitch Threads unit The thread pitch threads per unit must be specified for the metric fine pitch thread tapered thread and tapered fine pitch thread trapezoid thread and flat trapezoid thread as well as for the nonstandard thread This parameter may be omitted for the other types of threads The thread pitch is then calculated from the diameter see section 77 7 5 Thread Pitch Variable pitch increases reduces the pitch per revolution by E default O Length of the thread including runout length Runout length for threads without undercut Division for determining the threads unit Number of thread turns default 1 Thread angle left right with nonstandard thread Thread
196. On Spindle override 100 G919 Switched the spindle speed override off on Parameters O Spindle number default O H Type of limit default O H 0 Switch on spindle override H 1 Spindle override to 100 modal H 2 Spindle override to 100 for the current NC block HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 171 e 2 m S 5 LL g e Q me S 5 LL g 4 13 Deactivate zero offsets G920 Deactivate the workpiece zero point and the zero point shifts Traverse paths and position values are referenced to the distance tool tip machine zero point Deactivate zero offsets tool lengths G921 Deactivates the workpiece zero point zero point shifts and tool dimensions Traverse paths and position values are referenced to the distance slide reference point machine zero point Lag error limit G975 Switches to Lag error limit 2 see machine parameter 1106 G975 is a modal function At the end of a program the CNC PILOT switches to the standard lag error limit Parameters Q Lag error limit default 1 H 1 Standard lag error limit H 2 Lag error limit 2 Activate zero offsets G980 Activates the workpiece zero point and all zero point shifts Traverse paths and position values are referenced to the distance tool tip workpiece zero point while taking the zero point shifts into consideration Activate zero offsets tool lengths G981 Activates
197. PILOT checks whether the tool can move into the contour valley without a collision The collision check is based on tool parameter width dn see 8 7 2 Notes on Tool Data 4 DIN PLUS T J N N O Equidistant around the barrier Omission of the first contour element if the start position is inaccessible Q 1 First X then Z direction Q 2 First Z then X direction Q 3 No approach tool is in the proximity of the starting point Q 4 Residual finishing Retraction default 3 Tool lifts off under 45 in the opposite direction to machining and moves as follows to the position I K H 0 Diagonal H 1 First X then Z direction H 2 First Z then X direction H 3 Remains at safety clearance H 4 No retraction movement tool remains at the end coordinate Cutting limit diameter default no cutting limit Cutting limit default no cutting limit Omit element influences the machining of undercuts relief turns and recessing see table default 1 End point that is appropriate at the end of the cycle diameter value Feed rate reduction default O O 0 No feed rate reduction O 1 Feed rate reduction active Undercuts undercut combinations can be omitted as follows SEO or R WI NwN JO e Skip elements HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Cutting limitation The tool position before the cycle call determines the effect of a cutting limit Th
198. PLUS In this operating mode the following operating resource and technology parameters are managed in addition see Chapter 8 Operating Resources Tool parameters Chucking equipment parameters Technology parameters cutting values This Manual describes parameters that can be changed by the user system manager user class Other parameters are explained in the Technical Manual Data transfer and data backup The CNC PILOT supports data exchange of parameters and associated fixed word lists All parameters are included for data backup Data transfer and data backup occur in the Transfer mode of operation see 70 4 Parameters and Operating Resources 338 200 002 100 001 100 001 Current Parameters frequently used parameters selectable via menu Param eterlists of the PLC group setup and machining Toolparameters Description of the tools see 8 7 Tool Database Chuckparameters Description of the chucking equipment see 8 2 Chucking Equipment Database Technology parameter see 8 3 Technology database cutting values Configuration contains all parameters can only be accessed by system manager Input Output and parameter backup 7 Parameters 7 1 2 Editing Parameters Active Parameters An overview of frequently used parameters are presented in the Cur rent para meter drop down menu so that you can select them without having to know the parameter
199. PLUS manipulates the contour accordingly Contour Inserts several contour elements at the selected point Select Select point Confirm soft key TURN PLUS activates the element input gt Select and define the desired elements TURN PLUS manipulates the contour accordingly 260 6 TURN PLUS 6 7 6 Transformations Transformations drop down menu The transtormation functions are used for turning contours contours on the end face or lateral surface etc Turning contour The original contour is deleted and the complete turning contour is transformed Contours on the end face lateral surface etc Define whether you wish to delete the original contour or copy and transform it Shift Shifts the contour to the given position or incrementally reference point contour starting point Parameters X Z Target point Xi Z Target point incremental Turning TURN PLUS turns the contour about the center of rotation by the angle of rotation Parameters KL Center of rotation in Cartesian coordinates a P Center of rotation in polar coordinates WW Angle of rotation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Polar dimensioning Angle a Polar dimensions Radius Polar dimensions end point Angle B Polar dimensions end point Radius 261 lating Contours 5 lating Contours Manipu Mirroring You define the position of the mirror axis through the starting and end poi
200. RN PLUS displays the selected chucking equipment and the cutting limit red line Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 ce You can set change the cutting limits If you do not use clamp TURN PLUS assumed standard values You define the chucking equipment for the second setup after machining the first Serup When the workpiece is clamped at the spindle and the tailstock TURN PLUS assumes shaft machining see also 6 16 9 Shaft Machining Select first the type of chuck and the jaw type TURN PLUS takes these data into account in the selection of the ID number of the chuck jaw 277 6 11 Prepare 6 11 Prepare Parameters for two jaw three jaw or four jaw chucks Chuck identification number Chuck type Define the chuck type and steps Clamp form Define the inside outside clamp and clamp step Jaw identification number Clamping length Ascertained from the jaw and the clamp form Correct this value if the clamping length is different Clamping pressure is transferred to the PROGRAM HEAD TURN PLUS does not evaluate the parameter Jaw adjusting dimension Distance between outer edge of chuck and outer edge of jaw Negative value The jaw projects from the chuck the dimension is for your information Select clamping range button Defines where to position the chuck In the case of contours with chamfers roundings or arcs tag the section around the corner to be clamped In the c
201. See sketch Zero point shift VV Shift of the NC zero point calculation distance from reference point on chuck to dead stop on chuck jaw finished part length Finished part length LF From the workpiece description With TURN PLUS 2 1 Prepare work on the opposing spindle switch on conversions zero point shift etc see also 6 77 Prepare 298 Start execution of the wo rk block T Transfer parameters in expert program with m gt 5 Tuan PLus E3 Poraneter other name bepoa_kb Zx main view IMG Parting Full surface P Parting see sketch A Tool HH cutting dete H tucie le 334 Single bioch HH start Hj putomatie we ATTE CHOETUZA e Spindle speed limitation LA for the parting process orenzanibosrara ca BIIN roa pos red Uors p Eu m O Feed rate reduction LB Feed value for the last Vorchubreduzier LB 0 3 am U EndpositionX R 2 m _ part of the parting operation iinkelsynchron ic Startposition Z 108 3 rn ithe lversats LG I 5 Bea Fosi of oz U E uga D Jaw rinsing K see machine manual F stanechlag EI Nulipunktwer 2 fm Starting position X O For the parting operation paeninamee Sirri e Ea i i d value from the workpiece PeT EE mEAEa at fi See Propose Va U g p Has Vorechubiirg Ep am Turn Pluie Ja 1 a g description Relic ee Position for reduced feed X P From this position aaa E Stertposition X oO lez om traverse is at reduced feed
202. The definition of the variable display is an alternative to programming with INPUTA PRINTA commands 4 4 2 TURRET TURRET x x 1 6 defines the turret assignment of tool carrier x You enter the ID number directly Tools dialog box or you take it from the tool database You can access the tool database with the Type list or ID list soft key Alternately you can define the tool parameters in the NC program Enter the tool data gt Select Head Turret assignment gt Position the cursor in the TURRET section gt Press the INS key gt Edit the Tool dialog box Edit the tool data gt Position the cursor Press RETURN or double click with the left mouse key gt Edit the Tool dialog box Parameters of the Tool dialog box E T number Position on the tool carrier ID ID number Reference to the database no input Data saved in the database as temporary tools Continued gt 80 ea J man mE nae i POF a j i Hi en Ob Ie Bleek Ia Bl LLI Config Gerson 4 SOT OT rimini e FE eE ph Tle r n E etl hal mm Dasig i omi ET won ee a mr ammm y L bai Pte ha ee ae El Definition of run time variables in actual value display Access to the tool database by soft key EA Edit the tool parameters Eoy Entries in the tool database sorted by tool type K Entries in the tool database sorted by tool ID number 4 DIN PLUS Exten
203. The machining functions GO G1 G2 G3 G12 and G13 are modal This means that the CNC PILOT uses the previous G command if the address parameters X Y Z or K in the following block have been programmed without a G function provided that the address parameters have been programmed as absolute values Continued P HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 p emt Switch the NC program Switch the NC program Switch the editing window Select full size window one editing window Select double or triple window 65 O z z E O O gt 4 2 Basic The CNC PILOT supports the use of variables and mathematical expressions as address parameters O z z pe O O pe Editing address parameters gt Call the dialog box Place the cursor in the required input box E Enter edit values or m CONTINUE soft key The Extended input dialog box appears E Program simplified geometry programming E Switch from Incremental to Absolute or vice versa A ome E Activate the input of variables X 82 315 T 4r per 4 2 Basic 4 2 3 Contour Programming The contour follow up function and contourturning cycles require the previous description of the blank and finished part For milling and drilling with the C orY axis contour definition is a precondition if you wish to use fixed cycles Remember with Contours for turning m Describe a continuous contour
204. VER 1 TURRET TI ID 512 000 10i T2 1D 111 80 080 1 T3 1D 514 600 10 T4 1D 121 55 040 1 T6 1D 115 80 080 1 T8 1I1D 125 55 040 1 SPANNMITTEL 1 CHUCKING EQUIPMENT zero point shift Z233 H1 ID 3BACK H2 ID KBA250 86 X100 Q4 SPANNMITTEL 4 CHUCKING EQUIPMENT Zero point shift Z196 H1 ID 3BACK H2 ID WBA240 50 X80 Q4 ROHTEIL BLANK N1 G20 X100 Z100 K1 FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART STIRN Z0 FRONT N13 G308 P 1 N14 G100 XK 15 YK10 N15 G101 XK 10 YK 12 BO N16 G103 XK 4 0725 YK 12 6555 R3 J 12 N17 G101 XK1 YK10 N18 G101 XK10 N19 6309 RUECKSEITE Z 98 REAR SIDE 190 Example Full surface machining on single spindle counterspindle Chucking equipment for 1st set up Chucking equipment for 2nd set up 4 DIN PLUS BEARBEITUNG MACHINING N27 659 Z233 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N62 N63 N64 N65 N66 N67 N68 N69 N70 N71 N72 N73 N74 N75 N76 N77 N78 G65 H1 XO Z 135 Dl G65 H2 X100 Z 99 D1 Q4 G14 QO G26 52500 T2 G126 S4000 M5 T1 G197 S1485 Cele F0 05 M103 M14 M107 GOTX36 0555T23 G110 C146 31 G147 12 K2 G840 Q0 NS15 NE18 10 5 RO P1 GO X31 241 23 G14 QO M105 M109 M15 6605 eh lpi G65 H2 D1 2 N79 M97 2 N80 L UMKOMPL V1 LA1000 LD369 LE547 LF98 LH98 I3 1 2 N81 M97 1 N82 G65 H1 XO Z 100 D4 1 N83 G65 H2 X80 Z 63 D4 Q4 1 2 Nis G30 TAO 00 1 2 N126
205. Y X End point as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter G120 End depth diameter value default Current X position zp Programming Z C CY Absolute incremental or modal Program either Z and C or Z and CY Circular arc on lateral surface G112 G113 The tool moves in a circular arc at the feed rate to the end point Direction of rotation see help graphic Parameters Z End point C Final angle angular dimension CY Endpoint as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter G120 R Radius K W Position angle to midpoint J Center point coordinate as a linear value referenced to unrolled G120 reference diameter X End depth diameter value default Current X position pP Programming Z C CY absolute incremental or modal K W J Absolute or incremental Program either Z C andK W or Z CY and K J Program either center or radius With Radius Only circular arcs lt 180 are possible HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Circular arc G112 Circular arc G113 151 illing Cycles 4 11 Milling Cycle Group Contour milling G840 G840 mills finishes engraves or deburrs figures or free contours open or closed in the following program sections FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE NS NE defines the contour section and the contour direction NE is not programmed for closed contours
206. ace 100 G30 Convert and mirror 169 G402 Geo Circular pattern on front face 101 G31 Thread cycle ss 140 G411 Geo Linear pattern on lateral surface 106 G32 Simple thread cycle 141 G412 Geo Circular pattern on lateral surface 106 G33 Thread single path 142 G49 Geo Bore hole centric 91 G36 Tapping 146 G7 Geo Precision stop on 92 G4 Dwell time 168 G95 Geo Feed per revolution 94 G40 Switch off TRC MCRC 115 G9 Geo Precision stop blockwise 92 G41 Switch on TRC MCRC 115 G functions for machining G42 Switch on TRC MCRC 115 GO Rapid traverse 110 G47 Safety clearance 118 G1 Linear movement 444 G48 Acceleration slope Ti G100 Rapid traverse front face rear side 149 G50 Switch off oversize 118 G101 Linear front face rear side 149 G51 Zero point displacement 116 G102 Arc front face rear side 149 G52 Switch off oversize 119 G103 Arc front face rear side 149 G53 Parameterdependent zero point shift 116 G110 Rapid traverse lateral surface 150 G54 Parameterdependent zero point shift 116 G111 Linear lateral surface 151 G55 Parameterdependent zero point shift 116 G112 Circular lateral surface 151 G56 Zero point shift additive ss 117 G113 Circular lateral surface 151 G57 Oversize paraxial 119 G119 Select C axis 148 G58 Oversize contourparallel 119
207. ached saves the position and retracts by the reversing path to reduce forces Application example Transter a premachined workpiece to a second traveling spindle if you do not know the exact position of the workpiece In machine parameters 1012 1112 1162 define the following Servo lag limit to detect the dead stop Reversing path The CNC PILOT Sets the feed rate override to 100 Moves to the dead stop and stops as soon as the servo lag error is reached the path remaining is deleted Saves the dead stop position in the variables V901 V918 Retracts by the reversing path Generates and interpreter stop Programming notes Position the slide at a sufficient distance before the stop Program G916 in the G1 positioning block Program G1 as follows Target position lies behind the dead stop Move only one axis Feed per minute must be active G94 As of software version 368 650 08 the traversing to a dead stop function can also be used for C axes Controlled parting using lag error monitoring G917 The controlled parting function cut off control prevents collisions caused by incomplete parting processes G917 monitors the path of traverse Application Parting control Move the workpiece in the positive Z direction after it has been cut off If a lag error occurs the workpiece is defined as follows No cut off Smooth parting control Move the workpiece in the negative Z direction after
208. age or page down key next info page 2 Basics of Operation 2 3 The Error System 2 3 1 Direct Error Messages Direct error messages appear whenever immediate error correction is possible Confirm the message by pressing ENTER and correct the error Example The input value of the parameter is out of range Information of the error message E Error description Explains the error E Error number For service inquiries m Time of day When the error occurred for your information Warning The program run operation continues The CNC PILOT indicates the problem Error The program run operation is stopped You must correct the error before you can continue the current job 2 3 2 Error Display PLC Display Error Display If during the system start or during program run or other operation an error occurs It is indicated in the date box displayed in the status line and saved in the error display The date and time remain highlighted in red until all of the errors have been canceled Notes on using TURN PLUS Opens the error display Further information on the error marked with I the cursor Exits the error display Deletes the error message marked with the cursor Deletes all error messages Continued HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 887 Angular offset measuring 8608 Cut off control 09 Load monitoring 810 Turret switching 811 Standard set 812 Tapping 813 Synchronous
209. aining piece number is 1 Bit 0 No Bit 1 Yes Bits 9 to 16 are for general information 4 DIN PLUS V921 Angular offset of G906 spindle synchronization TOIL COURIC a V922 V923 Result of G905 offset C angle from the unit counter in the machine V982 Error number of G912 actual value determination for in display process measurement X values are saved as radius values V300 Result of G991 controlled parting Note Functions G901 G902 G903 G912 and G916 overwrite the variable Examples for V variables This also applies to variables that have not yet been evaluated N Vi M1 Z 300 Sets machine dimension 1 Z to 300 N GO Z M1 Z Moves to machine dimension 1 Z oes Slide 1 V901 V902 V903 AeA EINES O Interrogates external event 1 bit 1 Slide 2 V904 V905 V906 oe Slide 3 V907 V908 V909 Na vwolKl ES Sets compensation X for tool 5 Slide 4 V910 V911 V912 E E e Slide 6 V916 Y917 V918 N G1 X V12 C axis 1 V919 C axis 2 V920 Note on interpreter stop G909 The CNC PILOT pre interprets approx 15 to 20 NC blocks It ce Program an Interpreter stop if A i variables or external events are modified variables are assigned shortly before the evaluation old values shortly before the block is run would be processed An interpreter stop ensures that the variables contain the new value Each interpreter stop lengthens the run time of the NC progr
210. al to inform yourself of the meaning of the parameters and the process of the expert program TURN PLUS determines the parameters as far as possible and enters them as default values Check edit or enter the values Parameters Bar diameter LA Starting point in Z LB TURN PLUS uses the position that you defined when selecting the machining range Chamfter rounding LC lt 0 Width of chamfer gt 0 Radius of rounding Feed rate reduction from X LD Feed rate is reduced for the last path the reduced feed rate is defined in the expert program Diameter of finished part LE for determining the position of the chamfer rounding Inside diameter LF The expert program moves past this position in order to ensure a proper parting operation 0 for a solid bar gt 0 for a tube Safety clearance LH to starting position X Cutting width I is usually not evaluated Parting and tool transfer TURN PLUS activates an expert program from machining parameter 21 for parting and for workpiece transfer Which expert program is used depends on the entry 1st setup of spindle 2nd setup of spindle in the program header Same spindle manual rechucking Enter UP ABHAND Different spindles transfer of workpiece to the opposing spindle Enter UP UMKOMPLA Expert programs are provided by the machine tool builder That is why there may be deviations in the parameters described below Use the expert pr
211. am Subprograms can be nested up to 6 times Nesting means that another subprogram is called from within a subprogram Recursion should be avoided You can add up to 20 transfer values to a subprogram The designations parameter designations are LAg IEE CH a KOR Ry gt UA YZ The transfer values are available as variables within the subprogram The identification code is _ followed by the parameter designation in lowercase letters for example __la You can use the transfer values when programming with variables within the subprogram The variables 256 285 are available in every Subprogram as local variables If a subprogram is to be executed repeatedly define in the number repeats Q parameter the number of times the subprogram is to be repeated A subprogram ends with RETURN Dialog texts You can define the parameter descriptions that precede follow the input fields in an external subprogram The CNC PILOT automatically sets the unit of measure for parameter values to the metric system or inches Max 19 descriptions the parameter descriptions can be positioned within the subprogram as desired 182 gt DIN PLUS M Parameter tile jis K T4 GO 250 729 5 Subprogram call 1 21 N Te Miaa Nane of peoorma i L 5 Gewindeschneiden zylindrisch aussen 1 TT TS i External 1 u f r n io SMB Stangendurchn ta am P N 31 G0 Kaa z2 Startpunkt in 2 Le
212. am Several G functions include the interpreter stop G909 stops the pre interpretation The NC blocks are processed up to G909 after G909 the subsequent NC blocks are processed 4 15 3 Program Branches Program Repeats Logical operators for IF and WHILE Conditional Block Execution lt Less than V variables are included during simulation The V variables can be g Less than or equal assigned values Thus all branches of your NC program can be tested lt gt Not equal You can combine up to two conditions gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal E IF you program branches on the basis of V variables ual u there must not be any variables in the program SLIME Combining conditions AND Logical AND operation OR Logical OR operation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 179 rogramming IF THEN ELSE ENDIF program branches A conditional branch consists of the elements E IF followed by a condition In the case of conditions variables or mathematical expressions are defined to the left and to the right of relational operators E THEN when the condition is fulfilled the THEN branch is executed m ELSE when the condition is not fulfilled the ELSE branch is executed m ENDIF concludes the conditional program branch Programming notes gt Select IF Machining menu Instructions DIN PLUS words gt Enter the desired condition only enter the required brackets gt Insert NC blocks
213. ams Template files DIN PLUS templates TURN PLUS complete workpiece blank and finished part description and work plan TURN PLUS workpieces workpiece blank finished part description TURN PLUS workpiece blanks blank description TURN PLUS finished parts finished part description TURN PLUS contour trains description of contour trains TURN PLUS Turr et lists TURN PLUS Mach ining seqg uence Parameter files PARA_USR directory Parameter backup BACKUP directory Program head lists subtiles for program head entries HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 1 5 gt TURN PLUS l Ejservice Diag osis Logican Enabling password Enabling name PARA_USR CPS TR TH TT E Read the password A gt Write the password aa X 497 282 T Otro Y a Kmi 0 Z 160 001 pS am E 7 20116 05 7 _ 0 w 0 999 C a n ie af Di Diii r 17 5ep 02 S S a a a e Danger of collision Other computer systems in the network may overwrite CNC PILOT programs When organizing the network and granting access rights ensure that only authorized persons have access to the CNC PILOT NCPS NC main programs and subprograms template files GTR Workpiece blank descriptions TURN PLUS GTF Finished part descriptions TURN PLUS GTW Workpiece descriptions TURN PLUS GTC Complete programs TURN PLUS GTT Contour train descriptions TURN PLUS GTL Turret lists TURN PLUS GTB Machin
214. an Generation IWG LF Different longitudinal transverse oversize generates oversize G57 before the cycle is Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contours Yes No E Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Retraction Yes Set the type of retraction by soft key No H 4 Tool remains at the end coordinate H Type of retraction define by soft key I K Retraction position with H 0 1 or 2 Form element machining with Define by soft key the form elements chamfers etc to be machined i7 a 2 eo Q ams Pur N a co zp The CNC PILOT finds the proposed value of the retraction position I K depending on whether you program Cycle Approach Programmed Position from Cycle Approach Not programmed Position of the tool change point 304 6 TURN PLUS Finishing Hollowing neutral tool G890 O 4 The IWG machines recess areas determined with the aid of the Inward copying angle recesses inward copying angle lt mtw During automatic generation URN PLUS selects a neutral finishing tool Options parameters Keds Cutting limit Type of oversize is set by soft key LF Different longitudinal transverse oversize generates oversize G57 before the cycle L Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contour
215. and second numeral Type of tool Third numeral Tool position main machining direction Setting dimensions xe ze Distance from tool reference point to tool carrier reference point Tool carrier reference point see machine manual Compensation values DX DZ DS compensate for the wear of the cutting edge For recessing and button tools DS stands for the compensation value of the third side of the tool away from the tool reference point Cutting length sl Length of cutting insert Check the contour cycles as to whether the tool can perform the required cutting job Influences tool selection inTURN PLUS Is evaluated for simulating the cutting path and depicting the tool Secondary machining direction NBR Defines the directions in which the tool works In addition to the main direction The contour cycles check whether the tool is suitable for the respective machining operation Influences the tool selection inTURN PLUS For the secondary machining direction the AWG uses The secondary feed rate see 8 3 Technology Database Cutting Values a reduced cutting depth see machining parameter 4 SRF Direction of rotation defines the direction of spindle rotation for the tool defines whether the tool is a driven non driven tool The contourbased cycles check whether the tool is suitable for the respective machining operation The direction of rotation influences tool selection inTURN PLUS It also defines the
216. anger of collision During hollowing operations on the inside of contours the plunging depth of the toolis not checked Select suitable tools 6 16 5 Inside Contours TURN PLUS machines continuous inside contours up to the transition from the deepest point to a greater diameter In addition TURN PLUS accounts for Cutting limitation inside Overhang length inside ULI machining parameter 4 when determining the end position for drilling roughing and finishing operations TURN PLUS assumes that the usable tool length is sufficient for the respective machining operation if not the inside contour is machined according to the tool parameter 326 6 TURN PLUS Limits for internal machining operations Predrilling SBI limits the drilling operation Roughing SBI or SU limit the roughing operation SU basic length of roughing cut sbl overhang length inside ULI To avoid residual rings during the machining process TURN PLUS leaves an area of 5 in front of the roughing limit Finishing sbl limits the finishing operation The illustrations show the dimensions a the drilling operation b the roughing operation c and the finishing operation d Example 1 The roughing limit SU is in front of the inside cutting limit SBI Example 2 The roughing limit SU is behind the inside cutting limit SBI Abbreviations SBI Cutting limitation inside SU Roughing limitation SU sbl ULI s
217. anging the cutter compensation G148 OQ defines the values compensating for wear On program start and after al command DX DZ are active Parameters O Selection default O O 0 DX DZ active DS inactive O 1 DS DZ active DX inactive O 2 DX DS active DZ inactive The recessing cycles G860 G866 G869 automatically take the correct wear compensation into account Additive compensation G149 The CNC PILOT manages 16 tool independent compensation values A G149 followed by a D number activates the compensation G149 D900 switches the compensation off Parameters D Additive compensation default D900 range 900 916 Programming notes The compensation becomes effective after the tool has moved in the compensation direction by the compensation value Therefore program G149 one block before the block containing the path of traverse to which the compensation Is to apply An additive compensation remains effective until The next G149 D900 The next tool change The end of the program 120 ID 112 25 080 1 ID 111 80 080 1 ID 122 12 040 1 ID 111 80 120 1 ID 121 55 040 1 ID 143 16 200 2 ID Ss42 4007 1 REVOLVER 2 T 101 1D 111 80 080 1 T number ME OK Cancel Example N G1 Z 25 FOGIAOD90 GIG te N G1 Z 50 N G149 D900 Activate the compensation Move compensation Position X50 compensation Compensation is a
218. angle The hole can contain the following elements Centering Core drilling Countersinking Thread Centering parameters O Centering diameter HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 251 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours Core hole parameter B Hole diameter P Hole depth depth of hole and countersink without drill point and center point W Point angle We 0 Feed rate reduction V 1 W gt 0 Point angle Fit H6 H13 or none see 6 76 6 Drilling Countersinking parameters R Countersinking diameter Di Countersinking depth Countersinking angle Thread parameters Nominal diameter A Thread depth K Thread runout length Thread pitch Thread type Right hand left hand 252 6 TURN PLUS Circle full circle Parameters Z Center of the figure CY Center of the figure angle as linear dimension C Center of figure angle R Radius K Diameter of circle P Depth of the figure Rectangle Parameters 7 Center of the figure CY Center of the figure angle as linear dimension Ss Center of figure angle A Angle to longitudinal axis of rectangle reference Z axis K Length of rectangle B Width of rectangle Bt Chamfter rounding Width of chamfer Radius of rounding P Depth of the figure Polygon Parameters Z Center of the figure GY Center of the figure angle as linear dimension D Center of figure angle A Angle to a polygon side ref
219. aphic type Tool path depicts paths of traverse with solid line reference theoretical tool tip Cutting path depicts the surface covered by the cutting area of the tool with hatch marks The cutting path graphic accounts for the exact geometry of the tool tip cutting radius cutting width tool tip position etc The graphic simulation is based on the tool data Erasing graphics The blank part is displayed as a filled area from which material is removed during the machining process HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 323 on 6 15 Configuration Machining Information co 6 16 Machining Information 6 16 1 Tool Selection Turret Assignment The tool selection is determined by The machining direction The contour to be machined The machining sequence If the ideal tool is not available TURN PLUS first searches for a replacement tool then for an emergency tool If necessary TURN PLUS adapts the machining cycle to the requirements of the replacement or emergency tool If more than one tool is suitable for a machining operation TURN PLUS uses the optimal tool TURN PLUS does not support multiple tools except tools for drilling combinations Contour recessing recess turning Cutting radius must be smaller than the smallest inside radius of the recess contour but gt 0 2 mm TURN PLUS determines the width of the recessing tool as follows The recess contour contains Paraxial base element wit
220. arameters F Thread pitch no value Pitch from the standard table Thread general G37 Geo Defines the different types of thread Multi start threads and concatenated threads are possible Threads are concatenated by programming several G01 G34 blocks after each other Parameters O Type of thread default 1 Q 1 Metric ISO fine pitch thread DIN 13 Part 2 Series 1 Q 2 Metric ISO thread DIN 13 Part 1 Series 1 Q 3 Metric ISO taper thread DIN 158 OQ 4 Metric ISO tapered fine pitch thread DIN 158 Q 5 Metric ISO trapezoid thread DIN 103 Part 2 ies 1 Q 10 TaperedWhitworth thread DIN 2999 Q 11 Whitworth pipe thread DIN 259 Q 12 Nonstandard thread Q 13 UNC US coarse thread Q 14 UNF US fine pitch thread Continued gt 90 as You need to program a linear contour element as a reference before G34 or in the NC block containing G34 The thread is machined with G31 Program a linear contour element as a reference before G37 The thread is machined with G31 For standardized threads the CNC PI LOT defines the parameters P R Aand W see 77 7 4 Thread Parameters Use O 12 if you wish to use individual parameters 4 DIN PLUS OZ mous Pra Q 15 UNEF US extra fine pitch thread Q 16 NPT US taper pipe thread Q 17 NPTF US taper dryseal pipe thread Q 18 NPSC US cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant Q 19 NPFS US cylindrical pipe thread without lubricant Thread pitc
221. area milling cycles machine the complete area specified in the contour definition Islands within this surface are not taken into consideration 95 N z Q O 4 5 Geo Commands Example for G308 G309 0 FE FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART gt 22 2 2 2 a SSTIRN ZO FRONT 0000 N7 6308 P 5 N8 G305 XK 5 YK 10 K50 B30 R3 AO 2 O N9 6308 P 10 LO mp N10 G304_ XK 3 YK 5 RB NIL G309 00 DC MANTEL X100 SURFACE gt N13 G311 Z 10 C45 AO K18 BB P 5 0 PSE EE 4 5 6 Front and Rear Face Contours Starting point of front rear face contour G100 Geo Parameters Starting point in polar coordinates diameter Starting point in polar coordinates angular dimension XK YK Starting point in Cartesian coordinates End pocket island G309 Geo End ofa reference plane Every reference plane defined with G308 must be ended with G309 co Define reference plane Beginning of rectangle with depth of 5 Rectangle Beginning of full circle in rectangle depth 10 Full circle End of full circle End of rectangle Define reference diameter Linear slot with the depth 5 4 DIN PLUS Line segment in front face rear face contour G101 Geo Parameters X End point in polar coordinates diameter C End point in polar coordinates angular dimension XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates A Angle to positive XK axis B Chamfer rounding arc
222. ary tools G73 is used for bore holes with contour definition individual bore hole or hole pattern in the following program sections FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE The starting position is calculated from the safety distance and the run in slope length B Meaning of retraction length J Use this parameter for floating tap holders The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the thread depth the programmed pitch and the retract length The nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap During tapping the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length With this method you can acheive higher service life from the taps Parameters NS Contour block number with geometry of bore hole G49 G300 G310 Geo B Slope length default Machining Parameter 7 Thread starting length GAL S Retraction speed default Tapping speed K Retraction plane radial holes holes in the YZ plane diameter default to starting position or to safety clearance J Retraction length when using floating tap holders default O HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Cycle run 1 Approach starting position at rapid traverse according to K K not programmed Approach directly to starting position K programmed Approach to K and then to Starting position 2 Move along slope length B at feed rate synchronization of spindle and feed drives 3 Cut the thread
223. ase of rectangular contours tag an element adjacent to the corner to be clamped 278 8 l 3 gt TURN PLUS E Transfer bepol ZX main view Chucking Tailsteck side 17 Cutting limitation Three jaw chuck 4 Spindle side ID number chuck KHI10 n Type jow Soft jau a one step n Clamp form opio W ID number jaw MeAz4e 9522C s Clamp length fis nm Clamp presa 25 ber Jan petting Hir Fz 5 nm Select clamp rango Recess Form 157 488 1 a a a E D 2 E D 3 D 4 7 D 5 D 6 ce 6 TURN PLUS Collet chuck parameters gt gt TURN PLUS E Transfer Chuck identification number W 3 B l bepol ZX main view Chucking Clamping diameter spindle side Unclamping length Distance between front edge of collet and right edge of blank Clamping pressure is transferred to the PROGRAM ee HEAD TURN PLUS does not evaluate the Becitesl parameter a eS al OF Recess Form 151 488 ae Sey ee a a E Parameters without chuck face drive gt TURN PLus E5 Paraneter Identification number bepol ZX main view Chucking Indentation depth Approximate depth by which the H spindle cide Ti Tailetock cide cutting limitation claws indent the material TURN PLUS uses Spindle side without chuck this value to position the graphic pac ste representing the face driver Sines Indentation depth x eceso Form 151 488 a a a a E
224. ast machining strategy first transversal then longitudinal roughing Preturned workpiece blank Working plan generation after the standard strategy In addition to standard machining cycles contourparallel roughing cycles are used Unknown or no attribute defined Working plan generation according to the standard strategy 6 9 2 Oversize The oversize e g grinding allowance is retained after the machining process has been completed TURN PLUS distinguishes between Absolute oversize s final other oversizes are ignored Relative oversize Applies additively to other oversizes Parameters Absolute oversize li Relative oversize 6 9 3 Feed rate peak to valley height Feed rate The input value applies as finishing feed rate see also 4 5 4 Auxiliary Commands of the Contour Description Feed rate reduction factor The input value is multiplied by the current feed rate HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 267 Attributes Igning T W lt Attributes igning T W lt Peak to valley height The peak to valley height is evaluated during finishing see also 4 5 4 Auxiliary Commands of the Contour Description TURN PLUS distinguishes Peak to valley height Rt general peak to valley depth profile depth Mean roughness index Ra Average roughness value Rz Additive correction The CNC PILOT manages 16 tool independent compensation values In the dialog box you enter
225. asured values to be averaged 1 50 The mean value is calculated from the number of values to be averaged This reduces the sensitivity to short term peak load during monitoring Maximum torque not used at present Reaction delay time P1 P2 0 1000 ms The system reports a limit violation as soon as the delay time for P1 or P2 limit torque 1 or 2 has been exceeded Continued gt 7 Parameters 1112 1162 Traverse to fixed stop G916 linear axis These parameters apply to the linear axis for which G916 has been programmed Evaluation G916 Traverse to fixed stop Lag error limit The slide is stopped as soon as the lag distance difference between actual and nominal position has reached the lag error limit Reversing path After a fixed stop has been reached the slide is reversed by the reversing path stress relief 1114 1164 Zero offset when converting linear axes NC zero offset Length by which the machine zero point is shifted during conversion G30 1115 1165 Controlled parting G917 linear axis These parameters apply to the linear axis for which G917 has been programmed Evaluation G917 Controlled parting using lag error monitoring Lag error limit The slide is stopped as soon as the difference between actual and nominal position has reached the lag error limit As a result the CNC PILOT generates the message Lag error detected Feed rate when moving the linear axis using lag error mo
226. atabase 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 4 Multipoint Tools Tool Life Monitoring Multipoint tools Turning tools with more than one maximal 5 cutting edges are referred to as multipoint tools In the tool database each cutting edge is given a tool definition in addition the identification numbers of the cutting edges of a Multipoint tool are linked so that a sequence is defined which comprises all cutting edges Define one of the cutting edges as primary cutting edge and the other ones as secondary cutting edges In the tool list the ID number of the primary cutting edge see 4 2 4 Tool Programming Mag azine code Not used at present Mag azine attr ibute Not used at present Multi tool Multipoint tool No No Multipoint tool Main Primary cutting edge Aux Secondary cutting edge M ID Identification number of the following cutter of a multipoint tool Mon itoring method of the tool life monitoring function see 4 2 4 Tool Programming No Tool life monitoring Quantity monitoring Tool life total Tool life of the cutting edge Tool life rem Display of remaining tool lite Quantity total Total quantity that can be produced by a tool Quantity remaining Display of remaining quantity Reason for retiring Displays reason tool has been retired Tool life expired Quantity reached Tool life expired Determined by in process measuring Determined through postprocess measurement Tool wear limit value 1 or 2 of t
227. ated from the pitch Danger of collision and the speed An excessive overrun length P might H Type of tool offset of the individual infeeds to smooth the cause a Collision The overrun length can thread flanks be checked during the simulation H 0 No offset H 1 Offset from left H 2 Offset from right H 3 Offsets alternates right left Q Number of air cuts after the last cut for reducing the cutting pressure in the thread base 5 e 2 a Q im Pur N ae co 306 6 TURN PLUS 6 12 9 Milling Overview of milling operations Contour milling roughing finishing G840 Area milling roughing G845 finishing G846 Deburring G840 Engraving G840 Automatic milling roughing finishing Contour milling roughing finishing deburring G840 Contour milling and deburring are for figure or free contours open or closed of the reference planes FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE The oversize L shifts the milling contour in the direction defined under milling location Q Q 0 Oversize Is ignored Q 1 closed contour Reduces the size of the contour Q 2 closed contour Enlarges the contour Q 3 open contour Shift left right depending on the machining direction Parameters K Retraction plane default return to starting position Front rear face Retraction position in Z direction Lateral surface Retraction position in X direction diameter Q Milling locati
228. atic DIN PLUS program generation option Automatic NC programming for the turning axis C axis Y axis and full Surface machining Automatic tool selection Automatic turret assignment Automatic generation of the machining sequence in all machining planes Automatic cutting limit by chucking equipment Automatic rechucking with machine specific expert program for rear side machining Automatic generation of work blocks for rechucking and the second setup Information system Information on the G functions Support for graphic programming inTURN PLUS Support for interactive programming inTURN PLUS Information on parameters and operating resource data Context sensitive call of the Info system Topic search in table of contents and subject index HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 435 c 2 por m O lam rr c E D N q q c 2 ad Hees O em rr Lam E D N q q Measuring option In the machine At external measuring stations Tool monitoring Tool life monitoring Load monitoring Tool inspection 436 For setting up and measuring workpieces in the manual and automatic modes using a touch probe Downloading the results of measurement at an external measuring station for processing the measured data in the Automatic mode of operation Maximum of 16 measurement points Data interface RS 232 C V 24 Data transfer protocol 3964 R Tool life monitoring a
229. ation of P absolute additive default O H 0 P replaces G57 G58 oversizes H 1 P is added to G57 G58 oversizes Feed per revolution G95 Geo Influences the finishing feed rate of G890 Parameters F Feed per revolution Additive compensation G149 Geo The CNC PILOT manages 16 tool independent compensation values To activate the additive compensation function program G149 followed by a D number for example G149 D901 G149 D900 resets the additive compensation function Parameters D Additive compensation default D900 range 900 to 916 94 Programming notes G52 is a non modal function G52 is programmed in the NC block containing the contour element for which it is destined G50 preceding a cycle MACHINING section cancels a finishing allowance programmed for that cycle with G52 Programming notes G95 is a modal function G10 resets a finishing feed rate set with G95 Use peak to valley height and finishing teed rate alternatively The G95 finishing feed rate replaces a finishing feed rate defined in the machining program Programming notes Additive compensation is effective from the block in which G149 is programmed An additive compensation remains effective until The next G149 D900 The end of the finished part description Note the direction of contour description 4 DIN PLUS 4 5 5 Contour Position Milling depth contour position You must define the reference plane
230. aves the selected NC program under a given name Do not close Close Select whether to close the editing window or leave it open to continue editing the NC program Save as Enter the program name Save all Saves all loaded NC programs Head pull down menu NC program head Program head activates the Editing program head dialog box Turret assignment positions the cursor in the TURRET section Chucking equipment positions the cursor in the CHUCKING EQUIPMENT section Continued gt 72 Some G functions are used for blank tinished part definition and in the MACHINING section When copying or shifting NC blocks keep in mind that geometry functions are used only for describing a contour while machining functions are used only in the MACHINING section When you exit DIN PLUS operating mode the NC programs are saved automatically The old version of the NC program is overwritten 4 DIN PLUS Geometry pull down menu contour programming Blank Chuck piece bar G20 creates an NC block in the BLANK section switches to the Geometry menu and activates the Chuck part cylinder tube G20 dialog box Blank Casting G21 creates an NC block in the BLANK section switches to the Geometry menu and activates the Casting G21 dialog box Blank Free contour positions the cursor in the BLANK section and switches to the Geometry menu Finished part po
231. axis 2 The zero offset stays in effect until another NC program is activated Parameters O Number of the C axis C Angle of additional zero point shift for offset gripping range 360 lt C lt 360 default 0 Measuring angular offset during spindle synchronization G906 G906 writes the angular offset between the master spindle and the slave spindle into variable V921 Programming notes Program G906 only for active angular synchronization both chucks must be closed Program G906 In a separate NC block Program G909 interpreter stop before processing variable V921 G906 generates an interpreter stop HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Example G720 N G397 S1500 M3 speed and direction of master spindle N G720 C180 4 H2 Q2 F 1 synchronization of master spindle to slave spindle The slave spindle precedes the master spindle by 180 Slave spindle Direction of rotation M4 speed 750 Danger of collision For narrow workpieces the jaws have to grip at an offset The zero point shift of C axis is retained When changing from Automatic to Manual mode After switch oft 161 e c m S 5 LL ic IONS J S LL Traversing to a fixed stop G916 G916 activates the monitoring function for the traversing path Then you move with G1 to a dead stop The CNC PILOT stops the slide as soon as the following error lag is re
232. ay X value input for basic elements and form elements of the turning contour Diameter Input is interpreted as diameter values Radius Input is interpreted as radius values With help graphic to illustrate the input parameters Yes Display help graphics No Do not display help graphics Window configuration Views menu item Views thatTURN PLUS is to depict besides the main view XZ plane front face unrolled lateral surface etc Mirror main view Yes Complete contour is depicted No contour above the turning center is shown Coordinates Setting of the coordinate system and the position of the workpiece datum for the Main view Front face Rear side Lateral surface Parameters example of main view Delta X Z defines the dimensions of the control graphic window min XN ZN Defines the position of the tool zero point 322 Cep X value input With standard forms for workpiece blank description X values always function as diameter values X XE coordinates on contours for C Y axis machining always function as radius values ep TURN PLUS Adjusts the dimensions to the height and width of the screen Increases the dimensions of the window to show the complete workpiece 6 TURN PLUS Control graphic Depending on the menu option selected IWVG or AWG the following settings apply to the IWG or AWG Basic block On stops after every traverse movement Off simulates the complete machining sequence Gr
233. b1 db2 Drill diameter DB1max DB2max Maximum inside diameter 1st 2nd drilling step dimin Minimum inside diameter BBG drilling limitation elements Contour elements intersected by UBD1 UBD2 UBD1 UBD2 have no effect when Centric predrilling has been defined as main machining operation followed by Finish drilling as submachining operation in the machining sequence see 6 712 2 Machining Sequence Prerequisite UBD1 gt UBD2 UBD2 must permit subsequent inside machining with boring bars Point angle tolerance SWT If the drilling limitation element is a diagonal element TURN PLUS prefers using a twist drill with Suitable point angle SWT Permissible point angle tolerance If no suitable twist drill is available an indexable insert drill is selected for the predrilling operation Drilling allowance Diameter BAX Machining allowance on the drilling diameter X direction radius value Drilling allowance Depth BAZ Machining allowance on drilling depth Z direction ep BAZis not considered if A subsequent internal finishing cycle is not possible because the diameter is too small During finish machining blind holes dimn 2 WIA HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 359 Machining Parameters m Machining Parameters Predrilling Traverse modes Safety clearance Approach for predrilling ANB Traverse to tool change point ABW Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and
234. ber of chucks found and the number of saved chucks In addition the maximum number of chucks Delete Delete a chuck entry saved by the CNC PILOT is indicated Editing the chucking equipment list Move the cursor to the desired chucking equipment Insert COPY chucking equipment entry and press the corresponding key Copy the entry only chucking Insert P E 16s we are Edit Editing a chuck entry Delete Delete entry SORE Sort displayed entries according to chuck type Edit Or ENTER Edit the entry by type ane sort displayed entries according to chuck ID number by ID mEn Reverse the sequence of sorting sorting HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 391 8 2 2 Chucking Equipment Data Overview of chuck types The chuck parameters depend on the chuck types Chuck Chucking equipment Chucking Equipment Database Collet chuck 110 Two jaw chuck 120 Three jaw chuck 130 Fourjaw chuck 140 Face chuck 150 Special chuck 160 Chuckingequipment Type Adapters for chucking types 23x 28x Type Chuck jaws 21x Cylindric chuck adapter xx1 Soft jaws 211 Plain flange adapter Xx2 Hard jaws 212 Morse cone MK3 XX3 Grip jaw 213 Morse cone MK4 Xx4 Special jaw 214 Morse cone MK5 Xx5 Collet chuck 220 Morse cone MK6 xx6 Mandril 23X Other adapters xXX7 Face driver 24x Rotating gripper 25X Dead center 26x Lathe center 27x Centering cone 28x 392 8 Operating Resources Chuck Code for jaw adapter When specific combinations of chuck and jaws are required enter
235. bl Basic length of roughing cut deepest point of inside contour ULI Overhang length inside machining parameter 4 nbl Usable tool length tool parameter HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 327 Machining Information co Machining Information 6 16 6 Drilling Drilling without definition of fits TURN PLUS selects tools that permit machining to finished dimensions First it searches for twist drills then for boring bars with indexable inserts Drilling with definition of fits TURN PLUS machines the bore hole in two steps Drilling with smaller diameter than the nominal diameter of the hole Reaming to finished dimension 6 16 7 Full Surface Machining You describe the geometry of the blank and finished part and TURN PLUS generates the working plan for the complete workpiece Depending on the machining sequence after machining the front side TURN PLUS activates an expert pro gram for rechucking machining parameter 21 Rechuck Full surface machining the opposing spindle takes over the workpiece entry of UP UMKOMPL Parting Full surface machining Bar machining the workpiece Is parted and taken over by the opposing spindle entry of UP UMKOMPLA The NC program generated includes front and back machining including the drilling milling and inside machining calling the expert program and the clamping information of both setups see also 4 78 3 Fu
236. blank and finished part Graphical geometry program for calculation and display of any length of a series of dimensioned or also nondimensioned contour points With simple inout of standard form elements Chamfer rounding radii undercuts recesses thread fits With simple input of transformations Shifting rotating mirroring multiplying If more than one geometrical solution exists for calculated coordinates all of them are presented for selection 11 Tables and overviews C axis machining Display and programming in 3 views ZX XC ZC plane and the unrolled lateral surface Hole and figure pattern in the XC and ZC plane Machining cycles for drilling and milling on front face and lateral surface Y axis machining Display and programming in 3 views ZX XY ZY plane and the unrolled lateral surface Hole and figure pattern in the XY and ZY plane Machining cycles for drilling and milling in the XY and ZY planes TURN PLUS Graphical programming option Programming in individual work steps for the turning axis C axis Y axis and full surface machining with Calling tool and cutting data Individual selection and and definition of the machining mode Direct graphic verification of simulated cutting and subsequent correction possibilities for rear side machining Rechucking with machine specific expert program for rearside machining Interactive generation of the work blocks for rechucking and the second setup TURN PLUS Autom
237. block p yomg i N s x asee Sesocl oo ot 11 gaa az0 Continue resumes the simulation Jee x Single Basic block During a simulation stop you can switch the block Oe Cee eee OS r mode edit the settings or call the dimensioning function 66 Sep Z Bi ali gali 414 End of program W 09 41 49 Eg x 5 Y Ra LO Errors and Warnings mOr rung Stop after every NC source block The continue soft key Warnings that occur during the interpretation of an Single NC program are displayed in the header When the block simulates the next NC source block simulation has been stopped or completed you can S S OO SS call up the messages by selecting Set up eee ar Contour simulation Stop after every contour element Warnings If more than one warning has occurred Contour macros contour cycles are segmentalized press ENTER to call up the next message Select Continue to display the next contour element The CNC PILOT deletes a warning after you have Machining or motion simulation Stop after each path confirmed the corresponding message with ENTER of traverse Machining cycles are segmentalized The The system stores a maximum of 20 warnings continue soft key simulates the next path of traverse If an error occurs during the interpretation of an NC program the simulation is stopped Without stop single block and basic block soft keys are not
238. c Wbsp i ou Of Gott 0 i tr a T WS ee Z 5 000 pres 7 100 001 Ya 0 000 Dp gt Yami J ea N ees D HG o w a X kai 7 ei ii Z n m x 0 000 poh 65 5ep 82 15 19 24 Standard Preu i Workpiece Work o Zoom 35E ice maximum i coordinates Return to block display gt ee Standard Cancels the zoom settings last used and displays the size last standard setting Workpiece maximum or Work space Prev zoom oWitches back to the last zoom setting used You can select Previous zoom more than once Workpiece Shows the workpiece in the largest possible ee magnification Work space ONOws the working space including the tool change position By In the Coordinate system dialog box you specify the coordinates dimensions of the simulation window and the position of the workpiece zero point 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 5 9 Post Process Measuring Status Display Selection Menu item Display PPM Status nS automatic mode The PPM Info dialog box contains information on the status of the measured values and displays the transferred results E Measured value coupling control parameter 10 m Off Measuring results are immediately transferred Previous values are overwritten E On Measuring results are not transferred until the previous results have been processed E Measured values valid Status of the m
239. cally Rough hollowing Residual roughing longitudinal Residual roughing transverse Residual roughing contour parallel automatic hollowing Rough hollowing neutral tool FD relief turn machining E and F undercut machining G undercut machining c 2 J c g c H K and U undercut machining Roughing longitudinal transverse G810 G820 Parameters P Cutting depth maximum infeed A Approach angle reference Z axis Longitudinal Default 0 180 parallel to Z axis Plan default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis W Departure angle reference Z axis Longitudinal Default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis Transverse Default 0 180 parallel to Z axis Keke Cutting limit Type of oversize is selected by soft key per Softkey 6 12 Interactive Worki I K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contours Yes No E Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Type of departure type of contour smoothing H 0 Smoothing after each cut along the contour H 1 Lift off at under 45 contour smoothing after the last cut H 2 Lift off at under 45 no contour smoothing Q Retraction at cycle end Q 0 Return to starting point Longitudinal first X then Z direction Transverse First Z then X direction Q 1 Positions in front of the finished contour ae
240. case you require field service Language switching Select the language with the soft key gt gt and press OK The selected screen language becomes effective as soon as you restart the CNC PILOT FWL editing Language dependent currently not used FWL editing Language independent Material file name OTEMATER Cutting material file name OTESTOFF Fittings file name OVWVZPASSU OListbox Currently not used FWL fixed word lists see 9 2 3 Fixed Word Lists Aux images ON OFF When Aux images ON is active the graphic support windows of Machine mode are not displayed Editing switch ON OFF This function protects the operating modes DIN PLUS TURN PLUS Parameter from unauthorized access When Editing switch ON is active these menu items can only be selected if you are logged on as an NC programmer or higher Aggr d Component Aggregate diagnosis drop down menu Using the submenu items you can call diagnosis functions defined by the machine manufacturer see Machine Manual HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 The CNC PILOT is shipped with the user name Password 1234 and the password 1234 user class system manager To enter further users log on with the user name Password 1234 You should then delete the user password 1234 The CNC PILOT prevents that the last system manager is deleted Make sure however to memorize your password 403
241. ccording to time and piece number Breakage and wear monitoring through motor current evaluation Maximum of 4 drives Depiction of load values through bar graphic or line graphic For checking the indexable inserts during machining returning to the workpiece on the retraction path 11 Tables and overviews 11 3 Peripheral Interfaces The CNC PILOT is fitted with the following connectors for connecting peripheral devices or PCs and for integrating the control into networks For information on the connectors available on your lathe refer to your machine manual 11 3 Peripheral Interfaces Serial interface Ethernet interface Connector 9 pin D sub male Connector RJ45 connector female Pin Signal RS 232 Pin bayou 2 TxD Transmit Data 1 TX 3 RxD Receive Data 2 TX 4 DIR Data Terminal Ready 3 REC 5 GND Signal Ground 4 Do not assign 6 DSA Data Set Ready 5 Do not assign 7 RTS Request to Send 6 REC 8 CTS Clear to Send 7 Do not assign Housing External shield 8 Do not assign Housing External shield The interface is linked to the external PC by direct electrical connection This may lead to interference in the interface resulting from different power supply reference levels Measures If possible use the service jack on the machine for the PG Engage disengage the connection only when the machine and PC are switched off The cable length must not exceed 20 m 66 ft Use even shorter cables if there is strong electromagn
242. ce run is defined in machine parameters 203 253 Exiting the Reference automatic dialog box Press Cycle stop The software limit switches are active only after you have traversed the reference marks Monitoring the EnDat encoders If your machine is equipped with EnDat encoders the control saves the axis positions during switch off During switch on the CNC PILOT compares for each axis the position during switch on with the position saved during switch off If there is a difference one of the following messages appears Axis was moved after the machine was switched off Check the current position and confirm it if the axis was in fact moved Saved encoder position of the axis is invalid This message is correct if the control has been switched on for the first time or if the encoder or other control components involved were exchanged Parameters were changed Saved encoder position of the axis is invalid This message is correct if configuration parameters were changed The cause for one of the messages listed above could be a defect in the encoder or in the control Please contact your machine supplier if the problem recurs 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode Reference jog single axis l Select Ref Reference jog T Status of reference run approach informs you of the current status Axes that have not been referenced are shown in gray fixie ik f Actuate
243. ce the cursor on the contour element to be modified Press the confirm soft key Continued gt 256 E The turning contour cannot be edited if contours machined with the C orY axis exist New length New end point n on New end point AS 6 TURN PLUS Enter a new length end position Change line length dialog box TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Contirm soft key accepts the solution ESC key rejects the solution Parameters L XIZ New length New end position Successor element Modify angle to the next element with angle change Do not modify angle to the next element without angle change Length of contour Change length of contour Select the element to be modified and a compensation element These are usually one element of the outside contour and one of the inside contour Operation Place the cursor on the contour element to be modified Press the confirm soft key Enter a new length or end position Change line length dialog box TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour n Confirm soft key accepts the solution n ESC key rejects the solution Parameters L X Z New length New end position Radius Change the radius of an arc Operation Place the cursor on the contour element to be modified Press the confirm soft key Enter a new radius Irim radius dialog box TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Confirm soft key accepts the solution ESC
244. chined The following rules apply Finished part with inside contour FMPL gt 11 Without additional transverse cut FMPL lt 11 With additional transverse cut Finished part without inside contour Always with additional transverse cut FMST lt ft The additional transverse cut is always from the outside to the inside The transverse angle variation PWA does not influence the analysis of the transverse elements Maximum finishing cut depth FMST defines the permissible infeed depth for non machined undercuts The finishing cycle G890 uses this parameter to determine whether undercuts type E F G will be machined with a contourfinishing operation The following applies FMST gt ft With undercut machining ft undercut depth FMST lt ft Without undercut machining Number of revolutions for chamfer or rounding FMUR The feed rate is reduced such that at least FMUR revolutions can be executed evaluation finishing cycle G890 Recessing Traverse from to tool change position Approach external recessing ANESA Approach internal recessing ANESI Depart external recessing ABESA Depart internal recessing ABESI Recessing Traverse from to tool change position Approach external contour recessing ANKSA Approach internal contour recessing ANKSI Depart external contour recessing ABKSA Depart internal contour recessing ABKSI Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and Z
245. cket arrow up down or touch pad Enter the tool type the CNC PILOT Type list i i displays all tools of this type mask Enter the ID number the CNC PILOT displays all the tools of this ID mask ID list Select the tool Insert Take the tool from the database E ESC key exit the tool database 284 w l gt TURN PLUS bepog ZX main view Program 4 Workpiece f Prepare are dijg Hi AWG Configuration Turret assignment 1 ID number clipboard Pockets From 3 T Wo ID number Type Designation rejdb df ew bw fw sufet Cutting mel E Paraneter 111 60 06 1 B 111 Roughing tool 6 800 33 00 60 00 GC 425 12135 049 1 F 121 Finishing toal 8 400 38 00 35 80 GC 415 Finish Contour parallel 127 55 840 1 i me X Delete tool Take the tool from the ID number clipboard ID number clipboard Delete the tool and place in the Edit the tool parameters Edit Type list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool typep ID list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool ID number For further soft keys see 3 3 7 Setting Up aTool List Adjust the coolant circuits in the tool dialog box 6 TURN PLUS Select Setting up Tool list Set up turret Set up turret n OO eer Select the tool pocket arrow up down or touch pad u y ENTER or INS key opens the tool dialog box _y amp
246. ction mode E Setup switch Display group at right Spindle Display for direction of rotation left right Both active Positioning of spindle M19 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 53 3 7 Load Monitoring The load monitoring function of the CNC PILOT compares the current torque or the values for work with the values from a reference run If torque limit 1 or the work limit is exceeded the CNC PILOT marks the tool as worn out If torque limit 2 is exceeded the CNC PILOT assumes tool breakage and stops machining feed stop Violations of limit values are reported as error messages The load monitoring identifies worn tool in the tool diagnosis bits If you are using the tool life management function the CNC PILOT will manage the replacement of tools see 4 2 4 Tool Programming You can also evaluate the tool diagnosis bits in the NC program The load monitoring function defines the monitoring zones and the drives to be monitored G995 in the NC program The torque limits of a monitoring zone depend on the maximum torque determined by the reference machining cycle 3 7 1 The reference machining cycle registration of nominal values determines the reference values for the maximal permissible torque and work of each monitoring zone Reference Machining CNC PILOT executes a reference machining cycle if The parameters for monitoring have not been entered Y
247. cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Mx03 Mx03 Mx04 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Right Left Left Right Right Left Left 4 DIN PLUS Closed contours tii g Cycletype Cutting direction _ Directionoftoolrotation TRC Version __ p gt Outside Climb milling H 1 Mx04 Right TE Q O ore Contour Q 0 Mx03 Oe Contour Mx04 Right Q 3 Up cut milling H 0 Mx03 Right Left Q 3 Up cut milling H 0 Mx04 Let gt __ Aor Left O 3 Climb milling H 1 Mx03 Left ae 4 S Right Q 3 Climb milling H 1 Mx04 Right HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 155 filling Cycles Pocket milling roughing G845 G845 roughs closed contours and figures in the following program sections FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE You can change the cutting direction with the cutting direction H the machining direction Q and the direction of tool rotation see table G846 Parameters NS Block number reference to contour description F Maximum milling depth infeed in the working plane Oversize in X direction K Oversize in Z direction U Minimum overlap factor overlap of tool
248. cycle keya 1 Set slides and axes reference jog dialog box The reference run is continued as long Ka 200 0020 Of 5 ne a as you keep pressing the key To 100 001 gna 100 001 chee interrupt the reference run release the Z panen F 100 00 ied key Y 100 001 ae _ C oi ai Cancels the reference run Se r E After completion of the reference run EE Exiting the Reference jog dialog box Press cycle stop The position display is active for the axis that has been referenced _ If all axes have been referenced you can select The software limit switches are only active after you automatic mode have traversed the reference marks 3 1 2 Switch Off Shutdown Witching off the CNC PILOT Confirm the subsequent request with OK The control is shut down in an orderly manner After a few seconds CNC PILOT requests you to switch off the machine Exit CNC PILOT Shutdown is available in the programming and Do you really want to organization modes if no operating mode is selected exit Proper switch off is recorded in the error log file HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 23 3 1 Switch On Switch Off i Run O S a e c N ap 3 2 Manual Operating Mode The Manual control mode offers various functions for setting up the machine for measuring tool dimensions and for manually machining workpieces The machine d
249. d Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 2 umn ews Etrenoter 1234500 ZX main view Finished part ee Contour 34 Form H Pattern a Figure Jj Henipulete aij hittributs AT Sep 62 13 25 22 LEE a olj Select Workpiece Finished part Form Select the desired form element from the drop down menu Place the cursor on first position Mark the selection points in succession ES ES Switch on the multiple selection Place cursor on next position JS Select the marked point S End the selection Enter the parameters of the form elements As an alternative you can select all points and deselect the undesired point 225 orkpiece Description 6 3 7 Help Functions for Element Definition Delete drop down menu Select Element range TURN PLUS tags the last element Select the contour section by soft key and confirm The contour section is deleted Unsolved elements deletes all insufficiently defined contour elements immediately Section deletes the entire contour orkpiece Description Zero point drop down menu Displace shifts the zero point of the coordinate system to the position entered absolute value by the value entered incremental value Reset Resets the zero point of the coordinate system to the originally programmed position Duplicate drop down menu Series Linear duplicates the selected contour
250. d HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the CNC PILOT controls We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skills and sharing information and ideas with other CNC PILOT users HEIDENHAIN also offers the PC software DataPilot 4290 which is designed for use with the CNC PILOT 4290 The DataPilot is suitable for both shop floor programming as well as off location program creation and testing It is also ideal for training purposes DataPilot can be run on WINDOWS 95 WINDOWS 98 WINDOWS ME WINDOWS NT 4 0 or WINDOWS 2000 Intended place of operation The CNC PILOT 4290 complies with EN 55022 Class A and is intended primarily for operation in industrially zoned areas Contents HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 troduction and Fundamentals asics of operation anual Control and Automatic Modes N PLUS L p F raphic Simulation a a URN PLUS rameter operating Resources ervice and Diagnosis ransfer oles and overviews Contents 1 1 1 2 Lo 1 4 to The CNC PILOT 2 The Operating Modes 5 Expansion Stages Options 6 Fundamentals 7 Tool Dimensions 10 2 1 ZZ Zo User Interface 12 2 1 1 Screen Displays 12 2 1 2 Controls and Displays 13 2 1 3 Selection of Operating Modes 14 2 1 4 Selection of Functions Data Input 14 The Info System 16 The Error System 17 2 3 1 Direct Error Messag
251. d of contour section Cycle run P Maximum infeed 1 Calculate the areas to be machined and the Oversize in X direction diameter value default O cutting segmentation infeeds K Oversize in Z direction default 0 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting X Cutting limit in X direction diameter value default none point taking me satety cloak ane into account Z Cutting limit in Z direction default no cutting limit 3 Execute the Met cut roughing A Approach angle reference Z axis default 0 180 parallel 4 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next to Z axis pass W Departing angle reference Z axis default 90 270 5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete area has been perpendicular to Z axis machined Q Type of retraction after machining default 0 6 If required repeat 2 to 5 until all areas have been Q 0 Return to starting point first in X direction then in Z machined Q 1 Position in front of finished contour 7 Retract as programmed in OQ Q 2 Move to clearance height and stop V Identifier beginning end default O A chamfer rounding arc is being machined V 0 At beginning and end V 1 At beginning V 2 At end V 3 No machining ats Y rt being e P id Cutting limitation The tool position i wae pate ae Sr genre ae eo hepa oon before the cycle call determines the D Omit element influences the machining of undercuts relief effect of a cutting limit The CNC PILOT turns see tab
252. d rate reduction There is no feed rate reduction for chamfers rounding arcs that due to their size are machined with at least FMUR revolutions machining parameter 5 Parameters X Z Cutting limit Type of oversize is set by soft key LF Different longitudinal transverse oversize generates oversize G57 before the cycle L Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contours Yes No E Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Approach Yes Set the type of approach O by soft key No Q 8 Tool is near the starting point Q Type of approach define by soft key Retraction Yes Set the type of retraction by soft key No H 4 Tool remains at the end coordinate H Type of retraction define by soft key Ris Retraction position with H 0 1 or 2 Form element machining with Define by soft key the form elements chamfers etc to be machined 302 ep The CNC PILOT finds the proposed value of the retraction position I K depending on whether you program Cycle Approach programmed Position from Cycle Approach Not programmed Position of the tool change point 6 TURN PLUS Finishing Clearance turning TURN PLUS executes a measuring cut on the selected contour element Precondition Ihe measuring attribute was assigned to the contour element see 6 9 6 Machining Attributes Parameters Overs
253. d rate to the end point Direction of rotation see help graphic Parameters X Z Diameter length to end point X diameter R Radius 0 lt R lt 200 000 mm Q Selection of intersection default Q 0 End point if the circular arc intersects a circular arc Q 0 Far intersection Q 1 Near intersection B Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer E Special feed factor for chamfer rounding 0 lt E lt 1 default 1 special feed rate active feed rate E G2 G3 incremental center I K Center distance from starting point to center radius G12 G13 center absolute K Center I radius Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 withY Axis User s Manual zp Programming X Z Absolute incremental modal or Danger of collision If V variables are used for calculating the address parameters a limited contour check is carried out Ensure that the variable values produce a circular arc 112 Circular arc G13 4 DIN PLUS 4 6 4 Feed Rate and Spindle Speed Speed limitation Gx26 G26 Spindle Gx26 Spindle x x 1 3 The speed limit remains in effect until the end of the program or until a new value is progra
254. d service traffic light E Display of date and time m A color background signals a error or a PLC message m The service traffic light shows the servicing state of the machine see 9 3 Maintenance system 7 Soft key row Shows the current meaning of the soft keys 8 Vertical soft key row Shows the current meaning of the soft keys For more information see the machine manual 12 2 Basics of Operation 2 1 2 Controls and Displays Screen with Horizontal and vertical soft keys The meaning is shown above or next to the soft keys Additional keys same function as on the operating panel ESG INS Operating panel with Alphanumeric keyboard with integrated numeric keypad Keys for Operating mode selection Touch pad For cursor positioning menu or soft key selection selection from lists selecting edit boxes etc Machine operating panel with Operating elements for the manual and automatic operation of the lathe cycle keys manual direction keys etc Handwheel for exact positioning in manual operation Override button for feed rate override Operation of the touch pad Normally you can use the touch pad as an alternative to the cursor keys In the following the keys below the touch pad are referred to as the left and right mouse keys The functions and operation of the touch pad are similar to the mouse operation of theWindows operating systems Single click of the left mouse key or single touch o
255. d tool or a standard tool is used Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Example Tool type 111 377 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 Tool Database TH DIN Type of tool holder TH heig wh Height of tool holder TH brea wb Width of tool holder Breadth dn Too width tool tip to shank back Shank d sd Shank diameter Design A Left hand or right hand tool Design A Button tools Left right or neutral tool versions in the tool positions 1 4 Pitch Thread pitch Available Physical availability Pict no tool display Cut mat Cutting material CSP comp Compensation factor for cutting speed FDR comp Compensation factor for feed rate Deep comp Compensation factor for cutting depth Location type G Basic data S Tool depiction simulation TP TURN PLUS See also 8 1 4 Multiple Tools Tool Life Monitoring parameters of the third dialog box 8 1 5 Notes on Tool Data 8 1 6 Tool Holder Mounting Position The version parameter defines whether the tool reference point lies on the right or left side of the cutting edge For neutral button tools the tool reference point lies on the left side of the cutting edge Example Tool type 111 8 Operating Resources Drilling tool parameters ID Identification number of tool X Z Y dim xe ze ye Setting dimensions Diamet db Drill diameter Bor ang bw Drill angle Point angleW sw Poi
256. dds it to the contour Mirroring mirrors the selected contour section and adds it to the contour Select Mirroring TURN PLUS tags the last element Select the contour section by soft key and confirm Enter Copy in circular series dialog box Press OK TURN PLUS extends the contour Parameter Duplication through mirroring dialog box W Angle of the mirror axis reference for the angle positive Z axis the mirror axis runs through the current end point of the contour Info menu item The Info menu item opens and closes a window containing information on unsolved geometric elements If the info boxes exceed the window size move to the next previous info box by pressing the vertical arrow keys The ALT key calls the parameters of the last unsolved element which can then be edited HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 227 Y 6 4 Contours ofWorkpiece Blanks gt Bar defines the contour of a cylinder chuck or bar Q y Parameters E X Diameter o Diameter of circumference of polygonal blank aa Vie Blank length including face oversize K Face oversize distance between workpiece zero point and right edge 2 Tube defines the contour of a hollow cylinder tube Parameters X Diameter Diameter of circumference of polygonal blank k Inside diameter E Blank length including face oversize K Face oversize distance between workpiece zero point and right edge Forgin
257. de Neutral tool Outside front Transverse machining outside front and back Neutral tool Inside front Transverse machining inside L gt f hollowing precedes recess turning contour recessing in the machining sequence recess areas are hollowed exception no suitable tools are available Contour machining finishing Contour analysis Subdivision of the contour into areas for external and internal machining Sequence External machining precedes internal machining Machining parameter Finishing 5 aw Son Q g O Par q 09 m O Contourparallel External internal machining Contour parallel Outside External machining Contour parallel Inside Internal machining Neutral tool External internal machining Neutral tool Outside External machining Neutral tool Inside Internal machining Neutral tool Outside front Machining the front back outside Neutral tool Inside front Machining the front inside L Undefined recesses are only finish machined if they have been rough machined before Contourparallel submachining standard tools Finishing operation according to hollowing operation Submachining with neutral tool Finish machining using one tool HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 313 Recess turning Contour analysis Without previous rough machining Ihe complete contour including recess areas undefined recesses is machined With previous rough machining Recess areas undefined recesses are de
258. deactivating tool lengths G921 172 Shift parameterdependent G53 G55 116 Shift relative G51 116 Shifts overview 116 Workpiece zero 9 Zoom function Automatic mode graphical display 49 Simulation 208 TURN PLUS control graphics 317 XXIV Index Connection between geometry and machining commands Individual elements GO G3 G810 Longitudinal roughing cycle G12 G13 G820 Face roughing cycle G830 Contour parallel roughing cycle G835 Contour parallel with neutral tool G860 Universal recessing cycle G869 Recess turning cycle G890 Finishing cycle Recesses G22 standard G860 Universal recessing cycle G866 Simple recessing cycle G869 Recess turning cycle Recesses G23 G860 Universal recessing cycle G869 Recess turning cycle Threads G24 G810 Longitudinal roughing cycle with undercut G820 Face roughing cycle G830 Contour parallel roughing cycle G890 Finishing cycle G31 Thread cycle Undercut G25 G810 Longitudinal roughing cycle G890 Finishing cycle Threads G34 standard G31 Thread cycle G37 general Bore holes G49 turning center G71 Simple drilling cycle G72 Boring countersinking etc G73 Tapping cycle G74 Deep hole drilling cycle Individual elements G100 G103 G840 Contour milling G845 G846 Pocket milling roughing finishing Figures G301 Linear slot G840 Contour milling G302 G303 Circular slot ccw G845 G846 Pocket milling roughing finishing G304 Full circle G305 Rectangl
259. ded input No constraints for the use of the tool Only the tool tip is shown in the simulation First you define the tool type then you edit the tool parameters The tool parameters are shown in the parameters of the first dialog box to the tool editor see 8 7 Tool Database The data are saved in the database during program compilation only if you enter the ID number Simple tool Only suitable for simple traverse paths and turning cycles GO G3 G12 G13 G81 G88 No contour regeneration Tooth cutter radius compensation Simple tools are not included in the database For the meaning of the parameters refer to the table below Dialog box NG program Meaning CES I youdo not program the TURRET the tools entered in the tool list are used Tool type WIT Tool type and machining direction see 3 3 1 Setting Up the Tool List X dimension xe X Setup dimension The names _SIM and _AUTO are reserved for temporary tools simple SS se S tools and tools without ID number Tool Z dimension ze Z Setup dimension entries are valid as long as the NC pro Radius R rs R Cutting radius of turning tools gram is activated in the simulation or Automatic mode Cutting width B sb B Cutting width of recessing and button tools Diameter df Milling or drilling diameter Example TURRET Table REVOLVER 1 TURRET T1 1D 342 300 1 Tool from the database T2WT1 X50 Z50 RO 2 B6 s
260. default branch G706 With IF or SWITCH statements withV variables G706 defines the default branch The commands of the default branch are used for updating the technology data tool tool position contour follow up TRC etc After the branch the result of the default branch goes into effect Without the default branch the technology data remain undefined after the branch Parameters O K branch Q 0 No default branch defined Q 1 THEN branch as default branch Q 2 ELSE branch as default branch Q 3 Current branch as default branch 164 Program G702 for one slide only usually for slide 1 Programming notes Program G706 OO 1 2 before the branch G706 Q3 at the beginning of the THEN ELSE or CASE branches 4 DIN PLUS 4 12 5 In Process Measuring Prerequisite Touch trigger probe The measuring results are evaluated by the NC program You can use the tool life monitoring function when the NC program sets tool diagnosis bit 4 tool wear determined by in process measuring of a workpiece in order to inform the CNC PILOT of a worn out tool see 4 2 4 100l Programming Switch on in process measuring G910 G910 activates the probe and the probe monitoring function Programming notes Program G910 alone in the NC block G910 is a modal function G913 switches the touch probe off again Actual value determination for in process measurement G912 G912 stores the position of the probe i
261. define the scope of variables Real V1 V199 Integer V200 V299 Reserved variables V300 V900 Requests and assignments Machine dimensions read write machine parameter 7 Syntax V Mx y x dimension 1 9 y coordinate X Y Z U V W A B or C Interrogate external events Is the bit value O or 1 The significance of the external event is determined by the machine manufacturer Syntax V Ex y x Slide 1 6 y bit 1 16 Continued P gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 177 rogramming ae Interrogate The tool life monitoring function and the function for searching the start block trigger sequential events see below Syntax V Ex 1 x event 20 59 90 20 Tool life has expired global information 21 59 Tool life of this tool has expired 90 Search for start block O not active 1 active Assign this clock event to the tool tool life management Manual control mode Tool compensation Read write Syntax V Dxly x T number y length compensation X Y or Z Diagnosis bits Tool life monitoring read write Syntax V Tx y x number y bit 1 16 see table Sequential events and tool life management When a tool is worn out event 20 global information and event 1 are triggered Event 1 can be used to identify the worn out tool When the last tool of an tool interchange chain is worn out event 2 is also triggered Define events 1 and
262. departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for outside corners Contour element is approached departed on a tangentially linear path Milling depth Milling finishing default Milling depth from the contour description Deburring Plunging depth of the tool HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 K Retraction plane default return to starting position Front or rear face Retraction position in Z direction Lateral surface Retraction position in X direction diameter B Chamfer width for deburring the upper edges sign has no effect Ni Preparation diameter tool diameter from machining Required for deburring of open contours Not required if diameter of deburring tool diameter of milling tool D V Beginning end of element number for figures only if partial figures are machined Element numbers for figures Direction of contour definition for figures Counterclockwise Rectangles polygons and linear slots he angle of orientation angle with respect to the longitudinal axis or to one side of a polygon points to the first contour element Circular slot The larger arc is the first contour element Full circle The upper semicircle is the first contour element 153 TA 2 O gt O Milling Cycles Contour O 0 Contour Contour Contour Inside Q 1 Inside Inside Inside Outside Q 2 Outside Outside 154 Up
263. departure type of contour smoothing H 0 Smoothing after each cut along the contour H 1 Lift off at under 45 contour smoothing after the last cut H 2 Lift off at under 45 no contour smoothing Q Retraction at cycle end Q 0 Return to starting point Longitudinal first X then Z direction Transverse First Z then X direction Q 1 Positions in front of the finished contour Q 2 Lifts off to safety clearance and stops Undercutting see soft key table 292 6 TURN PLUS Hollowing Automatic supports bilateral machining TURN PLUS first selects a roughing tool for rough machining and then a tool for removing the residual material in the opposite machining direction zp You can use the Hollowing automatic function only for recesses a relief turn can be machined using a standard roughing cycle TURN PLUS uses the Permissible inward copying angle EKW machining parameter 1 to distinguish recesses from relief turns Roughing hollowing neutral tool G835 Parameters P Cutting depth maximum infeed A Approach angle reference Z axis default 0 180 parallel to Z axis WW Departing angle reference Z axis default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis X Z Cutting limit Type of oversize is set by soft key I K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Plunging Machine descending contours Yes
264. depth with nonstandard thread Thread width with nonstandard thread HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Ia n inch Define the direction of the thread Threads inch is entered instead of thread pitch Enter either I or H The rule is Thread pitch graduation number of starts You can assign further attributes to the thread see 6 9 6 Machining Attributes Use the nonstandard thread if you want to use individual parameters Caution Danger of collision The thread is generated to the length of the reference element For the machining of threads without an undercut it is necessary to program the runout length K so that the overrun can be executed by the CNC PILOT without danger of collision 237 5 Finished Part Contour 5 Finished Part Contour Centric bore hole Bore hole defines a single bore hole on the turning center front or back The hole can contain the following elements Centering Core drilling Countersinking Thread Centering parameters O Centering diameter Core hole parameter B Hole diameter P Depth of hole excluding point W Point angle W 0 Feed rate reduction V 1 W gt 0 Point angle Fit H6 H13 or none see 6 76 6 Drilling Countersinking parameter R Countersinking diameter U Countersinking depth E Countersinking angle 238 6 TURN PLUS Thread parameters N
265. dialog box are for your information Entries can only be made in the Read password and Write password input fields The password is entered masked not visible Network Network ON Network Network OFF Switches the network adapter of the control on or off then restart the system to put it into effect The menu items Osci loscope LogicAn alyzer are reserved for service personnel fe j gt l Ej Service Diag osis X1 200 002 T7 05 X a i as Z 100 001 E Z 100 001 Z mmm r Y 10 001 Cami i 16 Sep 62 18 55 15 E J J J lagnosis 9 4D Transfer 10 1 Transfer Mode of Operation 10 1 The Transfer Mode of Operation The Transfer mode is used for data backup and data exchange with other IT systems It moves files from one location to another The files contain NC programs DIN PLUS or TURN PLUS programs parameter files or files with information for service personnel oscilloscope data log files etc The Transfer mode also includes organizational functions such as copying deletion renaming etc Data Backup HEIDENHAIN recommends saving your CNC PILOT programs on a PC in regular intervals You should also back up the parameters Since the parameters are not changed very often however you only need to back up the parameters from time to time as required See 70 4 2 Backup Up Parameters and Operating Resource Files Data exchan
266. distant line Milling cutter radius compensation MRC In milling operations the outside diameter of the milling cutter determines the contour When the MRC function is not active the system defines the center of the cutter as reference point for the paths of traverse The MRC function compensates for this error by calculating a new path of traverse the equidistant line 10 1 Introduction and Fundamentals Basics of Operation 2 1 User Interface face 2 1 1 Screen Displays 1 Operating mode line Show the status of the operating modes m The active mode of operation is shown with a dark gray background E Programming and organization modes The selected mode is shown at the right of the symbol Additional information such as the selected pro gram submode etc are shown below the operating mode symbol Sn N N 2 Menu bar and pull down menus For function selection 3 Working window Size and content depend on the operating mode Some programming and organization modes overlap the machine display 4 Machine display Current status of the machine tool position the cycle and spindle situation active tool etc The machine display is configurable 5 Status line E Simulation TURN PLUS display of current settings or information on the next operating steps E Other operating modes display of the last error message 6 Calendar date an
267. distant or longitudinal RLA Equidistant allowance or longitudinal allowance None or transverse RPA Transverse allowance Roughing Traverse from to tool change position Approach external roughing ANRA Approach internal roughing ANRI Depart external roughing ABRA Depart internal roughing ABRI Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and Z direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO Roughing Machining analysis TURN PLUS uses the PLVA PLVI parameters to define whether a roughing area is to be rough machined longitudinally or transversely Transverse longitudinal ratio external PLVA PLVA lt AP AL Longitudinal machining PLVA gt AP AL Transverse machining Transverse longitudinal ratio internal PLVI PLVI lt IP IL Longitudinal machining PLVI gt IP IL Transverse machining Minimum transverse length RMPL radius value defines whether the front transverse element of a finished part will have the external contour roughed transversely RMPL gt 11 Without additional transverse roughing RMPL lt 11 With additional transverse roughing RMPL 0 Special case Transverse angle variation PWA The first front element is declared a transverse element when itis within PVVA and PWA 362 RAA 16 144 RLA
268. ds from the preceding succeeding element counterclockwise to the new element Arc as preceding succeeding element Angle to tangent L Length of line J Tangential nontangential Specify the transition to the Te next contour element Circular arc in lateral surface contour Use the menu symbol to select the direction of arc rotation and give the arc a dimension Parameters end point of arc Vy End point F End point polar CY End point angle as linear dimension G End point angle Center of arc parameters K Center CJ Center angle as linear dimension reference unrolled cylinder at reference diameter PM Center point polar B Center angle Other parameters R Arc radius 4777 Tangential nontangential Specify the transition to the next contour element 250 6 TURN PLUS Angle parameters WA Angle between positive Z axis and tangent in starting point of arc WE Angle between positive Z axis and tangent in end point of arc WV Angle between preceding element and tangent in the starting point of the arc WN Angle between tangent in arc end point and following element WV WN The angle leads from the preceding succeeding element counterclockwise to the new element Arc as preceding succeeding element Angle to tangent Single hole Reference point parameters Z Center of hole GI Center of the hole angle as linear dimension C Center of the hole
269. duces the programmed offset width After precutting the remaining material is removed with a single cut Unidirectional turning U 1 Roughing is in the machining direction NS NE The simplest way of programming is specifying NS or NS NE and P Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section or reference to G22 G23 Geo recess NE End block number end of contour section omit for contour defined by G22 G23 Geo Maximum infeed Turning depth compensation for finishing default O Oversize in X direction diameter value default O Oversize in Z direction default O Cutting limit in diameter value default no cutting limit Cutting limit default no cutting limit Nos AT DY Continued gt 130 Cycle run where Q 0 or 1 1 Calculate the areas to be machined and the cutting segmentation 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point taking the safety clearance into account radial recess first in Z then in X direction axial recess first in X then in Z direction 3 Execute the first cut recessing 4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction turning 5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete area has been machined 6 If required repeat 2 to 5 until all areas have been machined 7 Q 0 Finish machine the contour E G869 requires tools of the type 20 Cutting limitation The tool position before the cycle call determines the effect of a cut
270. e 169 e c mer S 5 LL g 4 13 4 13 e c 2 me Q 5 LL g Waiting for time G204 G204 interrupts an NC program up to a specified moment Parameters D Day D 1 31 default First possible time H Q H Hour H 0 to 23 O Minute Q 0 to 59 Update nominal values G717 G717 is used to update the nominal position values of the control with the axis position data Application Deleting the lag error Standardization of the slave axes after deactivating a masterslave coupling Move lag error G718 G718 prevents the automatic updating of nominal control position values with the axis position data e g when traversing to a fixed stop or after canceling and re enabling a controller release Application Before activating a masterslave axis coupling Parameters Q On Off O 0 Off Q 1 On the lag error is retained in the control memory Actual values to variables G901 G901 is used to transfer the actual values to the variables V901 V920 see 4 75 2V Variables G903 generates an Interpreter stop Zero point shift to variables G902 Transfers the shift in Z direction into the variable V901 V920 see 4 15 2V Variables G903 generates an interpreter stop Servo lag to variables G903 G903 transfers the current following error distance by which the actual values lags the nominal value into the variables V901 V920 see 4 75 2V Variables
271. e in the program header Same spindle manual rechucking Enter UP UMHAND Different spindles transfer of workpiece to the opposing spindle Enter UP UMKOMPL Expert programs are provided by the machine tool builder That is why there may be deviations in the parameters described below Use the expert program or the machine manual to inform yourself of the meaning of the parameters and the process of the expert program Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 6 11 Prepare gp E Before rechucking save the working plan etc for machining the first setup When you use the rechucking function TURN PLUS deletes the previous working plan and the operating resources used Rechucking is no substitute for chucking LD Nvz LH HE NRO F1 B1 F2 B2 Chuck Chuck jaw for main and opposing spindle Nvz Zero point shift G59 l Safety clearance on workpiece blank machining parameter 2 NPO Zero point offset e g machine parameter 1164 for Z axis 1 281 6 11 Prepare TURN PLUS entered the calculated parameters as proposed values Check and edit the entries The meaning of the transfer program depends on the name of the expert program Transfer parameters with the expert program UMKOMPL Spindle speed for workpiece transfer LA Direction of spindle rotation LB 0 CCW 1 CW Speed or angular synchronism LC 0 Angular synchronism without angular offset gt 0
272. e G307 Eccentric polygon Bore holes G300 G71 Simple drilling cycle G72 Boring countersinking etc G73 Tapping cycle G74 Deep hole drilling cycle Individual elements G110 G113 G840 Contour milling G845 G846 Pocket milling roughing finishing Figures G311 Linear slot G840 Contour milling G312 G313 Circular slot ccw G845 G846 Pocket milling roughing finishing G314 Full circle 0315 Rectangle G317 Eccentric polygon Bore holes G310 G71 Simple drilling cycle a72 Boring countersinking etc G7 Tapping cycle G74 Deep hole drilling cycle Overview of G commands for contour C axis machining oman Superimposed contours Page fuming G308 Geo Beginning of pocket island 95 DSFintHIOHIGT WOFKBISESBIGHK INP C309 Geo End of pocketlisland 96 G20 Geo Chuck part cylinder tube 84 G21 Geo Cast part 84 G100 Geo Starting point of end face contour 96 Basic contour elements Page G101 Geo Line segment on end face 97 G0 Geo Siantingvoihtor contour 34 G102 Geo Circular arc on end face 97 G1 Geo Line segmen 35 G103 Geo Circular arc on end face 97 G2 Geo Circular arc with incr center dimensioning 85 G300 Geg Borehioleonend lice X G3 Geo Circular arc with incr center dimensioning 85 CROPA CAO ONAE G12 Geo Circular arc with abs center dimensioning 85 C30 ee ean aa G13 Geo Circular arc with abs center dimensioning 85 Sates Geli Soren wee TG 304 Geo Full circle on end face 99 Contour form elements _ _ Page G305 Geo Rectangle on end face 10
273. e departure angle reference Z axis default opposite from the recessing direction Arf Cutting limit Type of oversize is set by soft key I K Different longitudinal transverse oversize Constant oversize generates oversize G58 before the cycle Unidirectional bidirectional setting by soft key Precutting is performed Yes S 0 bidirectional No S 1 unidirectional in the direction defined during the selection of the machining area Precutting and finishing Precutting c J c g c Finish machining 6 12 Interactive Worki d Recessing feed rate default Active feed rate Finishing teed default Active feed H Type of retraction at cycle end H 0 Return to starting point axial first Z then X direction radial first X then Z direction H 1 Positions before the finished contour H 2 Retracts to the safety clearance and stops Process Setting by soft key Pre cutting and finishing In one machining cycle Only pre cutting Only finishing HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 295 lan Generation IWG 5 a 2 a Q im ad N ar co Parting Cutting off The workpiece is parted with the expert program that is entered in machining parameter 21 UP 100098 Expert programs are provided by the machine tool builder That is why there may be deviations in the parameters described below Use the expert pro gram or the machine manu
274. e CNC PILOT machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depending on which side the tool has been positioned before the cycle is called G57 oversize enlarge the contour also inside contours G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour lt Q reduces the contour G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after cycle end Other D codes for skipping undercuts recesses Add the codes if you want to skip several undercuts recesses G22 22 23 FiO G23 H1 G23 H4 G23 H5 G23 H6 G23 H7 G23 H8 G23 H9 Recess for sealing ring 512 Recess for guard ring 1 024 General recess 256 Relief turn 2 048 Undercut type U 32 68 Undercut type E 65 536 Undercut type F 131 072 Undercut type G 262 144 Undercut type H 524 288 Undercut type K 1 048 576 133 Cycles D bm Cycles D 4 7 2 SimpleTurning Cycles End of cycle G80 Concludes the fixed cycles Simple longitudinal roughing G81 G81 machines roughs the contour area described by the current tool position and X Z If you wish to machine an oblique cut you can define the angle with and K The CNC PILOT uses the position of the target point to distinguish between external and internal machining The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the calculated infeed distance lt maximum infeed Oversizes G57 oversizes are calculated with algebraic sign oversizes are
275. e X or Z axis The acceleration feed rate for the slide is not higher with axis parallel traverses 113 N Q O Peed per toot Ge ep The actual value display shows the feed Drive dependent feed rate with respect to the number of teeth on the rate In mm rev milling cutter x spindle 1 3 Parameters F Feed per tooth mm tooth or inch tooth Commands Constant feed G94 feed per minute Drive independent feed rate Parameters F Feed per minute mm min inch min O vv Feed per revolution Gx95 G95 Spindle Gx95 Spindle x x 1 3 Drive dependent feed rate Parameters F Feed per revolution mm rev inch rev E G26 Gx26 limits the spindle speed Constant cutting speed Gx96 G96 Spindle Gx96 Spindle x x 1 3 The spindle speed is dependent on the X position of the tool tip or on the diameter of the driven tools Parameters S Cutting velocity in m min or ft min Speed Gx97 G97 Spindle Gx97 Spindle x x 1 3 Constant spindle speed Parameters S Speed in revolutions per minute 114 4 DIN PLUS 4 6 5 Cutter Radius Compensation TRC MCRC Tooth and cutter radius compensation TRC If TRC is not used the theoretical tool tip is the reference point for the paths of traverse This might lead to inaccuracies when the tool moves along non paraxial paths of traverse The TRC function corrects programmed paths of traverse see section 1 5 Tool Di
276. e block is inserted at copied to the position indicated by the cursor Ses Q hm e LLJ V l 0 4 3Th Single menu items Cancel all markings are canceled Insert contour inserts the most recent workpiece blank and finished part contour in the simulation below the cursor position As an alternative of the block menu you can use the usual WINDOWS key combinations for marking deleting shifting etc Marking by moving the cursor keys while holding the shift key Ctrl C Copy the marked text to the clipboard Shift Del ete Delete the marked text and save it in the clipboard Ctrl V Insert text from the clipboard at the cursor position Del ete Delete the marked text 78 4 DIN PLUS 4 4 Program SectionCodes GiWeWOrRERMEcOnCU TT o A new DIN program is already provided with section eae ee codes You can add new codes or delete existing TURRET Q ones depending on your program requirements A MAGAZINE e DIN program must contain at least the MACHINING CHUCKING EQUIPMENT and END section codes KONTUR CONTOUR ROHTEIL BLANK FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART HILFSKONTUR AUXILIARY CONTOUR BEARBEITUNG MACHINING ENDE END UNTERPROGRAMM SUBPROGRAM RETURN 4 4 Prog ram Q FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE 4 4 1 PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAMHEAD ZENEN l Material st 60 2 v Piece Genindezapfen i The PROGRAM HEAD comprises Machine M 2A 4290 Company HEIDENHAIN Slides NC program is run
277. e system applies 2 Mirrored machine coordinate system Z direction opposite to the machine coordinate system 82 The chucking equipment table is used for the simulation graphics it does not influence the execution of the program Example CHUCKING EQUIPMENT table SPANNMITTEL 1 CHUCKING EQUIPMENT D250 H2 ID KBA250 77 4 DIN PLUS ROHTEIL BLANK Program section for defining the contour of the blank part FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART Program section for defining the contour of the finished part To define the finished part use additional section codes such as FRONT SURFACE etc FRONT REARSIDE designates contours on the front and rear face Parameters Z Position of the contour on the front rear face default O SURFACE identifies contours on the lateral surface Parameters x Reference diameter of lateral surface contours HILFSKONTUR AUXILIARY CONTOUR designates further turning contours intermediate contours 4 4 5 BEARBEITUNG MACHINING Program section for machining a workpiece This code must be programmed ENDE END Ends your NC program This code must be programmed It replaces M30 4 4 6 UNTERPROGRAMM SUBPROGRAM If you define a subprogram within your NC program within the same file it is designated with SUBPROGRAM followed by the name of the subprogram max 8 characters RETURN ends your NC subprogram HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 For several independent contour
278. e the first variable number dialog box V display The variables are shown in a dialog box Use arrow up down and page up down to display the desired variables Set display Set variable tyoe and number The variables are displayed alternative to the NC source block Reset display Variable fields remain empty 210 The variables and events are simulated in other words the variables used in the Automatic and Manual Control operating modes are not affected E Transfer 2 dnou diicone tHstop iH sot up HH contour 1 Debug election display number Fd lu Variable 3 D correct x 4 u Wariable iT A S1 SN i E D ceo s ol F of HEN Le End oF progran W 334 26 gt gt DIN PLUS TURN PLUS Variable variable V variable KV V variable Tool compensation X KD X Tool compensation Machine dimensions X KM X Machine dimensions Tool dimensions Mx KTM X Tool dimensions Sequential events Events of the tool life management and start block search External events External events 5 Graphic Simulation Transfer Debug Change variables m Change V variables Sain BHH Set the variable type and number Tkon ilcont tHstop Hset up JH contour 24 Dabs Preset the value or the event a aT TETTE ETT Define the sta
279. e tool The cutting path graphic accounts for the exact geometry of the tool tip cutting radius cutting width tool tip position etc When using the cutting path graphics you can check whether the contour is machined completely or needs to be reworked whether the contour is damaged by the tool or overlaps are too large The cutting path graphics is especially useful for recessing or drilling operations as well as for machining slopes where the tool shape has an essential influence on the accuracy of the resulting workpiece ode of Operation Notes on the display modes Programmed NC block NC source block Display of NC source blocks of up to four slides setting Set up Window Alternatively Display of four selected variables selection Debug Display variables Set variables Displayed information Block number position values actual values and tool of the selected slide Alternative to the tool data Spindle speed feed rate direction of spindle rotation 1 11 n n 1 6 Slide code the selected slide is marked Symbol Configured coordinate system of this slide Number in the symbol Contour that is machined by this slide x 5 Y ar LO 198 d gt Simulation Machining ZESPO Contour qH Debug J Cont H stop aH set up 1 N 98 G16 NS18 WETS P3 5 TI AlGG 355 W50 G2 UG D4 1 n 38 xi T3 00A zl 278 658 onm PR a jl Zoon ON
280. easured values after the measured values have been transferred with G915 the status No is displayed E 939 Total result of last measurement E 940 956 Measuring results last transferred by the measuring function If you select Init the post process measuring function is re initialized and all measured values are deleted HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 51 3 5 Automatic ae i 3 6 Machine Display 3 6 Machine Display The machine display of the CNC PILOT can be configured Per slide you can configure up to 6 displays in Manual mode and Automatic mode Switches to the next configured display To switch to the display of the following slide press the Change slide key With the spindle change key you can display the next spindle Switching display The display elements table explains the standard display fields For more display fields see 73 Control Parameters You can set the values of the Position display in Display setting machine parameter 17 0 Actual values 1 Lag 2 Distance to go 3 Distance between tool tip and position of slide 4 Slide position 5 Distance between reference cams and zero pulse 6 Nominal position value 7 Distance between tool tip and slide position 8 IPO nominal position 52 gt DIN PLUS l E Poraneter 3 Autonatie operation 2bepo ee ie X 185 693 i Gee Z 377 299 pe Z
281. echnology data In addition you can use the database for saving your own cutting data Cutting value tables cS Tab le material E l idi cut val direct 1 Tab material t Tab cut material Uti Tab proc tupe ap Define the machining mode and the cutting material Regn o the CNC PILOT lists the cutting data according to Cut material GC 425 Hachining meth Roughing Material Sp cut fore Cut speed Main feed Aux feed Stat Cooling materials 3p ut speed Main feed Aux feed li Tab le cut material Define the material and the machining mode the CNC PILOT lists the cutting data according to cutting materials Tab le proc ess type Define the material and the cutting material the CNC PILOT lists the cutting data according to machining modes 3 60 with coolant 5 68 with coolant 5 00 with coolant 5 08 with coolant 00 with coolant with coolant with coolant O with sealant j with coolant with colant With coolant eS ee ee Seeeocoeecoaa 5 5 E 5 5 With coolant 5 5 5 E To enter material cutting material and machining mode always use the fixed word list HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 399 A gt O E Oo e 2 oa O gt O e Cut val direct menu item Define the material cutting material and machining mode the CNC PILOT opens a dialog box for editing the cutting parameters Cutting Parameters Specific c
282. ect Do not use spindle override Use a floating tap holder if the driven tool is not controlled e g by a ROD encoder 4 DIN PLUS Deep hole drilling G74 Cycle run p 1 Bore hole without contour definition maa G74 is used for axial and radial bore holes in several stages using gh rE ayer ear EE UOGle Precondition Tool is located at the safety distance gt lt y l from the bore hole starting position Q Ist drilling depth P is used for the first pass The CNC PILOT then Bore hole with contour definition 5 automatically reduces the drilling depth with each subsequent pass by The tool approaches the starting position at rapid amp the reducing value however without falling below the minimum traverse according to K hole depth J After each pass the tool is retracted either by return K not programmed Approach to clearance height distance B or to the starting point of the hole K programmed Approach to K and then to 7 The cycle is used for clearance height Individual bore hole without contour description 2 Start oe T hole feed rate reduction Bore holes with contour definition individual bore hole or hole ng A pattern in the following program sections 3 Drill hole in several passes FRONT 4 Drill through feed rate reduction according to V REAR SIDE 5 Retract at rapid traverse or feed rate according to SURFACE D 6 Position to which tool retracts depends on K
283. ection then in Z Q 1 Position in front of finished contour Q 2 Move to clearance height and stop V Identifier beginning end default O A chamfer rounding arc is being machined V 0 At beginning and end V 1 At beginning V 2 At end V 3 No machining V 4 Chamfer rounding is being machined not the basic element prerequisite Contour section with an element D Omit element influences the machining of undercuts relief turns see table default O B Slide lead for 4 axis machining B 0 Both slides work on the same diameter with double feed rate B lt gt 0 Distance to leading slide the lead The slides work on different diameters with the same feed rate B lt 0 The slide with larger number leads B gt 0 The slide with smaller number leads Ce Cutting limitation The tool position before the cycle call determines the effect of a cutting limit The CNC PILOT machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depending on which side the tool has been positioned before the cycle is called Cutter radius compensation Active G57 oversize Enlarges the contour also inside contours G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour lt Q is not considered G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after cycle end 0 e 1 e z J e m e e 2 e 4 e e Skip elements HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 4 axis operation When workin
284. ed Q 3 only with open contours The tool cuts from the left or right of the contour depending on the cutting direction H and the direction of tool rotation see following table Q 4 with closed contour inside milling Q 4 with open contour left in machining direction Intersecting areas which are programmed in directly successive contour elements are machined Q 5 with closed contours outside milling Q 5 wiith open contours right in machining direction Intersecting areas which are programmed in directly successive contour elements are machined Block number beginning of contour section Figures Block number of the figure Free contour First contour element not starting point Block number end of contour section Figures closed contours No input Open contour Last contour element Contour consists of one element Input unnecessary Cutting direction default O H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling Maximum infeed default Milling in one infeed Infeed rate depth infeed default Active feed rate Reduced feed rate for circular elements default Current feed rate Radius of approaching departing arc default O R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to Starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on an approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for inside corners Tool moves on an approaching
285. eed Oversize in X direction diameter value default O Oversize in Z direction default O Approach behavior E 0 Descending contours are not machined E gt 0 Approach behavior No input Feed rate reduced depending on approach angle maximum reduction 50 X Cutting limit in X direction diameter value default no cutting limit A Cutting limit in Z direction default no cutting limit H Type of contour smoothing default H 0 smoothing after each cut H 1 lift off at under 45 smoothing after last cut H 2 lift off at under 45 no smoothing A Approaching angle reference Z axis default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis W Departing angle reference Z axis default 0 180 parallel to Z axis O Type of retraction after machining default O Q 0 Return to starting point first in X direction then in Z Q 1 Position in front of finished contour Q 2 Move to clearance height and stop V Identifier beginning end default 0 A chamfer rounding arc is being machined V 0 At beginning and end V 1 At beginning V 2 At end TE ae O Continued gt 124 Cycle run 1 Calculate the areas to be machined and the cutting segmentation infeeds 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point taking the safety clearance into account first in X direction then in Z 3 Move at feed rate to target point X 4 Depending on H H 0 Cut along the contour H 1 or 2 Retract at
286. eeds to smooth the thread flanks H 0 No offset H 1 Offset from left H 2 Offset from right H 3 Offsets alternates right left Q Number of air cuts after the last cut for reducing the cutting pressure in the thread base HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 0 000 Next previous plane in figure in figure Next previous plane in figure in figure Next previous figure or pattern Next previous figure or pattern 269 Attributes Igning T W lt Attributes Igning T W lt Machining attributes Measuring TURN PLUS uses the parameters of the Measuring cut dialog box to call the expert program in machining parameter 21 UP MEAS01 Parameters oversize for measuring cut K Length of measuring cut Q Measuring loop counter Every nth workpiece is measured Machining attributes Drilling This attribute calls a submenu with drilling attributes and drilling combinations see 4 9 Drilling Cycles TURN PLUS accounts for drilling combinations when selecting tools and generating the working plan one machining cycle per drilling combination Retraction plane The tool is positioned to the return plane before after each drilling operation hole on lateral surface diameter Parameters K Retraction plane Position of the drill before after machining Drilling combinations The attribute influences the tool selection Centering and countersinking NC centering drill
287. eference XK axis E Total length of pattern Li Distance between two figures pattern distance Hole description figure description Circular Hole Pattern Circular Figure Pattern Parameters XK YK Center of pattern in Cartesian coordinates a PM Center of pattern in polar coordinates reference angle positive XK axis Q Number of figures Orientation Clockwise n Counterclockwise R K Radius diameter of pattern A W Starting angle end angle position of first last figure reference XK axis special cases Without A and W Full circle subdivision beginning with 0 Without W Full circle subdivision Wi Angle between two figures algebraic sign has no effect Position of figures Normal position The original figure is rotated about the pattern center rotation about the pattern center Original position The position of the original figure remains translation Hole description figure description 248 gh Linear pattern Enter the length R Linear pattern Enter the angle j EE n patterns with circular slots the center of curvature is added to the pattern position see User s Manual 4 5 8 Circular Pattern with Circular Slots 6 TURN PLUS 6 6 2 Contours of the Lateral Surface Cartesian or polar dimensions The linear dimension CY is given with respect to the unrolled Surface under reference diameter Milling depth For figures enter the parameter De
288. element and correct the data Mark previous unresolved element Mark next unresolved element 7 Select marked unresolved element HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 gt TURN PLUS E Transfer TE_UnE ZX main View Finished part Ei Le e E FNE Error _ P E TEE rx Error 55 405 Contour element underdetermined Lx BG Sep 62 11 57 19 gt TURN PLUS E Transfer TE_unE ZX main view Finished part Fa 986 162 G88 86 Sep 62 11 58 09 E a E Zz 4 0068 X 102 R68 275 m 6 10 Operating Aids 6 10 Operating Aids 6 10 5 Error Messages If the actual error message shows the characters gt gt TURN PLUS can display further information on the error if desired Call the additional information on the error message 276 if a gt TURN PLUS E transfer stern ZW main view AWG FERI Program 34 ferkoiece O Emar 51 160 ees ee Mo suitable tools available Idesl Alternative Emergency tool 112 114 213 06 Sep ez 12 00 20 A gt TURN PLUS E transfer stern Zw main view AWG dj rogram tH torkpives J Prepare aiun 14 aus dH configuration Tool selection information Heachining Rough Long Inside Z Centric predrilling 2nd hole S42 7140 1 Comparison paramot Ideal alternate fomerg tool 112 114 212 Tool angle 38 608
289. em Process V variables the CNC PILOT shows the variables defined in the NC program gt Press Edit if you wish to change the variables Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Status of skip levels Display field Markings m Upper row entered skip levels E Lower row the skip levels detected by the block execution active skip levels The CNC PILOT accounts for activated deactivated skip levels after approx 10 blocks reason block scan during the execution of NC blocks giie 10146 LBL E ES Channel 1 Zbepol 43 3 5 Automatic Mode of Operation q Sums e 2 a Oo Pur lt L o Single block Single block mode Only one NC command basic block is executed at a time The CNC PILOT then goes into the cycle stop condition The subsequent blocks are started with Cycle Start Selectable Optional STOP stop The CNC PILOT stops at the M01 command and goes into the cycle stop condition Cycle start resumes the program run Feed rate override F 0 150 Feed rate override is controlled manually with a knob on the on the machine operating panel The machine display shows the current feed rate override Spindle speed override S 50 150 The spindle speed override or the reset to the programmed speed is controlled with the keys of the machine operating panel The machine display shows the current spi
290. em manager gt Select Setting Network Transfer mode gt Setting for network copying dialog box E Transfer directory Enter the path of the Saree ASS EM ae pe SS AN communication partner see next page ga ace SRN PS Rs r cena ane E Auto login during power up Transfer directory YES The CNC PILOT accepts the login with the po a E data entered in User name and Password Auto login during power up E NO You enter the user name and password during system start Recommendation Use the automatic login Activate Windows network gt Select Network inTransfer mode With the defined mask the CNC PILOT displays X 497 282 m E Files of its own system Z1 160 001 a Z 20116 05 E Files of the defined transfer directory Files of the Y 0 393 communication partner 414 10 Transfer Transfer directory You enter the computer name enabling name and path of the communication partner in transfer directory Setting Directory dialog box in the following form Computer name Enabling name Path Example DATAPILOT C DP90V70 MASCH MASCHINE1 You define the computer name and enabling name on the PC of the communication partner In this example the C disk is enabled Whether you define the complete path or parts of the path depends on your organization Settings for FTP gt Log in as system manager gt Define in control parameter 11 FTP param
291. epth height no entry P from G308 P lt Q Pocket P gt 0 Island Full circle on front rear face G304 Geo Parameters XK YK Circle center in Cartesian coordinates R Radius P Depth height no entry P from G308 P lt 0 Pocket P gt 0 Island HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 G302 Geo 99 Commands Commands O g i Rectangle on front rear face G305 Geo Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates A Angle to longitudinal axis reference XK axis default 0 K Length B height width R Chamfer rounding default 0 R gt 0 Radius of rounding R lt 0 Width of chamfer P Depth height no entry P from G308 P lt 0 Pocket P gt 0 Island Eccentric polygon on front rear face G307 Geo Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates Q Number of edges Q gt 2 A Angle to a polygon side reference XK axis default 0 K Edge length K gt 0 Edge length K lt 0 Key width inside diameter R Chamfer rounding default O R gt 0 Radius of rounding R lt 0 Width of chamfer P Depth height no entry P from G308 P lt 0 Pocket P gt 0 Island Linear pattern on face G401 Geo G401 is effective for the bore hole figure defined in the following block 6300 305 G307 Programming notes Program the hole figure in the following block without a center The milling cycle MACHINING section calls the hole figure in the
292. er C Circle center angle CY Angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter R Radius P Pocket depth no entry P trom G308 Rectangle on lateral surface G315 Geo Parameters Z Center C Center angle CY Angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter A Angle to longitudinal axis reference Z axis default 0 K Length B Width R Chamfer rounding default O R gt 0 Radius of rounding R lt 0 Width of chamfer P Pocket depth no entry P from G308 Eccentric polygon on lateral surface G317 Geo Parameters Center C Center angle CY Angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter Q Number of edges Q gt 2 A Angle to a polygon side reference Z axis default 0 K Edge length K gt 0 Edge length K lt 0 Key width inside diameter R Chamfer rounding default O R gt 0 Radius of rounding R lt 0 Width of chamfer P Pocket depth no entry P from G308 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 105 Commands Commands O g u Linear pattern on lateral surface G411 Geo G411 is effective for the bore hole figure defined in the following block 310 2315 317 Programming notes Program the hole figure in the following block without a center The milling cycle MACHINING section calls the hole figure in the following block not the pattern definition Parameters Numbe
293. er to the machine zero point and The slide moves at rapid traverse on the shortest path to the target the slide zero point point Parameters X Z End point X diameter value Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 withY Axis User s Manual N Q O 4 6 3 Simple Linear and Circular Movements Linear path G1 The tool moves linearly at the feed rate to the end point Parameters X Z Diameter length to end point X diameter A Angle angular direction see graphic support window O Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the line segment intersects a circular arc O 0 near intersection Q 1 distance intersection B Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer l gp Programming X Z Absolute E Special feed factor for chamfer rounding incremental modal or 0 lt E lt 1 default 1 special feed rate active feed rate E Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 with Y Axis User s Manual HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 111 Commands O E q Circular paths G2 G3 incremental center coordinates G12 G13 absolute center coordinates The tool moves in a circular arc at the fee
294. erator cannot change are explained in the Technical Manual 7 Parameters 72 Machine Parameters Value ranges of machine parameters 1 200 General machine configuration 801 1000 Spindles 1 to 4 50 positions per spindle 201 500 Slides 1 to 6 50 positions per slide NC 1001 1100 C axes 1 to 2 50 positions per C axis channel 1101 2000 Axes 1 to 16 50 positions per axis 501 800 Tool carriers 1 to 6 50 positions per tool 2001 2100 Various machine components carrier 6 Tool measuring These parameters define how to determine the tool lengths in set up mode Method of tool measuring 0 Scratch 1 Probe 2 Optical measuring system Measuring feed Feed rate for approaching the touch probe Clearance distance Minimum distance which has to be traversed in the opposite direction to the measuring direction to retract the touch probe after the stylus has deflected 7 Machine dimensions Within the framework of variable programming machine dimensions can be used in NC programs The contents and evaluation of machine dimensions depend on the NC program only Dimension n X Y Z U V W A B C n 1 to 9 17 Display setting The Display mode defines the position display actual value display within the machine display Actual value display 0 Actual value 1 Lag error 2 Distance to be covered 3 Tool tip referenced to machine zero point 4 Slide position 5 Distance between reference cams and zero point 6
295. ercut 137 Threads DIN PLUS General G37 Geo 90 single path G33 142 Standard G34 Geo 90 Tapping G36 146 XIX Index Index Threads DIN PLUS Thread cycle G31 140 Thread cycle simple GZ evens 141 With undercut G24 Geo 87 TURN PLUS Form element 237 IWG machining 302 Machining attributes 265 Tilt position of tool carrier 68 Time calculation 212 Time of day setting 399 Tool Changing DIN PLUS 120 Measuring og Tool display simulation 197 Tool graphic displaying 370 Tool call TURN PLUS IWG 283 Tool change point Tool compensation Finding 40 Fundamentals 10 In automatic mode 44 Variable programming 178 Tool database Adapter 300 Compensation values 381 Cutting length 381 Cutting speed CSP compensation 302 Deep compensation 382 Direction of rotation 381 Execution 381 Extended input 81 Feed rate FDR compensation 382 Fixed word list 381 General information 368 XX Mount type 382 Mounting position 385 Multipoint tools 380 NBR secondary machining direction 381 Notes on tool data 381 Overhang length 382 Picture number 381 Position angle 382 Setting dimensions 381 Simple tool 81 Tool editor 368 Tool graphic displaying 370 Tool holder
296. ercut length R undercut radius W undercut angle P transverse depth A transverse angle HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 1 25 1 5 1 75 20 325 4 5 59 z 10 gt 1 6 3 gt 3 10 gt 10 18 gt 18 80 gt 80 11 gt 16 3 gt 3 10 gt 10 18 gt 18 80 gt 80 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 4 05 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 05 0 5 5 2 6 7 48 9 1 10 3 15 2 17 7 20 23 26 28 30 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 6 0 6 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 8 le 1 6 1 6 20 eZ OZ 15 157 1o om 197 157 19 19 19 to 15 15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 307 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 3 427 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 11 1 4 Thread Parameters The backlash of threads ac is determined from the thread pitch To determine the thread parameters the CNC PILOT uses the following table Where F the thread pitch depending on the Threadpitth ag thread type is determined from the diameter 2s 0 15 Where 0 25 F thread pitch lt 12 0 5 P thread depth gt 12 1 R thread width A thread angle left W thread angle right Calculation of Kb Kb 0 26384 F 0 1 VF Q 1 Metric ISO fine pitch thread DIN 13 Outside 0 61343 F F 30 30 Inside 0 54127 F F 30 30
297. erence Z axis Q Corner number O gt 3 K Length of side SW Width across flats inscribed circle diameter R Chamfer rounding Width of chamfer Radius of rounding P Depth of the figure HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 253 m 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours Linear slot Parameters Z CY VUAO Center of figure Center of the figure angle as linear dimension Center of figure angle Angle to longitudinal axis of slot reference Z axis Slot length Slot width Depth of the figure Circular slot Parameters E CY Twr Center of figure Center of the figure angle as linear dimension Center of figure angle Starting angle starting point of the slot reference Z axis End angle end point of the slot reference Z axis Curvature radius reference center point path of the slot Slot width Depth of the figure Linear hole pattern linear figure pattern Parameters Z Starting point of pattern CY Starting point of pattern angle as linear dimension C Starting point of pattern angle Q Number of figures K End point of pattern KI Distance between the figures in Z direction CYE End point of pattern angle as linear dimension Cr Distance between figures as linear dimension 254 Continued P gt 6 TURN PLUS L Total length of pattern Li Distance between the figures pattern distance B Angle to the longitudinal axis of
298. es 17 2 3 2 Error Display PLC Display 17 2 4 Data Backup 19 2 5 Explanation of Terms 19 a 3 4 Switch On Switch Off Reference Run 22 3 1 1 Switch On and Traversing the Reference Marks 2 3 1 2 Switch Off 23 Manual Operating Mode 24 3 2 1 Entering machine data 25 3 2 2 M Commands 25 3 2 3 Manual Turning Operations 26 3 2 4 Handwheel 26 3 2 5 Spindle and Axis Direction Keys 27 3 2 6 Slide Spindle change key 27 Tool Lists Tool Life Management 25 3 3 1 Setting Up a Tool List 29 3 3 2 Comparing a Tool List with an NC Program 31 3 3 3 Transferring the Tool List from an NC Program 32 3 3 4 Tool Life Management 33 Setup Functions 34 3 4 1 Defining the Tool Change Position 34 3 4 2 Shifting the Workpiece Datum 30 3 4 3 Defining the protection zone 36 3 4 4 Setting up the Chucking Table of 3 4 5 Setting uo Machine Dimensions 38 3 4 6 Measuring Tools 39 Contents RD 3 6 3 7 Automatic Mode of Operation 41 3 5 1 Program Selection 41 3 5 2 Defining a Start Block 42 3 5 3 Program Sequence Modification 43 3 5 4 Compensation 44 3 5 5 Tool Life Management 45 3 5 6 Inspection Mode 46 3 5 7 Block Display 48 3 5 8 Graphic Display 49 3 5 9 Post Process Measuring Status Display 5l Machine Display D2 Load Monitoring 54
299. est measuring results Nein iVvo40 1 If results are available N52THEN N53 V D1 X D1 X V941 Add the measuring result to compensation value D1 N54 ENDIF 166 ep The post process measuring status as well as the measured values last received can be checked in Automatic mode see 3 5 9 Post process Measuring Status Display zp Evaluate the measurement status in order to avoid that compensation values are accounted for twice or Incorrectly Example Monitoring for tool breakage Monitoring a limiting value BEARBEITUNG MACHINING N27T1 Contour Roughing Outside NAS T End of machining process NSO Go TSint Request measuring results N51 IF V940 1 If results are available NS TAEN N53 IF V941 gt 1 Measured value gt 1 mm N54THEN N55 PRINTA Measured value gt 1 mm tool breakage N56 MO Programmed stop Cycle stop N57 ENDIF N58 ENDIF 4 DIN PLUS 4 12 7 Load Monitoring The load monitoring function checks the performance and work values of the drives and compares them to limit values which have been determined during a reference machining cycle The CNC PILOT considers two limit values If the first limit value is exceeded the tool is marked as worn out and the tool life monitoring inserts the replacement tool during the next program run see 4 2 4 Tool Programming Second limit value exceeded The load monitor reports a broken tool and stops the
300. eter m Use FTP 1 YES gt Select Setting FTP Transfer mode gt Setting FTP dialog box m User name password for login at the host computer m Address Name FTP server Enter the server name or IP address of the host computer Activate FTP gt Select FTP inTranster mode With the defined mask the CNC PILOT displays E Files of its own system E Files of the defined transfer directory Files of the communication partner HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 415 10 2 Transfer Method Oo Configure serial interface or printer O Login as system manager gt Select Setting Serial Printer in the Transfer Jorg H Ha mode serial setting gt Enter data in Setting serial printer dialog box Baud rata m Word length a Parameter Parity N Define the following interface parameters in Stop bite consultation with your communications partner Protocol nor gt Baud rate in bits per second The baud rate is Device name conz a N defined according to the local condition cable S length interference etc A high baud rate has the advantage of fast data transfer A lower baud rate 200 002 11 however is more stable 100 001 TE m 100 Word length Choose between 7 or 8 bits per 100 001 character T UO a 9 0 n Parity If you select even odd parity the CNC PILOT adds a parity bit so that an even odd number of set bits are transferred per character The pari
301. etic interference Recommendation Use an adapter with electrical isolation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 437 variable In NC program interpretation 70 Input Output 173 Programming 175 Slide code Editing 76 Execution 181 Skip level Editing 76 Execution 181 Simplified geometry programming 65 3 D view 209 4 axis machining Cycle G810 123 Cycle G820 125 Absolute coordinates F Acceleration slope G48 113 Active tool 178 Actual values in variables G901_ 170 Additional axes 62 Additive compensation Compensation G149 120 Compensation G149 Geo 94 Display 53 Entry sane 45 Address parameters Fundamentals 64 Programming 65 Angle cutter 37 2 Angle offset Angle offset measuring during spindle synchronization G90 161 C angle offset G90b 161 Angular data for C axis 62 Arcs See Circular arc HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Area milling IWG roughing finishing 304 TURN PLUS machining attribute 267 Assigning contour to operation 110 Attributes For overlay elements G39 Geo 93 For TURN PLUS contours 263 Automatic mode 41 Automatic working plan generation AWG 306 Auxiliary axes 62 Auxiliary commands for contour description 92 Auxiliary contour Entering the section code 75 In the simulation 197 Bar
302. f the tool change position are entered and displayed as distance between machine datum and tool carrier datum Since these values are not shown in the position display it is advisable to move to the tool change point and capture the position 34 x 200 002 ms mm 1 993 gt Bim m Assigns a handwheel to an axis E Defines the handwheel interpolation factor Switch the machine display Enter the feed per revolution Enter the M function Accept the axis position as tool change point orY or Z axis Accept the slide position as tool change point a Enter the constant surface speed 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 4 2 Shifting theWorkpiece Datum Shifting theWorkpieceDatum ___ For more than one slide Define the desired slide with the Slide change key u _y a S Position the tool On eee eee Select Setting up Shift zero point S _ err The Shift zero point dialog box displays the current workpiece zero point Enter the workpiece zero point Enter a zero point shift Contact position tool zero point gt Touch the end face with the tool gt Accept the tool contact position as workpiece zero point Workpiece zero point relative to the contact position gt Touch the end face with the tool poca gt Accept the tool contact position gt Enter the measured value distance of the tool contact position from the workpiece zer
303. fault to starting position or to safety clearance HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 143 9 Drilling Cycles Boring countersinking G72 Use of G72 Boring sinking reaming NC spot drilling or centering for axlal radial holes with stationary or driven tools G72 is used for bore holes with contour definition individual bore hole or hole pattern in the following program sections FRONT REAR SIDE SURFACE Parameters NS Contour block number with geometry of bore hole G49 G300 G310 Geo E Period of dwell for chip breaking at end of hole default O D Retraction speed default O D 0 Rapid traverse D 1 Feed rate K Retraction plane radial holes holes in the YZ plane diameter default to starting position or to safety clearance 144 Cycle run 1 Approach starting position at rapid traverse according to K K not programmed Approach to clearance height K programmed Approach to K and then to clearance height 2 Start drilling bore hole at reduced feed rate 50 3 Move at feed rate to end of bore hole 4 Retract at rapid traverse or feed rate according to ai D 5 Position to which tool retracts depends on K K not programmed Retract to starting position K programmed Retract to position K Hole pattern NS refers to the bore hole contour and not the definition of the pattern 4 DIN PLUS Tapping G73 G73 cuts axial radial threads using driven or station
304. fine the end point of the line and then the transition to the next contour element Parameters Al End point in Cartesian coordinates Xi Zi Distance from starting point to end point P a End point in polar coordinates reference angle a positive Z axis W Angle of the line for reference see illustration WY Angle to the preceding element WN Angle to the successor element WV WN The angle leads from the preceding succeeding element counterclockwise to the new element Arc as preceding succeeding element Angle to tangent Length of line am Tangential nontangential Specify the transition to the E next contour element rT 6 TURN PLUS Arc Use the menu symbol to select the direction of arc rotation and give the arc a dimension The set the type of dimensioning by soft key see table Select the direction of rotation Parameters end point of arc X Z End point in Cartesian coordinates Xi Zi Distance from starting point to end point Po End point in polar coordinates reference angle a positive Z axis Pi ai End point polar incremental Pi Linear distance from starting to end point reference of ai see illustration Parameters center of arc K Center XM radius dimension li KI Distance from starting point to center point PM B Center in polar coordinates reference angle B positive Z axis PMi Bi Center polar incremental PMi Linear distance from starting poi
305. fore defining the contours for C Y axis machining Select the reference plane front face lateral surface etc before you define the contours for the C Y axis See also 6 6 7 Contours of the Front Face and Rear Side 6 6 2 Contours of the Lateral Surface gt j gt TURN PLUS E Transfer bepoS ZX main view Finished part Fi Form Lf pattern ai Figure Manipulate Ee C lateral surface Y front face Y lateral surface CR rear side YR rear eide Select input level PEEL 86 Sep az 11 21 21 223 orkpiece Description orkpiece Description Select Workpiece Finished part Figure Select the figure type If required adjust the reference plane front face lateral surface etc Select Machining surface Check and correct the Reference dimension Enter the position Press the figure button and define the figure Check your entries Press OK Select Workpiece Finished part Pattern Select pattern single hole If required adjust the reference plane front face lateral surface etc Select Machining surface Check and correct the Reference dimension Patterns Enter pattern positions and data Select the Hole Figure soft key and define the hole figure Single hole Enter the position Press the hole button and define the hole Check your entries Press OK 224 If required adjust the reference plane fr
306. g menu item The Display line shows all the data of the marked contour element The arrow indicates the direction of the contour description Move to the next contour element Arrow left right Switch contours example switch between workpiece blank and finished part contour Arrow up down Point dimensioning menu item The CNC PILOT shows the dimensions of the contour point with respect to the reference point Set reference point Position the cursor onto the reference point small red square Select Set point of reference the small square changes Its color Position the cursor to the contour point to be measured the CNC PILOT shows the dimensions with respect to the reference point Cancel reference point Point of reference OFF deactivates the selected reference point You can now set anew point of reference The following rules apply Use the vertical arrow keys to move to the next element group In the case of figures the individual elements are measured The selected reference plane XC XY etc is shown in the status line You can also call the dimensioning functions in the Machining Motion mode of simulation Dimensioning menu item 204 gt Simulation 5 point dimension ai 59 Arc G2 Start x 76 250 End x 50 000 Mp ge a0 o00 R 15 000 KZ oN 20 z 52 118 z 67 00 z 67 000 rem 66 Sep BZ ise 2 14 3 14 4 14 End of program W 18 03 43
307. g absolute incremental Cartesian or b polar coordinates You can usually program a ONS DIECE pinks d contour with the dimensions given in the Finished parts ov workpiece drawing Contour train X values are entered as diameter or radius values Milling contours O see 6 14 Configuration TURN PLUS automatically calculates all missing coordinates points of intersection center points etc that can be derived mathematically If the entered data permit several mathematically possible solutions you can inspect the individual solutions and select the proposal that matches the drawing 6 3 1 Entering the Contour of a Blank S TURN PLU Ejsrvice Standard forms bars pipes Definition with workpiece blank macros Complex workpiece blanks Description as for finished part Cast or forged blanks are generated from the finished part and the oversize Select Workpiece Blank Bar Tube _y amp amp e _mMme_ Enter the dimensions of the workpiece blank u _y ur The CNC PILOT displays the workpiece blank __ S _ errr To return to the main menu press the ESC key J Bar f Tube 34d cecting Hd Contour 34 Forn Manipulate jj attribute See also 6 4 Contours of Workpiece Blanks 6 9 1 Attributes for Workpiece Blanks HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 219 6 3Workpiece Description 6 3 2 Input of the Finished Part Contour The finished part contour includes
308. g blank or cast blank L amp p First enter the single oversize and then Generates the workpiece blank from an existing finished part o the contour element the contour Parameters Surface Cast blank Forging blank With bore hole Yes No K Equidistant oversize for the complete part Single allowance for individual elements or contour sections 228 6 TURN PLUS 6 5 Contour of Finished Part 6 5 1 Basic Contour Elements Parameters that TURN PLUS knows are not requested the input boxes are locked Example On horizontal or vertical lines only one of the coordinates changes and the angle is defined by the direction of the element The set the type of dimensioning by soft key see table Starting point of contour To define the starting point select Contour Parameters KL Starting point of contour PO Starting point of contour in polar coordinates reference angle a positive Z axis HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Polar dimensions of the end point Angle o Polar dimensions of the end point Radius Polar dimension of the center Angle B Polar dimension of the center Radius Angle to the predecessor element Angle to the successor element 229 gt Finished Part Contour 5 Finished Part Contour Lines Use the menu symbol to select the direction of the line and assign it a dimension Select the line direction Select the line direction Select a line in any desired direction De
309. g box Position the cross hairs Cursor keys or mouse Exit digitizing mode Enter with value transfer ESC without value transfer zp Change the zoom setting before calling r coat GEMEN E the digitizing mode if the increments of the cross hairs movements are too small large The values are taken over as absolute values of the Cartesian coordinate system independent from the setting of the input fields 24 005 X 34 G88 6 10 3 Inspector Checking Contour Elements The inspector function can be used to check contour elements form elements figures and patterns It is not possible to edit the displayed data Checking contour elements with the inspector function Select the desired window reference plane Call the inspector Inspector pa a Position the cursor on the contour form element figure or pattern and confirm TURN PLUS shows the entered parameters ALT key TURN PLUS shows all parameters of the element for form elements the parameters of the individual elements Arrow left right with opened dialog box Shows the parameters of the following previous element To close the dialog box press the ESC key 274 6 TURN PLUS 6 10 4 Unresolved Contour Elements If a contour element is not sufficiently defined TURN PLUS reports the error After you have confirmed the error message use the soft keys to position the cursor to the desired unresolved
310. g cycle 0 lt E lt 1 default 1 special feed rate active feed rate E G2 G3 incremental center Center distance from starting point to center as radius K Center distance from starting point to center G12 G13 absolute center Center radius K Center E Programming X Z Absolute incremental modal or G13 Geo HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 85 4 5 3 Contour Form Elements Recess Standard G22 Geo Recess on a paraxial reference element G1 G22 is assigned to the previously programmed reference element Parameters X Starting point of recess on the face diameter Zz Starting point of recess on the lateral surface l K Inside corner recess on face Recess end point diameter value recess on lateral surface Recess base diameter value K recess on face Recess base K recess on lateral surface Recess end point li Ki Inside corner incremental pay attention to sign li recess on face Recess width li recess on lateral surface Recess depth Ki recess on face Recess depth Ki recess on lateral surface Recess end point recess width B Outside radius chamfer at both ends of the recess default O B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer Re Inside radius in both corners of recess default O Commands O g u ep Program either X or Z Reces
311. g design overhead B8 left hand long design overhead B6 B8 C1 right hand C2 left hand C3 right hand overhead C4 left hand overhead D1 multiple holder A three bar boring tool B drill holder with coolant circulation C square longitudinal D square transverse E end face machining E1 U drill E2 cylindrical shank holder E3 collet holder F drill holder MK Morse taper HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 B1 B3 C1 C3 B2 B4 B5 B7 387 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 Tool Database K drill chuck Z stop T1 driven axial T2 driven radial T3 three bar boring tool X5 driven axial X6 driven radial X7 driven special holder 388 8 Operating Resources Adapter When an adapter is used the values entered for tool height wh and tool width wb refer to the height width of the adapter and the holder Tool mounting position The mounting position is fixed by the machine tool builder see Machine Parameter 511 Depending on the turret location the CNC PILOT determines the tool mounting position Axial mount left turret side AP 0 Radial mount left turret side AP 1 Radial mount right turret side AP 2 Axial mount right turret side AP 3 When the tool is mounted radially in the middle of the turret AP 1 is used HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 389 8 1 Tool Database e 2 Parn A oo am oO LLJ O
312. g of the X axis deactivated X 1 Mirroring of the X axis activated Y 0 Mirroring of the Y axis deactivated etc Switch off protection zone G60 G60 is used to cancel protective zone monitoring G6O is programmed before the traversing command to be monitored or not monitored Application example With G60 you can temporarily deactivate a programmed monitoring of the protective zone in order to machine a centric through hole Parameters O 0 Activate the protection zone modal Q 1 Deactivate the protection zone modal Q no input Deactivate the protection zone for the current NC block Spindle with workpiece G98 The assignment of the spindle is required for thread cutting drilling and milling cycles if the workpiece is not in the main spindle Parameters Q Spindle number default O master spindle HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Mirror the traverse paths and tool lengths in separate G30 commands Q1 Q2 without axis selection switches the mirroring function off Only configured axes can be selected Danger of collision In the transition from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL OPERATION conversions and mirror images are retained The conversion mirroring must be switched off if you activate the front face machining after rear face machining for example during program section repeats with M99 After a new program selection the conversion mirroring is switched off example transition from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC mod
313. g on the same diameter both slides start simultaneously When working on different diameters the second slide starts when the leading slide has reached lead B This is synchronized at every step Each slide advances by the calculated depth of cut If the slides do not have to execute the same number of cuts the leading slide executes the last cut With constant cutting speed the cutting speed depends on the speed of the leading slide The leading tool does not retract until the subsequent tool is ready for use On 4 axis cycles ensure that the tools are identical tool type cutting edge radius cutting edge angle etc 123 Cycles D ie Cycles D Face roughing G820 G820 machines the contour area defined by NS NE The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal machining With NS NE you specify the machining direction If the contour to be machined consists of one element then If you program only NS machining is in contour definition direction If you program NS and NE machining is against the contour definition direction If required the area to be machined is divided into several sections for example for machining contour valleys The simplest way of programming is specifying NS NE and P Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section NE End block number end of contour section Maximum inf
314. g the front and rear face contours default 0 D 0 No mirroring shifting O Mirroring the coordinate system direction of the Z axis D 1 Mirroring shifting default O Q 0 No mirroring Q 1 Mirroring Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 117 Example of rear side machining with opposing spindle Part transfer with mirroring of the coordinate system NG E On Za Commands Part transfer without mirroring of the coordinate system NETGZ 1 eto Ole ZZ ID O q Example of rear side machining with a spindle The workpiece is rechucked manually to machine the rear face AG nOA 4 6 7 Oversizes Safety Clearances Safety clearance G47 Le G47 replaces safety clearance set in the Safety clearance for the turning cycles G810 G820 G830 G835 machining parameters or that set in G147 G860 G869 G890 the drilling cycles G71 G72 G74 and milling cycles G840 G846 G47 without parameters activates the parameter values machining parameters 2 safety clearances Parameters P Safety clearance Switch off oversize with G50 Switches off oversizes defined with G52 G39 Geo for the following cycle G50 is programmed before the cycle 118 4 DIN PLUS Switch off oversize G52 G52 has the same effect as G50 Use G50 Parameters P Oversize is not evaluated Safety clearance G147 Safety clearance for the milling cycles G840 G846 and drilling cycles G71 G72 GM Pa
315. ge with DataPilot HEIDENHAIN offers the PC program package l ant Network staat Sasa a tet a CNC PILOT Network activates the Windows network and shows the MAEA T OOA NOU ae Ue alle 358 masked files of the CNC PILOT and the communication programming and testing function as the control This means that can create TURN PLUS and DIN PLUS R programs on the PC test it with program simulation a and rane erit tome machine control m Serial activates serial data transmission and displays the 234 masked files of the CNC PILOT Systems for data backup data exchange The DataPilot also includes backup functions Of gam FTP activates the FTP network and shows the masked course YOU can also use alternative Windows EEE files of the CNC PILOT and the communication partner operating system functions or other PC programs available on the market for data backup CEE Calling the Organization local Printer mimm With the organization functions you can printout DIN PLUS programs and parameter operating Parameter conv ersion Converts parameters operating resource data TURN PLUS programs cannot be Tjaa resources from internal format to ASCII format or vice printed out versa prepares data backup downloads saved data The CNC PILOT prepares for print job tor A4 format tio Setting the network FTP serial interfaces or printer 2 Cina x 29 7 Cm im TI parameters Files in TURN PLUS format are processed only b
316. graphics function displays the programmed blank and finished part and the paths of traverse This enables process control of non visible areas during production and provides an oversight of production status etc All machining operations including milling are depicted in the turning window XZ view Activate the graphic if the graphic was already active the screen is adapted to the current machining Status z Return to block display Line Each tool movement Is represented as a line referenced to the theoretical tool tip Cutting path depicts the surface covered by the cutting area of the tool with hatch marks You can see the area that will actually be machined with the geometry of the respective tool already accounted for see 5 7 Simulation Mode of Operation The white dot small white rectangle a represents the theoretical tool point Tool The tool contour is depicted Precondition Proper tool description in the tool database ERPE Standard The system displays the complete path of traverse block by block Motion Depicts the metal removal in synchronism to the machining sequence Prerequisites Workpiece blank is programmed Activate the motion function before starting the NC program If an NC program is repeated M99 the Motion function becomes active with the next program run Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 rT l gt
317. h required for O 1 3 7 12 For other thread types F is calculated from the diameter If it was not programmed see 77 1 5 Thread Pitch Thread depth enter only for Q 12 Run out length for threads without undercut default O Reference point position of thread run out default O D 0 Run out at end of reference element D 1 Run out at beginning of reference element Number of thread turns default 1 Edge angle left enter only for Q 12 Edge angle right enter only for Q 12 Thread width enter only for O 12 Variable pitch increases reduces the pitch per revolution by E default O Bore hole centric G49 Geo Single bore hole with countersink and thread at the center of rotation front or rear face The G49 hole is a form element not part of the contour Parameters lt 7A7C7TMCDSVOAIN Starting position for hole reference point Bore hole diameter Depth of hole excluding point Point angle default 180 Countersinking diameter Countersinking depth Countersinking angle Thread diameter Thread depth Thread runout length Thread pitch Left hand or right hand thread default O V 0 Right hand thread V 1 Left hand thread Angle position of bore hole default O A 0 front end A 180 tail end Centering diameter HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 A Caution Danger of collision The thread is generated to the length of the reference element Ano
318. h Wi clockwise sign of Wi has no meaning V 2 with W counterclockwise V 2 with Wi counterclockwise sign of Wi has no meaning XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates H Position of figures default O H 0 Normal position figures are rotated about the circle center rotation H 1 Original position position of figure remains unchanged with respect to coordinate system translation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 101 N Q Q Commands O g a 4 5 7 Lateral Surface Contours Starting point of lateral surface contour G110 Geo Parameters Vs Starting point C Starting point starting angle CY Starting angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter EE Program either Z C or Z CY Line segment in a lateral surface contour G111 Geo Parameters Z End point C End point end angle CY End angle as linear value referenced to unrolled reference diameter A Angle reference positive Z axis B Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer O Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the line segment intersects a circular arc OQ 0 near intersection Q 1 distance Intersection zp
319. h radii on both sides SB lt b 2 r for different radii smallest radius Paraxial base element without radii or with a radius on one side only 9B lt D No paraxial base element The recessing width is determined using the recessing width divisor SBD machining parameter 6 SB Recessing width b Width of base element r Radius Drilling Depending on the geometry of the bore hole TURN PLUS determines the appropriate tool For centric bore holes TURN PLUS uses stationary tools Automatic turret assignment The tool location is selected according to the Mount type and Preferred tool parameters machine parameter 511 These parameters are used to determine whether a driven tool is supported and whether to locate primarily external internal tools or drilling milling tools Location type The mount type machine parameter 511 differentiates between different tool holders see 8 1 2 Notes on Tool Data TURN PLUS does not support magazine pocket systems 324 C gt Machining parameter 2 global technology parameters defines whetherT URN PLUS is to account for the tool database in addition to the current turret assignment 6 TURN PLUS 6 16 2 Cutting Parameters To determine the cutting parameters TURN PLUS uses the Workpiece material program head Cutting material tool parameters Machining type for the IWG primary machining operation selected for the AWG primary machi
320. h the debug functions see 5 8 Checking the NC Program Run Contour drop down menu Contour Dimension see 5 3 2 Dimensioning Contour 3 D view see 5 73 D View Influence the traversing speed by menu Slows the traversing speed gt lt means traversing speed in real time m increases the traversing speed 207 d ke gt v c 2 or oP Zoom Function 5 6 Zoom Function The zoom function can be used to magnify reduce the displayed graphic or isolate a detail Zoom settings by keyboard Prerequisite Simulation in stop condition When you call the zoom function a red INe G frame appears with which you can select the detail you wish to isolate With more than one simulation window 7 x Set the windows Detail Enlarge Page forward Reduce Page back Shift Cursor keys Zoom settings by touch pad Prerequisite Simulation in stop condition Position the cursor to one corner of the section While holding the left mouse key pull the cursor to the opposite corner of the section Right mouse key Return to standard size Standard settings See soft key table a Exit the zoom function After having enlarged a detail to a great extent select Workpiece maximum or Work space and then isolate a new detail 208 Hain level EEE Prog tic e S1 gt Simulation E Poraneter ZBSPO
321. h to tool change position Example Programming contour repetitions including storing of the contour 4 DIN PLUS FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART N2 GO X19 2 Z 10 N3 G1 Z 8 5 BO 35 N4 G1 X38 B3 NeG 2 5 0a BOE 2 N6 Gl X42 B0 5 N7 G1 Z0 B0 2 N8 G1 X66 B0 5 N9 Gl Z 10 B0 5 N10 G1 X19 2 B0 5 BEARBEITUNG MACHINING N11 G26 2500 N12 G14 QO Nis G702 Q0 N14 L 1 VO Q2 N15 M30 UNTERPROGRAMM 1 SUBPROGRAM N16 M108 Nay Soy 027 00 N18 G14 QO N19 T8 N20 G97 S2000 M3 N21 G95 F0 2 N22 GO XO Z4 N23 G147 Kl N24 G74 Z 15 P72 18 B20 J36 E0 1 KO N25 G14 QO N26 T3 N27 G96 S300 G95 FO 35 M4 N28 GO X72 Z2 N29 G820 NS8 NES P2 K0 2 W270 V3 N30 G14 QO N31 112 N32 69652501695 F022 N33 G810 N57 NE3 P2 10 2 K0 1 Z 12 H0 W180 QO N34 G14 Q2 NSS oh N36 G96 5300 695 F0 06 NBTE SEI Moet 7a N38 G47 Pl N39 G890 NS8 V3 H3 Z 40 D3 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Store contour Qx number of repetitions Load stored contour 185 4 18 Notes and Examples om 86 Insert recessing tool Shift reference point to the right of the cutting edge Activate TRC Switch off TRC Incremental zero offset 4 DIN PLUS 4 18 3 Full Surface Machining The term full surface machining refers to the machining of the front and rear ends inone NC program The CNC PILOT supports full surface machining for all common machine designs The features include angle synchronous part transfer wi
322. he starting point if you use the standard programming example roughing cycles 69 4 2 6 NC Subprograms Subprograms are used to program the contour or the machining process In the subprograms transfer parameters are available as variables You can fix the designation of the transfer parameter see 4 76 Subprograms In every subprogram the variables 256 to 285 are available for internal calculations Subprograms can be nested up to six times This means that a Subprogram calls in a further subprogram etc If a subprogram is to be executed repeatedly enter the number of times the subprogram is to be repeated in the parameter Q The CNC PILOT distinguishes between local and external subprograms Local subprograms and the NC main program are stored in the same file Local subprograms can only be called in from their corresponding main programs External subprograms are stored in separate NC files and can be called in from any NC main program or other NC subprograms Expert programs The machine manufacturer usually provides subroutines which are tailored to the machine configuration for complex processes such as workpiece transfer for full surface machining Example workpiece transfer for full surface machining Refer to the machine manual 4 2 7 Template Control Templates are predefined NC code blocks integrated in the NC program They reduce programming input and help standardize the program for
323. he CNC PILOT stores the settings of the serial interfaces and the printer interface in these parameters You define the parameter settings in the Transfer mode of operation 48 Transfer directory NETWORK directory Path of directory offered and indicated for data transfer with NETWORK You define the parameter settings in the Transfer mode of operation 196 SIK number The CNC PILOT checks whether certain options are available on your system For configuring additional options your machine manufacturer must be informed of your board number HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 351 B 7 3 Control Parameters 7 3 Control Parameters 197 Option passwords The options available on your CNC PILOT can be activated for a limited period of time Enter 9999 in the next free input field and restart the CNC PILOT All options will now be available for a limited period of time 301 ff Display type 1 6 manual control automatic The machine display comprises 12 fields which can be configured and are arranged as follows Field 1 Field 5 Field 9 Field 2 Field 6 Field 10 Field 3 Field 7 Field 11 Field 4 Field 8 Field 12 352 Options can be made available a limited number of times and cannot be transferred to other systems Symbol field n n 1 12 code number of the symbol to be displayed here for code numbers see following pages Slide Spindle Define to which slide spindle or C axis the display refer
324. he contours are not considered by a small box until GRAPHIC is selected again When the cursor is located on a block of the Unambiguous NC block numbers are a prerequisite for BLANK or FINISHED PART section the the contour display corresponding contour element is highlighted in red and the direction of contour definition is indicated When programming fixed cycles you can use the displayed contour for establishing block references The CNC PILOT starts at the pattern base when displaying contours on lateral surfaces reference diameter for SURFACE 4 2 4 Tool Programming The designations of the tool pockets are fixed by the machine tool builder Each tool holder has a unique T number In the T command MACHINING section you program the position of the tool holder and therefore the position to which the tool carrier rotates The CNC PILOT retrieves the assignment of the tools to the turret positions from the TURRET section or the tool list in case the T number is not defined in TURRET Continued gt 68 4 DIN PLUS Multipoint tools For tools with more than one point multiple tools the T number is followed by an es T number S S Number of the cutting edge 0 to 4 O main cutter may be omitted In the TURRET section you define only the main cutting edge When a cutting edge of a multiple tool has become dull the tool life management function marks all cutting edges worn out
325. he expert program mirrors the contour Further programming of G121 is normally not required for machining the rear face after rechucking Working without expert programs If you do not use the expert programs or the converting and mirroring functions the following principle applies direction Program a positive value to move away from the spindle direction Program a negative value to approach the spindle G2 G12 Circular arc clockwise G3 G13 Circular arc counterclockwise 188 w om ruus A sable fcir dji Form Wi attr JA Front tH Hs e ee 4j Instr Hj Graph ae IRN_Y Z C9 FRONT 7 G308 P 1 8 6170 15 V18 3 GITl X 10 V 12 Be N 18 GIT3 X 4 R3 J 12 BO UECKSEITE Y X106 2 50 C REAR SIDE Y 14 G368 P 1 15 6170 X5 Y 10 16 GITTI Vis 17 GITTI X 5 B 18 GI73 X Y3 0038 RE I 5 BO Geometrij iig PiLine fcir dij Form Wi attr tarrone tiso FH sur S S T 6308 P 1 8 GITO x 15 VIG 5 GITTI X 16 Y 12 B 10 6173 X 4 RF J 12 B9 11 GITi X1 Ie 12 GITi X18 13 6399 Eei a Al Graph CKSEITE Y X160 2 56 CG REAR SIDE Y 14 6308 P 1 15 GI7 X5 V 19 16 Gil v15 17T GlTl X 5 B9 18 GIT3 X 8 Y3 8036 PG I 5 Bo 153 GI71 K 12 16 20 6399 17 5ep 82 11 23 12 For machining the rear face with the Y axis deactivate arc conversion G30 H2 and reactivate it for turning and other operations in the YZ plane surface view G30 H1 4 DIN PLUS Example
326. he power has been exceeded detected through load monitoring Tool wear limit value of work exceeded determined by load monitoring The tool life parameters are reset with a new cutting edge see 3 5 5 Tool Life Management 384 Data input for multipoint tools Primary cutting edge Parameter input dialog box 1 and 2 Use the PgUp key to switch to dialog box 3 Enter the Main cutting edge in the Multi tool input field Enter the identification number of the following secondary cutting edge in the M ID input field Conclude with OK For each secondary cutting edge Enter the identification number ID number that has been entered into the M ID field for the preceding cutting edge For further parameter input dialog boxes 1 and 2 Use the PgUp key to switch to dialog box 3 Enter the secondary cutting edge in the Multi tool input field Enter the identification number of the following secondary cutting edge in the M ID input field for the last secondary cutting edge enter the identification number of the main cutting edge Conclude with OK Watch for the closed chain tn Multipoint tools main tooth auxillary teeth main tooth 8 Operating Resources 8 1 5 Explanation ofTool Data Tool ID number Each tool is assigned a unique ID with up to 16 letters and numbers The ID number must not start with with an underscore Tool type First
327. he solution ESC key rejects the solution 6 7 4 Deleting Delete drop down menu Element Range Deletes the selected contour section Delete one contour element Place the cursor on the contour element Confirm soft key TURN PLUS deletes the contour element Delete contour range Place the cursor on the beginning of the section Mark beginning of range range marking soft key Place the cursor on the end of the contour section Contirm soft key TURN PLUS deletes the section HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 259 lating Contours Manipu Contour Pocket Figure Pattern Workpiece blank or finished part Deletes the complete contour Pocket figure pattern Activate the window in the desired reference plane front back surface Y front Y back Y surface gt Place the cursor on the pattern figure contour gt Confirm soft key TURN PLUS deletes the contour element Form element Place the cursor on the form element Contirm soft key TURN PLUS deletes the form element and adjusts the reference element the adjacent elements All form elements TURN PLUS deletes all form elements and adjusts the reference elements adjacent elements 6 7 5 Inserting Insert drop down menu Line Arc Inserts a linear element an arc at the selected point Select Select point OK soft key TURN PLUS activates the line menu arc menu gt Select and define the desired line arc segment TURN
328. here must be set to a value greater than the sum of the maximum differences in the speeds of the guiding and guided spindles approx 5 to 10 rpm 807 857 Angular offset measuring G906 spindles Evaluation G906 Measuring angular offset during spindle synchronization Maximum permissible change in position Tolerance window for the change of position offset after the spindles have gripped the workpiece at both ends during synchronized operation If the offset change exceeds the maximum value an error message appears A normal fluctuation of approx 0 5 must be taken into account Waiting time measuring offset Measuring period duration 808 858 Cut off control G991 spindle After the parting operation has been completed the phase angle of the two synchronized spindles changes without the nominal values speed angle of rotation being changed If the speed difference Is exceeded during the monitoring time the workpiece is considered as being cut off Evaluation G991 Controlled parting using spindle monitoring Speed difference Monitoring time 809 859 Load monitoring spindles Evaluation Load monitoring Start up time for monitoring 0 1000 ms only evaluated if Omit paths of rapid traverse is active The load monitoring function is not activated if the nominal acceleration of the spindle exceeds the limit value limit value 15 of acceleration ramp brake ramp As soon as nominal accelera
329. hine manufacturer usually supplies your lathe with suitable expert programs for workpiece transfer Rear face HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 187 Programming When programming a contour on the rear face be sure to consider the orientation of the XK axis or X axis and rotational direction of arcs Insofar as you use drilling and milling cycles there are no special aspects to rearface machining since these cycles refer to predefined contours For rear face machining with the basic commands G100 G103 or GO G3 G12 G13 for the Y axis the same conditions as for rearface contours apply Turning The expert programs contain converting and mirroring functions The following principle applies for rearface machining 2nd setup direction Program a positive value to depart the workpiece direction Program a negative value to approach the workpiece G2 G12 Circular arc clockwise G3 G13 Circular arc counterclockwise Full surface machining with counterspindle G30 The expert program activates the mirroring of the Z axis and the conversion of the arcs G2 G3 The arcs must be converted for turning operations and machining with the C axis G121 The expert program shifts the contour and mirrors the coordinate system Z axis Further programming of G121 is normally not required for machining the rear face after rechucking Full surface machining with single spindle G30 Normally not required G121 T
330. i 301 6 12 8 Thread Machining G31 306 6 12 9 Milling 307 6 12 10 Special Machining Tasks SM 309 6 13 Automatic Working Plan Generation AWG 310 6 13 1 Generating a Machining Plan 310 6 13 2 Machining Sequence So 6 14 Control Graphics 321 6 15 Configuration 322 6 16 Machining Information 324 6 16 1 Tool Selection Turret Assignment 324 6 16 2 Cutting Parameters 325 6 16 3 Coolant 325 6 16 4 Hollowing 326 6 16 5 Inside Contours 326 6 16 6 DING sine 328 6 16 7 Full Surface Machining 328 6 16 9 Shaft Machining 330 6 17 Example 392 rA 1 2 73 74 4D Parameter Mode of Operation 338 71 1 Parameters 338 7 1 2 Editing Parameters 339 Machine Parameters 341 Control Parameters 348 Set Up Parameters 209 Machining Parameters 397 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 VII Contents Contents 8 1 Tool Database 372 8 1 1 Tool Editor 3 2 8 1 2 Tool Types Overview of 8 1 3 Tool Parameters 37 7 8 1 4 Multipoint Tools Tool Life Monitoring 384 8 1 5 Explanation of Tool Data 305 8 1 6 Tool Holder Mounting Position 387 8 2 Chucking Equipment Database 390 8 2 1 Chucking Equipment Editor 390 8 2 2 Chucking Equipment Data 392 8 3 Technology Database Cutting Values 399 9 Service and Diagnosis 401 9 1 Service Mode of Operation 402 9 2 Service F
331. iable WINDOW WINDOW x opens an output window with x lines The window is opened as a result of the first input output WINDOW 0 closes the window The standard window comprises 3 lines you do not need to program it ST leput Dioaptor 50 5 31 utput Dinseter 00 5 TEARRE Syntax l l i i R E yl T WINDOW number of lines 0 lt number or lines lt 10 ME ensten End of pregran i 5 50P 82 DIN PLUS arn ne p sa ee ie ee Examples N WINDOW 8 N INPUT input diameter 1 N PRINT input diameter 1 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 173 4 14 Data Input Data Output 4 14 2 Input Output of V Variables INPUTA INPUTA can be used to program the input of V variables evaluated during program run run time You define the input text and the number of the variable The CNC PILOT requests the input of the variable value during the execution of the command The input is assigned to the variable and the program run continues The CNC PILOT displays the input after having completed the INPUT command Syntax INPUTA Text variable PRINTA PRINTA can be used to display text and V variable values in an output window You can program in succession up to two texts and up to two variables The input must not exceed 80 characters To output texts and variable values on a printer activate printer output In control parameter 1 printer
332. ide front Recessing Type S D A FD Outside Type S D A FD Inside Type A FD Outside front TypeA FD Inside front Define the recess type Undercuts Type H K U G Outside HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Axial machining Inside p If contour recessing precedes hollowing in the machining sequence recess areas are machined by contour recessing exception no suitable tools are available Recess turning contour turning are used alternatively Contour analysis Determining the recess type Form element S guarding ring recess type S Form element D sealing ring recess type D Form elementA recess general Form element FD relief turn F for FD a recess operation is used only in conjunction with inward copying angle EKW mtw contour recessing angle Sequence Outside machining before inside machining machining parameters for form element FD Global finished part parameters 1 All recess types radial axial machining outside and inside Radial machining outside Radial machining inside Axial machining outside Axial machining inside Contour analysis machining Determining the undercut types Form element H is machined using Individual traverse paths copying tool type 22x Form element K is machined using individual traverse paths copying tool type 22x Form element U is machined using individual traverse paths Recessing tool type 15x Form
333. iles HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 421 Parameters and Operating Resources 10 4 2 Saving Parameters and Operating Resources Data backup of parameters and operating resources Is conducted in two steps gt Create backup files backup function Transfer backup Tiles to an external system standard transfer function Restoring a data backup of parameters and operating resources is also conducted in two steps Retrieving backup files from the external system Standard transfer function gt Integrating backup files in CNC PILOT Restore function Backup transfers the following files in the directory BACKUP All parameter files All operating resource data All associated tixed word lists Maintenance system files Parameters and operating resource Tiles are converted during backup Restore downloads all backup files into the directory BACKUP except maintenance system files Call Menu item Parameter conversion Backup Restore fe Back to Transfer menu Operation Arrow up down only in right window moves the cursor within the file list Horizontal arrow keys move from left to right window and vice versa Enter only in right window displays the file content you close the file by pressing Enter again or ESC key Mask Only in right window Sort by data or file name Pao Make backup All existing backup files are deleted Then the new backup parameters files are created nee Rest
334. imensional elements The contour must be in a separate layer without dimension lines without wraparound edges etc Turning contours workpiece blanks or finished parts should be shown above the turning center if this is not the case then they must be revised in TURN PLUS No complete circles no splines no DXF blocks macros etc The imported contours can consist of up to 4000 elements lines arcs In addition up to 10 000 polyline points are permitted Preparation of contours during DXF import The contour is converted from DXF format to TURN PLUS format during importation The following changes are made to the contour representation since there are basic differences between the DXF and TURN PLUS formats Possible gaps between contour elements are closed Polylines are transformed into linear elements In addition the following features which are necessary for a TURN PLUS contour are specified The starting point of the contour The rotational direction of the contour Sequence of a DXF importation gt Selection of the DXF file gt Selection of the layer which contains only the contour s Import of the contour s gt Saving and editing of the contour in TURN PLUS HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 263 6 8 2 Configuring the DXF Import You can influence the preparation of the contour during the DXF importation with the configuration parameters described below x XF configuration Starting from the mai
335. imple tool description T3WT122 X15 Z150 HOV4 R0 4 A93 C55 19 K70 extended tool description not transferred to database 74 ID Erw 1 WT112 X20 Z150 H2V4 RO 8A95 C80 BY K70 extended tool description with transfer to database HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 81 4 4 3 gt CHUCKING EQUIPMENT CHUCKING EQUIPMENT x x 1 to 4 defines spindle assignment x Using the identification numbers of chuck jaws and adapters lathe center etc you create the chucking equipment table It is evaluated in the simulation G65 Enter chucking equipment data Select Header Chucking equipment Position the cursor in the CHUCKING EQUIPMENT section Press the INS key Edit the Chucking equipment dialog box Edit the CHUCKING EQUIPMENT data Position the cursor Press ENTER Edit the Chucking equipment dialog box Parameters of the Chucking equipment dialog box H Number of chucking equipment reference to G65 H 1 Chuck H 2 Jaw H 3 Adapter spindle H 4 Adapter tailstock ID Identification number of chucking equipment reference to database X Gripping diameter of jaws Q Chuck form of jaws see G65 4 4 4 Contour Definition KONTUR CONTOUR Assigns the following workpiece blank and finished part description to a contour Parameters O Number of the contour 1 4 X Z Zero point shift reference machine zero V Position of the coordinate system 0 The machine coordinat
336. ines the deviation from the main machining direction in the mathematically positive direction of rotation 90 lt rw lt 90 TURN PLUS only uses drilling and milling tools machining in direction of or at right angles to the principal axis Tooth number Used for G93 feed rate per tooth Salient length ax for drilling and milling tools Axial tools ax Distance from tool reference point to the upper edge of the holder Radial tools ax Distance from tool reference point to the lower edge of the holder also for drilling milling tools clamped in a chuck 386 Dimension of Position angle rw 8 Operating Resources 8 1 6 Tool Holder Mounting Position The graphic tool representation functions Simulation and control graphics take account of the shape of the tool holder and the mounting position on the tool carrier Tool holder Depending on the turret location the CNC PILOT determines whether the holder is mounted in an axial or radial position or whether an adapter is used When the tool holder type is not specified the CNC PILOT uses a simplified graphic representation The CNC PILOT recognizes the following holders designation of the standard holder as per DIN 69 880 A1 three bar boring tool B1 right hand short design B2 left hand short design B3 right hand short design overhead B4 left hand short design overhead B5 right hand long design B6 left hand long design B7 right hand lon
337. ing Instructions for structuring the program Instructions for input output Section codes for contours with the C Y axis Variables Enter a variable or mathematical expression FRONT SURFACE REAR SIDE The dialog box for entering the contour position reference plane reterence diameter appears Enter the Z position diameter The CNC PILOT inserts the section code below the position of the cursor AUXILIARY CONTOUR TEMPORARY inserts the section code below the position of the cursor Comment line Enter a comment The comment is inserted above the position of the cursor Single menu item Graphic Activates deactivates contours in the graphic window HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 m 62 315 qt X v maniim Z 198 766 f 7 100 001 Z ma Y 100 001 C n naini u Cir a Form adj attr E SS N 14 Gl X56 2 26 N 15 GI Z 35 B1 5 FH Bolt cirele Guez N 16 GI X65 B7 5 N 17 G1 XTS 2 45 3 Bere hole G308 Behl atj start point G1ee FT N 19 G22 7 56 Ti 5 Ki6 B 1 iN 20 61 Z 64 N 21 G25 HS 16 3 K2 5 Re 6 W15 Er A ER R eE JH Circlo cu Glez N 23 GI Z 199 B 1 dhi cirele cew G193 N 24 GI XB STIRN ZO FRONT nN aff gt gt DIN PLUS E transfer nee Holes line G4 l 3 Line 6181 dj Figures front r i KE D annn a G Direct input of the G number Calls the G list Line Activates the G1 Geo dialog box CirClockwise arc counterclockwise with incre
338. ing contours are not machined E gt 0 Approach behavior No input Feed rate reduced depending on approach angle maximum reduction 50 X Cutting limit in X direction diameter value default no cutting limit ra Cutting limit in Z direction default no cutting limit H Type of contour smoothing default H 0 smoothing after each cut H 1 lift off at under 45 smoothing after last cut H 2 lift off at under 45 no smoothing mM gs ee U Continued 122 If you press the vertical arrow keys the CNC PILOT also considers contours that are not displayed on the screen Cycle run 1 Calculate the areas to be machined and the cutting segmentation inteeds 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point taking the safety clearance into account first in Z direction then in X 3 Move at feed rate to target point Z 4 Depending on H H 0 Cut along the contour H 1 or 2 Retract at 45 5 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 3 to 5 until target point X has been reached 7 If required repeat 2 to 6 until all areas have been machined 8 H 1 Smoothen contour 9 Retract according to Q 4 DIN PLUS D Approach angle reference Z axis default 0 180 parallel to Z axis W Departing angle reference Z axis default 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis O Type of retraction after machining default O Q 0 Return to starting point first in X dir
339. ing sequences TURN PLUS PARA_USR Subfiles for program head entries Converted parameter and operating resource files Saved error log file DATA Files for the service personnel BACKUP Files for data backup backup restore 417 10 3 Data Transfer im ham e c ad A o3 q 10 3 2 Transmitting and Receiving Files After selecting Transfer mode select by menu the transmission method Network Windows networks Serial Serial data transfer FTP File Iransfer Protocol Displays Left window File belonging to CNC PILOT Right window Network and FTP Directory of the communications partner Serial transter Defined interface a Back to transfer menu If after a certain waiting time the communications partner cannot be reached an error message appears Parameters and operating resource data must be converted before transmission and after reception see 10 4 1 Parameter and Operating Resource Transfer c Changing communication partners Change the entry in Transfer directory or in Address Name of FTP server Settings box dialog Changing the file group changing mask The current mask setting is displayed below the menu line Data type See 70 3 7 Enabling File Types Sorting Sort files sorted by name or date Mask Only those entries are displayed that the mask allows Wildcards Represents any characters at this p
340. ing tools 3 2 NC center tool oF Parting tool 371 Reamer CTA Recess turning tool 371 Recessing tool 371 Roughing tool 37 Side milling cutter ole HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Special drilling tool 375 Special milling cutter 372 Special turning tool Of Step drill 371 Stopper tool 372 Tap drill 37 1 Thread cutter 3 2 Thread tool standard 371 Touch probe 312 Turning tools 371 Turn out tool oF Twist drill 371 Workpiece handling systems 372 Tools with more than one cutting edge 69 Touch pad 13 Touch probe Tools measuring with 39 Transfer 408 Transfer methods 409 Transfer values for subprograms 182 Transformations TURN PLUS contours 261 Translation of the NC program 70 Trimming TURN PLUS contour 256 Tube TURN PLUS 228 TURN PLUS AWG Editing and managing machining sequences 31G List of machining sequences 308 Machining sequence 307 Working plan generation 306 Contour definition Assigning attributes 263 Blank contour editing 256 Colors for selection points 229 Connect 262 Contour train integrating 222 XXI Index Index TURN PLUS Contour definition Contour deleting 259 Contour editing 258 Contour trimming 256 Contours of the lateral surface
341. ing up Tool list Accept list ee Depending on the previous turret assignment the following might occur Tool not used The CNC PILOT enters the new tools in the tool list Positions that were occupied In the old tool list but are not used in the new list are retained If a tool shall remain in the tool carrier no further action is required if not delete the tool Actual tool location differs from location in tool list A tool is not entered when Its newly assigned location differs from the location specified in the tool list The CNC PILOT displays a message indicating this error Change the tool location As long as a tool position differs trom the nominal assignment It remains highlighted Danger of collision Tool locations that are occupied but according to the NC program are not needed are kept The CNC PILOT compensates the tool actually entered even if it does not match the nominal assignment 32 e 2 e B Manual control H Hs 3n Setting up Har ee Menuel 24 Ror Tool list pominal actual comp 1 a ID number clipboard Pockets 9 From 5 T No ID number Type Designation tatus Ready for use Sister tool 342 300 1 342 Revers pl drill OFF ang Roughing tool 5 Off g Roughing tool 4 DFF Finishing tool OFF a8 Finishing tool R orf aoe a X z 111 880 8868 1 3 112 16 896 1 4 1221 35 0498 1 3 122 12 040 1 amp 151 660 2 T 14316 158 1
342. inished part and i N 513 e cea 2 25 576 c v TT 1 342 3801 simulate machining of the first setup Then you save EN ajg guts Progran active Wi 95 5eP 02 the contour You define a shift of the workpiece zero s Single el point and or a mirror image The simulation save the oan fee eee ESS eee Eo generated contour as the workpiece blank and the originally defined finished part contour taking the zero point shift and mirroring into account In DIN PLUS you insert into the program the Wij New of the paths of traverse Line or cutting track workpiece blank and finished part contour that you generated during simulation block menu Insert contour M Tool depiction Point of light or tool Menu items for controlling the simulation New Start a new simulation program changes are taken into account Continue Simulates the next NC source block or basic block Stop Stops the simulation Thus you can edit the settings or use the contour follow up function Set up drop down menu Window Slides Contour selection Status line u Zero point C See 5 2 Main menu Warnings see 5 1 2 Basics of Operation Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 205 c Times see 5 9Time Calculation m gt J Byrrencter Oo Protection zone eae 7 T Monitoring off
343. interval Duration Time period between due and overdue maintenance actions Who Person responsible for performing the action Interval Duration of the maintenance Interval Early warning Defines the time point of the action is soon due status relative to the maintenance interval Documentation reference and type Entry exists the Info actions soft key calls a comprehensive description of the maintenance action No entry There is no comprehensive description of the maintenance action available Calling the maintenance system Maintenance menu Item Service operating mode a Return to Service After calling the maintenance system the Maintenance and repair actions list are displayed with all actions The information is divided into Parts 1 and 2 switch by soft key Operation Vertical arrow keys Page Up Dn move the cursor within the list of actions Enter Opens a dialog box with the parameters of the action marked by the cursor 406 gt l Ejservice Maintenance system C EPS0_UTO para_usr up_demo cow 1J Confirm Bie Inport 4 Export Deactivate Maintenance and repair actions Typ Action Location Aecembly When Who HMH DEMO 1 12 3456 789 Linear axis 1 24H HNH DEMO 2 12 3456 789 Linear axis 2 a 5 HNH A HAH DEMO 3 12 3456 785 Linear axi 3 ST HNH i HNH DEMO 4 12 3956 789 Linessr axis 4 4 ki HNH iZ HNH DEH 5 i2 3456 7893 Linear axie 5 zi HNH HAH DE
344. io PLVA PLVI Sequence External machining precedes internal machining Machining parameter Roughing 4 Transverse machining longitudinal machining inside and outside Longitudinal machining outside and inside Longitudinal machining outside Longitudinal machining inside Transverse machining Contourparallel machining outside and inside Contour parallel machining outside Contourparallel machining inside Contour analysis Using the inward copying angle EKVV you can determine recess areas undefined recesses Ihe workpiece is machined with one or two tools Sequence External machining precedes internal machining Machining parameters Global finished part parameters 1 Longitudinal transverse machining outside and inside Longitudinal machining outside Longitudinal machining inside Continued gt 6 TURN PLUS on Main machining _Submachining Location Execution _ _ _ gt Roughing Hollowing continued z Transverse Outside Transverse machining outside front and back lt Transverse Inside Transverse machining inside gt Transverse Outside front Transverse machining outside front Transverse Outside back Transverse machining outside back D Neutral tool Longitudinal transverse machining outside and inside D Neutral tool Outside Longitudinal machining outside Oo Neutral tool Inside Longitudinal machining insi
345. ion A Rotary axis around X B Rotary axis around Y C Rotary axis around Z The auxiliary axes are only programmed in the MACHINING section using the functions GO to G3 G12 G13 G30 G62 and G701 Circular interpolation is only possible in the principal axes Rotary axes auxiliary axes are programmed in the MACHINING section using G15 The DIN editor respects only address letters of the configured axes The behavior of the rotary axis C depends on whether it is configured as principle or secondary The C axis functions G100 G113 apply for the principle axis C 62 Principal axes Rotary axes as secondary axes 4 DIN PLUS 4 1 4 Units of Measurement You can use the metric or inch system for writing NC programs The unit of measure is defined in the Unit box see 4 4 7 Program Head After the unit of measure has been defined it cannot be edited Units of measure used See 7 4 Fundamentals 4 1 5 Elements of the DIN Program A DIN program consists of the following elements Program number Program section codes NC blocks Commands for structuring the program Comment blocks The program number begins with followed by up to 8 characters numbers upper case letters or underscore no mutated vowels or and the extension nc for main programs or ncs for subprograms The first character must be a number or a letter Program section code When you create a new D
346. ion to return to the starting point of your machining process The working blocks of the 2nd setup are rejected HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 gt bepog ZX main view Orehzahl Drehrichtung Wink Synchront 8 Versatzuinkel Festanschlag 8 Abholmass H 1 6 min Vorschubweg max Vorschubweg Uorsch wegi les Backenspuelung Mit TurhPlue HT La os O w E uf i im is a 7 if gt TURN PLus Ej Peraneter Arbedtepooit 2 U feca pa Hullpkt Wersch Fer tigteiilaenge ki pes mm hs E mi 283 6 11 Prepare 6 11 Prepare 6 11 2 Setting Up a Tool List With Prepare Tool list you manage custom turret assignments See also Machining Parame ters 2 Global Technology Parameters View turret look at turret n Shows the turret assignment Set up turret set up turret n Select tools and position them on the turret Load list saved tool list Load a saved tool list Load file selection box Load list tool list of the machine Accept the current revolver assignment of the machine see 3 3 1 Setting Up aTool List Save list Save the current turret assignment in a file Delete list TURN PLUS deletes the selected file zp LoadTURN PLUS specific turret assignments before using the IWG AWG function for selecting tools Select Setting up Tool list Set up turret Set up turret n u _y _ Select the tool po
347. irection default O Q Sequence default O Q 0 Roughing and finishing Q 1 Roughing only Q 2 Finishing only x Cutting limit in X direction diameter value default no cutting limit Z Cutting limit in Z direction default no cutting limit Code start end default O A chamfer rounding arc is machined V 0 At the start and end V 1 At the start V 2 At end V 3 No machining Feed rate for finishing default Active feed rate H Retraction at end of cycle default O H 0 Return to starting point axial recess first Z and then X direction radial recess first X and then Z direction H 1 Position in front of the finished contour H 2 Move to clearance height and stop 128 Cycle run where Q 0 or 1 1 Calculate the areas to be machined and the cutting segmentation 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point taking the safety clearance into account radial recess first in Z then in X direction axial recess first in X then in Z direction 3 Execute first cut roughing 4 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next pass 5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete area has been machined 6 If required repeat 2 to 5 until all areas have been machined 7 Q 0 Finish machine the contour Cutting limitation The tool position before the cycle call determines the effect of a cutting limit The CNC PILOT machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depending on
348. isplay in the lower section of the screen shows the tool position and further machine data Options of operation E Manual mode of operation With the machine keys and the handwheel you can control the spindle and move the axes to machine the workpiece E Setting up the machine Functions for entering the tools being used setting the workpiece zero point the tool change position the protective zone dimensions etc E Measuring tool dimensions Functions for measuring the tool by touching the workpiece or by use of measuring devices E Configuring the screen display The CNC PILOT supports various types of machine display zp _ nAutomatic mode the data are entered and displayed in 1 millimeters or in inches depending on the setting of the control parameter 1 Remember If the machine has not been referenced The position display is not valid The software limit switches are nonoperational 24 Z _ 71 999 y 100 001 Menn cE l a C axie drive ere C axis 1 ON HIH ri E er F r J CAR OFF AI E Assigns a handwheel to an axis m Defines the handwheel interpolation factor Switches the machine display Turret one position backward Turret one position forward 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 2 1 Entering machine data F feed rate pull down menu m Feed per revolution gt Select Feed per revolut gt Enter the feed rate in mm rev or inches rev E Feed pe
349. ist Tool Life Data The CNC PILOT generates the displayed tool from the parameters of the tool database Whether the complete tool or only the cutting area is shown is specified in Picture number picture no 1 in the tool editor No tool displayed Chucking equipment display The simulation graphics displays the chucking equipment provided that it has been programmed with G65 The CNC PILOT uses the parameters of the chucking equipment database to display a chuck White dot The point of light small white rectangle represents the theoretical tool tip Rapid traverse paths Are shown as a broken white line Workpiece line display and tool path display Tool paths are shown as a continuous line They describe the path of the theoretical tool tip The wire frame graphics is particularly convenient if you only need a quick overview of the proportioning of cuts The path of the theoretical tool tip however is not identical with the contour of the workpiece This graphic is therefore not as suitable if you wish to run a thorough check on the machined contour In the CNC this falsification is compensated by the cutting radius compensation Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 197 5 1 Simu anoe of Operation In control parameter 24 you can define the color of the feed path for the respective T number In the cutting path display the CNC PILOT shades the area traversed by the cutting edge of th
350. it has been cut off If a lag error occurs the workpiece is defined as follows No correct cut off Define the following in machine parameters 1115 1165 Lag limit Feed rate for the path of traverse to be monitored 162 NGIZ ZP ZP Target position of the traverse command D Lag error limit R Reversing path Example N G94 F200 2 N GO Z20 Pre position slide 2 2 N G916 G1 Z 10 Activate monitoring move to a dead stop Continued gt 4 DIN PLUS Programming controlled parting Cut off the workpiece Activate the monitoring function for the path of traverse with G917 Move the workpiece with G1 after it has been cut off The CNC PILOT checks the lag error and stores the result in variable V300 Evaluate variable V300 Test results G917 produces satisfactory results provided that With rough chucking jaws n lt 3000 rpm With smooth chucking jaws n lt 2000 rpm Clamping pressure of gt 10 bar Controlled parting using spindle monitoring G991 The controlled parting function cut off control prevents collisions caused by incomplete parting processes G991 controls the parting process by monitoring the speed difference between the two spindles The spindles are connected in terms of actuation via the workpiece After the parting process has been completed the spindles rotate independently of each other Speed differences and monitoring time are stored in machine parameters 808
351. ize for measuring cut K Length of measuring cut Q Measuring loop counter every nth workpiece is measured Fit turning is performed by the expert program entry UP MEAS01 machining parameter 21 Parameters of the expert program see your machine manual Finishing Undercut Finishing undercut can be used for machining undercuts Type U Type H Type K When machining undercut type U adjacent transverse elements for which an oversize is taken into account are machined to finished dimensions Notes on using TURN PLUS Select the tool Selecting the machining range Confirm Start HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 You cannot influence an undercut operation the Cycle Cycle parameter menu item cannot be selected 303 J jam g amp 6 12 Interactive Worki Finishing Residual contour machining G890 Q 4 Using the Roughing hollowing residual roughing function you can remove residual material from sloping contours Cutting limitation The finishing operation begins with the residual poeced gt material Normally a cutting limit is not necessary V ep Residual finishing G890 04 checks whether the tool can move Into the contour valley without a collision The collision check is based on tool parameter width dn see 18 12100 Data 7 Parameters Kof Cutting limit Setting the oversize type by soft key Pl
352. key rejects the solution Parameters R Radius HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 257 Manipulating Contours lating Contours anipu Diameter Change the diameter of a horizontal linear element TURN PLUS recalculates the manipulated element and adjusts the position of the preceding succeeding element Operation Place the cursor on the contour element to be modified Press the confirm soft key Enter the new diameter and adjustments to the predecessor successor model Change diameter dialog box gt TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Contirm soft key accepts the solution ESC key rejects the solution Parameters of Change diameter dialog box X New diameter Preceding succeeding element With angle change Without angle change 6 7 3 Change Change drop down menu Contour element Change the parameters of the contour element TURN PLUS adjusts the succeeding elements The starting point stays as It Is Operation gt Place the cursor on the contour element to be modified Press the confirm soft key TURN PLUS opens a Line Arc dialog box Change parameters TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Contirm soft key accepts the solution ESC key rejects the solution Contour element with shift Change the parameters of the contour element TURN PLUS shifts the contour according to the new parameters The starting point remains Operation Place
353. knows the areas that have already been machined and does not machine them again If Q 4 you cannot influence the approach type It is determined by the finishing cycle Note for small chamfers rounding Peak to valley height or feed rate with G95 Geo are not programmed The CNC PILOT automatically reduces the feed rate The chamfer rounding arc is machined with at least 3 revolutions If peak to valley height or feed rate with G95 Geo are programmed no automatic feed reduction For chamfers rounding which as a result of their size are machined with at least three revolutions the feed rate is not reduced automatically Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section NE End block number end of contour section E Approach behavior E 0 Descending contours are not machined E gt 0 Approach behavior No input Feed rate reduced depending on approach angle maximum reduction 50 V Identifier beginning end default 0 A chamfer rounding arc is being machined V 0 At beginning and end V 1 At beginning V 2 At end V 3 No machining V 4 Chamfer rounding is being machined not the basic element prerequisite Contour section with an element Type of approach default O Q 0 Automatic selection the CNC PILOT checks Diagonal approach First X then Z direction Continued gt 132 G890 04 Residual finishing p During residual finishing G890 04 the CNC
354. l workpieces in the working space The CNC PILOT depicts up to four workpieces in the working space and simulates machining of these workpieces You define the first position of the workpiece in CONTOUR It is possible to shift the workpiece position later with G99 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Zero point shifts are included in calculation Zero point shifts are not included in calculation D i A change of status Is not accounted for until the simulation is restarted The symbols are shown faded as long as the changed setting is not yet in effect at Qn n 1 4 Contour n the selected contour is marked Symbol Coordinate system of this contour 199 5 1 Simulan o of Operation 5 1 2 Basics of Operation m a simuration E Machining ZBSPO1_F new telcos Hoton whist up Mi contour 1 Debug Load the desired NC program na Set the simulation window face surface window No feed programed etc N 51 G74 Z7 28 5757 P806 I J32 8 1 Ka Set the simulations mode single block basic block ee or without stop Select the simulation mode contour machining motion Select New Simulation mode without stop Stop stops the the simulation Continue resumes the simulation How to activate the simulation function ode of Operation EEREN Simulation mode Single block or basic block The simulation stops after every single block 1 N 5I G74 Z2 28 5757 P80 18 J32 E0 1 Ke basic
355. le default 0 machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depending on which side the tool has been positioned D G22 G23 G23 G25 G25 G25 before the cycle is called Cutter radius compensation Active 0 i i Z G57 oversize Enlarges the contour 1 e also inside contours 2 o e e G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour 3 z 7 Z Z 7 Z lt 0 is not considered 4 e B G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after occas cycle end e Skip elements 126 4 DIN PLUS Contour parallel with neutral tool G835 G830 machines the contour area defined by NS NE parallel to the contour and bidirectionally The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal machining If required the area to be machined is divided into several sections for example for machining contour valleys The simplest way of programming is specifying NS NE and P Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section NE End block number end of contour section P Maximum infeed Oversize in X direction diameter value default O X o OF Oversize in Z direction default O Cutting limit in X direction diameter value default no cutting limit Z Cutting limit in Z direction default no cutting limit A Approach angle reference Z axis default 0 180 parallel to Z axis W Departing angle reference Z axis defa
356. le for machining relief turns and undercuts TURN PLUS divides the machining process into standard machining cycles and the machining cycles for form elements If the division into standard machining cycles and machining cycles for form elements is not successful TURN PLUS switches to Tull surface machining Finishing Tool tolerances traversing to from tool change position For tool selection the following applies Setting angle EW EW gt mkw mkw increasing contour angle Setting angle EVV and point angle SVV NWmin lt EW SW lt NWmax Secondary angle FNWT FNWT NWmax NWmin Secondary angle tolerance FNWT tolerance range for secondary cutting edge Relief cutting angle FFW Minimum angle differential between the contour and secondary cutting edge Approach external finishing ANFA Approach internal finishing ANFI Depart external finishing ABFA Depart internal finishing ABFI Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and Z direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO 364 FAL 0 FIL 0 FAL 1 FIL 1 7 Parameters Finishing Machining analysis Minimum finishing transverse length FMPL TURN PLUS checks the frontmost element of the outside contour to be finish ma
357. learly defined by the entries for diameter and angle You can enter polar coordinates as absolute or incremental values Units of measurement You can program and operate the CNC PILOT either in the metric or inch system The units of measurement listed in the table below apply to all inputs and displays Coordinates mm inch Lengths mm inch Angles Degrees Degrees Spindle speed rom rom Cutting speed m min ft min Feed per revolution mm rev inch rev Feed per minute mm min inch min Acceleration m s2 ft s2 1 Introduction and Fundamentals Machine reference points Machine zero point The point of intersection of the X axis with the Z axis is called the machine zero point On a lathe the machine zero point is usually the point of intersection of the spindle axis and the spindle surface The machine zero point is designated with the letter M Workpiece zero point For machining a workpiece it is easier to reference all input data to a zero point located on the workpiece By programming the zero point used in the workpiece drawing you can take the dimensions directly from the drawing without further calculation This point is the workpiece zero point The workpiece zero point is designated with the letter W Reference marks Whether the control forgets the positions of the machine axes when it is switched off depends on the position encoders used If the positions are lost you must pass over the fixed
358. led a cursor Arrow keys Ihe cursor is moved with the page up page down arrow keys or the touch pad Navigate You can move the cursor within a list or an input box to any position you would like to check change delete or add to In other words you navigate through the list Active inactive functions menu items Functions or soft keys that currently unavailable are shown dimmed Dialog box Dialog boxes are also called input windows Editing Editing is changing deleting and adding to parameters commands etc within programs tool data or parameters Default value If the parameters of DIN commands or other parameters are preassigned values these values are referred to as default values Bytes he capacity of a storage disk is indicated in bytes Since the CNC features a hard disk the individual program lengths file sizes are expressed in bytes Extension File names consist of the actual file name and the file name extension he name part and the extension part are separated by The extension indicates the type of file Examples NC DIN programs NCS DIN subprograms MAS Machine parameters HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 19 o 9 me K Q gt Lu L N Q at aa oa m x N Cc cc c 3 1 Switch On Switch Off Re 3 1 Switch On Switch Off Reference Run 3 1 1 Switch On andTraversing
359. les can be displayed that the mask allows transmitted by serial interface 7 bit transfer some special Wildcards characters are replaced in the comments by _ Represents any characters at this position Represents any one character at this position The CNC PILOT automatically adds to any entered mask Continued gt 420 10 Transfer Operation Vertical arrow keys Page Up Dn move the cursor within the list of files eae Calls the marked parameter operating parameters resource file from the PARA_USR directory converts the data to the salah oe andoveryrtesihe I During loading the CNC PILOT recognizes the parameter existing parameter operating resource operating resource group from the file name extension data This is why the file name can be changed on external l systems but not the extension During download the control checks whether the user is authorized to edit this parameter or whether the Automatic operating mode is active If the user is not authorized to Marks the selected file or the edit the parameter the parameter is skipped parameter operating resource pressing again unmarks it N en i T oa S Network Serie HJFTP i 3 Parenter conv se Setting Horizontal arrow keys move from left to right Paraueter files xx orp window and vice versa I Tool data WEZ Sy ALL_DEU SPS 102622 r w 65 66 N ae f Chucking data SPH GW ALL_DEU STD 482473 r w 05
360. lide Switch over to the next spindle 27 O a q c Oo Q N o 3 3 Tool Lists Tool Life Management 3 3 Tool Lists Tool Life Management The tool list turret table indicates the current tool carrier assignment Io compile a tool list enter the ID numbers of the tools You can use the entries in the TURRET section of the NC program to set up the tool list The Compare list and Accept list functions refer to the NC program last interpreted in automatic mode Tool life data Apart from ID numbers and tool type descriptions the tool list includes data for tool life management Status Shows the remaining tool life quantity Ready for use When the tool life has expired the defined number of parts has been produced the tool is not ready for use any longer Atw replacement tool If a tool is not ready for use a replacement tool is inserted Simple tools With the setup functions you can only enter tools registered in the database If the NC program uses simple tools proceed as follows Run an interpretation of the NC program the CNC PILOT automatically updates the tool list h gt If the positions in the tool list are occupied by old tools the confirmation request Update tool list appears The tools are only entered after you have confirmed the request Tools that are not registered in the database are identified by the code _AUTO_xx
361. lide programmed with G62 waits until the mark has been crossed The slide continues executing the NC program without a pause Parameters H Number of the mark range 0 lt H lt 15 60 4 12 3 Spindle Synchronization Workpiece Transfer Spindle synchronization G720 G720 controls the workpiece transfer from the master to the slave spindle and synchronizes functions such as polygonal turning jobs Program the speed of the master spindle with Gx97 S and define the speed ratio between the master spindle and the slave spindle with OQ F If you enter a negative value for Q or F the direction of rotation of the slave spindle will be reversed If you synchronize more than one slave spindle with a master spindle use G720 for each of the slave spindles The following rule applies Q master speed F slave speed Parameters Number of the master spindle 1 4 H Number of the slave spindle 1 4 no input or H 0 Switches off the spindle synchronization C Offset angle default 0 Q Master speed factor default 1 Range 100 lt Q lt 100 F Slave speed factor default Q Is transferred range 100 lt F lt 100 C angle offset G905 G905 measures the angular offset of workpiece transfer with rotating spindle The sum of angle C and the angle offset goes into effect as zero point shift of C axis This value is saved in the variable V922 C axis 1 or V923 C
362. line running parallel to the Z axis and through the center of the selected arc Position Original position Inserts the overlay contour as itis into the support contour see section 1 in the figure Normal position rotates the overlay contour about the normal position The overlay contour is rotated by the angle of the overlay point and Is inserted into the support contour see section 2 in the figure Q Number of overlay elements B End point position of the last element to be superimposed reference a line segment running parallel to the Z axis and intersecting the midpoint of the selected arc Be Angle between the first and last overlay element Bi Angle between the individual overlay elements The direction of rotation according to which the overlay contours are arranged corresponds to the direction of rotation of the supporting contour element The reference point of the contour to be superimposed is positioned on the point of overlay HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 241 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 1 Contours on the Front and Rear Face Milling depth For figures enter the parameter Depth FP If you use Individual elements for describing a milling contour TURN PLUS opens the Pocket contour dialog box after you have finished your entries which requests Depth P Depth P gt 0 defines a pocket Position of end face contours TURN PLUS takes
363. ling closed contour contracts the contour while an outside milling type expands It For open contours the contour Is shifted to the left or right depending on the cycle type Continued gt 152 Cycle run 1 Starting position X Z C is the position before the cycle begins 2 Calculate the milling depth inteeds 3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling depth 4 Mill the contour 5 E For open contours and for slots whose width tool diameter Plunge to the next milling depth and mill the contour in the opposite direction For closed contours and slots Retract by the safety clearance return and cut to the next milling depth 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the complete contour is milled 7 Retract to return plane K With cycle type Q 0 oversizes are not taken into account G57 and negative G58 oversizes are not taken into account 4 DIN PLUS Parameters Q NS NE Cycle type milling location Q 0 Milling center on the contour without milling cutter radius compensation Q 1 closed contour inside milling Q 1 with open contour left in machining direction intersecting areas which are programmed in directly successive contour elements are not machined Q 2 with closed contour outside milling Q 2 with open contour right in machining direction Intersecting areas which are programmed in directly successive contour elements are not machin
364. ling systems jd Measuring device el na 5 x E B Turret list Type list I0 list Service Transfor Changes to Service Mode Service m Switches to Transfer mode of operation Transfer Turret list Registered tools of the tool carrier turret Type list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool type ID list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool ID number 8 Operating Resources Tool lists Use the tool lists as a starting point for editing copying or deleting entries 44 non diroct HH dei tonp thuelere all toole Tool database Selection by Type i77 ID number Up Lists the current tool carrier assignments Turret list Found From Max memory gt 1 rs db df eu bu fw Cutting material Designation Roughing tool Roughing tool Lists the entries sorted by tool type Roughing tool Type liet Roughing tool gt Enter the Tool type gt Tool type unknown Main group Subgroup Machining direction Roughing tool Roughing tool Roughing tool Roughing tool Roughing toel Roughing tool Roughing tool Roughing tool 8 1 Tool Database Select with continue soft key ee Lists the entries sorted by ID number Mask for ID numbers limits the list Only those entries are displayed that correspond to the mask Mask Enter the first characters of the ID The following places can be any characters Any character can be at these positions ID list
365. ll Surface Machining Preconditions for full surface machining Program header Assignment of spindle to slide for the 2nd setup input fields 2nd setup of spindle With slides Machining sequence Entry Main machining RECHUCK or PART after machining the front side see 6 73 2 Machining Sequence For the back machining you can Enter the machining operations after RECHUCK PARTING Use the same machining sequence as for front side machining no further entries after RECHUCK PARTING Continued P gt 328 TURN PLUS only evaluates the information with without fit The type of fit H6 H7 is of no significance w l E gt TURN PLUS bepog ZX main view Program RE Workpiece 1f Prepare at IWG Wiauc A Configuration Program head T l l Haterial St 6 2 i Workpiece Gewindebolzen Machine is Company HEIDENHATN Drawing i264 55 0511 author Michaela Huster i Setup i and 2 From 2 Date 16 65 02 let setup Spindle fo With slide i Clamping 2 eG ma Free length ec ma Clamp press E bar 2nd setup Spindle 3 With slide f Clamping ma Free length l ma Clamp prese bar Program for automatic lathe fe Speed limit rpn Foanent H functions p 16 ai k Edit program head LT w l gt Tum PLus bep ZX main view AWG 3j rrogrem 244 Workpiece 344 Propare 4 iun H nur 444 Configuration BARSANI 16 5ep 0z 17 17 02 Continue Finish Contour parallel
366. ll diameter Drilling depth reduction BTRC 2nd drilling depth bt2 bt1 BTRC the following drilling steps are reduced accordingly Diameter tolerance for drill BDT For selecting the desired drill centering drills countersinks stepped drill taper reamers Drilling diameter DBmax BDT d DBmax maximum drilling diameter Tool selection DBmax gt DB gt d Milling Traverse from to tool change position Approach end face ANMS Approach lateral surface ANMM Depart end face ABMA Depart lateral surface ABMM Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and Z direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO 368 bt1 BIFC db bt2 bt1 BTRC d lt db lt DBmax 7 Parameters Milling Safety clearances and allowances Safety clearance in infeed direction SMZ Distance between the starting position and the top edge of the workpiece to be milled Safety clearance in milling direction SME Distance between milling contour and cutter flank Allowance in milling direction MEA Allowance in infeed direction MZA Load monitoring ON OFF 0 No load monitoring commands generated by TURN PLUS 1 TURN PLUS generates commands for load monitoring Position components corresponds to parameter Q in G996 0 Load monitoring not active 1 Rapid traverse
367. lls with 180 drilling angle are used D Retraction speed and infeed within the hole default O D 0 Rapid traverse D 1 Feed rate K Retraction plane radial holes diameter default to starting position or to safety clearance HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 147 4 10 C Axis Machining 4 10 1 General C Axis Functions Select C axis G119 If several C axes are available use G119 to select a C axis and to switch the active C axis during machining G119 assigns the C axis entered in Q to the slide Before assigning an active C axis to another slide cancel the previous assignment with G119 without Q Parameters Q Number of the C axis default O Q 0 Cancel the current assignment of C axis to slide Q gt 0 Assign the C axis to a slide Reference diameter G120 G120 determines the reference diameter of the unrolled lateral surface Program G120 if you use CY for G110 to G113 G120 is a modular function Parameters X Diameter Zero point displacement C axis G152 G152 defines a zero offset for the C axis reference machine parameter 1005 ff reference point C axis The zero point is valid until the end of the program Parameters C Angle of the new C axis zero point Standardize C axis G153 G153 resets a traverse angle gt 360 or lt 0 to the corresponding angle modulo 360 without moving the C axis 148 G153 is only used for lateral surface machining An automatic modu
368. lo 360 function is carried out on the end faces 4 DIN PLUS 4 10 2 Front Rear Face Machining Rapid traverse on end face G100 The tool moves at rapid traverse along the shortest path to the end point Parameters X Diameter of the end point C Final angle angular dimension XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates Z End point default Current Z position pP Programming X C XK YK Z Absolute incremental or modal Program either X and C or XK and YK Danger of collision A N During G100 the tool moves on a linear path To position the workpiece to a defined angle use G110 Linear segment on end face G101 The tool moves linearly at the feed rate to the end point Parameters X Diameter of the end point C Final angle angular dimension XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates Z End depth default Current Z position p Programming X C XK YK Z Absolute incremental or modal Program either X and C or XK and YK Circular arc on front face rear face G102 G103 The tool moves in a circular arc at the feed rate to the end point Direction of rotation see help graphic If you program H 2 or H 3 you can machine linear slots with a circular base If H 2 With and K H 3 Define the circle center with J and K Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Circular arc G102
369. m elements Zoe 6 5 3 Overlay Elements 239 6 6 C Axis Contours 242 6 6 1 Contours on the Front and Rear Face 242 6 6 2 Contours of the Lateral Surface 249 6 7 Manipulating Contours 256 6 71 Editing the Contours of a Blank Part 256 6 72 Trimming 256 6 73 Change 258 6 74 Deleting 259 6 75 Inserting 260 6 76 Transformations 261 6 77 Connect 262 6 78 Resolve 262 6 8 Importing DXF Contours 263 6 8 1 Fundamentals 263 6 8 2 Configuring the DXF Import 264 6 8 3 DXFImport 266 6 8 4 Transferring and Organizing DXF Files 266 6 9 Assigning attributes 267 6 9 1 Attributes for Workpiece Blanks 267 6 9 2 Oversize 267 6 9 3 Feed rate peak to valley height 267 6 9 4 Precision stop 268 6 9 5 Separation Points 268 6 9 6 Machining Attributes 269 6 10 User Aids 273 6 10 1 Calculator 273 6 10 2 Digitizing 274 6 10 3 Inspector Checking Contour Elements 274 6 10 4 Unresolved Contour Elements 219 6 10 5 Error Messages 2 6 6 11 Preparing a Machining Process 217 6 11 1 Chucking a Workpiece 277 6 11 2 Setting Up a Tool List 284 Contents 6 12 Interactive Working Plan Generation IWG 286 6 12 1 Tool call 287 6 12 2 Cutting Data 288 6 12 3 Cycle specification 288 6 12 4 Roughing 289 6 12 5 Recessing 294 6 12 6 Drilling 299 6 12 7 FINISAING in
370. m shift in variables 170 G903 Lag error in variables 170 G907 Block speed monitoring off 171 G908 Feed override 100 171 G909 Interpreter stop 171 G918 Look ahead ON OFF 171 G919 Spindle override 100 171 G920 Deactivate datum shifts 172 G921 Activate datum shifts tool lengths 172 G975 Lag error limit 172 G980 Activate datum shifts 172 G981 Activate datum shifts tool lengths 172 INPUT Input variables 173 WINDOW Open output window variables 173 PRINT Output variables 173 INPUTA Input V variables 174 WINDOWA Open output window V variables 174 PRINTA Output V variables 174 variables Evaluation during program interpretation 175 V variables Evaluation during program run 177 IF THEN Program branch 180 WHILE Program repeat 180 SWITCH CASE Program branch 181 Slide code 181 Skip level 181 Subprogram call 182 G500 502 OEM cycle G600 602 699 PLC function G715 Real time coupling function G716 Real time coupling function G719 Real time coupling function G16 Reserved for 3 D G704 Return inspection G705 Return inspection G900 Return inspection G990 TURN PLUS soft keys selection Find input parameters by digitizing CECE Calculate input parameters with pocket calculator Incremental dimensions Switch to arc input Switch to line input Continue soft key next element next selection etc Tangential transition to next contour element Tangential transition to nex
371. m subprograms in parallel provides up to three editing windows Editing window Double or triple window Selected in Config Window main menu Load the desired NC program Load NC program in the next free window Select Prog Load Main program Subprogram Load NC program in selected window Select and activate free editing window Select Prog Load Main program Subprogram Switching between NC programs and windows By soft key see table By touch pad To switch NC programs Click the NC program in the program title bar To switch editing windows Click the desired window Save the NC program Prog Save Saves the NC program of the active window The NC program stays in the editing window you can continue editing It Prog Save as Saves the NC program of the active window under a new program name In the Saving NC program dialog box you specify whether the editing window Is closed Prog Save all Saves the NC programs of all active windows The NC programs remain in the editing windows you can continue editing them 4 2 2 Address Parameters You can use absolute or incremental coordinates for programming If no entry is made for X Y Z XK YK C the coordinates of the block previously executed will be retained modal CNC PILOT calculates missing coordinates in the principal axes X Y or Z if you program simplified geometry programming
372. machining block in the cutting data HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 325 co l O Au O l i E Machining Information co 6 16 4 Hollowing If hollowing precedes recess turning or contourrecessing In the machining sequence recess areas undefined recesses are machined with roughing tools Otherwise the AWG machines the respective contour areas using recessing tools TURN PLUS uses the Inward copying angle EKW machining parameter 1 to distinguish recesses from relief turns If more than one tool is required for the hollowing operation TURN PLUS pre machines the area with the first tool and removes the residual material with a tool machining in the opposite direction Contour machining finishing The AWG Tinish machines hollowed recesses using the same strategy as for the roughing operation Depending on the contour and the available tools the machining operation is executed as follows Complete hollowing with one tool If more than one tool is available the tool with standard machining direction is used If the final contour element of the area to be hollowed is a transverse element the tool first cuts towards the transverse element see figure If the two tools have different clearance angles the tool with the larger clearance angle is used first If both tools have the same clearance angle machining starts from the side with the smallest inward copying angle D
373. mat Templates are defined by the machine tool builder Your machine tool builder can tell you whether he offers templates and how they can be used 4 2 8 NC Program Interpretation For variable programming and user communication keep in mind that the CNC PILOT interprets the complete NC program before it can be run see 3 5 Automatic Mode of Operation The CNC PILOT differentiates between variables are calculated during the interpretation of the NC program V variables are calculated at runtime which means during the execution of an NC block Inout output during NC program interpretation Inout output during NC program run 70 4 DIN PLUS 4 3 The DIN PLUS Editor Select menu items The submenus can be called by Selecting the desired menu items Positioning the cursor in the program section aa From the submenu back to the main menu When you call the menu items Geometry Processing Turret assignment or Chucking equipment the CNC PILOT jumps to the corresponding program section When you position the cursor in the BLANK FINISHED PART or MACHINING section the CNC PILOT switches to the corresponding submenu Creating NC blocks The insertion of new NC blocks varies depending on the program section After the Editing program head dialog box has been concluded the CNC PILOT automatically creates the blocks of the program head code In the TURRET and CHUCKING EQUIPMENT sectio
374. me for monitoring 0 to 1000 ms evaluated if Omit paths of rapid traverse is active The load monitoring function is not activated if the nominal acceleration of the spindle exceeds the limit value limit value 15 of acceleration ramp brake ramp As soon as nominal acceleration falls below the limit value the monitoring function is activated after the start up time for monitoring has elapsed Number of measured values to be averaged 1 to 50 The mean value is calculated from the number of values to be averaged This reduces the sensitivity to short term peak load during monitoring Maximum torque not used at present Reaction delay time P1 P2 0 to1000 ms The system reports a limit violation as soon as the delay time for P1 or P2 limit torque 1 or 2 has been exceeded 1016 1066 Limit switches and rapid traverse rates C axis 1019 1069 General data C axis This parameter is evaluated if pre positioning is switched on configuration code 1 machine parameter 18 For digital drives pre positioning Is usually not necessary HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Rapid traverse rate C axis Maximum speed for spindle positioning Pre positioning of spindle with M14 Angle at which the spindle is positioned before the C axis is swiveled in 345 a 72 Machine Parameters 7 2 Machine Parameters 1020 1070 Angle compensation in C axis Parameters are entered by the machine tool builder 1021 1026 1071
375. measured values ep EX values are measured as a radius The variables are also used by other G functions G901 G902 G903 and G916 Make sure that your measuring results are not overwritten 165 IONS J Q C LL Bi 4 12 Special Functions 4 12 6 Post Process Measuring The workpieces are measured outside of the lathe and the results are transferred to the CNC PILOT The measuring setup determines whether measured values or compensation values are transferred A global measuring result should be transferred to measuring position O The results are evaluated by the NC program Example Tool wear compensation You can use the tool life monitoring function when the NC program sets tool diagnosis bit 5 tool wear determined by in process workpiece measuring in order to inform the CNC PILOT of a worn out tool see 4 2 4Tool Programming Post process measuring G915 With G915 measured values are received from the post process measuring system and stored in variables Variable assignment V939 Global measuring result V940 Measuring status 0 No new measured values 1 New measured values V941 V956 corresponding to measuring points 1 16 Parameters H Block H 0 Reserved for further functions H 1 Measured values received are read in Example Using measuring result for compensation BEARBEITUNG MACHINING N2711 Contour finishing Outside MIm End of machining process N50 GOTS A1 Requ
376. measurement loop intervals Measuring Measuring loop geometry Measuring allowance MA Allowance still applied to the element to be measured Measuring cut length MSL The measuring parameters are assigned to the fit elements as an attribute Drilling Traverse from to tool change position Approach end face ANBS Approach lateral surface ANBM Depart end face ABGA Depart lateral surface ABGI Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and Z direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 367 Machining Parameters Machining Parameters Drilling safety clearances Internal safety clearance SIBC for deep hole drilling retraction distance B for G74 Driven drilling tools SBC Safety clearance for driven tools on end face and lateral surface Non driven drilling tools SBCF Safety clearance for non driven tools on end face and lateral surface Driven tap SGC Safety clearance for driven taps on end face and lateral surface Non driven taps SGCF Safety clearance for non driven taps on end face and lateral surface Drilling Machining The parameters apply to drilling with deep hole drilling cycle G74 Drilling depth factor BTFC 1st drilling depth bt BTFC db db dri
377. mensions With Q 0 the TRC reduces the feed rate at arcs G2 G3 G12 G13 and rounding arcs if the shifted radius lt original radius The special feed rate is corrected when a rounding as transition to the next contour element is machined Reduced feed rate Feed rate offset radius original radius Milling cutter radius compensation MCRC Without the MCRC function the system defines the center of the cutter as the zero point for the paths of traverse With the TRC function the CNC PILOT accounts for the outside cutting radius when moving along the programmed paths of traverse see 7 5 Tool Dimensions Recessing area clearance and milling cycles already include TRC MCRC calls You must therefore ensure that TRC MCRC is disabled before you call these cycles There are a few exceptions to this rule that will be described where concerned G40 Switch off TRC MCRC The TRC is effective up to the block before G40 In the block with G40 or in the block after G40 only a line is permissible G14 is not allowed G41 G42 Switch on TRC MCRC A straight line segment G0 G1 must be programmed in the block containing G41 G42 or after the block containing G41 G42 The TRC MCRC is effective beginning with the next positioning command G41 Switch onTRC MCRC compensation of the tool tip cutter radius to the left of the contour in traverse direction G42 Switch on TRC MCRC compensation of the tool tip cutter
378. mental or ab solute center dimensioning Form Elements of the contour subprogram call reference plane for pocket island Attributes auxiliary commands for contour definition Front Basic elements figures or patterns of the contour on the front or rear face machining with the C axis Surface Basic elements figures or patterns on the lateral surface machining with the C axis Instructions for structuring the program and for section codes Graphics Activate update the contour in the graphic simulation windows 75 Ses Q e LL V l A 4 3The 4 3 3 Machining Menu The Machining submenu contains G and M functions as well as further functions for the MACHINING section Selecting a G function The G number is known Select G and enter the number The G number is not known gt Select G gt Press the CONTINUE soft key Select the G function from the list of G numbers G menu To select the desired G function use the pull down menu PLUS Editor E cs j at lt Selecting an M function The M number is known Select M and enter the number M menu To select the M function use the menu Single menu items T Tool call Program theT number see 4 6 7Tools Types of Compensation A list containing the tools indicated in the TURRET section is displayed F calls G95 Feed per revolution S calls G96 Cutting speed Instr uc
379. meter 1 d1 Diameter 1 5 d2 Diameter 2 d2 Diameter 2 i IA Length of conical part zl Length of lathe center d3 Diameter of the dead center sleeve md Circumference diameter of the forcing nut b3 Width of the dead center sleeve mb Width of the forcing nut md Circumference diameter of the forcing nut mb Width of the forcing nut Dead center type 26x Lathe center type 27x HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 397 Centering cone ID Chuck identification number Available Physical availability fixed word list zw Centering cone angle za Length from centering cone tip to the sleeve d1 Maximum diameter 1 d2 Minimum diameter 2 zl Length of centering cone Chucking Equipment Database d1 d2 an Za Centering cone type 28x 398 8 Operating Resources 8 3 Technology Database Cutting Values The CNC PILOT stores the technology data according to the Material ist 52 2 Ss Material Cutt material ec azs Cutting material Mach method Roughing Machining mode The machining modes supported by the CNC PILOT bcd are permanently defined and cannot be changed materials and cutting materials can be defined Ina tixed word list The cutting data are managed in the technology editor Selection Tech nology data menu item parameter mode O 4 gt O b o e 2 oa m gt O Q The TURN PLUS working plan generation uses the t
380. mmed for G26 Gx26 Parameters S Maximum speed Acceleration slope G48 Define the approach acceleration breaking acceleration and maximum feed rate G48 is a modal function If G48 is not programmed Acceleration and deceleration values will be taken from machine parameter 1105 Acceleration deceleration of linear axis Maximum feed rate machine parameter 1101 maximum axis velocity Parameters E Acceleration starting an axis default Parameter value F Acceleration for braking an axis default parameter value H Programmed acceleration On Off H 0 Switch off programmed acceleration after next traverse H 1 Switch on programmed acceleration P Maximum feed rate default parameter value Interrupted feed G64 Briefly interrupts the programmed feed rate G64 is a modal function switch on Program G64 with E and F Switch off Program G64 without parameter Parameters E Duration of pause Interval time range 0 01 s lt E lt 99 99 s F Duration of feed rate feed period range 0 01 s lt E lt 99 99 s Feed per minute for rotary axes G192 Feed rate when only a rotary axis auxiliary axis is moved Parameters F Feed per minute in min HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Actual S gt absolute maximum speed machine parameter 805 ff applies to the parameter value If P gt parameter value the parameter value applies E F and P refer to th
381. more than once G80 ends the machining cycle Cycles If the number of infeeds differs for the X and Z axes the tool first advances in both axes with the programmed values The infeed is set to zero if the target value for one direction is reached D Note on programming G83 G83 must be alone in a block G83 must not be programmed with K variables G83 must not be nested not even by calling subprograms Oversizes G57 oversizes are calculated with algebraic sign oversizes are therefore E Cutter radius compensation Not impossible for inside contour machining active You can program the TRC G58 oversizes are taken into account if you are working with TRC separately with G40 G42 G57 and G58 oversizes stay in effect after cycle end Safety clearance After every step lmm Cycle run 1 Start the cycle execution from the current tool position Danger of collision 2 Advance by the infeed distance defined in and K A N After each pass the tool returns on a diagonal path before it advances for the next pass If required program an additional rapid traverse path to avoid a collision 3 Execute the machining operation which is programmed in the blocks after G83 taking the distance from the tool position to the contour start point as an oversize 4 Return on a diagonal path 5 Repeat 2 to 4 until the contour target point has been reached 6 Return to the starting point of the cycle Parameters
382. mp Mark the work blocks to be changed Onn eee TURN PLUS simulates the work plan Unmarked work blocks Without stop Marked work blocks Question Change aaam Work blocks to be changed SAL a i TURN PLUS marks the machining range and makes all IWG functions available Correct optimize the machining block 5 w a S aa ad N ae 6 12 1 Tool call Tool drop down menu Manually through turret assignment Select a tool positioned on the turret Manually through tool type ID number Select the tool from the database and position it on the turret From last machining process Select the tool used for the last machining operation Automatic The IVWVG selects and places the tool in the revolver Precondition Definition of the machining range HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 287 Generation IWG Plan a a ad N a 6 12 2 Cutting Data The cutting speed main and auxiliary feed rate are determined from the material and the tool data Check optimize the values Maximum cutting depth P is adopted as cycle parameter Define the coolant and coolant circuit 6 12 3 Cycle specification Menu item Cycle Machining range Use the range selection function to set the area to be machined Cycle parameter Check optimize the parameters Approach The tool moves at rapid traverse from the current position to the tool change p
383. ms copy the block to the clipboard Then read in the block from the clipboard A block remains in the clipboard until it is overwritten by another block Single menu items Start Mark Position the cursor on the beginning of a block Press Start mark End mark Position the cursor on the end of a block Press End mark Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 pom PLUS Transfer Blockmenu 1 Start Mark TU End Mark NSS WES P2 5 17 2 d EEE Copy to clipboard 4 Paseo E7 Delete W Dispiace J Copy and paste From clipboard LA Finishing Transversal Outside Front face BET Orare _ 77 Ses Q e LL V l A Edit pull down menu Cut Stores the highlighted block in the clipboard Deletes the block Copy to clipboard copies the highlighted block to the clipboard Paste from clipboard gt Position the cursor where you wish to insert the block Select Paste from clipboard The block is inserted at the position indicated by the cursor Delete deletes the highlighted block definitively it is not stored in the clipboard Displace Position the cursor where you wish to insert the block gt Select Displace The highlighted block is moved from Its initial position to the position Indicated by the cursor Copy and paste Position the cursor where you wish to insert the block Select Copy and paste Th
384. mulation 203 Mirror shift contour G121 117 Section code in DIN PLUS 82 Contour machining arrangement 110 Contour definition DIN PLUS Front tace rear side 96 Fundamentals 66 Geometry menu 79 Lateral surface 102 Main menu 12 Workpiece blank finished part contour 84 TYRN PLUS Contour editing 256 Contour elements checking 270 Contour of workpiece blank 228 Entering basic contour 229 Entering form elements 232 Front face rear side 242 Fundamentals for workpiece description 219 Lateral surface 249 Contour generation during simulation 67 Contour machining finishing IWG_ 298 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Contour milling DIN PLUS Cycle 6840 192 TURN PLUS IWG machining 303 Machining attribute 267 Contour of workpiece blank DIN PLUS Blank definition of 84 Fundamentals 66 TURN PLUS Blank contour editing 256 Contour elements 228 MOUTON cens 219 Contour recessing IWG 290 Contour regeneration Contour follow up G70 164 Contour follow up saving loading G702 164 Fundamentals 67 In the simulation 206 Contour repeat cycle G83 136 Contour repeats DIN PLUS example 184 Contourbased turning cycles 122 Contourparallel roughing DIN PLUS Cycle G830 126 With neutral tool cycle G835 127 TURN PLUS IWG machining
385. n the touch pad The cursor is positioned in lists or input windows Menu items soft keys or buttons are activated Double click of the left mouse key or double touch on the touch pad In lists the selected element is activated the input window is activated Single click with the right mouse key Same function as the ESC key prerequisite the ESC key is allowed in this situation for example to go back by one menu level Same function as the left mouse key when selection soft keys or buttons HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 EEBS BB p s m p i iin in i Hes ES 13 z N ra N 2 1 3 Selection of Operating Modes Keys for operating mode selection __ You can switch the operating mode at any time After the change the Manual operating mode new mode starts in the function in which it was last exited In the programming and organization modes a difference is made Automatic operating mode between the following situations No operating mode is selected no entry next to the operating mode symbol Select the desired mode from the menu Programming modes o Organization modes Operating mode selected indicated next to the operating mode symbol The functions of this operating mode are available Within the programming or organization modes you can switch the modes by soft key or by repeatedly pressing the corresponding mode key 2 1 U ser rite 2 1 4 Selection of Functions Data I
386. n Simulation 207 Multiple tools Definition of 380 Programming 69 Navigating 19 NC address parameters 64 NC blocks Creating deleting 71 Fundamentals 63 Numbering Ta NC commands Editing deleting 72 Fundamentals 63 NC drilling G72 siis 144 NC program header 12 NC program management 72 NC program run 70 NC program run checking 210 NC program sections 60 NC subprograms 70 Negative X coordinates 62 Nested contours 95 Networks Installing 410 Overview 409 Settings diagnosis 405 New start NC programs 41 Nominal values updating G717 170 Numeric keypad 14 XII Index Index OK button 15 One sided synchronization G62 160 Operating aids TURN PLUS 269 Operating rights 398 Operation Buttons 15 Data Input 15 Function selection 14 List operations 14 Menu bar 14 Soft key row 14 Operator communication 64 Optional STOP Automatic mode 44 M command M01 183 Options 6 OPTIONS sic 6 Options overview Of 405 Organization file management 419 Outputs variable 173 Operator communication 64 Programming of 173 Time point of 70 V variables 174 Overlay element TURN PLUS Circular arc 239 Linear circular overlay 240 PO
387. n menu select Configuration Change DXF Parameters gt Define the settings in the DXF Parameters dialog box gt Conclude with OK gt Call the Settings dialog box Settings menu and choose an entry for the Start point automatic field gt Conclude with OK gt Go back one menu step with the ESC key gt Select the Configuration Save menu item gt Select the Standard file and save the changed configuration DXF configuration parameters 2 Maximum gap There might be small gaps between contour elements in the DXF drawing With this parameter you specify how large the distance between two contour elements may be If the maximum gap is not exceeded then the following element is seen as being part of the current contour If the maximum gap is exceeded then the following element is considered an element of the new contour Starting point The DXF import analyzes the contour and determines the starting point The possible settings have the following meaning Right left top bottom The starting point is set to be the contour point that is the furthest to the right or left or If more than one contour point satisfies this requirement then one of these points is selected automatically Maximum distance Ihe DXF import sets the starting point to one of the two contour points farthest apart from each other The program automatically determines which of these points is the Starting point I
388. n variables V901 toV920 see 4 15 2V Variables The CNC PILOT moves to the position to be measured and stops as soon as the probe stylus is deflected The remaining path of traverse is deleted You can influence the reaction to the probe not triggered after moving the measuring path situation with error evaluation Q Parameters Q Error evaluation default O Q 0 Cycle stop condition the error is displayed Q 1 Cycle on condition the error number 5518 is saved in variable V982 Switch off in process measuring G913 G913 is used to deactivate probe monitoring Before G913 becomes effective retract the probe Program only G913 in the NC block G903 generates an interpreter stop Switch off probe monitoring G914 After the deflection of the probe stylus deactivate probe monitoring in order to retract the probe To retract the probe Program G914 and G1 in an NC block HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Note on programming in process measuring Position the probe at a sufficient distance before the measuring point Program G1 as follows Target position lies sufficiently behind the measuring point Feed per minute must be active G94 Example In process measuring BEARBEITUNG MACHINING Neos Change the touch probe NEGI Activate in process measuring Ne GOT Pre position probe God NEG Approach probe MECS Retract probe HEGI Deactivate in process measuring Evaluate
389. nal soeed the CNC PILOT usually only monitors the period after the first cut Experimental values for the machining of steel For longitudinal turning ensure that the cutting depth Is greater than 1mm For recessing ensure that the cutting depth is greater than 1 mm For hole drilling ensure that the diameter drilled is between 6 and 10 mm 57 3 46 Load Monitoring Parameters O Machine parameters for load monitoring spindle 809 859 C Q axis 1010 1060 linear axes 1110 1160 c Start time for monitoring 0 to 1000 ms is calculated when rapid traverse movements have been skipped Spindles A limit value is calculated from the acceleration and brake ramps As long as nominal acceleration exceeds the limit value the monitoring function is deactivated If nominal acceleration drops below the limit value the monitoring function is delayed by the start time for monitoring Linear axes and C axis After rapid traverse has changed to feed rate the monitoring function is delayed by the start time for monitoring Number of measured values to be averaged 1 50 The mean value reduces the sensitivity to short peaks Maximum torque of the drive Nmm Delay in reaction P1 P2 0 to 1000 ms The CNC PILOT indicates that torque limit 1 2 has been exceeded after the time P1 P2 has passed Control parameter 8 Load monitoring settings Factor for torque limit value 1 2 Factor for work
390. nce system files can be restored only by trained service personnel 10 Transfer 10 5 File Organization a O The organization functions are used for CNC PILOT dHnstuork dH ssri HFP doro tijperencter conv FHsertina T files and under the following conditions also for files Main NC programs x ne N of the communication partner Exar ae TEE EN e SERU WL T r DE DT 20 16 02 Windows network transfer method aerel piet E 86 87 sae 16 82 z F J _SERUFRA NC 2858 ri D6 0T 2001 16 02 Login as system manager IEA 2792 hi 86 07 2001 16 02 J _SERUITA NC 2833 rf BE BT 2881 16 82 a J _SERUNIE NC J 1346 rii 86 07 2601 16 02 Selection of the file organization I SERUSPA NC 2607 r u 96 07 2001 16 02 Organization menu item only for local CNC i anae C ej eye 28 68 2062 15 43 i ESPOO NE 2045 riya 20 05 2002 15 5 pam PILOT files i ESPe 8_LA AC scar de 1f er rie cca LL Organizational functions soft keys eR SC LO Quantity 46 Harked 8 A z oo o0 n0 f Information in the file list 200 002 1 File names and extensions NC main program 100 001 am 100 001 NCS subprogram etc 100 001 File size in bytes shown in brackets c Attribute rw reading and writing allowed read write ro only reading allowed read only Date and time of the last change Switch the file group change the mask The current mask
391. ndent of offset width B Inside radii and chamfers Depending on the recessing width and the radii of rounding single cuts preventing a fluid transition from recessing to turning are executed before the rounding is machined This prevents damade to the tool Edges Edges are recessed This prevents residual rings HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 y gt Simulation 3 Poraneter Hation EGGS eel 1 N 58 G amp 65 N535 NE42 PI AO AG OZ H UO O8 1 0 15 BO 5 1 N se x 133 855 Z 43 955 C v 2 261 250 2 BEE tdi 314 gut Zoon ON Program active W S e i le Bacic block Sn ars ue E PAAA 131 Cycles O S Cycles rning Finish contour G890 G890 finishes the contour area defined by NS NE parallel to the contour in one pass and takes chamfers rounding into account Undercuts are machined where tool geometry permits The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal machining With NS NE you specify the machining direction If the contour to be machined consists of one element the following applies The contour is machined in the defined direction if you program only NS The contour is machined opposite to the defined direction if you program NS and NE You activate the residual finishing with Q 4 example hollowing with finishing tools that machine in the direction opposite to that defined The CNC PILOT
392. nding on which side the tool has been positioned before the cycle is called Cutter radius compensation Active G57 oversize Enlarges the contour also inside contours G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour lt Q is not considered G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after cycle end 127 Cycles urning Recessing G860 G860 machines indents the contour area defined by NS NE axially radially The contour to be machined may contain various valleys The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal machining or between radial and axial recesses Calculation of the cut segmentation SBF see machining parameter 6 maximum offset SBF width of cut With NS NE you specify the machining direction If the contour to be machined consists of one element then If you program only NS Machining in contour definition direction If you program NS and NE Machining against the contour definition direction If required the area to be machined is divided into several sections for example for machining contour valleys The simplest way of programming is specifying NS or NS and NE Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section or reference to recess defined by G22 G23 Geo NE End block number end of contour section omit for contour defined by G22 G23 Geo Oversize in X direction diameter value default O K Oversize in Z d
393. ndle speed override 3 5 4 Compensation Tool compensation Select Comp Tool compensation gt The CNC PILOT enters the T number and current compensation values of the active tool You can enter a differentl number Enter the compensation values Values entered here are added to the existing compensation values zp lool compensation Become effective when the next traverse starts Are transferred to the database Values of max 1 mm can be entered 44 Optional stop off Optional stop on 100 Rotational speed to 100 of the programmed value p A Increase speed by 5 p 1 Reduce speed by 5 p l gt DIN PLUS E service Automatic operation Zbepol Comp Hl insp Display Chane abe pel eh zentrisches Verbohren fertig 36mm aussen zent 44 Ti 45 G97 S2440 G95 FB 5 M4 Number i N 46 Hi68 N 47 M107 ay 9 N 48 GB xa Z5 N 49 GO 27 25 5757 d e N 50 GI47 K2 eer N 51 GTA Z 50 PTS IS J3 E KS d fe N 52 GO Za N 53 G14 00 N 54 M103 L Schruppen plan aussen Stirnflaeche N 55 72 N 56 G36 5238 G95 Fe 4 HY ok Cancel x 0 000 T pT Ot ee en ie Z 25 716 SS Z 100 001 2 imme y 0 000 f 5 DEBS D Ymmi e i p H aS a witching Switch Basic block Single block Selectable 4 display ehanl diepl stop SE E i 0S Sep OZ 14 25 30 bhatt plock search 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode
394. ne user of the required maintenance and repair tasks Every action is described briefly assembly maintenance interval responsible person etc This information is displayed in the Maintenance and repair actions list A comprehensive description of the maintenance action is provided if desired All status changes including acknowledgment of the maintenance actions are reported to the PLC Refer to the machine manual to see whether further consequences must be made from due or overdue maintenance actions After the user completes a maintenance action he acknowledges it Then the maintenance interval begins again The CNC PILOT saves the time of acknowledgment together with the nominal date in a log file The acknowledgment log files can be called by the service personnel and evaluated You can see at least the last 10 acknowledgments Display of maintenance status Traffic light at right next to the date time information Green No maintenance actions required Yellow At least one maintenance action is due soon Red At least one maintenance action is due or overdue The status with the highest priority is displayed red before yellow yellow before green Dates and intervals see illustration l Interval The period of time between maintenance actions as fixed by the machine tool builder During the on time of the control the current maintenance interval is continuously reduced The remaining time appears in the When
395. ned with this L number to the next subprogram call Run a start block search 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 5 3 Program Sequence Modification Skip levels E The program blocks which are marked as active skip levels are not executed when the program Is being carried out E Skip levels 0 9 E For multiple skip levels enter a sequence of digits E Deactivate the skip level No entries in Level No Operation gt Select menu item Process Skip level gt Enter the level number Quantity E Counting range 0 9999 Quantity 0 Production without quantity limitation the counter is increased by one after each program run E Quantity gt 0 The CNC PILOT produces the defined quantity the counter is reduced by one after each program run E Quantity counting is retained even if the machine has been switched off in the meantime m When an NC program is activated with Program selection the CNC PILOT resets the quantity counter E When a program has completed a production lot the NC program cannot be restarted by the Cycle Start key To start the NC program again press Re start Operation gt Select menu item Process Quantity gt Enter the quantity V variables E The V variables dialog box serves for input and display of variables E V variables are defined at the beginning of the NC program The meaning is specified in the NC program Operation gt Select the menu it
396. neration you can Accept or Reject the working plan To interrupt working plan generation press the ESC key All working blocks that have completely been generated up to the moment of interruption are retained Selection AWG Block by block TURN PLUS generates the working blocks according to the sequence defined in Machining order and displays them in the control graphics After generation you can accept reject or repeat the working block After blockwise working plan generation you can Accept or Reject the working plan TURN PLUS uses default values for machining details that cannot be defined through contour analysis attributes etc TURN PLUS displays a warning for your information Example If you haven t defined how to clamp a workpiece TURN PLUS assumes a default type of clamping clamping length and adjusts the cutting limitation accordingly 310 Tum PLus bepog ZX main view J44 Workpiece 14 4 Prepare SEE Iwe DERSEN 16 5ep 82 17 13 05 Call generation function or machining sequence editer 6 TURN PLUS 6 13 2 Machining Sequence TURN PLUS analyzes the contour in the sequence in which the operations are listed In this process the areas to be machined and the tool parameters are ascertained The contour is analyzed with the aid of the machining parameters TURN PLUS differentiates in machining operations between Main machining operations Submachining operations
397. nes the slides that machine this contour If G99 was not yet programmed for example at the start of the program all slide work in contour 1 Parameters Q Tool number specified in CONTOUR D Spindle number spindle that holds the workpiece X Z Zero point shift reference machine zero 4 6 2 Tool Positioning without Machining Rapid traverse GO The tool moves at rapid traverse along the shortest path to the target point Parameters X Z Diameter length to target point X diameter Programming X Z Absolute incremental or modal Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 with Y Axis User s Manual Approach to tool change position G14 The slide moves at rapid traverse to the tool change position In setup mode define permanent coordinates for the tool change Parameters Sequence default O 0 diagonal path of traverse 1 First X direction the Z 2 First Z direction then X 3 Only X direction 4 Only Z direction Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 withY Axis User s Manual 110 E The simulation positions the tool using the shift in X Z calculates and positions the chuck using the spindle number D G99 does not replace the G65 Program G99 again if the workpiece is transferred to another spindle and or moves Its position in the working space n A 4 DIN PLUS Rapid traverse to machine coordinates G701 X Z ref
398. new machining sequence Position the cursor the new code is inserted In front of the cursor position 5 Editing and managing machining S TURN PLU Erener sequences bapoa Program J5 Workpiece 11 Prepare adJ IWG Wii pu JW Configuration Editing a machining sequence aeaa aaa Ea n T Select AWG Machining order Change TURN HN Q PLUS opens the machining sequence editor 7 Contour recaesin tess hh Drilling Q Select the position a Milling g mee Activates the Enter the machining sequence dialog Select Main machining Submachining Define machine operations in desired sequence f Location delete and confirm with Enter OK confirms the new machining sequence Managing the machining sequence files The following subpoints of AWG Machining sequence help you Editing the machining sequence manage the Tiles Position the cursor Load a Saving storing on hard disk Change Activates the Enter the machining ee l i sequence dialog Select Main machining Submachining Location and correct it with Enter OK confirms the edited machining sequence E Sm Q Oo oa lt m a Deleting a machining operation Position the cursor norets TURN PLUS removes the NC code QO OK saves the changes machining sequence 320 6 TURN PLUS 6 14 Control Graphics During contour definition TURN PLUS display
399. ng 0 OFF 1 ON Load monitoring 02 OFF 1 ON Additive compensation The CNC PILOT manages 16 compensation values for each X and Z The compensation values can be activated deactivated in the NC program see G149 G149 Geo Compensation 901 916 in X Compensation 901 916 in Z If an additive compensation value is changed in Automatic mode this parameter is changed accordingly Deletion level cycle A deletion level can be assigned a deletion cycle As a result NC blocks containing the specified deletion level are executed each nth time Deletion level 0 9 Deletion cycle 0 99 0 NC blocks with this deletion level are never executed 1 NC blocks with this deletion level are always executed 2 99 NC blocks with this deletion level are executed each 2nd to 99th time _ Activate deactivate the skip levels in automatic mode 356 7 Parameters 75 Machining Parameters Machining parameters are used by the work plan generation TURN PLUS and various machining cycles All elements of the finished part are machined according to the ORA and ORW parameter values Evaluation Finishing cycle G890 Type of roughness ORA Type of surface roughness O No roughness value 1 Rt Peak to valley in um EKW gt mtw EKW lt mtw 2 Ra Mean roughness in um 3 Rz Determined peak to valley roughness in um 4 Vr Direct feed entry in mm rev Roughness values ORW Roughness or feed rate values Permissible
400. ng G84 156 Point dimensions simulation 204 Polar coordinates 8 Polygon DIN PLUS Front rear face G307 Geo 100 Lateral surface G317 Geo 105 TURN PLUS Front rear face 247 Lateral surface 253 Position display 52 Position nominal values updating G717 170 Post process measuring Cycle G915 166 Status 51 Precision stop Blockwise G9 168 Blockwise G9 Geo 92 Off G8 168 Off G8 Geo 92 On G7 168 On G7 Geo 92 TURN PLUS Attribute 264 Predrilling IWG 295 Prepare TURN PLUS 213 Principal axes Arrangement y Fundamentals 62 PRINT output variables 173 PRINTA output V variables 174 Printer 409 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Program blocks moving 78 Program branch Fundamentals 64 Programming 179 Program branch IF 180 Program branching SWITCH 181 Program compilation 70 Program end with return jump M99 183 Program execution 70 Program Head DIN PLUS secs 79 TURN PLUS sxc 218 Program memory 429 Program number 63 Program repetition WHILE 180 Program run modification 43 Program section codes 79 Program selection 41 Program stop MOO 183 Programming Machining Cycles Notes on programming 69 Programming example 184 Protection zone Defining 36 Protection zone
401. ning operation from the machining sequence The values determined are multiplied by the correction factors which depend on the respective tool see 8 3 Database for Technology Parameters Cutting Values and 8 7 2 Tool Data Note for roughing and finishing operations Main teed rate when the main cutting edge is used Secondary feed rate when the secondary cutting edge is used For milling operations the following applies Main feed rate for operations in the milling plane Secondary feed rate for infeed movements For threading drilling and milling operations the cutting speed is converted into rotational speed 6 16 3 Coolant Depending on the workpiece material cutting material and machining operation define in the technology database whether coolant is used AWG If you have specified that coolant is to be used the AWG activates the coolant circulation for the respective machining block If high pressure coolant circulation is used the AWG generates a corresponding M function When a fixed turret assignment see machining parameter 2 is used each tool can be assigned high pressure normal pressure coolant circulations selection Prepare Tool list Set up list The AWG activates the respective coolant circulations as soon as the tool is used IWG The IWG controls coolant circulation in the same way as the AWG Alternately you can define coolant circulation and pressure stage for the current
402. nitoring 1116 1166 Limit switches protection zone linear axis feeds Protection zone dimension negative Protection zone dimension positive Dimensions for protective zone monitoring Reference Machine zero point Rapid traverse rate in Automatic mode Reference dimension Distance between reference point and machine zero point 1120 1170 Slide offset compensation linear axis Parameters are entered by the machine tool builder Parameters 2003 2013 are not used at present HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 347 _ 7 2 Machine Parameters m 7 3 Control Parameters 73 Control Parameters 1 Settings 8 Load monitoring settings 10 Post process measuring 348 Deactivate printer output Using the PRINTA command in an NC program you can output data on a printer see also control parameter AO 0 Output deactivated 1 Output activated Metric Inch Definition of the system of measurement 0 Metric system 1 Inch system Display format of position display actual value display 0 Format 4 3 4 integer positions 3 decimal places 1 Format 3 4 3 integer positions 4 decimal places In DIN PLUS programs the unit of measure is defined in the program head and is independent of the setting made here Restart the CNC PILOT after having changed the unit of measure Evaluation Load monitoring Factor for torque limit value 1 Factor for torque limit value 2 Factor for work limit value The CNC
403. nput Menu bar and pull down menu The individual menu items are preceded by a 9 Tield symbol with one field highlighted This field represents the field on the numeric keypad Press the key whose position corresponds to the position of the highlighted field The function selection begins in the menu row then goes to the pull down menus In the pull down menu press again the numeric key assigned to the menu Item or alternatively select the menu item with touch pad or with the page up page down keys and press Enter Soft key row The meaning of the soft keys is dependent on the current operating situation Some soft keys work like toggle switches A function Is active when the associated field in the function key row is highlighted in color The setting remains in effect until the function is switched off List Operations DIN PLUS programs tool lists parameter lists etc are displayed as lists You can scroll through a list with the touch pad or arrow keys to check data to select the position where you wish to enter data or to highlight items for operations like deleting copying editing etc After having selected the desired list position or a list item press the ENTER INS ALT or DEL key to execute the operation Continued gt 14 2 Basics of Operation Data Input Data are entered and edited in input windows An input window consists of several input fields You position the cursor with the touch pad
404. ns 2 Calculate the cutting segmentation infeeds to the working planes infeeds in the working plane 3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling depth 4 Mill the first plane 5 Retract by the safety clearance return and cut to the next milling depth 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the complete surface is milled 7 Retract to return plane J Continued gt 157 TA 2 O gt O Vlilling Cycles G845 G846 G845 G846 G845 G845 G845 G846 G845 G846 G845 G845 G846 G846 G846 G846 158 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 from inside Q 0 from inside Q 0 from outside Q 1 from outside Q 1 from inside Q 0 from inside Q 0 from outside O 1 from outside O 1 Mx03 Mx03 Mx04 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx03 Mx04 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 4 DIN PLUS 4 12 Special functions 4 12 1 Chucking Equipment in Simulation Clamping G65 G65 dis
405. ns Surface contour slot pocket Location Execution of the selected milling operation on the selected machining location Define the type of contour HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 317 n Generation AWG wt Som Q Oo ad lt m a fe Deburring Contour slot pocket Location Define the type of contour Engraving Contour slot Location Define the type of contour Finish milling Surface contour slot pocket 318 Contour analysis Determining milling contours with the attribute Delburring Sequence machining location Front face also machines front face in Y Lateral surface also machines lateral surface in Y then sequence of geometrical definition Machining all milling contours with the attribute Deburring on all machining locations Machining all milling contours with the attribute Deburring on the selected machining location Contour analysis Determining milling contours with the attribute Engraving Sequence machining location Front face also machines the front face in Y Lateral surface also machines the lateral surface in Y then sequence of geometrical definition Machining all milling contours with the attribute Engraving on all machining locations Machining all milling contours with the attribute Engraving on the selected machining location Contour analysis Determining the milling contou
406. ns you can insert a new block by pressing the INS key VVhen you program a contour or a machining process or within a subprogram the CNC PILOT automatically creates new NC blocks Alternately you can add NC blocks by pressing the INS key The new NC block is inserted below the cursor position Deleting elements of an NC block Position the cursor on an element of the NC block NC block number G or M command address parameter etc or the section code Press the DEL key The element highlighted by the cursor and all the related elements are deleted Example If the cursor is located on a G command the address parameters are also deleted Editing elements of an NC block Position the cursor on an element of the NC block NC block number G or M command address parameter etc or the section code Press ENTER or double click with the left mouse key The CNC PILOT activates a dialog box which displays the block number the number of the G or M function or the address parameters of the G function which can then be edited When you edit NC words G M T the CNC PILOT additionally activates a dialog box for editing the address parameters When editing section codes you can only change the associated parameters Example Number of the turret Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Ses ge LL V l 0 4 3Th Before deleting a complete NC block CNC PILOT displays a confirmation request Individ
407. nsions gt Move the slides to the desired positions Confirm the axis positions of the slides as machine dimensions gt OK enter the next machine dimension gt Cancel Exit the machine dimension setup Machine dimensions are managed in machine parameter 7 Machine dimensions are given with respect to the machine zero point 38 My 70 00 ors Z 358 001 m Assigns a handwheel to an axis E Defines the handwheel interpolation factor Switch the machine display Enter the feed per revolution Enter the constant surface speed Enter the M function Accept the axis position as machine dimension X orY or Z axis Accept the axis positions of the slides as machine dimensions 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 4 6 Measuring Tools Define the type of tool measurement in machine parameter 6 E 0 Contact with tool E 1 Measure with touch probe m 2 Measure with measuring optics Position the tool Onn ees eee Select Setting up Tool setup Tool measuring The Tool measuring dialog box indicates the current tool dimensions Onn eee Enter the machine dimensions Enter the dimensions Find the tool dimensions by touching the workpiece with the tool gt Select the input field X gt Touch off the diameter retract in Z direction Confirm the diameter as measured value gt Select the Z input field Touch the face with the tool then retract in the X
408. nt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 ie a E EPeraneter Manual central jr HS 3n Hsotting up r Hrona ror Tool list nominal actual comp 1 EOUME T Teo I0 number clipboard Nominal Actual T No ID number Type Desi 1 342 300 1 342 Rew Tool type Thread standard Finishing tool 2 111 80 086 1 B 11i Row mi 3 112 16 080 1 ez 112 Row Ident_No 143 16 150 1 Hee ee 4 115 350806 1 F 115 Feu f 5 122 12 040 1 ez 122 Fin pam oa Repl teal la T 121755 8468 1 F 121 Fi a 143 16 150 1 te 143 The Event 1 8 p 9 18 Event 2 6 E 11 342 328 1 m 342 Rew 12 OK Cancel 13 y 0 000 T ee x nn Uae Z 269 000 gt Z 100 001 EP Y 0 000 C ieee i J ais p Ae pi 65 Sep Z 15 21 29 Delete the tool Take the tool from the ID number clipboard tR T gt S Delete the tool and place in the ID number clipboard Editing Edit the tool parameters Type list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool typep ID list Entries in the tool database sorted by tool ID numberr Confirm Accept the ID number of the nominal tool in the tool nominal list 31 ife Data n ded S al 8 0 q A i 3 3 Tool Lists Tool 3 3 3 Transferring theTool List from an NC Program The CNC PILOT transfers the new tool assignment from the TURRET section reference the NC program last interpreted in Automatic mode Select Sett
409. nt angle Shnk di d1 Shank diameter Shnk In 11 Shank length Pos ang rw Position angle X Z Y comp DX DZ DY Compensation values maximum value 10 mm Direc rot Direction of spindle rotation Usab Ig nl Usable length of drill Type of tap See fixed word list Strtlen al Length of first cut Fixed word list for Tap type 0 Undefined 11 Metric 12 Fine thread 13 Whitworth thread 14 Pipe thread 15 UNC 16 UNF 172 PG 18 NPT 19 Tetragonal thread 20 Other threads e o o e e o o e o o eoe o o e o o e o o e oe e e o o 1 e o o 1 The Type of tap parameter is used for determining the thread parameters the AWG accounts for this parameter when selecting a tool HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Continued gt Example Tool type 311 379 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 Tool Database TH DIN Type of tool holder TH heig wh Height of tool holder TH brea wb Width of tool holder Chck fd Diameter of chuck Chcek he fh Height of chuck Sali lg ax Overhang length Pitch hb Thread pitch Fit qual ity See fixed word list 2 Available Physical availability Pict no tool display Cut mat Cutting material CSP comp Correction factor for cutting speed FDR comp Compensation factor for feed rate Deep comp Compensation factor for cutting depth Location type Fixed word list f
410. nt to center Reference of Bi Angle between an imaginary line intersecting the starting point and parallel to the Z axis and another line from the starting point to the center Other parameters R Arc radius 40077 Tangential nontangential Specify the transition to the lt next contour element Angle parameters WA Angle between positive Z axis and tangent in starting point of arc WE Angle between positive Z axis and tangent in end point of arc WV Angle between preceding element and tangent in the starting point of the arc WN Angle between tangent in arc end point and following element WV WN The angle leads from the preceding succeeding element counterclockwise to the new element Arc as preceding succeeding element Angle to tangent HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 231 5 Finished Part Contour 6 5 2 Form elements Chamfer Parameters B Chamfer width 5 Finished Part Contour Rounding Parameters B Rounding radius Undercut type E Parameters K Undercut length DIN 503 E Undercut depth radius R Undercut radius in both corners of the undercut WW Approach angle undercut angle TURN PLUS suggests undercut parameters calculated from the diameter see 11 1 2 Undercut Parameters DIN 509 E 232 6 TURN PLUS Undercut type F Parameters K Undercut length Undercut depth radius R Undercut radius in both corners of the undercut P transverse depth
411. ntour 523 4 525 Set up dimensions ze xe ye 526 4 527 Position of tool tip center I K see illustration 68 7 0 Last programmed position X radius value Y Z 771 Last programmed position C 772 Active operating mode 2 Machine 3 Simulation 4 TURN PLUS 774 Status TRC MCRC 40 G40 active 41 G41 active 42 G42 active 775 Number of the selected C axis Continued gt 176 Positions and dimensions are always indicated in metric form This also applies when an NC program is run in inches O undefined 1 Z 2 X 3 Z 4 X 5 Z 6 X 4 DIN PLUS 776 Active wear compensation G148 0 DX DZ 1 DS DZ 2 DX DS 778 Unit of measure 0 Metric system 1 Inch system 82 Active machining plane 17 XY plane front or back 18 XZ plane turning operation 19 YZ plane side view surface 783 785 786 Distance from tool tip to slide reference pointy Z X 787 Reference diameter for lateral surface machining G120 788 Spindle holding the workpiece G98 790 Oversize G52 Geo 0 Do not account for oversize 1 Account for oversize 791 4 792 G57 oversizes X Z 793 G58 oversize P 794 4795 Cutting width in X Z by which the tool reference point is shifted with G150 G151 796 Number of spindle for which the last feed rate was programmed 797 Number of spindle for which the last soeed was programmed 4 15 2 V Variables The CNC PILOT uses value ranges to
412. nts or the starting point and angle Parameters X Z Starting point in Cartesian coordinates XE ZE End point in Cartesian coordinates W Angle reference positive Z axis P Starting point in polar coordinates B PE End pointin polar coordinates Invert Inverts the definition direction of the contour 6 77 Connect Connect menu item TURN PLUS closes an open contour by inserting a line segment 6 78 Resolve Disconnect menu item Place the cursor on the form element figure pattern you wish to resolve Press confirm soft key TURN PLUS resolves the form element figure pattern Turning contour Form elements also chamfers and roundings are transtormed into linear segments and arcs Contours on the end face or lateral surface etc Figures and patterns are resolved into line segments and arcs 262 Form elements figures patterns once resolved cannot be connected again 6 TURN PLUS 6 8 Importing DXF Contours 6 8 1 Fundamentals Contours available in DXF format can be imported into the TURN PLUS programming mode of operation DXF contours describe Workpiece blanks Finished parts Contour train Milling contours For workpiece blank and finished part contours as well as for contour trains DXF layers should contain only one contour For milling contours multiple contours can be contained and imported sorting DXF Contours Requirements of a DXF contour or DXF file Only two d
413. o point The tool zero point is managed in the setup parameters Select Act Para Setting up menu Tool zero point _ E The displacement is with respect to the machine zero point You can also offset the workpiece zero point for the X andY axes HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 70 00 2 1 Y 100 001 m Assigns a handwheel to an axis E Defines the handwheel interpolation factor Switches the machine display Enter the feed per revolution Enter the constant surface speed Enter the M function Define the Z position as tool zero point or X orY position Specify the tool zero point relative to the current Z position or X orY position 35 3 4 _ unctions fad Y x 3 4 3 Defining the protection zone Insert any tool TO is not permitted On ees eee Select Setting up Selection zones e n Enter the protection zone parameters Enter the limit values Capturing the protection zone parameters per axis For each input box gt Select the input field gt Position the tool to the protection zone limit Accept the axis position as protection zone parameter Capturing positive negative protection zone parameters gt Select any positive or negative input field gt Position the tool to the protection zone limit Accept all positive negative axis positions zp The parameters serve for protection zone monitoring
414. ode Return to Service The Diagnosis submenu provides information test and control functions that help you with troubleshooting Info menu item Provides information on the software modules being Da my Display drop down menu E Memory only accessible by the service personnel E Variables displays the current contents of approx 500 V variable see also 4 75 2V Variables E The variable is not initialized m 2 The variable is not available Input Output displays the current status of all input output positions interface between CNC PILOT and lathe E 16 Inputs Outputs Enter up to 16 inouts outputs in the Select I O s for display dialog box After the dialog box has been concluded the CNC PILOT displays the current status of these inputs outputs Each change of status is displayed immediately To exit the display function press the ESC key m Cyclic memory is reserved for the service personnel E Variables cyclic Enter a V variable The CNC PILOT displays the current value Each change in value is displayed immediately Inputs Outputs cyclic Enter an O position The CNC PILOT displays the current status Each change of status is displayed immediately Log files drop down menu Errors system events and data exchange between different system components are recorded in log files Some log files are save on command and can be used by the ser
415. of cut is used for each thread turn before the next infeed motion is executed Feed rate stop becomes effective at the end of a thread cut Feed rate override is not in effect Do not use spindle override if the look ahead is switched off 4 DIN PLUS Single thread G32 Cycle run 2 G32 cuts a simple thread in any desired direction and position E a Sco memanor Oo longitudinal tapered or transverse thread internal or external thread 2 Execute a thread cut gt without look ahead function G32 calculates the thread from the 3 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next pass Q thread end point thread depth and the tool position The main Oo machining direction of the tool determines whether an internal or an 4 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete thread has been cut external thread will be machined 5 Execute idle cuts Q First infeed remainder of the division of thread depth cutting depth 6 Return to starting point Parameters X Z End point of thread X diameter Feed rate stop becomes effective at F Thread pitch the end of a thread cut P Thread depth Feed rate override is not in effect Maximum cutting depth Spindle override is not in effect B Remainder cuts default 0 Make thread with G95 feed rate per B 0 Division of the last cut into 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 cut revolution B 1 No remaining cut division Look ahead is switched off Q Number of air cuts after the last
416. of the THEN and ELSE branch the ELSE branch can be omitted WHILE ENDWHILE program repeat A program repeat consists of the elements m WHILE followed by a condition In the case of conditions variables or mathematical expressions are defined to the left and to the right of relational operators E ENDWHILE concludes the conditional program branch NC blocks programmed between WHILE and ENDWHILE are executed repeatedly for as long as the condition is fulfilled If the condition is not fulfilled CNC PILOT continues execution of the program with the block programmed after ENDWHILE Programming notes gt Select WHILE Machining menu Instructions DIN PLUS words gt Enter the desired condition enter only the required brackets gt Insert NC blocks 180 4 DIN PLUS SWITCH CASE Program branch The switch statement consists of the elements E SWITCH Followed by a variable The content of the variable is interrogated in the following CASE statement m CASE x This CASE branch is run with the variable value x CASE can be programmed more than once m DEFAULT This branch is run if no CASE statement matched the variable DEFAULT can be omitted m BREAK Closes the CASE or DEFAULT branches Programming notes gt Select SWITCH Machining menu Instructions DIN PLUS words gt Enter the variable without parentheses gt For each CASE branch gt Select CASE Machining men
417. ogram or the machine manual to inform yourself of the meaning of the parameters and the process of the expert program Continued gt 296 Select the machining range Vertical element at which part is to be parted and the chamfer rounding Parting parameters 6 TURN PLUS Process of parting and workpiece transfer Select the vertical element for the parting TURN PLUS opens the dialog box of the expert program Check edit the parting parameter The parting operation starts afer OK is pressed Define the chucking data and position for the secon setup Check edit the workpiece transfer parameter The workpiece transfer starts afer OK is pressed TURN PLUS entered the calculated parameters als proposed values Check edit or enter the values The meaning of the transfer program depends on the name of the expert program Transfer parameters with the expert program UMKOMPLA Parting see sketch Spindle speed limitation LA for the parting process Maximum diameter of workpiece blank LB Proposed value from the tool description Reduced feed rate K for the parting operation 0 No feed rate reduction gt 0 Reduced feed rate Starting point in X O For the parting operation proposed value from the workpiece description Start point in Z P For the parting operation proposed value Vertical element from the selection Workpiece
418. ogy database 395 Cutting path display mode 197 Cutting speed Manual control 25 Technology database 396 Cycle end G80 134 Cycle specification TURN PLUS IWG 284 D display 53 Data Backup General information 19 Transfer mode 408 Data exchange transfer 408 Data Input 15 Data input keyboard 2 Data input output NC program 173 Data transfer General 413 Installation of 410 Settings for FTP 411 Settings for Windows networks 410 Transter directory 411 Database for Chucking Equipment Centering taper 394 Chuck 389 Chuck types overview 388 Chucking equipment editor 386 Chucking equipment lists 387 Chucking equipment type 386 Index Clamping jaws 390 Dead center 393 Face driver 392 General information 386 ID number of chucking equipment 386 Lathe center 393 Mandrel 391 Overview of chuck types 388 Rotating gripper 3972 DataPilot 408 Date setting the 399 Datum setting canceling simulation 204 Dead center 393 Deburring DIN PLUS milling cycle 6840 152 TURN PLUS machining attribute 268 Deep hole drilling G74 147 Default value 19 Deleting TURN PLUS contour manipulation 259 TURN PLUS element input 226 Deleting the chucking data 244 Delta drill or Diagnosis
419. ol by the compensation value The CNC PILOT loads the compensation values 40 x 70 002 38 001 E m Assign a handwheel to an axis E Define the handwheel interpolation factor Switch the machine display Enter the feed per revolution Enter the constant surface speed Enter the M function Accept the tool compensation values 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 5 Automatic Mode of Operation L amp In Automatic mode the data are entered and displayed in 1 millimeters or in inches depending on the setting of the control parameter 1 The setting in the program head of the NC program governs the execution of the NC part program it has no influence on operation or display 3 5 1 The CNC PILOT interprets the NC program before it can be activated with Cycle Start Variables are entered during the translation process A restart prevents a new translation while a new start forces a new translation Program Selection Program selection Select Prog Program selection Select the NC program The NC program is loaded without previous translation if No changes were made in the program or the tool list The lathe was not switched off since the program was last selected Restart gt Select Prog Restart The last active NC program is loaded without without previous translation if No changes were made in the program or the tool list The lathe was
420. ominal diameter Ni Thread depth K Thread runout length F Thread pitch Thread type Right hand left hand gt Finished Part Contour 6 5 3 Overlay Elements Call Menu item Form Form element submenu Finished part Select the contour trains arc wedge or pontoon define the element and superimpose it after the definition With the menu item Form Form element Contour TURN PLUS superimposes the last loaded contour train This is either the previously loaded contour train main menu Program Load Contour train or the last defined overlay element Circular arc Circle center as reference Parameters XF ZF Reference point shift R Arc radius A Aperture angle W Angle of rotation The overlay contour is rotated by the angle of rotation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 239 5 Finished Part Contour Wedge rounded wedge Reference point Wedge tip midpoint of rounding Parameters XF ZF Reference point shift R R gt 0 Radius of rounding R 0 No rounding A Aperture angle Bey Length of wedge sides projecting element parts are cut at the points of overlay W Angle of rotation The overlay contour is rotated by the angle of rotation Ponton Reference point Center of base element Parameters XF ZF Reference point shift R R gt 0 Radius of rounding R 0 No rounding A Aperture angle LS Length of ponton sides projecting element pa
421. on Q 0 Contour Cutter center on the contour Q 1 inside milling closed contour Q 2 Outside milling closed contour O 3 left right of the contour reference machining direction open contour H Cutting direction H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling R Approach radius R 0 Directly approach contour element R gt 0 Approaching departing radius connecting tangentially with the contour element R lt 0 with inside corners Approach departure radius connecting tangentially with the contour element R lt 0 with outside contours Contour element is approached departed tangentially on a line Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 307 z La J jam g amp 6 12 Interactive Worki z c J Sou c g am 6 12 Interactive Worki P Contour milling Milling depth overwrites the depth of the contour definition Deburring Plunging depth of the tool default Chamfer width from deburring machining attribute 1 mm f Maximum infeed default Milling in one infeed L Oversize Shift milling contour oversize G58 before the milling cycle E Effects of milling location cutting direction and direction of tool rotation See 4 77 Milling Cycles Deburring he chamfer width is defined as machining attribute Area milling Roughing Finishing G845 G846 Roughs finished figures or closed tree contours of the reference
422. oncept The working plan generation is based on the workpiece definition blank finished part milling drilling contours During chucking of the workpiece the cutting limits are determined For tool change TURN PLUS provides the following strategies Automatic selection from the tool database Use of the current turret assignment TURN PLUS turret assignment The technology database provides the cutting data TURN PLUS generates the working plan which includes technology attributes such as oversizes tolerances peak to valley height etc into account Each entry and working step are displayed and can be corrected immediately On the basis of workpiece blank regeneration TURN PLUS optimizes the paths for approach and avoids idle cuts or collisions between workpiece and cutting edge The generation strategy is defined in the machining sequence or machining parameters This allows you to adapt URN PLUS to your individual needs You can use part of the functions and continue working in DIN PLUS example Define a contour using TURN PLUS and program the machining operation in DIN PLUS Alternately you can optimize the DIN PLUS program generated by TURN PLUS 216 El service 14 aus H Configuration Complete let TE Workpiece 4f belete Heiani a Sau F H Finished part Contour train 4 NG progran _ SOUR EC Leah Notes on using TURN PLUS The status line above the soft key row inf
423. one machining cycle Only pre cutting Only finishing Recessing radial axial G866 For form elements Recess type D sealing ring recess type S guarding ring If an allowance has been specified TURN PLUS first rough machines and then finish machines the recess For finishing the dwell period is accounted for only during the finishing operation Otherwise the dwell period is considered for each pass Parameters Oversize longitudinal and transverse Period of dwell 294 6 TURN PLUS Recess turning G869 Recess turning soft keys _ _ The CNC PILOT machines the material using alternate recessing and Select longitudinal transverse oversize roughing movements or constant oversize Parameters P Maximum cutting depth Unidirectional Bidirectional R Depth compensation depending on factors such as Sy L workpiece material or feed rate the tool tip tilts during a turning operation You can correct this infeed error with turning depth compensation factor R The compensation is usually determined empirically B Offset width After the second infeed movement during the transition from turning to recessing the path to be machined is reduced by offset width B Each time the system switches from turning to recessing on this side the path is reduced by B in addition to the previous offset After precutting the remaining material is removed with a single cut A W Approach angl
424. only on the given slides Drawing lasez 218 Author Schmidt input 1 2 no input NC program is run for every slide Setting and from 2 Date Unit Unit of measure metric inches no input Slide fiz Synchro E Unit retrace e The unit of measure defined in control parameter 1 Clamp diam 1st Sett iz0 mm 2nd sett mm is used Clamp length st Sett 71 min and sett mm The other codes contain organizational Clamp press tet Sott 3z2 bar and Sett bar information and set up information that do not Perr influence the program run Ox ler Zibiesdtontay Information contained in the program head is preceded by in the DIN program Ok Cancel The Unit can be programmed only when a new program is being created set under PROGRAM HEAD It is not possible to post edit this entry HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 79 4 4 Program Section Codes Definition of the variable display Call Variable display button in the Editing program head dialog box In the dialog box you define up to 16 V variables that control the program process In automatic mode and in the simulation you define whether the variables are to be asked for during program run As an alternative the program version is run with the default values For each variable you define E Variable number m Default value initialization value E Description text with which this variable is asked for during program run
425. ont face lateral surface etc _ yyY em Select Workpiece Finished part Contour u _y e SS Select Machining surface Check and correct the Reference dimension _y amp e Define the Starting point of the contour rs Describe the C Y contour element for element S Sw _ee e After the contour has been completed press the ESC key twice 6 TURN PLUS 6 3 6 Basics of Operation Soft keys You define by soft key the type of dimensions special function selection etc The following tables and the sott key overview at the end of this User s Manual illustrate the meaning of the soft keys Selection with the touch pad To make a selection with the touch pad Single selection Position cursor on element etc Press left mouse key Multiple selection Switch on multiple selection by soft key Position cursor on element point etc Press the left mouse key Position cursor next on element point etc etc Area selection Position cursor on the first element Switch on the area selection by soft key Position the cursor on the last element Left mouse key Area selection in direction of contour description Right mouse key Area selection in direction opposite to contour description Colors of selection points Red Point marked by cursor but not selected Green Selected point Blue Point marked by cursor and selecte
426. ontour gt 2 Parameters H Milling direction b 0 Up cut mill lt q 1 Climb mill o B Chamfer width co W Chamfer angle For tool selection default 45 S K Retraction plane Cutter position before after milling lateral D surface diameter T W lt x Engraving Engraves a contour figure freely defined open or closed contours Parameters B Width W Angle for the tool selection default 45 K Retraction plane Cutter position before after milling lateral surface diameter Do not machine The milling contour is not machined Delete milling attributes Deletes all attributes of this milling contour 272 6 TURN PLUS 6 10 User Aids 6 10 1 Calculator You can use an online pocket calculator for example for standard calculations calculation of fit tolerances and calculation of the core hole diameter for inside diameters To calculate Position the cursor on the input field of the dialog box Call the pocket calculator the value of the input box is erred loaded Perform the calculation OK deactivates the pocket calculator and accepts the value Delete deactivates the calculator and rejects the value Displays Display value below saved value right of Operation and intermediate result to the right of the display value Operation Select and activate the function box by cursor key or mouse The arithmetical functions SIN squares etc
427. or ESC key Exit the dialog box File Switch to Line graphics Precondition The values measured during the reference machining cycle have been stored 56 Program SAIA X 91 000 Z 221 425 Y 0 000 Tool No i POWER Refer 0 20 Nm Refer Lim val 1 ize F Lim val Lim val 2 ise Pi File Savino E ocea k Er iis X ii o pee z 100 001 Zii A ie Ea oD Do a AT ee E a ee 3 Manual Control and Automatic mode 3 7 4 Analyzing Reference Machining The torque and the limit values of the selected component are shown over time Limit values gray nonmonitored area hiding rapid traverse paths The CNC PILOT also displays the values of the cursor position Selection File button Display and set load parameters dialog box Analyzer file display submenu Set cursor pull down menu using the right left arrow key position the cursor at the Start of file Start of the next zone Zone maximum Display menu item Select the component from the Display file dialog box Setting Zoom menu item Set the zoom factor Small values increase the accuracy of the display and reduce the step size of the cursor The settings defined for the grid the time reference grid of the measured value registration and the cursor position are shown in the line below the graphic display relative to the start of reference machining Time 0
428. or fit quality 1 Chuck dimensions Holder types F K fd th serve to indicate the holder dimensions Other holders Where fd 0 and fh 0 the chuck is not displayed 2 TURN PLUS s automatic tool selection checks whether the fit quality is defined There is no detailed evaluation G Basic data S Tool depiction simulation TP TURN PLUS See also 8 1 4 Multiple Tools Tool Life Monitoring parameters of the third dialog box 8 1 5 Notes on Tool Data 8 1 6 Too Holder Mounting Position Example Tool type 311 8 Operating Resources Milling cutter parameters X Z Y comp DX DZ DY Compensation values maximum value 10mm D corr DD Compensation value for cutter diameter e Direc rot Direction of spindle rotation oe Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Example Tool type 611 381 8 1 Tool Database 8 1 Tool Database TH DIN Type of tool holder TH heig wh Height of tool holder TH brea wb Width of tool holder Chek fd Diameter of chuck Chcek he fh Height of chuck Sali lg ax Overhang length Pitch hf Thread pitch Threads per unit length gb for multiple threads Tooth pattern of cutter see fixed word list Available Physical availability Pict no tool display Cut mat Cutting material CSP comp Compensation factor for cutting speed FDR comp Compensation factor for feed rate Deep comp Com
429. or longitudinal and tapered threads up to a maximum angle of 45 45 to Z axis H 1 Feed rate in X axis for transverse and taper threads up to amaximum angle of 45 45 to the X axis H 2 Feed rate in Y axis H 3 Contouring feed rate E Variable pitch default O E 0 Constant pitch E gt 0 Increase pitch per revolution by E E lt 0 Decrease pitch per revolution by E 142 c Feed rate stop becomes effective only at the end of a thread cut Feed rate override is not in effect Do not use spindle override if the look ahead is switched off Make thread with G95 feed rate per revolution 4 DIN PLUS AIF Cycle run N 4 3 Drilling cycles 1 Bore hole without contour definition imple drillina cvcl 71 Precondition ool is located at the safety distance simple g cycie G from the bore hole starting position oO G71 is used for axial and radial bore holes using driven or stationary tools Bore hole with contour definition 5 The cycle is used for The tool approaches the starting position at rapid e a Eas _ traverse Individual bore hole without contour description If K is not programmed Approach to clearance height Bore holes with contour definition individual bore hole or hole If K is programmed Approach to K and then to E pattern in the following program sections clearance height FRONT 2 Start drilling bore hole feed rate reduction REAR SIDE according to V SURFACE 3 Drill hole
430. ore Tiles parameters 422 w gt S EXiranerer Backup Restore 43 NotHork i serial yrr dj tra Hd Perenster conv H setting Parameter backup Eas ji z BACKUP 1663 r u 64 64 2002 2442 r H 64 84 2002 BACKUP MAS T5486 r m 64 04 2007 BACKUP PRO 1514 reve 84 64 2082 BACKUP BEA BACKUP CSU im Backup files BACKUP SPH pyy r e 64 64 2002 BACKUP SPS 4125 r u 84 84 2082 BACKUP STD 13271 rife 04 04 2002 BACKUP TEC 259026 r fu 84 64 2002 2 BACKUP WKZ 201836 r m 64 84 2082 DEUTSCH FWL T682 rf 84 64 2082 3 EMGLISCH FWL T476 r fe 04 04 2002 fe WART_OBB CL_ 331 r u 20 83 2082 WART_G30 L_ S2 r w 84 03 2002 j Quantity 1 Marked 1 Quantity 14 Marked 14 X 497 282 T 0m X hui Z 160 001 a 7 20116 05 Z mm w 0 999 C v nnani i 1A Ss DAES D inate a poh 17 Sep 82 16 25 47 E E Hask Update Selective Save Hark Hark Service Paraneter collection paramatere atl Wack Define the sorting order Update Update the file list eae Make backup parameters cand Restore files parameters zp Restore expects a complete file group saved by backup HEIDENHAIN recommends that you always treat a file group saved by backup as a block Prerequisites for Restore Log in as system manager The automatic mode must not be active The backup files must be available in the BACKUP directory Maintena
431. ormats and in special r i directories in CNC PILOT Before transmission the 100 001 data are converted to ASCII format and transferred to _ 100 001 the PARA_USR directory Inversely received parameters and operating resource files are saved in the PARA_USR directory In a further step you activate these Tiles This means that the data are converted to internal format and transferred to special directories in the CNC PILOT After this step the CNC PILOT works with the parameter and operating resource data received p Q oa e o ce O a O c e m J4 w 0 Selective Convert individual parameters operating resource data During conversion of parameters operating resources collection you define the name of the backup file and influence its output as follows in the Save parameters dialog Save Convert parameters operating resources box parameters No comment Only parameter and operating resource data are output Load Activate marked files With comment Explanatory comments are parameters output along with the parameter operating resource aata Management Call the organization functions see 10 4 File Changing the mask only in the right window functions Organization The current mask setting is displayed below the menu line RE Sort Sort files by name or date Mask Only those entries are gp To parameter and operating resource fi
432. orms you how to proceed TURN PLUS uses a multi level menu structure The ESC key switches one level back This description includes operation by mouse soft keys and touch pad However you can still operate the CNC PILOT as in earlier versions without soft keys or touch pad If more than one window view is displayed on the screen the active window is identified by a green frame PgUp PgDn switches between the windows The period key displays the active window as a full screen Pressing the period key again switches back to multiple windows The Configuration menu allows you to select the desired type of display and input see 6 75 Configuration gp TheTURN PLUS working plan generation uses the tool chucking equipment and the technological information contained in the respective database Therefore make sure that the database contains an up to date and correct description of the operating resources 6 TURN PLUS 6 2 Program Management gt TURN PLL sevice 6 2 1 TURN PLUS Files Haus H Configuration TURN PLUS has indexes for A Workpiece Complete programs blank and finished part if Deletes HH pian definition as well as working plan generation see ae W contour train Banfi progran Workpiece descriptions workpiece blank and finished part Workpiece blank descriptions Finished part descriptions Individual contour trains TURN PLUS turret assignments see 6 77 2 Set Up Tool Li
433. osition Represents any one character at this position The CNC PILOT automatically adds to any entered mask Mask Continued gt 418 a S Network notori 4 serie Hr Hora Main NC programs ne C EPS0_UTS NEPS 44 Perencter Onis JH setting PALIN RS NOL ends terest RE ABN l E Transfer APOGW NC BELAHPE1 NC BSP NE BSPao_LA NE BSPO1_F NC BSPG22 NE fel Service Parameter Mask Update Management functions Transmit Receive Mark all Mark BSPa2 NC BSPOh222 NC BSPOR NC BSPO38 NE Quantity 38 X 497 282 Z 160 001 im 0 999 Update anagement Transmit Hark B ia R funetions all BSPB1 NC BSPH1_C NE wa 68i NG 1166 rfw 23 87 26 oz 13 11 1398 Galbi NC 1106 r u 23 67 2002 2883 FfH 21 83 2002 BB152 NC 1166 rhe 22 87 2682 2845 r w 29 08 2002 O8153 NC 1149 r w 24 87 2002 2403 r H VT 8T 2002 OSIG NE 1113 F H 23 87 2002 1621 ree 24 85 2082 BEIT NC 1421 rhe 23 07 2002 1335 r W 25 08 2000 8939081 NG 1715 r 24 87 2002 4151 F u 86 89 2002 BSPOG NE 2156 reve 14 03 2002 3573 T W 14_85 26827 BSPA1 WC afaij rw 14_83 2687 3689 rfe 62 11 2061 BSPO2 NE 3227 rive 14 03 2002 3529 r u 05 11 200 BSPOS NE 2693 r fu 14 83 2002 2531 rW 14 05 2087 BSPB4 NC 31993 r W 14 84 706Z 1527 r 02 11 20
434. osition before the cycle is called The Approach function is not contained in drilling and threading cycles Place the tool on a suitable position using the Approach function Retract After the cycle is finished the tool moves at rapid traverse to the retraction position Move to tool change position After the cycle is finished or after retraction the tool moves at rapid traverse to the change position The change position defined in the dialog box is evaluated only when VWP 1 machining parameter 2 The traverse type GO or G14 and the tool change position are defined in machining parameter 2 288 w l E gt TURN PLUS bepoa ZX main view IWG Roughing Leng amp r cutting data Cycle EE Single block Start J Automatic aisia el Machining direction during range selection B 16 5ep 82 15 56 04 By key or soft key The sequence of selection determines the machining direction Touch pad Left mouse key machining direction is the direction of contour creation Right mouse key machining direction is opposed to the direction of contour creation 6 TURN PLUS 6 12 4 Roughing Roughing Softkey Overview of roughing operations Ss Select longitudinal transverse oversize Roughing longitudinal G810 or constant oversize Roughing transverse G820 Contour parallel roughing G830 Roughing automatic TURN PLUS generates all roughing operations automati
435. ou press Yes in the Reference machining dialog box after having selected the program Selection Display Load monitoring Load monitoring display Automatic mode Taking nominal values submenu Curves menu item Assign the input fields curves 1 4 to the drives The value in Display grid influences the accuracy and velocity of the graphical display A small value increases the accuracy of the display values 4 9 19 39 seconds per image Mode menu group Line graphics Display torque values over the time axis Continued gt 54 The CNC PILOT checks the values for torque and work In each interpolator cycle and displays the values in a time reference grid of 20 ms The limit values are calculated from the reference values and the limit factor control parameter 8 You can later change the limit values in Edit load parameters Taking nom Make sure that the conditions for reference machining comply with those for production feed rate speed override tool quality etc Up to four components are monitored per monitoring zone Using G996 Type of load monitoring you can control the hiding the rapid traverses paths and the monitoring of torque and or work The graphic and numeric displays are relative to the rated torque values gt DIN PLUS l E service Value Curve 1 fx Axis 1 Z Axis 1 Spindle 1 a Curve z a Curve 3
436. output ON Syntax PRINTA Text1 Variable Text1 Variable WINDOWA WINDOWA x opens an output window with x lines The window is opened as a result of the first input output WINDOWA 0 closes the window The standard window comprises 3 lines you do not need to program it Syntax WINDOWA line number 0 lt line number lt 10 174 HAuton dialeg channel 1 Hutomatic dialog Z 100 001 Dm e 2 1 Input Haag value 12 5 1 Output fess velue 12 500 Examples MACHINING N100 WINDOWA 8 N110 INPUTA Input Meas value V1 N120 PRINTA Output Meas value V1 4 DIN PLUS 4 15 ProgrammingVariables The CNC PILOT supports NC programs before the program run The system therefore differentiates between two types of variables variables are evaluated during NC program interpretation V variables or events are evaluated during NC program run The following rules apply Multiplication division before addition subtraction Up to 6 bracket levels Integer variables only for V variables Integer values between 32767 32768 Real variable with andV variable Floating point numbers with max 10 integers and 7 decimal places The variable are kept even if the control was switched off 4 15 1 Variables The CNC PILOT uses value ranges to define the scope of variables 0 29 Channel dependent global variable Can be used for each slide NC channel
437. paths overlap U cutter diameter default 0 5 Overrun factor no significance for machining with the C axis Cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling Feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate E Reduced feed rate for circular elements default Current feed rate Ji Retraction plane default return to starting position Front or rear face Retraction position in Z direction Lateral surface Retraction position in X direction diameter Q Machining direction default 0 O 0 From the inside toward the outside O 1 From the outside toward the inside ILS Programming in theY axis See CNC PILOT 4290 withY Axis User s Manual 156 Cycle run 1 Starting position X Z C is the position before the cycle begins 2 Calculate the cutting segmentation infeeds to the working planes infeeds in the working plane 3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling depth 4 Mill the first plane 5 Retract by the safety clearance return and cut to the next milling depth 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the complete surface is milled 7 Retract to return plane J Oversizes are taken into account with G845 G57 X Z direction G58 equidistant oversize in the milling plane 4 DIN PLUS Pocket milling finishing G846 G846 finishes closed contours and figures In the following program sections FRONT REAR SID
438. paths are not monitored 2 Rapid traverse paths are monitored The first parameter switches load monitoring on and off The other parameters define the components to be monitored with regard to machining location machining mode Entry for parameters 12 19 Machining mode on off 0 Load monitoring off 1 Load monitoring on Component to be monitored for more than one component the sum of the codes 0 No monitoring 1 X axis 2 Y axis 4 Z axis 8 Main spindle 16 Driven tool 32 Spindle 3 64 Spindle 4 128 C axis 1 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 369 Machining Parameters Machining Parameters 12 19 Loadmonitoringfor ___ machining modes continued 12 Load monitoring centric predrilling Drilling centric ON OFF Centering Drilling Counterboring Countersinking Reaming Tapping 13 Load monitoring roughing Roughing ON OFF External longitudinal External transverse Internal longitudinal Internal transverse 14 Load monitoring contour recessing Piercing ON OFF External Internal Transverse 15 Load monitoring contour machining Finishing ON OFF External Internal 16 Load monitoring recessing Recessing ON OFF External Internal 17 Load monitoring thread cutting Thread cutting ON OFF External Internal Transverse 18 Load monitoring drilling C axis Drilling C axis ON OFF Centering Drilling Counterboring Countersinking Reaming Tapping 19 Load monitoring milling C axis
439. pensation factor for cutting depth Location type Fixed word list for tooth pattern Undefined SpurFac straight end HeliFac helical end SpurCir straight circumference HeliCir helical circumference SEndCir straight end and circumference HEndCir helical end and circumference Special tooth pattern yyOoOJARAOUON O 1 Where fd 0 fh 0 no chuck is depicted G Basic data S Tool depiction simulation TP TURN PLUS See also 8 1 4 Multiple Tools Tool Life Monitoring parameters of the third dialog box 8 1 5 Notes on Tool Data 8 1 6 Too Holder Mounting Position Example Tool type 611 8 Operating Resources Parameters for workpiece handling system and encoders ID Identification number of tool X Z dim xe ze Setting dimensions Available Physical availability Shank d sd Shank diameter Multiple tool Multiple tool see 4 2 4 Tool Programming No No multiple tool Main Primary cutting edge Aux Secondary cutting edge M ID Identification number of the following cutter of a multiple tool TH DIN Type of tool holder TH heig wh Height of tool holder TH brea wb Width of tool holder Sali lg ax Overhang length Pict no tool display Location type Mag azine code Not used at present Mag azine attr ibute Not used at present HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Example Tool type 811 383 8 1 Tool D
440. perating resource data management Data backup Training HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 433 c Q or Hey Oo hem rr c E D N q q DIN editor DIN PLUS Cycles for contour description Fixed cycles TURN PLUS graphic programming option 434 Programming in DIN 66025 ISO 6983 format Setup information on workpiece blank material tools chucking equipment Expanded command set IF THEN ELSE WHILE SWITCH CASE Dialog guided input an help graphics for every programming function Subprograms and variable programming Control graphics for workpiece blanks and finished parts Parallel programming Parallel simulation alohanumeric program name Standard workpiece blank forms Recesses Undercuts Thread Hole pattern for the front face and lateral surface XY and ZY plane Figure pattern for the front face and lateral surface XY and ZY plane Area clearance longitudinal and transverse Recessing cycles radial and axial Recess turning cycles radial and axial Undercut cycles Parting cycles Thread cycles radial and axial multiple threads successive threads taper threads variable pitch Drilling deep hole drilling and tapping cycles conventional rigid radial and axial C axis and Y axis Contour milling and pocket milling radial and axial C axis andY axis Area milling centric polygon milling radial and axial Y axis Geometrical workpiece description for workpiece
441. plays the selected chucking equipment in the simulation graphics G65 needs to be programmed separately for each chuck G65 H without X Z cancels the chuck in the simulation graphics Chucks are described in the database and are defined in CHUCKING EQUIPMENT H 1 3 Parameters H Chuck number H 1 3 Reference to CHUCKING EQUIPMENT X Z Starting point position of the chuck reference point X diameter Reference Workpiece zero point D Spindle number reference CHUCKING EQUIPMENT section Q Chuck shape only for chuck jaws default Q trom the CHUCKING EQUIPMENT section Chuck reference point X Z defines the position of the chucking equipment in the simulation graphics The position of the reference point depends on the clamping form see illustration The CNC PILOT mirrors the chucks H 1 to 3 if they are positioned to the right of the workpiece Note on the simulation graphics and the reference point H 1 chuck Open chuck is displayed Reference point X Chuck center Reference point Z Right edge account for width of chuck jaws H 2 chuck jaw chuck shape Q defines the reference point and internal external clamping Position of the reference point see illustration at upper right Internal clamping 1 5 6 7 External clamping 2 3 4 H 3 chucking accessory dead center lathe center etc Reference point in X Chuck center Reference point in Z Chuck tip
442. plified geometry programming 55 Views of contour 203 Wait for moment G204 170 Warnings Simulation 200 WHILE Program repetition 180 WINDOW special output window 173 Window selection DIN PLUS contour display 74 Simulation 201 WINDOWA special output window 174 WINDOWS networks 409 Working plan generation TURN PLUS Working plane 67 Working window 12 Workpiece group G99 110 Workpiece handling systems 3 2 Workpiece transfer 161 Angle offset measuring during spindle synchronization G90 161 C angle offset G905 161 Controlled parting using spindle monitoring G991 163 Controlled parting using lag error following error 162 fixed stop traversing to G916 162 Spindle synchronization G720 161 Values for controlled parting G992 164 XXIII Index Index Workpiece zero point Entering 30 Fundamentals 9 Parameters 397 Workpiece chucking TURN PLUS 273 Y axis 3 Y axis machining 67 IZ Zero point C axis 62 Changing in TURN PLUS 226 Machine zero point 9 Shift absolute G59 117 Shift in the simulation 199 shift in variables G902 171 shift activating G980 172 shift activating tool lengths G9811 172 Shift additive G56 117 Slit axis G152 sc 148 Shift deactivating G920 172 Shift
443. pplied to contour element Deactivate compensation 4 DIN PLUS Compensate right tool tip G150 G150 Compensate left tool tip G151 Defines the tool reference point for recessing and button tools G150 Reference point of the right tool tip G151 Reference point of the left tool tip N z Oo Q G150 G151 is effective from the block in which It is programmed and remains in effect up to The next tool change The end of the program The displayed actual values always refer to the tool tip defined in the tool data If you use TRC after G150 G151 you must also adjust G41 G42 Linking tool dimensions G710 Example for application a For full surface machining the workpiece is transferred to a rotating gripper after having been machined on the front face The rear side is machined by stationary tools To do this the dimensions of the rotating gripper are added to the dimensions of the When al command is programmed the CNC PILOT replaces the previous tool dimensions with new tool dimensions When you activate the adding function with G710 Q1 the dimensions of the new tool are added to the dimensions of the previous tool Parameters Stationary tool Q Addtool dimensions O 0 Off O 1 On Example of adding tool dimensions Rotating gripper Stationary tools on tool carrier 2 Roughing tool for rearface machining Insert rotating gripper Transfer workpiece trom spindle to rotating gripper e
444. predrilling Automatic performs the complete predrilling operation including tool changes that might be necessary because of different diameters HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 299 z c J Soon c g am 6 12 Interactive Worki Types of machining for holes The IAG generates the following drilling and boring cycles Centric predrilling G74 Centering G72 Drilling No deep hole drilling parameter set G71 deep hole drilling parameter set G74 Countersinking G72 Counterboring G72 Reaming G71 Tapping G73 Centering and sinking G72 Drilling and sinking G72 Drilling and thread G73 Drilling and reaming G71 or G74 For Stationary tools For drilling at the center of workpiece rotation Driven tools For C axis machining Feed rate reduction factor For blind drilling and or through drilling you can define a feed rate reduction of 50 The feed rate reduction for through drilling is switched on depending on the type of tool Boring bar with indexable inserts and twist drills with 180 drilling angle Feed rate reduction switched on at drill tio 2 safety clearance Other tools Tool tip length of first cut safety clearance length of first cut tool tip safety clearance see Machining Parameter 9 Drilling or G47 G147 Parameters K Retraction plane default Return to the starting position or to the safety clearance D Retract continue soft key At feed rate
445. program run feed stop Defining a monitoring zone G995 G995 defines the monitoring zone and the axes to be monitored G995 with parameter Beginning of monitoring zone n G995 without parameter End of the monitoring zone not required if another monitoring zone follows The zone number must be unambiguous in the NC program A maximum of 49 monitoring zones per slide are possible Parameters H Zone number range 1 to 999 Q Code for axes drives to be monitored 1 X axis 2 Y axis 4 Z axis 8 Spindle 16 Spindle 1 128 C axis 1 Add the codes if you want to monitor more than one drive Example Monitoring the Z axis and main spindle Q 12 Type of load monitoring G996 With G996 you can temporarily switch off the load monitoring and define the type of monitoring Parameters Q Scope of monitoring default O Q 0 Monitoring not active effective for the entire NC program even previously programmed G995 are rendered ineffective Q 1 Rapid traverse movements not monitored Q 2 Rapid traverse movements monitored H Type of monitoring default O H 0 Torque and work monitoring H 1 Torque monitoring H 2 Work monitoring HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Example Load monitoring MACHINING N 7GOIG Ola FILLA appe Torque monitoring does not monitor rapid traverse paths 5 CHAO G26 4000 TT G995 H1 Q9 Monitors the spindle and X axis FGJ S20 Es Poo MA M108 IO ZX E
446. pth FP If you use individual elements for describing a milling contour TURN PLUS opens the Pocket contour dialog box after you have finished your entries which requests Depth P Depth P gt 0 defines a pocket Position of lateral surface contours TURN PLUS takes the selected reference plane and suggests it as reference diameter Reference data dialog box X Reference diameter Starting point of lateral surface contour To define the starting point select Contour Parameters Starting point of contour P Starting point of contour polar CL Starting point of contour angle as linear dimension C Starting point of contour angle HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Polar dimensions i 4c Angle or angle as linear dimension Polar dimension parameter P n P is given with respect to the unrolled lateral surface Select the desired solution when there are two possibilities YK 249 m 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours Line segment in a lateral surface contour Use the menu symbol to select the direction of the line and assign it a dimension Parameters Z End point of line P End point of the line polar CY End point of the line angle as linear dimension p End point of the line angle WW Angle of the line for reference see illustration WV Angle to the preceding element WN Angle to the successor element WV WN The angle lea
447. r Sequence milling operation Linear and circular slots Open contours Closed contours pockets single surfaces and polygonal surfaces Sequence machining location Front face also machines front face in Y Lateral surface also machines lateral surface in Y then sequence of geometrical definition Execution of all milling operations on all machining locations Execution of the selected milling operation on all machining locations Continued gt 6 TURN PLUS Main machining _Submachining Location Execution _ _ gt 0 Finish milling continued Ss lt Surface contour slot pocket Location Execution of the selected milling operation on the gt selected machining location To Define the milling operation D Parting Cutting off The workpiece is cut off 9 Full Surface Machining The workpiece is cut off and transferred to the E counterspindle Rechucking Full Surface Machining Lathe with counterspindle The workpiece is transferred to the counterspindle Lathe fitted with one spindle The workpiece is rechucked manually Machining of fits For contour machining finishing the AWG takes into account contour elements with the measuring contour element Special machining tasks No significance for the AWG 6 13 Automatic Workine HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 319 3 Drilling Onn eee eee Entering a
448. r Thus you can inspect the current contour of the workpiece during each machining stage With the contour follow up function the CNC PILOT optimizes the paths for approach and departure and avoids noncutting passes Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 67 O z z Saz 5 gt 4 2 Basic The contour follow up function can also be used for m a om puus E Tranofer amp auxiliary contours z Preconditions for contour follow up iis Definition of blank W 2 00 ko z s s ras Proper description of tools simple definition of NO ONGIH Sa tools is not sufficient 3 es gi Erorit window 1 2 20 i i i o Gl Z0 B turning contours it cannot be used for contours Mo anc euecae A a a Rear side window N 12 GI RTE B 1 with the C orY axis N 1361 2 17 BI N 18 GI ATO Z719 3094 B1 1 I N 15 GI 2 25 BI Contour simulation REDS Lost M Derren During editing CNC PILOT displays programmed contours in up to two graphic windows 8 GI S48_37T62 i The contour follow up function can be used only for h S G25 HS 11 2 KO RO 6 W99 Surface window Selection of the graphic window Graphic Window menu item Back to machine display Graphic Graphic OFF 65 Sep 62 menu item 17 22 14 Activate graphic window or update the oe are a gt contour Note F The starting point of the turning contour is marked p E Additions changes on t
449. r minute gt Select Feed per minute gt Enter the feed rate in mm min or inches min and press OK g Mode S spindle speed pull down menu E Spindle speed gt Select Speed S gt Enter the speed in rom Constant cutting speed gt Select V constant gt Enter the cutting speed in m min or ft min and press OK E Spindle point stop To switch to the required spindle press the Spindle change key gt Select Spindle point stop gt Enter position Cycle start The spindle is positioned Cycle stop Exit the dialog box Menu item T Tool gt Select T gt Enter the turret position O S am am N ap 3 2 2 M Commands M M functions pull down menu E The M number is known Select M direct and enter the number E M menu To select the M function use the menu After input selection of the M function gt Cycle start The M function is executed Cycle stop Exit the dialog box 00 002 a 71 999 100 001 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 25 g Mode O S a e c N ap 3 2 3 ManualTurning Operations Manual pull down menu E Simple longitudinal and transverse turning operations gt Select Constant feed gt Select the direction of feed Constant feed dialog box gt Control the feed rate with the cycle keys m G functions gt Select G function gt
450. r of holes figures default 1 Starting point Starting point starting angle End point End point end angle Distance between figures in Z direction i Angular distance between figures Angle to longitudinal axis reference Z axis default 0 Total length of pattern Distance between figures pattern distance O DDESASZAON Circular pattern on lateral surface G412 Geo G412 is effective for the bore hole figure defined in the following block G310 315 317 Programming notes Program the hole figure in the following block without a center Exception circular slot the center of curvature J is added to the sample position see 4 5 8 Circular Pattern with Circular Slots The milling cycle MACHINING section calls the hole figure in the following block not the pattern definition Parameters Q Number of figures K Diameter of circle A Starting angle position of the first figure reference Z axis default 0 W End angle position of the last figure reference Z axis default 360 Wi Distance between figures Continued gt 106 If you program O Z and C the bore holes figures will be ordered in a regular manner along the circumference 4 DIN PLUS Q Direction orientation default O V 0 withoutW distribution over complete circle V 0 with W distribution over long arc V 0 with WI algebraic sign of Wi defines
451. r of the active compensation Compensation values Inspection cycle Slide display Ey m q White symbol No enabling Machine in setup mode le Number Selected slides Cycle state see table I o Bar diagram Feed rate override in Upper box Feed rate override Spindle status spindle display Lower box Current feed rate with stationary spindle Nominal feed rate gray print Slide number in blue background Rear side machining active Direction of spindle rotation M3 Spindle display aj 7 o Direction of spindle rotation M4 White symbol No enabling Number in spindle symbol Gear range Spindle stopped H number Selected spindle Spindle status See table Bar diagram Spindle speed override in Spindle position controlled M19 Upper box Spindle speed override Lower box Current speed with position control M19 Spindle position with stationary spindle Nominal speed gray print C axisis active Overview of enabled elements ee Shows the enabling status of up to 6 NC channels 4 spindles and 2 C axes Enabled elements are marked in green Display group at left Enabled elements F feed rate D data S spindle C C axis 1 6 Number of slides of spindle of C axis Display group at center Status Zy left dash Cycle on off Zy right dash Feed Stop R traversing the reference marks A automatic mode H manual control F retracting after traversing the limit switches Inspe
452. r to range 4 during interpretation of the NC programs Mx03 Spindle x ON CW Q Slide number use synchronization with Q if synchronization with x is not possible Mx04 Spindle x ON CCW D On Off default O Mx05 Spindle x STOP 0 Off synchronization during runtime of NC program M97 Synchronous function 1 On synchronization exclusively during interpretation of the NC programs Example for M97 SIN OIX A SON OGIX Z 1 2 N M97 1 2 wait for each other HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 183 4 18 Notes and Examples 4 18 Programming Notes and Examples 4 18 1 Programming Machining Cycles PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAM HEAD ROHTEIL BLANK FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART BEARBEITUNG MACHINING Nee Gogoi es Nee GZ0eS N 2 Gl4 Q Nive Wes Nee GO OS LE GOC ae G47 P Ge ORIN Sa NE GO As 2 G14 Q0 Bae ze ee 8 e 4 18 2 Contour Repetitions 111 nc PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAM HEAD 7 OCH ILEN 1 SLIDE REVOLVER 1 TURRET T2 1D 121 55 040 1 T3 1D 111 55 080 1 T4 1D 161 400 2 T8 ID 342 18 0 70 2D 1212 0501 SPANNMITTEL 1 CHUCKING EQUIPMENT ROHTEIL BLANK NaS G2Zv ex 0 SZ ZOTKI 184 Example Typical structure of a machining cycle Zero point shift Definition of speed limit Approach to tool change position Tool change Technology data Cutting speed spindle speed teed rate direction of rotation Positioning Definition of safety clearance Cycle call If necessary Retract Approac
453. rameters i Safety clearance to the milling plane only for milling operations K Safety clearance in approach direction feed Axis parallel oversize G57 G57 defines different oversizes for X and Z Program G57 before the cycle call G57 is effective in the following cycles After cycle run the oversizes are deleted G810 G820 G830 G835 G860 G869 G890 not deleted G81 G82 G83 Parameters X Z Oversize X diameter value only positive values If the oversizes are programmed with G57 and in the cycle itself the cycle oversizes apply Contour parallel oversize equidistant G58 A negative oversize is permitted with G890 Program G58 before the cycle call G58 is effective in the following cycles After cycle run the oversizes are deleted G810 G820 G830 G835 G860 G869 G890 not deleted G83 Parameters P Oversize E If an oversize is programmed with G58 and in the cycle the oversize from the cycle is used HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 I G147 replaces safety clearance set in the machining parameters machining parameters 2 or that set in G47 119 Commands O vr Commands O ox vr 4 6 8 Tools types of Compensation Tool callT The CNC PILOT displays the tool assignment defined in the TURRET section You can enter the T number directly or select it from the tool list switch with the CONTINUE soft key See also 4 2 4 Tool Programming Ch
454. rance on the workpiece to be transferred proposed value From safety clearance on blank machining parameter 2 With traverse to a fixed stop See machine manual Maximum traverse J No input Without traverse to fixed stop With input With traverse to fixed stop meaning of the parameters and J See machine manual 1 if 2 workpieces U No meaning 297 z c J Ee c g C 6 12 Interactive Worki S w 2 a S d N ae co End position X R End position during parting Start position Z S For the parting operation proposed value Vertical element from the selection Parting tool width Y Width of the parting tool s cutting edge Workpiece transfer Rechuck Angular synchronization LC 0 Angular synchronization 1 Speed synchronization Angular offset LD with angular synchronization Dead stop LE 0 With traverse to dead stop 1 Without traverse to dead stop Machine dimension LF Transfer position in machine dimension n n 1 6 Minimum feed path LH For traversing to dead stop see machining manual Maximum feed path LH For traversing to dead stop see machining manual Incr feed path J For traversing to dead stop see machining manual Working position Z 2 U Working position of opposed spindle proposed value Zero point offset e g from machine parameter 1164 for Z axis 1
455. rate 6 TURN PLUS 6 12 6 Drilling Feed rate reduction softkeys Overview of drilling operations Centric predrilling G74 F50 Centering G72 Drilling G71 or G74 cm Countersinking G72 Counterboring G72 Feed rate reduction for through drilling Feed rate reduction for blind drilling bw lt 180 Feed rate reduction for blind drilling with geile G71 boring bars and twist drills with 180 Tapping G73 drilling angle Special drilling Centering and countersinking G72 Drilling and countersinking G72 Drilling and threading G73 Drilling and reaming G71 or G74 Drilling automatic accounts for form elements bore holes single holes and hole patterns z c J am g amp Centric predrilling G74 Predrilling at the turning center with stationary tools Selecting the machining range Select all contour elements encompassing the bore hole If required the bore hole can be limited with drilling limitation Z 6 12 Interactive Worki Parameters Z Drilling limitation i Safety clearance generates safety clearance G47 before the drilling cycle yP 1st drilling depth J Minimum drilling depth Reduction value B Return distance default Retract to starting point of hole E Period of dwell for chip breaking at end of hole Position the drill with Cycle Approach to the turning center Centric predrilling Automatic Centric
456. rcut Parameters DIN 509 E Continued gt 88 NEGRA NENG AS E E K NGIA Calling the contour macro example longitudinal element Undercut contour Next surface element H 5 DIN 509 E 4 DIN PLUS Undercut DIN 509 F H 6 Parameters H 6 Depth of undercut radius DIN 509 F Width of undercut Undercut radius in both corners of the undercut transverse depth Undercut angle Transverse angle If you do not enter parameters the CNC PILOT calculates them from the diameter see 77 7 3 Undercut Parameters DIN 509 F N Q Q Poopo Undercut DIN 76 H 7 Parameters Depth of undercut radius K Width of undercut R Undercut radius in both corners of the undercut default R 0 6 W Undercut angle default 30 Undercut type H H 8 Parameters K Width of undercut R Undercut radius W Plunging angle Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 89 Commands O g u Undercut form K H 9 Parameters Undercut depth R Undercut radius no value The circular element is not machined W Undercut angle A Angle to linear axis default 45 Thread standard G34 Geo A simple or successive outside or inside thread metric ISO fine pitch thread DIN 13 Series 1 The CNC PILOT calculates all the required values Threads are interlinked by programming several GO1 G34 blocks after each other P
457. re 8 Milling DIN PLUS Contour milling G840 152 Fundamentals 66 Pocket milling finishing G846 157 Pocket milling roughing G84b 156 TURN PLUS IWG milling 303 Machining attributes 26 Milling contour position DIPLIS sata 95 TURN PLUS front rear face 242 Index TURN PLUS lateral surface 249 Milling cutter radius compensation Fundamentals 10 Programming 115 Milling cycles DIN PLUS Contour milling G840 152 Pocket milling finishing G846 157 Pocket milling roughing 6845 156 TURN PLUS Area milling 304 Contour milling 303 Deburring 303 Engraving 305 Milling depth DIN PLUS isas 95 TURN PLUS Front face rear side 242 TURN PLUS Lateral surface 249 Milling direction DIN PLUS Cycle 6840 152 Cycle 6845 156 Cycle G846 157 Milling pins 3 2 Milling tools 372 Mirroring DIN PLUS Converting and mirroring G30 169 Mirror shift contour G121 117 TURN PLUS Auxiliary function Zot Manipulating contours 262 Modal address parameters 65 Modal G functions 65 Modes of operation Automatic mode 41 DIN PLUS ssi 60 Manual control 24 Operating modes selection 14 Overview 5 HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Parameters 334 Service and diagnosis 398 Simulation 196 Transfer 408 TURN PLUS 216 Motio
458. re necessary to relieve the tool 806 856 Tolerance values spindles Speed tolerance The system proceeds from a GO block to a G1 block as soon as the status Speed reached is attained When the speed lies within the tolerance range the status is attained The tolerance value refers to the nominal speed Position window position After the spindle has stopped at a defined position M19 the system proceeds to the next block as soon as the status Position reached is attained When the difference between nominal and actual value lies within the tolerance range the Status is attained The tolerance value refers to the nominal speed Speed tolerance synchronization rpm Criterion for status Synchronization reached Position tolerance synchronization Criterion for status Synchronization reached The parameter settings for the slave spindle are the decisive ones Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 343 7 2 Machine Parameters 7 2 Machine Parameters Status Synchronization reached If the actual speed difference and the actual position difference between the spindles to be synchronized lies within the tolerance range the status is reached When the status Synchronization reached is attained the torque of the guided spindle is limited Note he tolerances which are actually attainable on the machine must not be undercut when setting these parameters The value programmed
459. reference points after switching on the CNC PILOT The system knows the distances of the reference points to the machine datum HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 1 4 ee a A 8 LO 1 5 Tool Dimensions The CNC PILOT requires information on the specific tools for a variety of tasks such as calculating the cutting radius compensation or the proportioning of cuts Tool length All position values that are programmed and displayed are referenced to the distance between the tool tip and workpiece zero point Since the control only knows the absolute position of the tool carrier slide it needs the dimensions XE and ZE to calculate and display the position of the tool tip For milling and drilling tools operating with the Y axis the CNC PILOT additionally needs the dimension inY Tool compensation The tool tip is subjected to wear during machining processes Io compensate for this wear the CNC PILOT uses compensation values The system automatically adds the compensation values to the values for length Tooth and cutter radius compensation TRC The tip of a lathe tool has a certain radius When machining tapers chamfers and radii this results in inaccuracies which the CNC PILOT compensates with its cutting radius compensation function Programmed paths of traverse are referenced to the theoretical tool tio S The TRC function compensates for this error by calculating a new path of traverse the equi
460. right angled lines Recess Straight lines Threads Straight lines Centric bore hole Center axis on front and rear face Select Workpiece Finished part Form u y Select the desired form element from the drop down menu OE eer Select a form element Select a position by soft key or touch pad Select more than one form element Select positions by soft key or touch pad _ errr Enter the parameters of the form element Onn eee eee TURN PLUS depicts the form elements ee See also 6 5 2 Form Elements 6 3 6 Notes on Operation HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 l gt TURN PLUS E Transfer bep ZX main view Finished part Contour Tee yt Pattern at Figure W Manipulate tal attribute lt 4 Se pe EEE EEn eee E ronie a B E Select form element for overlap Y gt TURN PLUS E transfer bep ZX main view Finished part rm dti Pattern set igure PER ianipulsto A43 AttErID alala j 86 Sep 82 11 17 05 ff fosfes fea Define chamfers rounding arcs undercuts etc as form elements I hen the working plane generation can take into account special operations on these form elements 221 orkpiece Description orkpiece Description 6 3 4 You can program frequently occurring contour trains once and integrate them once as a series row in the contour Integrated contour trains are part of the contour Integrating
461. rimposed by form elements the indicated end points or the end points to be entered are given with respect to the theoretical end point When contour elements are modified the system automatically adjusts chamfers roundings threads and undercuts to the new position Sequence starting point and end point of a contour element are determined by the direction of definition After trimming deleting or inserting operations have been executed TURN PLUS analyzes whether successive elements can be combined to form a line segment or an arc The edited contour is standardized 6 7 1 Editing the Contours of a Blank Part If there is a standard blank bar tube you can Delete d by selecting Workpiece Blank Manipulate Delete Contour Disconnect by selecting Workpiece Blank Manipulate Disconnect The standard blank is resolved into individual contour elements You can then manipulate the individual elements If there is a casting or a blank with individual elements was defined manipulate it like a finished part 6 7 2 Trimming Trimming drop down menu Length of element Change the length of a linear element The starting point of the contour element remains unchanged Closed contours The manipulated element is recalculated the position of the subsequent element is adapted Open contours The manipulated element is recalculated the following contour train is shifted Operation Pla
462. rking on the same diameter both slides start simultaneously On 4 axis cycles ensure that the tools are identical tool When working on different diameters the second type cutting edge radius cutting edge angle etc slide starts when the leading slide has reached lead B This is synchronized at every step Each slide advances by the calculated depth of cut If the slides do not have to execute the same number of cuts the leading slide executes the last cut With constant cutting speed the cutting speed depends on the speed of the leading slide The leading tool does not retract until the subsequent tool is ready for use HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 125 Contour parallel roughing G830 G830 machines the contour area defined by NS NE parallel to the contour The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal machining With NS NE you specify the machining direction Cycles urning If the contour to be machined consists of one element then If you program only NS machining is in contour def direction If you program NS and NE machining is against the contour definition direction If required the area to be machined is divided into several sections for example for machining contour valleys The simplest way of programming is specifying NS NE and P Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section NE End block number en
463. rking space limits The visual limit switch monitoring is independent from the protection zone monitoring and limit switch monitoring ng a Back to main menu Menu items for controlling the simulation New Start a new simulation program changes are taken into account Continue Simulates the next NC source block or basic block Stop Stops the simulation Thus you can edit the settings or use the contour follow up function Set up drop down menu Window Contour selection nw Status line see 5 2 Main Menu ne Slide See 5 2 Main Menu In the motion simulation you can also activate the limit switch display for slide x HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 The simulation shows the limit switch dimensions relative to the tool point This is why the limit switch dimensions are repositioned in a tool change Transfer a l fH non S44 cont A stop tH ser dp Ji contour 3j Debus i TH gt lt iis 1 N 132 G80 NS16 NEG E6 2 U HZ DI 124 K3 3 2 N x i z m Ef am pro EETA O Prora active 3 Tae gt gt e Sinole faric block DINPLUS TURN PLUS oo Heiko LLA Warnings see 5 7 2 Basics of Operation nw limes see 5 9Time Calculation n Protection zone see 5 4 Machining Simulation Debug drop down menu If you use variables to machine the workpiece you can show and edit them wit
464. ro shift EE A shift in X is entered as a radius 116 4 DIN PLUS Additive zero offset G56 Shifts the workpiece zero point by Z or X The shift is given with respect to the currently active workpiece zero point If you shift the workpiece zero point several times with G56 the shift is always added to the currently active zero point Commands Parameters X Z Shift X radius value default O Absolute zero offset G59 Sets the workpiece zero point to X Z The new zero point remains in effect to the end of the program Parameters X Z Zero point shift X radius dimension G59 cancels all previous zero point displacements with GSF GS G55 0r G59 Mirror shift contour G121 Lateral surface contours are mirrored Mirrors and or shifts the workpiece blank contour and finished part shifted like turning contours contour The contour is mirrored at the X axis and shifted in Z direction Auxiliary contours are not mirrored The workpiece zero point is not affected E eee E E E R G121 allows you to use the blank and finished part descriptions for system and the contour are mirrored front and rear face machining H 1 mirrors only the contour Parameters H Mirroring default O H 0 Contour shift no mirroring H 1 Contour shift mirroring and reversal of the direction of contour description N Shift default O D Mirroring XC XCR mirroring shiftin
465. rol of the simulation z New Redraws the contour program changes are Sstuatessen Poroneter taken into account Continue Displays the next NC source block or basic block 3 Contour Simulation Menu item Representation of contour You configure ery n n Turning uin cross Section wich i lateral View Section and view Above the center of rotation the lateral view below the center the cross section Additional views Show selected contour Simulate NC zero points ix Set up drop down menu Window zero point C see 5 2 Main Menu Contour selection In the dialog box define whether one selected ey e ae contour or all contours of the NC program will be 1 Pen shown H PLus Turn PLUS p Fj Fii gt gt Define whether zero point shifts will be included Warnings see 5 1 2 Notes for Operation Menu item 3 D view see 5 73 D View Debug drop down menu If you use variables to describe the contour you can show and edit them with the debug functions see 5 8 Checking the NC Program Run In single basic block mode section graphics is active HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 203 AS mar S gt E V ka Oo Pun a 5 3 2 Dimensioning Selection Dimensioning menu item ia Back to contour simulation Element dimensionin
466. ront rear side 247 Circular slot on lateral surface 254 Linear slot on front rear side 247 Linear slot on lateral surface 254 Sott key row 14 Software handshake data transmission 412 Software limit switch Manual control 24 Reference run 22 Source block display simulation 202 Special machining IWG 305 Specifications 429 Spindle Spindle change key 27 Spindle display 53 Spindle keys 27 Spindle override 100 G919 171 Spindle speed 25 Spindle status 50 Spindle synchronization G720 161 With workpiece G98 169 Spindle point stop 25 Spindle speed Constant cutting speed Gx96 114 Speed limitation Gx26 113 Speed monitoring blockwise off G907 171 Spindle speed Gx97 114 Spindle speed override 44 Start block search 42 Starting a pocket island G308 Geo 95 Starting length thread 140 Starting point of contour DIN PLUS Displaying 68 Index Front rear face G100 Geo 96 Lateral surface G110 Geo 102 Turning contour GO Geo 84 TURN PLUS Basic contour 229 Front rear face 242 Lateral surface 249 Step drill 371 Stopper tool 372 Structured DIN PLUS program 60 Subroutine Call 182 Fundamentals 70 section code 83 SWITCH CASE Program branch 181 Switch off 23 Switch on
467. rts are cut at the points of overlay Width of base element W Angle of rotation The overlay contour is rotated by the angle of rotation Z Superimposition Overlay Depending on the form of the supporting contour elements there is a Linear overlay or Circular superimposition E The overlay positions can deviate from the supporting contour element Continued P gt 240 ce Enter the length instead of end point je Enter the length instead of end point Be Define the first overlay position by angle Define the last overlay position by angle 6 TURN PLUS Linear overlay parameters pe Starting point Position of the first overlay element Position E Original position Inserts the original overlay contour in the supporting contour see Help graphic 1 Normal position Rotates the overlay contour about the pitch angle of the supporting contour element and inserts It then in the supporting contour see help graphic 2 a Number of overlay elements XE ZE End point Position of the last overlay element XEi ZEi Incremental end point Finished Part Contour L Distance between the first and last overlay element Li Distance between the overlay elements QL Angle default Angle of the supporting contour element Circular overlay parameters X Z Starting point Position of the first overlay element q Starting point as angle reference one
468. s Yes No Reduced plunging feed rate with descending contours Retraction Yes Set the type of retraction by soft key No H 4 Tool remains at the end coordinate H Type of retraction define by soft key Me Retraction position with H 0 1 or 2 Form element machining with Define by soft key the form elements chamfers etc to be machined HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 The position defined in Cycle Approach is assumed as proposed value for the Retraction position I K 305 c Q me D D g c 6 12 Interactive Worki 6 12 8 Thread Machining G31 Parameters B P Starting length overrun length no input The CNC PILOT automatically determines the length from adjacent undercuts or recesses If no undercut recess exists the starting length and overrun length from machining parameter 7 will be used see also 4 8Thread Cycles ee Starting angle necessary when the starting point of the thread is defined with respect to contour elements that are not rotationally symmetric Maximum approach maximum infeed distance V Type of infeed Constant cross section V 0 Constant cross section for all cuts Constant approach V 1 Remaining cut division V 2 If the division thread depth infeed leaves a remainder the first feed is reduced The last cut is divided into 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 of a cut lan Generation IWG EPL method V 3 The infeed is calcul
469. s The CNC PILOT automatically identifies whether the symbol refers to a slide spindle or C axis 0 The component that has been selected using the slide spindle selection key is displayed gt 0 Number of slide spindle C axis Component group Always enter 0 7 Parameters 0 Special code no display 1 Actual value in X 2 Actual value in Z 3 Actual value in C 4 Actual value inY 5 Actual value and distance to go in X display 6 Actl value and disance to go in Z display 8 Acti value and disance to go InY display 10 All principal axes 11 All secondary axes 12 Actl value in U auxiliary axis 13 Actl value in V auxiliary axis 14 Actl value in W auxiliary axis HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 15 16 17 21 22 23 25 26 30 32 33 34 Actl value in A auxiliary axis Actl value in B auxiliary axis Actl value in C auxiliary axis Tool display with comp values DX DZ Tool display with identification number Additive compensation Tool display with tool life information Display for multiple tools with compensa tion values DX DZ Actual value and distance to go in U display Actual value and distance to go in V display Actual value and distance to go in W display Actual value and distance to go in a display Actual value and distance to go in b display 7 3 Control Parameters S S S
470. s general G23 Geo Recess on a linear reference element G1 G23 is assigned to the previously programmed reference element On the lateral surface the recess can be positioned on an inclined reference straight Parameters H Recess type default O H 0 Symmetrical recess H 1 relief turn X Center point of recess on the end face diameter Z Center point of recess on the lateral surface Recess depth and position l gt 0 Recess to right of reference element lt O Recess to left of reference element K Recess width without chamfer rounding U Recess diameter diameter of recess base use only if the reference element runs parallel to the Z axis A Recess angle default 0 With H 0 0 lt A lt 180 angle between edges of recess With H 1 0 lt A lt 90 angle between reference straight and recess edge Simple recess Continued P gt 86 4 DIN PLUS B Outside radius chamfer starting point near corner default O B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer P Outside radius chamfer starting point distant from corner default O P gt 0 Radius of rounding P lt 0 Width of chamfer R Inside radius in both corners of recess default O L The CNC PILOT refers the recess depth to the reference element The recess base runs parallel to the reference element Thread with undercut G24 Geo Linear base element with linear thread external or internal thread metric
471. s all contour elements that can be displayed The IWG and AWG permanently display the finished part contour and graphically depict the cutting operations The workpiece blank takes on a contour during machining You can adjust the depiction of the tool paths and the simulation mode by soft key Maximum window size If there is more than one window on the screen you can use the key to switch windows settings from full size to multiple windows Zoom After activation a red frame appears FS with which you can select the detail you wish to isolate The submenu Zoom standard settings also appears Zoom settings by keyboard Enlarge Page forward Reduce Page back Shift Cursor keys Zoom settings by touch pad Position the cursor to one corner of the section While holding the left mouse key pull the cursor to the opposite corner of the section Standard settings See soft key table After having enlarged a detail to a great extent select Workpiece maximum or Work space and then isolate a new detail To exit the zoom function press the ESC key On stops after every traverse movement Off simulates the complete machining sequence Basic block Run the next path of traverse basic Continue block on simulation mode Activate the zoom function O HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 bep Zx main view AWG 3j Frogram 44 Workpiecs Jij Propare PEED Hnum 449 Configuration Fini
472. s for blank finished part auxiliary Programmed shift contours are retained by the zero offset description Reference Previously defined workpiece E G920 temporarily deactivates zero point shifts G980 reactivates zero point O them 0503 0954 G55 Relative shift Shift defined in parameters Reference Previously defined workpiece zero point G56 Additive shift Programmed shift Reference Current workpiece zero point O lt q G59 Absolute shift Programmed shift Reference Machine zero point Zero point shift G51 Shifts the workpiece zero point by Z or X The shift is referenced to the workpiece zero point defined in setup mode Even if you shift the zero point several times with G51 it is still always referenced to the workpiece zero point defined in setup mode The zero point shift remains in effect up to the end of the program or until it is canceled by another zero point shift Parameters X Z Displacement X radius value default O Parameter dependent zero offset G53 G54 G55 Shifts the workpiece zero point by the value defined in the setup parameters 3 4 5 The shift is referenced to the workpiece zero point defined in setup mode Even if you shift the zero point several times with G53 G54 G55 it is still always referenced to the workpiece zero point defined in setup mode The zero shift applies until the end of the program or until it is canceled by another ze
473. s the paths for approach and departure no noncutting passes Depending on the type and complexity of your machining task you can use simple DIN programming or DIN PLUS programming NC program sections The CNC PILOT supports the division of the NC program into individual program sections Sections containing set up information and organizational data are included NC program sections Program head organizational data and setup information Tool list turret table Chucking equipment table Definition of blank Definition of finished part Machining of workpiece Parallel operation While you are editing and testing programs your machine can execute another NC program 60 Example Structured DIN PLUS program PROGRAMMKOPF PROGRAM HEAD MATERIAL St 60 2 EINSPANNDURCHM CLAMPING DIAMETER 120 AUSSPANNLAENGE CLAMPING LENGTH 106 SPANNDRUCK CLAMPING PRESSURE 20 SCHLITTEN SLIDE 1 SYNCHRO O REVOLVER 1 TURRET NDSA 200 T2 ID 111 80 080 1 T3 ID 112 16 080 15 T41D 121 55 040 1 15 1D 122 20 040 1 16 1D 151 600 2 SPANNMITTEL CHUCKING EQUIPMENT Zero offset Z282 MANDAR 50 H2 ID KBA250 77 Q4 ROHTEIL BLANK NRG ZOD 2OZIZ20K2 FERTIGTEIL FINISHED PART N2 GO X60 Z 115 NS G1PZ 105 BEARBEITUNG MACHINING NZZ7GSS 7782 NZ3 G6S a XO 7 152 N24 G65 H2 X120 Z 118 N25 G14 QO Predrilling 30mm Outside Centric Front face N2611 N27 G97 1061 G95 F0 25 M4 ENDE END 4 DIN PLUS
474. se E Chuck supplement ID identification number Reference to database E Clamp form for chuck jaws Define internal external chucking and the level of chuck jaws used E Clamping diameter The diameter at which the workpiece is clamped Workpiece diameter when clamped externally inside diameter when internal clamping is used Tailstock parameters E Sleeve center ID identification number Reference to database HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 x 70 002 7 58 001 a oa EN Edit the chucking equipment parameters Entries in the chucking database sorted by chuck type Continue Define the clamp form Entries in the chucking database sorted by chuck ID number 37 ions unct Y x lap Functions Q Y a 3 4 5 Setting up Machine Dimensions You can evaluate machine dimensions in the variable programming of the NC program The Set machine dimensions function accounts for the dimensions 1 9 and the configured axes for each dimension Select Setting up Machine dimensions Nn eee eee Enter the machine dimension number Enter the machine dimensions Enter the values Set machine dimension x dialog box Capturing a single machine dimension gt Select the input field gt Move the axis to the desired position Confirm the axis position as machine dimension ory or Z position Capturing all machine dime
475. setting is displayed below the menu line Delete Delete marked files ane Data type See 10 3 1 Enabling File pee Rename marked files Sorting Sort files sorted by name or Rename date Mask Only those entries are displayed that the mask allows Copy Copy marked files Wildcards Represents any characters at this position TE Define the file type sorting order and masking Represents any one character at this position The CNC PILOT automatically adds EE Print marked files to any entered mask Operation Vertical arrow keys Page Up Dn move the cursor TERY Mark all files within the list of files all Enter character character series The cursor positions to the next file name beginning with this lark Mark file character sequence Enter with DIN PLUS programs parameters and operating resource files Shows the file content Transfer Call transfer functions You close the file by pressing Enter again or Esc Ponera Mark Marks all displayed files pressing all again unmarks them Management Call organization functions functions Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 423 Mark Or plus key marks the selected file pressing again unmarks the file Mouse operation You can use a mouse to position the cursor and mark and open a file with DIN PLUS programs parameter files and operating resource files For other organization functions see the table of soft keys c J N c
476. sh Contour parallel gt TURN PLUS AARAA 16 5ep 02 17 17 02 Continue 121 375 040 1 LLL LLL MLL LLL EL LLLLLLLL Cutting path depicts the surface traversed by the cutting area of the tool with hatch marks Line Depicts paths of traverse with solid line reference theoretical tool tip Material removal graphic cuts erases the area traversed by the cutting area of the tool Standard ize Last zoom Workpiece maximum Work space Through coordinates Shows the last setting workpiece maximum or working space Cancels the last magnification setting You can select Previous zoom more than once Switches the zoom function to the next window Shows the workpiece in the largest possible view Shows the working space including the tool change position Define the coordinate system and the position of the workpiece zero see 6 75 Configuration 321 Control Graphics n 6 15 Configuration 6 15 Configuration With the functions of the configuration you change and manage various display and input variants Settings Zoom behavior Dynamic Adjusts the the contour depiction to the window size Static Adjusts the contour depiction to the window size when the contour is loaded and keeps this setting Plane ID designation of the coordinate axes Display Do not display Point grid in background Display Do not displ
477. sitions the cursor in the FINISHED PART section and switches to the Geometry menu Single menu items Programming switches to the Machining submenu and positions the cursor in the MACHINING section PAb Program Section codes inserts new section codes Select the desired section code and press ENTER The CNC PILOT inserts the section code at the correct position Block switches to the block editing functions see section 4 5 5 Block menu NC BI pull down menu Program beginning Positions the cursor to the beginning of the program Program end Positions the cursor to the program end Search function Search block Enter the block number The CNC PILOT positions the cursor on the block number provided that it exists Search function Search word Enter the NC word to be searched for G command address parameter etc The cursor skips to the first NC block containing the word searched for The CNC PILOT searches from the cursor position to the end of the program then continues searching from the start of the program Increment Numerical interval between NC blocks The increment entered remains in effect for the active NC program only Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Main menu Ha 4 FUGLUE 11 ZH Subroutine are Teoplate Hic oe Tae sabe X 82 315 Z 198 765 Y 100 001 J 14 3 gt DIN PLUS transfer Ne el Jii config ticraph 26 16 55 St
478. so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the calculated infeed distance lt maximum infeed K Oversizes G57 oversizes are calculated with algebraic sign oversizes are therefore impossible for inside contour machining stay in effect after cycle end G58 oversizes are not taken into account Cycle run 1 Calculate the cut segmentation infeeds 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point on paraxial path 3 Move at feed rate to target point X 4 Depending on algebraic sign of K K lt 0 Machine contour outline K gt 0 Retract by 1 mm at 45 5 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 3 to 5 until target point Z has been reached 7 Move to X starting point of cycle Z last position at which the tool retracts Parameters X Z Contour target point X diameter Offset in X direction default O K Maximum infeed distance K lt 0 With machining contour outline K gt 0 Without machining contour outline Q G function Infeed default O 0 Infeed with GO rapid traverse 1 Infeed with G1 feed rate HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Programming X Z absolute incremental or modal Tool radius compensation Not active Safety clearance After every step 1 mm 135 Cycles D bm Simple contour repeat cycle G83 G83 carries out the functions programmed in the following blocks simple traverses or cycles without a contour definition
479. spindle slide for machining the setup E Spindle speed limit E No input SMAX is the spindle speed limit E Input lt SMAX Input is the spindle speed limit E Input gt SMAX SMAX is the spindle speed limit SMAX see machining parameter 2 global technology parameter spindle speed limit E M functions button You can define up to five M functions which TURN PLUS will take into account when generating the NC program m At the beginning of the machining process m After a tool change T command E At the end of the machining process A4 Progr m e e i Program head The fields E Clamping diameter E Unclamping length E Clamping pressure are calculated and automatically entered by TURN PLUS in the setup function see 6 77 7 Clamping theWorkpiece The other fields contain organizational information and set up information which do not influence the machining process Information contained in the program head is preceded by in the DIN program 218 6 TURN PLUS 6 3 Workpiece Description am 2 Basics ofcontourdefinition Importing contours in DXF format S You program a contour by entering Individual Contours available in DXF format can be imported into the TURN contour elements one after the other in the correct PLUS programming mode of operation see 6 8 Importing DXF Q sequence Contours A You can define the contour elements contour DXF contours describe A position usin
480. st _ c Sums O Som You can use this structure for your requirements for example for generating different working plans using the same workpiece definition ULEC TEE E Program management drop down menu Load Select the drop down menu Complete Blank Finished part or Contour train Select the file Change to the DIN PLUS mode New creates a new TURN PLUS program DIN PLUS Enter the program name and define the material To activate the Editing program head window select Program head After completing the program head editing define the workpiece blank and finished part and generate the working plan Deleting Select the drop down menu Complete Blank Finished part or Contour train Select the file and delete it Change to the simulation operating mode Ow Activate zoom see 6 74 Control Graphics Saving saves the created program Select the drop down menu Complete Workpiece Blank Finished part or NC program with Complete the NC program will also be saved Enter check the program name Press OK the file is saved HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 217 62 Program Management 6 2 2 Program Head The PROGRAM HEAD comprises E Material for determining the cutting values E Assignment of spindle to slide for 1st setup E Assignment of spindle to slide for 2nd setup For full surface machining enter the
481. st answer the inquiry Overwrite Serial Transfer Marked files are transmitted Roceius Network or FTP Marked files are transferred from the communications partner to the CNC PILOT If the file already exists you must answer the inquiry s During serial transfer first start the Overwrite i Serial Transfer The CNC PILOT switches to readiness A A Tien We A to receive or receives data If the file already exists you must answer the inquiry Overwrite Mouse operation You can use a mouse to position the cursor and mark and open a file with DIN PLUS programs parameter files and operating resource files HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 419 10 4 Parameters and Operating Resources Network JH soria HAFIF iora HdPoreneter conv setting fave parameters 10 4 1 Converting Parameters and Tool date WKZ _ Rees Sot rtemi E Operating Resources ee Tent i faven l l 1 Technology data TE 1 With comment Call Menu item Parameter conv ersion Save y covered sate CEN i m J Processing data BEA 7 Cance Load J Gt date PRO l fA 3 r J PLC data SP5 3 LL_DEU MAS 1381TIT Fyfe 03 06 2002 ALL_DEU PRO 29391 rzw 85 66 2002 A Back to Transfer menu ALL_DEU SPS 102622 r u 05 06 2002 i ALL_DEU STO 82473 r H 85 86 2687 S BSPUZBOR WKZ 25978 r u 03 02 1399 of Quantity 3 Marked 8 Quantity 31 The CNC PILOT saves parameters and operating 900 002 HE resource data in internal f
482. t parameters XK YK Hole center in Cartesian coordinates a PM Center of hole in polar coordinates reference angle positi ve XK axis The hole can contain the following elements Centering Core drilling Countersinking Thread 244 6 TURN PLUS Centering parameters Centering diameter Core hole parameters B Hole diameter P Depth of hole excluding point W Point angle mVW 0 Feed rate reduction V 1 mVW gt 0 Point angle Fit H6 H13 or none see 6 76 6 Drilling Countersinking parameter R Countersinking diameter U Countersinking depth E Countersinking angle HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 245 6 6 C Axis Contours 6 6 C Axis Contours Thread parameters Nominal diameter u Thread depth K Thread runout length Thread pitch Thread type Right hand left hand Circle full circle Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates a PM Center in polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis R K Radius diameter of circle P Depth of the figure Rectangle Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates a PM Centerin polar coordinates reference angle a positive XK axis Angle to longitudinal axis of rectangle reference XK axis Length of rectangle Width of rectangle Chamfer rounding Width of chamfer Radius of rounding F Depth of the figure DPAP 246 6 TURN PLUS Polygon Parameters XK YK Center in
483. t spindle and tailstock Danger of collision A N TURN PLUS does not monitor for collisions during transverse machining or machining operations on the end face Separation point TR The workpiece is divided into front and rear area If no separation point has been specified TURN PLUS sets a separation point at the transition from the largest to a smaller diameter Position the separation points on outside corners Tools for machining the Area on front side Main machining direction Z or primarily lett recessing or tapping tools etc Area on rear side Main machining direction Z or primarily right recessing or tapping tools etc Setting editing a separation point see 6 9 5 Separation Points Protective zones for drilling and milling operations TURN PLUS machines drilling and milling contours on the end face front and rear face provided that the following conditions are fulfilled The horizontal distance from the end face must be greater than omm OF The distance between chucking equipment and drilling milling contour must be greater than SAR SAR see machining parameter 2 If jaws are used for clamping the shaft at the spindle TURN PLUS accounts for the cutting limitation SB Continued gt 330 6 TURN PLUS Machining information Chucking the workpiece at the spindle Ensure that the area where the blank part is chucked is premachined Otherwise the cutting limi
484. t contour element Save a contour Activate range selection Select next previous contour element Select next previous contour element Activate selection of multiple elements and select all elements Activate selection of multiple elements Activate multiple selection and select all elements Activate multiple selection Select next previous point contour transition Select next previous point contour transition Se rom Ee AL Center end point selection Next previous center end point Select next previous center end point cee E Select all form elements Select next previous form element Select next previous form element V Select marked element point Confirm selection Cancel selection of marked element point
485. t infeed remainder of the thread depth cutting depth divisionThe last cut is divided into 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 cut V 3 Infeed is calculated from the pitch and the spindle speed H Type of offset infeed for smoothing the thread flank default O H 0 No offset H 1 Offset from left H 2 Offset from right H 3 Offset alternately right left Q Number of air cuts after the last cut for reducing the cutting pressure in the thread base default 0 C Starting angle thread start is defined with respect to rotationally nonsymmetric contour elements default O Danger of collision An excessive overrun length P might cause a collision The overrun length can be checked during the simulation 140 Runout length BE gt 0 75 F S e 0 15 BA Minimum starting length BE Minimum runout length z Thread pitch in mm revolution S Spindle speed in revolutions seconds a e Acceleration in mm s see Acceleration at block start block end in machine parameter 1105 Cycle run 1 Calculate the cut segmentation 2 Approach the internal starting point at rapid tra verse on a diagonal path which is calculated from Slope length B and the safety clearance 3 Execute a thread cut 4 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next pass 5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete thread has been cut 6 Execute idle cuts 7 Return to internal starting point For multiple threads the same rate
486. t is not possible to influence this decision Marked point If one of the contour points in the DXF drawing is marked with a complete circle then this point is specified as the starting point The contour point must be at the center of the complete circle Direction of rotation Indicate whether the contour is aligned in clockwise or counterclockwise direction 64 DAF parameters Max gap Start point Max dist Dir rot Counterclockwise OK Cancel 6 TURN PLUS In the starting point automatic configuration parameter you specify the behavior of TURN PLUS when entering the finished part contour Meaning of the setting in the Starting point automatic field E Yes Upon calling the finished part contour entry TURN PLUS immediately branches to the entry of the contour starting point The DXF import soft key is not available E No After the finished part contour entry is called you have the choice of whether a finished part contour DXF contour should be imported or whether the contour will be entered manually Only the entry of the finished part contour is affected by this setting For all other contours you select the form of contour entry either by menu or by soft key HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Do not display 265 6 8 i DXF Contours orting DXF Contours e 6 8 3 DXF Import The DXF import function is always offered when a contour entry is necessary The sequence of a DXF import
487. t slide x Shire mesh salir eo een E zj ge o uM LRE sjel a A S z End of program i 77 9 8 gt gt DIN PLUS a gt Simulation transfer 311 Prog Fek Contour Er Machining dH Motion WH set up H 3 0 vien Slide adjustment s ssssss ssnssssssssnnnnnns Slide position Slide 1 Eonind the contor af Slide 2 Behind the center of e e r _ S CE End of program p32 N x a B 1 L pam al gu 30 Aug 62 DES gt gt DIH PLUS TURN PLUS 5 Graphic Simulation 5 3 Contour Simulation E S roe 5 3 1 Contour Simulation Functions BORE ET disot up 4 Dimonsion Em Jiao view The contoursimulation function allows you to Select between section or view graphics Check the contour programming through simulation in single blocks Check the parameters of a contour element element dimensioning Measured each contour point with respect to a reference point point dimensioning Contour simulation presupposes that the blank or finished part contour blank or finished part definition auxiliary contours is programmed If the blank or finished part contours have not yet been completely programmed they are displayed as completely as 2 r O e T esr sims Fo l ir alma possible EM EMEN End of prooran 38 EES Back to main menu D a e AR r a Ox A ji al Menu points or cont
488. tal End point must not be the starting point no full circle Hole on front rear face G300 Geo Hole with countersinking and thread Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates U A SCr Mca Ss vw Hole diameter Depth of hole excluding point Point angle default 180 Countersinking diameter Countersinking depth Countersinking angle Thread diameter Thread depth Thread runout length Thread pitch Left hand or right hand thread default O V 0 Right hand thread V 1 Left hand thread Angle inclination of hole reference Z axis Front face default 0 range 90 lt A lt 90 Rear face default 180 range 90 lt A lt 270 Centering diameter Machine the G300 holes with G71 G74 98 G103 Geo 4 DIN PLUS Linear slot on face G301 Geo Parameters XK YK Center in Cartesian coordinates A Angle to longitudinal axis reference XK axis default 0 Slot length Slot width Depth height no entry P from G308 P lt 0 Pocket P gt 0 Island EEA Circular slot on front rear face G302 G303 Geo G302 Circular slot clockwise G3038 Circular slot counterclockwise Parameters J Center of curvature in Cartesian coordinates R Curvature radius reference center point path of the slot A Angle of starting point reference XK axis default O W Angle of end point reference XK axis B Slot width P D
489. tation might adversely affect the machining strategies Machining of bars TURN PLUS does not control the bar loader and does not move the tailstock and steady rest components TURN PLUS does not Support workpiece adjustment between collet and dead center during machining operations Machining operations on shaft ends Note that the machining sequence defined applies to the entire workpiece including machining operations on shaft ends The AWG does not machine Inside contours on rear ends If jaws are used for clamping the shaft at the spindle the rear face Is not machined Longitudinal machining First the front area is machined then the rear area Avoiding collisions Collisions during machining operations can be avoided as follows Add the retraction of the tailstock the positioning of the collet etc to the DIN PLUS program Add a cutting limitation to the DIN PLUS program Prevent the automatic execution of machining operations by assigning the Do not machine attribute or by specifying the machining location in the machining sequence Define for the blank part Oversize 0 As a consequence the front area is not machined e g shafts cut to length and centered shafts Machining Information co HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 331 6 17 Example 6 17 Example On the basis of the production drawing the working steps for defining the contour of the blank and finished part the setup procedures and automatic
490. tection class NC programmer System manager Service personnel of the machine manufacturer Log on menu item To log on select your name from the list of users and enter your password Log off menu item The CNC PILOT does not support automatic log off User log off is necessary in order to protect your system from unauthorized access User srv User service drop down menu User service functions are only available after logon as a system manager Enter user Enter the name of the new user assign a password and user class Precondition You are logged on as a system manager 402 Some service and diagnostic functions are not accessible reserved for service and commissioning personnel User PASSWORT zs Password entry mmm top cyt direpleye 9 Service and Diagnosis Cancel user Select the user to be deleted and confirm with OK Change password Every user can change his or her assigned password To safeguard against misuse the user must first enter the old password before assigning anew one Maintenance menu item See 9 3 Maintenance System 9 2 2 System Service Sys srv System service drop down menu Date Time Error messages are recorded together with the date and time they occurred Since all errors are stored in a log file for a long period of time you should always ensure that the date and time are correctly set These data facilitate the fault diagnosis in
491. ted in one machining cycle A division into rough machining and finish machining is only possible in DIN PEUS Recessing contour recessing Machining Evaluation DIN PLUS Recessing width factor SBF for determining the maximum offset during recessing cycles G860 G866 The following applies esb SBF SB esb effective recessing width offset SB width of recessing tool Thread cutting Traverse from to tool change position Approach external thread ANGA Approach internal thread ANGI Depart external thread ABGA Depart internal thread ABGI Entries for retracting a tool 1 Simultaneous X and Z direction 2 First X direction then Z 3 First Z direction then X 6 Coupled motion first X then Z 7 Coupled motion first Z then X Approach and departure are in rapid traverse GO 366 SB lt b SBD KSAA 16 144 KSAA 32 160 KSLA fal KSPA esb SBF SB 7 Parameters Thread cutting Machining Thread starting length GAL Starting length before threading cut Thread run out length GUL overrun length after threading cut E GAL GUL are automatically transferred to the thread attributes starting length B overrun length P if they have not been entered as attributes Measuring Method of measurement Measuring mode MART included 1 Manual measuring calls an expert program 2 3 Currently not used Measuring loop counter MC Defines the
492. termined from the inward copying angle EKW and machined Sequence External machining precedes internal machining Machining parameters Global finished part parameters 1 Radial axial machining outside and inside n Generation AWG Contour parallel Outside Radial machining outside Contourparallel Inside Radial machining inside Contourparallel Outside front Axial machining outside Contourparallel Inside front Axial machining inside ep F If recess turning precedes hollowing in the machining sequence recess areas are machined by recess turning exception no suitable tools are available Recess turning contour turning are used alternatively Som Q Oo oa lt m a fe Contour recessing contour cutting Contour analysis Recess areas recesses are determined from the inward copying angle EKW and machined Sequence External machining precedes internal machining Machining parameters Global finished part parameters 1 Radial axial machining outside and inside Shaft machining Axial machining on the outside is executed on the front and back Contour parallel Outside Radial machining outside Shaft machining front and back Contour parallel Inside Radial machining inside Contourparallel Outside front Axial machining outside Continued gt 314 6 TURN PLUS Contour recessing continued Contourparallel Ins
493. tes Program constant cutting speed G96 Program G991 and G1 path before the parting operation or return path in one block Result stored inV300 0 Workpiece not cut off 1 Workpiece cut off G991 generates an interpreter stop 163 e me S 5 LL p acial Functions N vi Values for controlled parting G992 G992 overwrites machine parameters 808 858 for controlled parting The new parameters are effective from the next NC block and are retained until G992 is reprogrammed or the parameters are edited Parameters S Speed difference in revolutions per minute E Monitoring time in ms 4 12 4 Contour Follow Up The following G functions can be used to influence contour regeneration see section 4 70 2 Contour Repetitions Examples Program repeats for the machining of bars program branches etc Storing loading contour follow up G702 Parameters O Loading saving the contour Q 0 Save saves the current contour no influence on the contour follow up Q 1 Load loads the saved contour the contour follow up is resumed with the loaded contour Contour follow up G703 With an IF WHILE or SWITCH statement the contour follow up is switched off With ENDIF ENDWHILE or ENDSWITCH it is switched on again G703 switches the contour follow up on for the THEN ELSE or CASE branch Parameters Q Contour regeneration On Off O 0 Off O21 Of K
494. th rotating spindle traversing to a stop controlled parting and coordinate transformation This ensures efficient full surface machining and simple programming G102 G103 You describe the turning contour the contours for the C axis or Y axis Da cuter as well as full surface machining functions in one NC program Expert programs are available for configuring the lathe You can also use full surface machining functions for single spindle lathes Fundamentals Rear face contours with C axis The XK axis and therefore also the C axis are oriented relative to the workpiece not to the spindle Therefore for the rear face Orientation of the XK axis To the left front end to the right Orientation of the C axis Clockwise Rotational direction for arcs G102 Counterclockwise Rotational direction for arcs G108 Clockwise Front face Rear face contours withY axis he X axis is also oriented relative to the workpiece Therefore for the rear face Orientation of the X axis To the left front end to the right Rotational direction for arcs G2 Counterclockwise Rotational direction for arcs G3 Clockwise Turning The CNC PILOT supports full surface machining with conversion and mirroring functions so that rearface machining also follows the principle Program a positive value to depart the workpiece Program a negative valueto approach the workpiece The mac
495. the Reference Marks In the screen dialog line the CNC PILOT shows you step by step how to proceed when starting the system The the CNC PILOT asks you to select an operating mode Whether the reference run is necessary depends on the encoders Installed in your machine EnDat encoder Reference run is not necessary Distance coded encoders The position of the axes is ascertained after a short reference run Standard encoder The axes move to familiar machine based points Reference automatic means that all axes make reference runs Reference jog only one axis does Select Ref Reference automatic Status of reference run approach informs you of the current status Axes that have not been referenced are shown in gray Either set the slides that need to find a reference or set All slides reference automatic dialog box an The axis move to find the reference Interrupts the reference run Cycle start resumes the run Cancels the reference run After completion of the reference run The position display is activated The automatic mode is selectable 22 a Reference approach Reference automatic jar Slides Actuate cycle keys Cancel Interrupt Start X 200 002 T Oirn X v man Z 100 001 p E 2 100 001 Zw imunim Y 100 001 C v mamani J ae me D H i os 05 50p 82 16 21 08 The Sequence in which the axis make their referen
496. the cursor on the contour element to be modified Press the confirm soft key TURN PLUS opens a Line Arc dialog box Change parameters TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Confirm soft key accepts the solution ESC key rejects the solution 258 6 TURN PLUS Form element Change parameters of the form element TURN PLUS adjusts the adjacent elements Place the cursor on the form element to be modified Press the confirm soft key gt TURN PLUS opens a dialog box containing the parameters of the form element Change parameters TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Confirm soft key Accepts the solution When thread parameters are edited the new parameters are immediately transferred ESC key Rejects the solution lating Contours 5 Pattern Figure Pocket Change parameters of the pattern figure If the contour consists of individual elements you can enlarge or reduce delete elements It or change its depth Activate the window in the desired reference plane front back surface Y tront Y back Y surface Place the cursor on the pattern figure contour Press the confirm soft key Pattern figure TURN PLUS opens a dialog box containing the parameters of the pattern figure Change parameters Extend the contour with a line segment arc Tag and delete a contour section with Delete TURN PLUS depicts the changed contour Confirm soft key accepts t
497. the pattern reference Z axis W Ending angle WI Distance between the figures as angle pattern distance Hole description figure description Circular Hole Pattern Circular Figure Pattern Parameters Z Center of pattern CY Center of pattern angle as linear value es Center of pattern angle Q Number of holes figures default 1 Orientation Clockwise n Counterclockwise R Pattern radius K Pattern diameter A W Starting angle end angle position of first last figure reference XK axis special cases Without A and W Full circle subdivision beginning with 0 Without W Full circle subdivision Wi Angle between two figures algebraic sign has no effect For figures except for circles you must enter the position of the figure in the figure description Normal position H 0 Initial figure is rotated about the center of the pattern Original position H 1 Position of the figure remains the same translation Hole description figure description HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 If you do not program the end point the holes figures will be distributed evenly along the circumference In patterns with circular slots the center of curvature is added to the pattern position see User s Manual 4 5 8 Circular Pattern with Circular Slots 255 _ 6 6 C Axis Contours lating Contours anipu 6 7 Manipulating Contours Note when editing contours For contour elements that are supe
498. ther linear element without undercut is to be programmed as overrun Program G49 in the FINISHED PART segment not in FRONT or REAR SIDE Machine the G49 hole with G71 G74 91 Commands 4 5 Geo Commands O g u 4 5 4 Help Commands for Contour Definition G7 Precision stop ON G8 Precision stop OFF G9 Precision stop blockwise G10 Influences finishing feed rate for total contour G38 Influences finishing feed rate for basic contour elements block by block G39 Only for form elements Influences finishing feed rate Additive compensation values Equidistant finishing allowances G52 Equidistant oversize blockwise G95 Defines finishing feed rate for total contour G149 Additive compensation values for basic contour elements Precision stop ON G7 Geo Switches precision stop on It is a modal function The block with G7 is run with precision stop The CNC PILOT does not run the following block until the tool reaches the position tolerance window around the end point for more on the tolerance window see machine parameters 1106 1156 Precision stop OFF G8 Geo Switches the precision stop off The block programmed with G8 is run without precision stop Blockwise precision stop G9 Geo Precision stop for the NC block in which G9 is programmed see also G7 Geo Peak to valley height surface texture G10 Geo Influences the finishing feed rate of G890 Parameters
499. ting contour See also 6 5 3 Overlay Elements 6 TURN PLUS 6 3 5 Entering Contours Machined with the C Axis You define standard forms with Figures regular linear or circular figures or holes in patterns To define complex contours use the basic elements line and arc Patterns Linear hole pattern drilling Circular hole pattern drilling Linear figure pattern milling Circular figure pattern milling Single bore hole Figures Circle full circle Rectangle Polygon Linear groove Circular slot You position patterns and figures on the Front face C axis machining Lateral surface C axis machining Rear side C axis machining Setting selecting the reference plane The reference plane i e the selected window is marked by a color frame TURN PLUS refers all activities to this window Activate another reference plane window Adjust 1st window configuration Configuration Change Views main menu Mark the window window configuration dialog box Return to main menu Select Workpiece Finished Part Select the window PgUp PgDN Select the 2nd window reference plane Select the turning contour window Select pattern figure Pattern Figures TURN PLUS opens the Select input plane dialog box select the reference plane Selection with multiple windows PgUp PgDn Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Define the complete turning contour be
500. ting limit The CNC PILOT machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depending on which side the tool has been positioned before the cycle is called Cutter radius compensation Active G57 oversize Enlarges the contour also inside contours G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour lt 0 is not considered G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after cycle end 4 DIN PLUS A W Approach angle departure angle default opposite from the recessing direction Q Sequence default O Q 0 Roughing and finishing Q 1 Roughing only Q z2 Finishing only U Unidirectional turning default O U 0 bidirectional U 1 unidirectional in contour direction H Retraction at end of cycle default O H 0 Return to starting point axial recess first Z and then X direction radial recess first X and then Z direction H 1 Position in front of the finished contour H 2 Move to clearance height and stop Code start end default O A chamfer rounding arc is machined V 0 At the start and end V 1 At the start V 2 At end V 3 No machining O Recessing feed rate default Active feed rate E Feed rate for finishing default Active feed rate B Offset width default O Machining information Transition from turning to recessing Before the transition from turning to recessing the CNC PILOT retracts the tool by 0 1 mm Thus an offset cutting edge is adjusted for the recessing operation indepe
501. tion falls below the limit value the monitoring function is activated after the start up time for monitoring has elapsed Number of measured values to be averaged 1 50 The mean value is calculated from the number of values to be averaged This reduces the sensitivity to short term peak load during monitoring Reaction delay time P1 P2 0 1000 ms The system reports a limit violation as soon as the delay time for P1 or P2 limit torque 1 or 2 has been exceeded Maximum torque not used at present 344 7 Parameters 1007 1057 Backlash compensation C axis In backlash compensation the value of backlash compensation is calculated into every change in direction 1010 1060 Load monitoring C axis Type of backlash compensation 0 No backlash compensation 1 Encoder is built into the motor The backlash compensation accounts for the reversal error between the motor and table During each change in direction the nominal value is adjusted by the value entered in the backlash compensation value option 2 With direct measurement the backlash compensation compensates the reversal error between the motor and encoder During each change in direction the nominal value is corrected by the value entered in the Backlash compensation value option Backlash compensation value For tyoe 1 compensation value with positive sign For type 2 compensation value with negative sign Evaluation Load monitoring Start up ti
502. tions pull down menu DIN PLUS words calls selection list containing Instructions for structuring the program Instructions for input output n Variables Enter a variable or mathematical expression Skip level Enter skip level 1 to 9 gt The CNC PILOT inserts the skip level before the NC block example 3 N 100 G Slide gt Enter the Slide number more than one slide number one after the other can be entered The DIN editor inserts the slide number before the NC block example 1 2 N 100 G Continued gt 76 o gt DIN PLUS E transfer Machining ane nar Single path 77 seh FH Turn cycles FH Linear course H 25 eta Teol dcire iner CH G2 N 26 Gla Datum allowances icire incr CC 63 N 28 gi attribute cel Thread cut G33 N30 e A Drilling jd Thread tapping G36 N 1 Ti di Feed rake t d Frontface N 33 M H Speed iH surface N M Jij milling N 36 G47 P3 N 37 G82 NS9 NEO P2 5 I1 KO 3 EG 2 68 A90 W270 OZ V3 D4 zj X 82 315 T Airm X v mnia Z 198 766 f Z 100 001 Zum 7 Y 100 001 Canin i J AO e SD A G i f G Enter number of G function call the list of G functions G menu Pull down menus containing G functions appear bike ELE bem bebe nile Bile M Enter the M number EEE oaa CCE M Menu Opens pull down menus containing M functions T Tool call F Call G95 Feed per revolution Rere
503. to rotary axis for angle direction see graphic support window O Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the line segment intersects a circular arc O 0 near intersection Q 1 distance intersection B Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer E Special feed factor for chamfer rounding arc in a finishing cycle ep Programming X Z Absolute 0 lt E lt 1 default 1 incremental modal or special feed rate active feed rate E Commands 4 5 Geometr Circular arc in a contour G2 G3 Geo incremental center coordinates G12 G13 Geo absolute center coordinates Direction of rotation see help graphic Parameters X Z End point of contour element X diameter R Radius Q Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the circular arc intersects a circular arc Q 0 Far intersection Q 1 Near intersection B Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer E Special feed factor for chamfer rounding arc in a finishin
504. transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when entering a chamfer rounding B No input Tangential transition B 0 Nontangential transition B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer O Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the line segment intersects a circular arc O 0 near intersection Q 1 distance intersection zp Programming X XK YX absolute incremental modal or C absolute incremental or modal Circular arc on front rear face G102 G103 Geo Direction of rotation see help graphic Parameters X End point in polar coordinates diameter C End point in polar coordinates angular dimension XK YK End point in Cartesian coordinates R Radius J Center in Cartesian coordinates Q Selection of intersection default 0 End point if the circular arc intersects a circular arc Q 0 Far intersection Q 1 Near intersection Continued gt HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 G102 Geo 97 Commands N z Q O Chamfer rounding arc transition to the next contour element Program the theoretical end point when you enter a chamfer rounding arc No entry in B tangential transition B 0 no tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of the rounding arc B lt 0 Width of chamfer zp Programming X XK YK absolute incremental modal or C Absolute incremental or modal l J Absolute or incremen
505. transverse RIPEW Point angle internal transverse RIPSW Parameter for machining contour areas Standard Complete external longitudinal RAL RAL 0 RIL 0 Standard Complete internal longitudinal RIL n Standard Complete external transverse RAP a Standard Complete internal transverse RIP Entry 0 Complete roughing cycle including plunge cutting TURN PLUS looks for a tool for full surface machining 1 Standard roughing cycle without plunge cutting Roughing Tool tolerances and allowances For tool selection the following applies Setting angle EW EW gt mkw mkw increasing contour angle Setting angle EVV and point angle SWW NWmin lt EW SVW lt NWmax Secondary angle RNWT RNWT NWmax NWmin Secondary angle tolerance RNWT tolerance range for secondary cutting edge Relief cutting angle RFW Minimum angle differential between the contour and secondary cutting edge HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 RAPSW E 361 a Machining Parameters m Machining Parameters The finished part area can be assigned allowances Type of allowance RAA 16 Different longitudinal transverse allowances individual allowances are not considered 144 Different longitudinal transverse allowances individual allowances are considered 32 Equidistant allowance individual allowances are not considered 160 Equidistant allowance Individual allowances are considered Equi
506. ts tool Tool positioning withoutmachining Page SS OO G980 Activate datum shifts 172 GO Positioning in rapid traverse 110 Col AGS G14 Approach to tool change position 110 lengths 172 amen OVAS Saee E Simple Linear and Circular Movements Page Gq E 118 G1 Linearpath i CO Switch off oversize 118 G2 Circular arc with incr center dimensioning 112 G52 Switch off oversize 119 G3 Circular arc with incr center dimensioning 112 G57 Paraxial oversize 119 G12 Circular arc with abs center dimensioning 112 G58 Contour parallel oversize 119 G13 Circular arc with abs center dimensioning 112 G147 Safety clearance milling 119 Gx26 Speed limit 113 T Tool change 120 G48 Acceleration slope 113 G148 Changing the cutter compensation 120 G64 Interrupted feed 13 G149 Additive correction 120 G192 Feed per minute for rotary axis 113 G150 Compensate right tool tip 121 Gx93 _Feedpertooth CA 81 Compensate left tool tip 121 G94 Feed per minute 4 G710 Adding tool dimensions 121 Gx95 Feed per revolution 114 Gx 6 Constant cutting sosed 4 Simpletuming Cycles Page Gx97 Spindle speed 114 G80 End of cycle 134 G81 Simple longitudinal roughing 134 Cutter radius compensation TRC MCRC Page 532 imple face roughing 15 G40 Switch off TRC MCRC 115 G83 Contour repeat cycle 136 G41 TRC MCRC left 115 G85 Undercut 137 G42 TRC MCRC right 115 G86 Simple recessing cycle 138 I a G87 Transitonreci 189 Overview of datum shifts 116 G88 Chamfers
507. tus Statue s1 uzo1 P sa Undefined The variable is not assigned to any Status s4 uzay wpz 2f value event That is the same as the condition after Status x3 np x 2 the NC program start Each time an NC block sie scene containing this variable is simulated the simulation o Reset Cancel asks you to enter the variable value event Defined During simulation of an NC block with ijn this variable the entered value the event is assumed Request Each time an NC block containing the variable is simulated the simulation requests the variable value event delete all xx variables events If variables have the status defined you delete NC Program Run 1 sei EE Da amp a ecap s ef F ol EE the status of the corresponding variable group Gm EE wo al E events s r PS yx stands for DIN PLUS TURN PLUS V var V variables D var Tool compensation E var sequential events and external events M var machine dimensions T var Tool dimensions 5 8 Checkin Debug V variable display Provides the variables in the V variable display program head for editing By pressing reset you load the preset values Prerequisite The V variable display was defined Debug Output window Activate window Deactivate window If the NC program includes data output you define whether the output
508. ty can be checked at the distant terminal If you define No parity the characters are transferred as they are saved S The parity bit is transmitted in addition to the number of bits defined in Word length input output control parameter 40 Stop bits Choose between 1 1 1 2 and 2 stop bits The parameters of the serial interface are saved in one of Protocol the control parameters 41 to 47 depending on the setting Hardware hardware handshake The receiving in control parameter 40 terminal informs the transmitting terminal by way of the RTS CTS signals that it is temporarily unable to receive data A hardware handshake presupposes that the RTS CTS signals are hardwired in the data transfer cable XON XOFF software handshake The receiving terminal transmits XOFF if it is temporarily unable to receive data with XON is indicates that it can receive data again The software handshake needs no RTS CTS signals in the transmission cable ON XOFF software handshake The receiver transmits XON at the beginning of data transmission to indicate that it is ready to receive When the receiver is temporarily not able to receive data it transmits XOFF With XON is signalizes that it can receive more data The software handshake does not require the transmission of RTS CTS signals over the data transfer cable Device name COM1 RS 232 C V 24 data interface The menu items Serial and
509. u Instructions DIN PLUS words gt Enter the SWITCH condition value of the variable Insert the NC blocks to be executed gt For the DEFAULT branch Insert the NC blocks to be executed Skip level An NC block with preceding skip level is not run with an active skip level see 4 3 3 Machining Menu Skip levels are activated deactivated in Automatic mode machine mode of operation In addition you can use the skip cycle setup parameter 11 deletion level cycle Skip cycle x activates the skip level every xth time Example 1 N 100G N100 is not executed if skip level 1 is active Slide code An NC block preceded by a slide code is executed only for the indicated slide see 4 3 3 Machining Menu NC blocks that are not preceded by slide codes are executed on all slides HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 181 rogramming ie 4 16 Subprograms 4 16 Subprograms Calling a subprogram U xx V1 L Indicator of subprogram call xx Name of the subprogram file name for external subprograms max 8 characters or letters V1 Identification code for external subprograms omitted for local subprograms Note on using subprograms External subprograms are defined in a separate file They can be called from any main program other subprograms or from TURN PLUS Local subprograms are In the main program file They can be called only from the main progr
510. u item Special mach ining Menu item free input Menu item Tool Select and position the tool Select the Single block menu item gt To define the tool path and other technological data G M functions use the other menu items Subprogram call G and M functions Select the SM drop down menu Choose Free input Select the Single block menu item gt Select the Technology drop down menu gt Select the menu item Subprogram or G and M functions Select the desired subprogram function Confirm with OK HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 309 z La J jam g c amp 6 12 Interactive Worki z lt c S me c g c 6 13 Automatic Working Pl 6 13 Automatic Working Plan Generation AWG The AWG generates a working plan consisting of individual working blocks TURN PLUS automatically finds the elements of a working block The control graphics feature enables you to directly check a working block see 6 74 Control Graphics The machining sequence can be influenced through the Machining Sequence Editor see 6 73 2 Machining Sequence The AWG enables you to continue machining a partially machined workpiece 6 13 1 Generating a Machining Plan Selection AWG Automatic TURN PLUS generates the working blocks according to the sequence defined in Machining order and displays them in the control graphics After ge
511. ual elements of an NC block including G or M functions are deleted immediately 71 Ses Q ham ge LL V l 0 Conversational or free editing You usually select the NC functions from the menus and edit the address parameters in dialog boxes You can also select Free input NC BI pull down menu and edit the NC program For free editing the maximum length of a block is 128 characters per line Block references When editing G commands related to the contour MACHINING section you can switch to contour simulation and select the block references from the contour displayed using the arrow keys G commands The G commands are divided into Geometry commandsfor describing the blank and finished part You can use additional auxiliary commands allowance surface quality etc to influence the machining process Machining commands for the MACHINING section 4 3 1 Main Menu Prog pull down menu NC program management Load loads stored NC programs The CNC PILOT displays existing NC main programs or subprograms Select the NC program New creates new NC main programs or subprograms Enter a program name Select main program or subprogram To activate the Editing program head window select Program head Close Closes the selected NC program without saving it Save Saves the selected NC program the program stays open for editing Save as S
512. ult 90 270 perpendicular to Z axis O Type of retraction after machining default O Q 0 Return to starting point first in X direction then in Z Q 1 Position in front of finished contour Q 2 Move to clearance height and stop V Identifier beginning end default O A chamfer rounding arc is being machined V 0 At beginning and end V 1 At beginning V 2 At end V 3 No machining V 4 Chamfer rounding is being machined not the basic element prerequisite Contour section with an element D Omit element influences the machining of undercuts relief turns see table default O 0 e e e 1 e 2 m J e e e 3 e 4 e e Skip elements HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 Cycles D ie Cycle run 1 Calculate the areas to be machined and the cutting segmentation infeeds 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting point taking the safety clearance into account 3 Execute the first cut roughing 4 Approach for the next pass and execute the next cut roughing in the opposite direction 5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete area has been machined 6 If required repeat 2 to 5 until all areas have been machined 7 Retract as programmed in QO Cutting limitation The tool position before the cycle call determines the effect of a cutting limit The CNC PILOT machines the area to the right or to the left of the cutting limit depe
513. ultiple spindles slides and tool carriers The CNC PILOT controls up to 6 slides 4 spindles and 2 C axes Programming Depending on the type and complexity of the parts to be machined and your organization you can choose the type of programming best suited to your tasks In TURN PLUS you describe the contour of the blank and finished part with interactive graphics Then you call the automatic working plan generation AWG and the NC program will be generated fully automatically at a keystroke Alternately you can choose the interactive working plan generation IWG When using the IWG you determine the sequence of machining and other technical details Every working step is shown In the control graphics and can be corrected immediately The result of pro gram creation with TURN PLUS is a structured DIN PLUS program TURN PLUS minimizes the number of entries required but it requires that the the tool data and cutting data has already been entered If TURN PLUS fails to create the optimal NC program for technologically sophisticated machining operations or if you primarily want to reduce the machining time program the NC program in DIN PLUS DIN PLUS supports the separation of the geometric description from the machining of the workpiece Powerful cycles are available for programming in DIN PLUS The simple geometry programming function calculates coordinates if the dimensions used in the drawing are not suitable for
514. un a Start block search search 41 T oO e ad Oo ad lt LO o Operation O z e lt LO ap 3 5 2 Defining a Start Block nme Activating a start block search Position the cursor on the start block The soft keys support your search The CNC PILOT switches back into automatic mode and jumps to the start block Start the NC program with the selected NC block Exit the start block search without default start block zp Selecta suitable start block If program run is started by a specific start block the CNC PILOT automatically provides all the programmed and essential data for this NC program excluding interchange of the correct tool and paths of traverse On machines with more than on slide select a suitable start block on all slides before you press the Accept soft key Danger of collision If the start block includes aT command the CNC PILOT first rotates the turret E The first traversing instruction Is executed from the current tool position 42 1 i i Em ae Switch the machine display Define block display for more channels Display basic blocks individual paths of traverse Preset the T number the cursor is positioned with this T number on the next Tl command Preset the T number the cursor is positioned to the block number Preset the L number the cursor is positio
515. unctions 402 9 2 1 Access Authorization 402 9 2 2 System Service 403 9 2 3 Fixed Word Lists 404 9 3 Maintenance System 405 9 4 Diagnosis 408 10 Transfer 411 10 1 The Transfer Mode of Operation 412 10 2 Transfer Systems 413 10 2 1 General Information 413 10 2 2 Configuring for Data Transfer 414 10 3 Data Transter 417 10 3 1 Enabling Data Types 417 10 3 2 Transmitting and Receiving Files 418 10 4 Parameters and Operating Resources 420 10 4 1 Converting Parameters and Operating Resources 420 10 4 2 Saving Parameters and Operating Resources 422 10 5 File Organization 423 11 Tables and overviews 425 11 1 Undercut and Thread Parameters 426 11 1 1 Undercut DIN 76 Parameters 426 11 1 2 Undercut DIN 509 E Parameters 427 11 1 3 Undercut DIN 509 F Parameters 427 11 1 4 Thread Parameters 428 11 1 5 Thread Pitch 429 11 2 Technical Information 433 11 3 Peripheral Interfaces 437 Vill Contents 1 1 The CNC PILOT The CNC PILOT is a contouring control designed for lathes and turning centers In addition to turning operations you can perform milling and drilling operations with the C axis or the Y axis The CNC PI LOT supports parallel machining of up to 4 workpieces in programming testing and production Full surface machining is supported on lathes with Rotating gripper Movable opposing spindle M
516. undercut K width of undercut R undercut radius P depth of end face Undercut DIN 509 F HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 137 Cycles D Recessing G86 G86 machines simple radial and axial recesses with chamfers From the tool position the CNC PILOT calculates a radial axial or an inside outside recess Oversize K programmed First pre recessing then finish recessing finishing G86 machines chamfers at the sides of the recess If you do not wish to cut the chamfers you must position the tool at a sufficient distance from the workpiece Calculate the starting position XS diameter as follows XS XK 2 1 3 b XK Contour diameter b Chamfer breadth Cycle run 1 Calculate the cutting segmentation maximum offset SBF cutting width For SBF see machining parameter 6 2 Approach to clearance height at rapid traverse on paraxial path 3 Execute the first cut taking finishing allowance into account 4 Without finishing allowance E period of dwell 5 Retract and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 2 to 4 until the complete recess has been machined 7 With finishing allowance Finish machine the recess 8 Return to starting point at rapid traverse Parameters X Z Target point X diameter Radial recess Allowance I gt 0 Allowance roughing and finishing I 0 No finishing K Recess width no input a single cut is machined recess width tool width Axial recess
517. uns parallel to the reference element 235 9 Finished Part Contour 5 Finished Part Contour Relief turn form FD This recess type defines an axial or radial relief turn on a linear reference element The relief turn is assigned to the previously selected reference element Parameters X Z Reference point K Recess width Recess depth OF Diameter radius of recess base provided that the recess base Is parallel to the Z axis A Recess angle 0 lt A lt 90 R Inside radius in both corners of the recess The CNC PILOT refers the recess depth to the reference element The recess base runs parallel to the reference element Recess type S guarding ring This recess type defines an axial recess on the outside or inside of the contour The recess is assigned to the previously selected reference element Parameters TA Starting point of recess KI Recess width pay attention to sign i Diameter radius of recess base li Recess depth B Outside radius chamfer at both recess sides 236 No no chamfer rounding Chamfer B width of chamfer Rounding B radius of rounding 6 TURN PLUS Threads Thread defines the different types of thread Parameters Q DUPITAT Type of thread Metric ISO fine pitch thread DIN 13 Part 2 Series 1 Metric ISO thread DIN 13 Part 1 Series 1 Metric ISO taper thread DIN 158 Metric ISO tapered fine pitch thread DIN 158 Metric IS
518. ure scratching etc To activate tools define the spindle speed and feed rate etc use the menus E To move the slide diagonally press the X and Z axis direction keys simultaneously 3 2 6 Slide Spindle change key On lathes with more than one slide the axis direction keys control the selected slide Selection of the slide Slide change key Display of the selected slide Machine display On lathes with more than one spindle the spindle keys on the selected spindle Select the spindle Spindle change key Display of the selected spindle Machine display For setup functions referring to one slide or spindle workpiece zero point tool change point etc you specify the slide spindle with the slide spindle change key The machine display usually contains display elements for spindle and slide To switch between these elements use the Slide Spindle change key see 3 6 Machine Display HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 SN IA ENI ZAN Switch the spindle on in M3 M4 direction Jog the spindle in M3 M4 direction The spindle rotates as long as the key is held Jog speed machine parameters 805 855 Spindle stop m Move slide in X direction Sool as Move slide in Z direction Move slide inY direction To move the slide in rapid traverse Simultaneously press the rapid traverse key and the axis direction key Rapid traverse velocity Machine parameters 204 254 B Switch over to the next s
519. urface Contours 102 4 5 8 Circular Pattern with Circular Slots 108 4 6 Machining Commands 110 4 6 1 Assigning the Contour to the Operation 110 4 6 2 Tool Positioning without Machining 110 4 6 3 Simple Linear and Circular Movements 111 4 6 4 Feed Rate and Spindle Speed 113 4 6 5 Cutter Radius Compensation TRC MCRC 115 4 6 6 Zero Point Shift 116 4 6 7 Oversizes Safety Clearances 118 4 6 8 Tools Types of Compensation 120 4 7 Turning Cycles 122 4 7 1 ContourBased Turning Cycles 122 4 72 Simple Turning Cycles 134 4 8 Thread Cycles 140 4 9 Drilling cycles 143 4 10 C Axis Machining 148 4 10 1 General C Axis Functions 148 4 10 2 Front Rear Face Machining 149 4 10 3 Lateral Surface Machining 150 4 11 Milling Cycle Group 152 4 12 Special functions 159 4 12 1 Chucking Equipment in Simulation 159 4 12 2 Slide Synchronization 160 4 12 3 Spindle Synchronization Workpiece Transfer 161 4 12 4 Contour Follow Up 164 4 12 5 In Process Measuring 165 Contents 4 12 6 Post Process Measuring 166 4 12 7 Load Monitoring 167 4 13 Other G Functions 168 4 14 Data Input and Data Output Woa 4 14 1 Input Output of Variables 173 4 14 2 Input Output of V Variables 174 4 15 Programming Variables 175 4 15 1 Variables 175 4 15 2 V Variables 177 4 15 3 Program Branches Program Repeats
520. usting switching 52 Display elements 52 Display defining 349 Fundamentals 2 Machine operating panel 13 Machine parameters 337 Machine reference points 9 Machine zero point 9 Machining information TURN PLUS 320 Machining modes technology database 395 Machining modes TURN PLUS IWG Drilling 295 Finishing 297 Milling 303 Recessing 290 Roughing 285 Thread 302 Machining Parameters 399 Machining sequence AWG ECIUNG siz 316 General information 307 LISTOI a san 308 Managing 316 Machining Simulation 205 XII Machining with DIN PLUS Machining commands 110 Machining menu 76 Section code 83 Main cutting edge 69 Main feed rate 396 Maintenance system 401 Manual control functions 24 Manual direction keys 2 Material technology database 395 Material designations 400 Mathematical expressions Input in Edit menu 76 Inout in Geometry menu 16 Mathematical functions Pes Measuring In process measuring 165 Postprocess measuring 166 TURN PLUS machining attribute 266 Measuring optics 39 Menu items 14 Menu selection 19 Metric Dimensional system in automatic mode 41 Dimensional system in Manual control mode 24 Dimensional system setting 79 Overview of units of measu
521. utting force for the material The parameter is for information only it is not evaluated E Cutting speed E Main feed rate mm rev Feed rate for primary machining direction Auxiliary feed rate mm rev Feed rate for secondary machining direction Infeed depth of cut m With without coolant JU UU The automatic working plan generation AWG uses this parameter to determine whether coolant is used 400 100 001 F ili EE oe 100 001 I 8 Operating Resources 9 1 The Service Mode of Operation 9 1 Service Mode of Operation The Service mode of operation features Service functions Diagnostic functions Maintenance system Service functions User registration and user management language switching and different system settings Diagnostic functions System inspection and Support when searching for errors The Maintenance system reminds the machine user about necessary maintenance tasks 9 2 Service Functions 9 2 1 AccessAuthorization Functions such as editing important parameters are reserved for privileged users The CNC PILOT permits access when the correct password is entered Ihe access authorization remains in effect until the user logs off or until a second user logs on correctly Each user is assigned a password consisting of a fourdigit number itis entered masked not visible The CNC PILOT differentiates between No pro
522. vice personnel for troubleshooting The display error log function displays the most recent error message To view further entries press the PgUp PgDn keys Save error log file makes a copy of the error log file file name error log Directory Para_Usr Existing error log files are overwritten Save Ipo trace saves information on the most recent interpolator functions file names IPOMakro cxx POBewbe cxx IROAxCMD cxx xx 00 99 directory data Remote drop down menu The remote functions support remote diagnosis For information on the Remote functions refer to your machine manufacturer Controls drop down menu The hardware System info option supplies you with information on the hardware components used Options You receive an overview of the available and installed options of the CNC PILOT see also 7 3 Expansion Stages Options and Control Parameters 197 Network Settings This menu item calls the Windows Network dialog box The CNC PILOT is entered as a Client for Microsoft Networks Details on installing and configuring networks are available in the documentation or in the on line help function of Windows Network shared password Assign individual passwords for read and write access However the passwords are valid for all shared directories see also 10 3 1 Releases File Types The Share names listed in the shared password
523. vidual blocks of the working plan You do this by selecting the tool and the cutting values and determining the fixed cycle The semiautomatic mode generates a complete work block part machining In special machining SM you add paths of traver se subprogram calls or G M functions example use of tool handling systems A working block may have the following content The tool call The cutting data technology data Approaching the workpiece Fixed cycle Retraction Approaching the tool change position When the tool data cutting data of the previous working block are used TURN PLUS does not generate a new tool call or commands for a new feed rate spindle speed Select the required machining operation _y ox_ Select the tool Tool submenu __ e Select Cutting data Check optimize the cutting data Activate deactivate the coolant and define the coolant circuit Onn eee eee Select Cycle Machining range Define the machining range by selection TURN PLUS marks the selected area OO ee eee eee Select Cycle Cycle parameters TURN PLUS opens the cycle parameters dialog box Check optimize the parameters On ees eee 286 w l gt Tum PLus bepog ZX main view IWG Td Recess 4f oril wid Finish W Thread H Mill di Special nach AARAA 17 Sep 62 If required select Cycle Approach Enter approach position and type of approach
524. which side the tool has been positioned before the cycle is called Cutter radius compensation Active G57 oversize Enlarges the contour also inside contours G58 oversize gt 0 enlarges the contour lt 0 is not considered G57 G58 oversizes are deleted after cycle end 4 DIN PLUS Recessing cycle G866 Cycle run N G866 generates a recess defined by G22 Geo The CNC PILOT uses Pasay eerie d eae O the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal 2 Approach workpiece for first pass from starting gt machining or between radial and axial recesses point radial recess first in Z then in X direction Q axial recess first in X then in Z direction a Calculation of the cut segmentation SBF see machining 3 Execute the first cut according to I E parameter 6 maximum offset SBF width of cut l 4 Return at rapid traverse and approach for next Parameters pass NS Block number reference to G22 Geo 5 0 E period of dwell Allowance with precutting default 0 6 Repeat 3 to 4 until the recess has been machined I 0 Recess is machined in one run _ l I gt 0 Precutting is carried out in the first run and finishing in 7 gt 0 Finish machine the contour the second E Dwell time no input Corresponds to a spindle revolution With l 0 For each recess With gt 0 Only during finishing Cutter radius compensation is active Oversizes are not taken into account
525. with standard finishing tools If form elements such as recesses type FD and undercuts type E F G cannot be machined with a standard finishing tool one form element after the other is skipped TURN PLUS starts a renewed attempt to machine the remaining contour with the standard tool Subsequently the skipped form elements are machined individually with a suitable finishing tool Setting angle external longitudinal FALEW Point angle external longitudinal FALSW Setting angle external transverse FAPEW Point angle external transverse FAPSW Setting angle internal longitudinal FILEW Point angle internal longitudinal FILSW Setting angle internal transverse FIPEW Point angle internal transverse FIPSW HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 363 E Machining Parameters Machining Parameters The machining of contour areas is determined by the following parameters Standard Complete external longitudinal FAL Standard Complete internal longitudinal FIL Standard Complete external transverse FAP Standard Complete internal transverse FIP Entry 0 Complete finishing cycle TURN PLUS searches for an optimum tool for machining the complete contour area 1 Standard finishing cycle is primarily executed with standard finishing tools Relief turns and undercuts are machined with a suitable tool If the standard finishing tool is not suitab
526. working plan generation are explained Select Program New s n New program dialog box Enter anew program name Material select the material from the fixed word list Press the program head button _yY amp amp amp amp e _ Program head dialog box Enter the spindle and slides for the 1st setup Fill in further input fields as required ees Return to New program dialog box On ees eee OK the new program is ready E_ E gt E gt E gt E_ _ K_X amp z iN EEE eee Select Workpiece Blank _yy amp amp amp amp m Select Bar _yy amp amp amp hm Bar dialog box Diameter 60 mm Length 80 mm Oversize 2mm OK TURN PLUS depicts the workpiece blank OO eee To return to the main menu press the ESC key DIN76 M16 35 541 5 Undefined chamfers 1x45 Undefined radii 7mm Workpiece blank 60 X 80 Material Ck 45 El Transfer Diameter x e am Length Zz EE om Face oursz K 2 an Define bar end as blank 6 TURN PLUS Select Workpiece Finished Part OE eee Point dialog box starting point of contour X 0 AA OK TURN PLUS depicts the starting point On eee Enter X 16 Press OK _ S S errr Enter Z 25 Press OK _ S _ errs Enter
527. xpert program Add tool dimensions Add the dimensions of the rotating gripper and the stationary tool HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 4290 121 Cycles D 4 7 Turning Cycles 4 7 1 Finding the block references Activate the contour graphics GRAPHICS soft key gt Set the cursor to NS NE and press the CONTINUE soft key Using the horizontal arrow keys to select the contour element gt The vertical arrow keys can be used to switch between contours also face contours etc gt Confirm the block of the contour element with ENTER Contour Based Turning Cycles Longitudinal roughing G810 G810 machines the contour area defined by NS NE The CNC PILOT uses the tool definition to distinguish between external and internal machining With NS NE you specify the machining direction If the contour to be machined consists of one element then If you program only NS Machining in contour definition direction If you program NS and NE Machining against the contour definition direction If required the area to be machined is divided into several sections example with contour valleys The simplest way of programming is specifying NS NE and P Parameters NS Starting block number beginning of contour section NE End block number end of contour section Maximum infeed Oversize in X direction diameter value default O Oversize in Z direction default O Approach behavior E 0 Descend
528. y CNC PILOT or DataPilot they are not readable Service files support troubleshooting Theses files are normally transferred and evaluated by service personnel cep 412 10 Transfer 10 2 Transfer Systems 10 2 1 General Information Interfaces HEIDENHAIN recommends data transfer over an Ethernet interface That guarantees high transmission speed high reliability and convenient operation Data transmission via serial interface is also possible Windows networks Ethernet interface With a Windows network you can integrate your lathe in an LAN network The CNC PILOT supports the usual networks under Windows The CNC PILOT allows you to send receive files Other computer systems integrated in the network have access to read from and write to shared directories Independent of the CNC PILOT s activities The CNC PILOT usually logs on in the network during startup and does not log off until the system is terminated FTP File Transfer Protocol Ethernet interface With FTP you integrate your lathe in a LAN network To do this an FTP server must be installed on the host computer with Windows NT and UNIX the FTP server is included in the operating system an FTP server is available for Windows 95 98 The CNC PILOT allows you to send receive files The CNC PILOT does not support server functions This means that other computer systems in the network cannot access CNC PILOT files Serial You transfer programs or
529. you wish to display the help graphics Window Full size window Double window Triple window Select the number of editing windows Font size smaller larger Change the font size within the editing window Font size Adjust fonts Set the font size of the selected window in all editing windows Settings Save Saves the current editor condition window setting all loaded NC programs Settings Load Loads the lasts save condition of the editor Settings Auto save on Saves the current editor condition when CNC PILOT is switched off Settings Auto save off No saving of the editor condition when the CNC PILOT is switched off Graphics pull down menu Graphic ON activates contour simulation Graphic OFF deactivates contour simulation and activates the machine display Window selection of simulation window Select a maximum of two windows The contour simulation is activated by selecting Graphic ON 74 4 DIN PLUS 4 3 2 Geometry Menu The Geometry submenu contains G functions and instructions for the BLANK and FINISHED PART sections Selecting a G function The G number is known Select G and enter the number The G number is not known Select G Press the CONTINUE soft key Select the G function from the list of G numbers G menu To select the desired G function use the pull down menu Instr uctions pull down menu DIN PLUS words calls selection list contain
530. ype 66x not used by TURN PLUS Special milling tool type 67x 8 1 Tool Database t Special tools are tools that do not fit into any other type They are not used for contour cycles and are not used by TURN PEOST Part Handling Systems Stopper tool type 71x Bar gripper type 72x Rotating gripping device type 75x Measuring Devices Touch probe type 81x 376 Example Tool type 51x Example Tool type 71x Example Tool type 81x 8 Operating Resources 8 1 3 Tool Parameters Parameters for turning tools oe AZO eS evel S a Cut wd sb Thread tool Cutting edge width distance from the tool edge to the ee Cut wid sb Cuttingwidth _ Cut len sl Cuttinglength e e e Curig CU Kouig okno a a BEE We EDA KANY OOL OA NBR Secondary machining direction __ _ X Z comp DX DZ Compensation values maximum value 10mm Direc rot Direction of spindle rotation _ _ _ _ O Usab lg nl Usable length for internal too Is 3 comp DS Special correction value for the 3rd cutting edge maximum value 10 mm see also G148 and G150 G151 o lt o O Threading tool Note that for types 141 143 the setting dimension ze and for type 142 144 the setting dimension xe is measured from the tool edge The CNC PILOT uses the direction of rotation parameter to determine whether an overhea
531. ys uses the current machining sequence he current machining sequence can be edited or overwritten by loading another machining sequence If you load a complete program and generate a new working plan the current machining sequence is used as basis Danger of collision When executing drilling or milling operations TURN PLUS does not check whether the turning operation has already been completed Ensure that turning operations precede drilling or milling operations in the machining sequence Continued gt 311 n Generation AWG wt Som Q Oo q lt m z n Generation AWG wt Som Q Oo oa lt m pF List of Machining Sequences Centric predrilling Predrilling Finish drilling Roughing without hollowing Longitudinal Longitudinal Outside Longitudinal Inside Transverse Contourparallel Contourparallel Outside Contourparallel Inside Roughing Hollowing Longitudinal Outside Longitudinal Inside 312 Contour analysis Determining the drilling steps Machining parameter Centric predrilling 3 Predrilling 1st step Predrilling 2nd step Finish drilling Predrilling 1st step Predrilling 2nd step Finish drilling Contour analysis Subdivision of the contour into areas for external longitudinal external transverse and internal longitudinal internal transverse machining using the transverse longitudinal rat

CNC PILOT 4290

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents